Mitel Smart-1 Dialer Manuals

ISSUE 1.
JUNE 1988
SECTION 8350-345012-NA
SMART-l
SMART-l CALL CONTROLLER MANUAL1 HARDWARE INSTALLATION
@ Copyright 1988 MITEL INC. All rights reserved. @ Registered Trademark of MITEL Corporation PRINTED IN CANADA
SECTION
8350-345012-NA
ISSUE
1, JUNE
1988
MITEL FIELD SERVICE

MLTEL INC. has set up a National Field Service number for technical and installation assistance (214) 241-4555 during normal working hours, for U.S. customers. Outside normal working hours a telephone answering service has been established. For Canadian customers contact the Canadian National Field Service Number. Regional Office (613) 592-0200 or the
NOTICE TO CUSTOMERS
The information contained in this document is bheved to be accurate in all respects but is not warranted by MITEL INC. The htformation is subject to change without notice and should not be construed in any way as a commitment by MITEL MITEL INC. and its affihates and subsidiaries assume no responstbility for INC. or any of its affiliates and subsidiaries. any errors or omissions in this document. Revisions of this document or new editions of it may be issued to incorporate such changes.
WARNING
The Call Controller generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed.and used in accordance with the instructions manual. may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part IS of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case the user, at his own expense, will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.
NOTICE TO CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

Warning The Canadian Department of Communications label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operation$. and safety requirements. The department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction. Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using acceptable method OC connection. In some cases, the company s inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure, for their own protection, that the electrical ground protections internal metallic water pipe system; if present, are connected together. Caution Users should not attempt to make such connections ity, or electrician, as required. themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authorto the power utility, telephone lines, and
The Load Number (LN) assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load, to be connected to a telephone loo?, that is used by the device to prevent overloading. The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices SubJect only to the requirement that the total of Load Numbers of all the devices subject does not exceed 100. An alphabetic suffii is also specified in the Load Number and designates the appropriate ringing type (A or B), if applicable. For example, LN = 20 A designates a load number of 20 and an A type ringer.
PAV
PAGE
1.1
ISSUE 1, JUNE 1988 HEADING
SECTION
8350-345-012-NA PAGE 1.3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..~ .......................................................... . ...............
1. INTRODUCTION
1. 1. General .................................................. 1. 2. Programming Devices ....................................................... ............................................ l.3.PositiveAccountCodeVerification 1. 4. Chaining ................................................................. 2. BASIC HARDWARE 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. INSTALLATION ... . ....................................
1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.9 1.10 1.12 1.13 1.13 1.14 1.15 1.15 1.16 1.16 1.17
1.17
1. DESCRIPTION ............................................................ 1. I. Mechanical Description ................................................... 1. 2. Electrical Description ..................................................... . .............................................. 2. General Mounting .......... 3. Wall Mounting Bracket ..................................................... 4. Ground .................................................................. 5. Telephone Connections ..................................................... ....................... 6.InstallatiosaOfARecordingUnitQrProgrammingTerminal . ........... ._ ................ 7. Powering Up .......................................... 8. Power Failure ............................................................. 9. Ground Start Installation Testing .............................................. .,...............,....................... .................
3. INITIALIZATION
3. 1. Initialization From A DTMF Telephone ........................................ 3. 2. Effects Of Initialization ..................................................... ..... mP,. ........................................ 3.3. WakingUptheController.. APPENDIX HARDWARE ORDERING 1 ................................................................ SPECIFICATIONS INFORMATION
.................................................
0.00.00.**90a*00.0..a...............
..D...*.*OODD.
1.19
1.19
PAVCall Controller ............................................................ PAV Chaining Call Controller ...................................................... Other Components .............................................................. INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..*..........
1.19 1.19 1.20
FCC INTERCONNECTION
REQUIREMENTS
....................................
1.21
PAGE 1.2
PAV
SECTION
8350-345012-NA
ISSUE
1, JUNE
1988
_
1. 1. General
1, INTROlXJCTION
The SMART- 1 Telephone Controller is a simple, compact and versatile telephone controller providing: Versatile Programming Four, or two line, or one line capacity Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Speed Call capacity of either 100, or 1000 Handles Loop Start Or Ground Start Telephone Lines Off-Hook Redial Remote Maintenance And Programming Compatible With Rotary Or DTMP Telephones and Telephone Offices Battery Back-up Of Customer s Memory Separate Program Access Code To Allow Customer Speed Call Update/Maintenance Progress Tones Available For Call And Route Progress Programmable For Account Code Change On Route Change Compliance with FCC Parts 68 and 15 Separate program entry to allow customer update and maintenance of PAV lists Progress tones programmable on a route by route basis Useable with Centrex Lines Useable behind a PBX/PABX Hot Line operation It can be installed and programmed easily from either a DTMP device, or a terminal, and is typically installed as a serial device between:
l
A Central Office (C. 0.) trunk and the user s telephone equipment,
SUBSCRIBER SIDE
The user s telephone equipment (PBX/key system) and the C.O. trunk, n
PAV
PAGE
1.3
ISSUE 1, JUNE 1988
SECTION
8350-34%012-NA
1 INTRODUCTION
0
The user s telephone and the user s PBXkey system.

...
SUBSCRIBER SIDE
The Controller provides easy access (regular dialing patterns) to the local telephone office and to Other Common Carriers (OCCs). The purpose of the Controller is to set up a call similar to the normal dialed call. The Controller can then add the access number and authorizatiow code as required for call completion. You can program the Controller to access a number based on regular dialing patterns, or use speed call for rapid access. You can also program the unit to route or restrict calls based on digits dialed by the user. Regardless of the dialing patterns you program, a user does not hear any unusual dialing patterns and is informed of the progress by a tone at the end of routing (unless you program the Controller to act otherwise). The product, on .default, is in a cut through state and can be changed by one parameter (x23T). . In addition, the Controller, allows you to tailor its telephone line parameters for both the subscriber s telephone equipment and the Central Office (C.O.) such as loop or ground start, and Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF), or rotary dial. This allows you to meet most situations or user requirements. 1. 2, Programming
Devices
from either: or a terminal.
The Controller can be programmed a DTMF telephone
PAGE
1.4
PAV
ISSUE 1,JUNE 1988
1. INTRODUCTION
1. 3. Positive Account Code Verification
The Controller can be programmed to require an Account Code before allowing a call. These Account Codes can be assigned to each individual person using the telephone lines connected to the Controller. These Account Codes can vary according to the route used as selected by the Controller. In addition, the Account Codes will appear on any Call Detail Records (CDR) output by the Controller through its RS-232 port. These records are valuable when determining billing information, call cost analysis or traffic patterns. If you wish to assign Account Codes that can be verified to persons using the the telephone lines connected to the Contrcller, you will want to configure the unit as a Controller with Positive Account Code Verification (PAV). For call screening/toll control purposes this will limit you to one set of tables (Primary). _. The Alternate tables are used for ike Verifiable Account Codes. Should you not require Positive Account Code Verification you should configure the unit . as a Controller without PAV. For more information on the PAV Controller see POSlTMZ ACCOUNT CODE OP I-IONS in MANUAL 2.
PAV
PAGE
1.5
ISSUE 1, JUNE 1988
SECTION
835&I-345-012-NA
1. INTRODU~ON
1. 4. Chaining
This feature allows multiple Controllers to be chained through their M-232 port via cabling supplied with each unit This feature provides two distinct functions: 1. The units which are chained together via their IS-232 ports (cabhng supplied) may be addressed remotely or %ocallywith DTMF instruments which can access any port om a Controller in a chain. From that access point, any combination of units within the set may be programmed with DTMF signals. A recommended method of access might be either a DTMF instrument itself, or a Tandem (see MANUAL 4) access from a remote location. 2. With the addition of an outionai cable, a printing device may be connected to the chain. This allows the collection of call records from all units in the chain, to be output to one printing device without the need for a data concentrator or multiplexer. The call details records of the units within the chained set will be output one at a time at the printing .device. Programming from this device through the gwtional printer chaining cable is not supported. For further information see MANUAL 3. .
QmTONAL Rs-532 CABLE FOR PRIMTER OR RRCORD6NG
JACX 2
PLUG
PAGE
1.6
PAV
SECTION 8350-34%OlZ-NA
ISSUE 1, JUNE 1988
2 BASIC HARDWARE INSTALLATION

l
2. 1. DESCRIPTION 2. 1. 1. Mechanical Description
The Controller (Figure 1.1 ) consists of a plastic case, enclosed circuitry and an outboard .*-. .. power supply.
2. 1. 2. Electrical
Description
are provided in Figure 1.1
.
Controller electrical characteristics
POWER SUPPLY
DIMENSIONS: MOUNTING:
1.38 x 7.63 x 10.6 inches Flush or Right Angle Wall Mount, Table Top
CONNECTIONS:
Standard RJ3 1X With one FemaleRS-232 and Connector for
Note: The above illustration and the rest of this manual shows the Controller as a four line unit. Your unit may be: one, two or four lines. In the programming and installatjon you should disregard programming for lines that you do not have.
PAV
PAGE 1.7
ISSUE 1, JUNE 1988
SECTION
8350~34501%NA
2, BASIC lE!IMtDWAREINSTAlYLA~ON
2. 2. General Mounting
Since you are reading this part of the Installation Section, it is assumed that you have unpacked the Controller. At this point, you are ready to proceed with the installation. Before proceeding ensure you have: oA place to mount the Controller (Figure 1.3 ). right side up (Figure 1.2 ), on a suitable backboard
.
o A screwdriver and wrench or pliers for the mounting hardware. @ Access to power, a ground, and telephone lines for the Controller (connected to RI31 blocks). You must provide a single phase power receptacle with the following recommendations: @ 103.5 - 126.5 VAC, 60 Hz fused and capable of delivering 350 mA per unit installed. QJ The power receptacle should be wired and fused independently cles that are not controller related. from all other recepta-
A warning tag should be attached to circuit breaker type fuses to prevent unauthorized manual operations. @ The power receptacle should not be controlled by a switch. @ The live and neutral conductors respective connections. at the receptacle should be wired to their proper
.
@ The power receptacle must be a 3-wire type, with the ground wire connected. to the. ground of the electrical system. @ The receptacle location should be selected to prevent accidental removal of the power cord. @ The receptacle nance. should be easily accessible for the removal of the plug for mainte-
Syfficient space around the units, especially the. cable side, should be left for cabling. This 1s very important if you intend to use chaining. You should also mark all cables as to their identity as this will ease troubleshooting problems.. Plgure I.2 Mounting Position
THIS WAY
NOT THT,C WAY
PAGE
1.8
PAV
SECTION
8350-345-012-NA
ISSUE
1, JUNE
1988
2. BASIC HARDWARE INSTALLATION

For information on installing chaining see MANUAL 3. The Controller can be mounted in one of two ways as shown in Figure 1.3 using the mounting. bracket shown in Figure 1.4 . Figure 1.3 Mounting WALL MOUNT BRACKET RIGHT ANGLE OPTION (PN 8350-017) R WALL MOUNTEDUNIT STANDARD FLUSH MOUNT
2. 3. Wall Mounting Bracket

Either mounting bracket has two wood screws and two holes in it to facilitate mounting. You should ensure that you have a solid surface such as l/2 inches (1.27 cm) plywood of sufficient size to mount the unit. Figure 1.4 Mounting Brackets FLUSH MOUNT BRACKET MOUNTING PLUGS RIGHT ANGLE BRACKET
MOUNTING SCREWS FOR BRACKET
2. 4. Ground
You must provide a good proven ground and wire as shown in Figure 1.5 . You should also ensure that all equipment (recording devices, printers, etc.) are grounded at the same point.
PAV
PAGE
1.9
ISSUE
1, JUNE
1988
SECTION
8350-345012-NA
2. BASIC HARDWARE INSTALLATION
Figure 1.5 Ground Wisisg
2. 5. Telephone Connections
The telephone connections should be made at the distribution block on your side of the telephone protection units, following established procedures and techniques (Figure 1.6 ). Tylxcally, vhen you connect to the modular jacks in your building you will be on the protected sfde of the telephone connections (if you are not sure, you should check). Fngure 1.6 illustrates the USOC RJ3lX Connector and cable assembly as used by the Controller. The FIGURE also illustrates a typical distribution block set up. Note: the cemter bridging clips are not inserted on the station block. This means that the Controller acts as a connector between the left and right connection points on the Station Block in Figure 1.6 D If you wire the Controller per Figure 1.6 it will when programmed, physically route calls through it, to the C.O.. This is done transnarentlv to the user, but all digits (whether DTI@ or rotary) dialed by the user can be &zreened and routed. This is done by splitting the user from the line when the user goes off-hook.
co.
SIDE
Once enough digits have been screened, the Controller decides the routing and dialing patterns. Then the Controller outputs the proper dialing sequence to the CO..
SUBSCRIBER
Once the digits have been sent to the C.O. the caller will be connected to the C.O..
PAGE
1.10
PAV
SECTION
8350-34%012-NA
ISSUE
1, JUNE
1988
2. BASIC HARDWARE INSTmLATION

Figure 1.6 DistributionWtig
MDF CENTRAL OFFICE DEMARC CUSTOMER TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT
= (TIP)
SPL&YPE STATION BLOCK (N&E 1)
(TIP)
NOTE 2: THE COLORS SHOWN IN THE RJ3lX OR CA3lA BLOCK REFER TO THE WIRES IN THE RJ31X OR CA31A CABLE WHERE: R=RED CR = GREEN
BK = BLACK Y =YELLOW
NOTE 1: NORMALLY THERE ARE BRIDGE CLIPS CONNECTING T TO ST AND R TO SR. WHEN YOU INSTALL THE UNIT YOU MUST REMOVE THEM
PAV
PAGE. 1.11
ISSUE
1. JUNE
1988
SECTION
8350-34%01%NA
2, BASIC HARDWiiItE INSTALLATION

2. 6. Installation
Call Controller s Figure 1.7 D
Of A Resording
Unit Or Programning
Terminal
outlined in
h order to program the Call Controller with a terminal you must connect 8 termiflal to the
RS-232. The terminal must comply with the requirements
Note: If you are using DTMF Chaining you can not use. this technique. Proceed to IMAW lL4.L 3, for the proper method to connect a recording unit. Later, you may want to connect a recording device for Call Detail Recording (CDR). If the CDR information is considered valuable, it is recommended that the recording device and the Call Controller have a safe (protected) source of AC power in case of commercial power failure.
Figure 1.7 RS-232 TERMINAL Specifications
SPECIHCA XTONS
= 8 with l-stop bit

Bit 8 Sense = Space
W-232
CONNECTOR
PAGE
1.12
PAV
SECTION
8350-345012-NA
ISSUE
1, JUNE
1988
2 BASIC HARDWARE INSTALLATION

l
2. 7. Powering Up
To power upthe Controller simply plug it in as shown in Figure I.8 Figure 1.8 Powering Up
.
TO 115 VAC SOCKET
POWER
SUPPLY
2. 8. Power Failure
Should a power failure occur that disables the Controller (or the Controller fails) the user s telephone will be directly connected to the CO. line. This means that the user will still have access to the telephone network, but the Controller will not screen or route calls.
SUBSCRIBER
C.O. SIDE
PAV
PAGE
1.13
ISSUE
1. J?JNE 1988
SECTION
8350-345-012-NA
2, BASIC lilAlXDW=
2. 9. Ground Start Installation Testing
INSTALIATION
If you have connected your Controller to a ground start trunk, you should perform the test illustrated in Figure 1.9 S If your wiring is correct you should hear a tone when you take the telephone receiver off-hook. If you don t hear a tone, try reversing the tip and ring on the C.0. side of the RJ31 block. Figure 1.9 Ground Start Testing
1_
To SMART-1 TRUNK CONN&TOR
PAGE 1.14
PAV
SECTION
8350-345-01%NA
ISSUE
1, JUNE
1988
3. INITIALIZATION
Before performing any further installation you should power the controller(s) up for 24 hours to allow the back-up batteries to charge filly. : In~i~~~z be a ueq
program the Con?oiler the first time or YOU wish to reset the Controller to its you must inmallze the unit. This can be done from a DTMF telephone
only.
3. 1. Initialization
From A DTMF Telephone
1. Connect a DTMF instrument to the subscriber side of the block (Tin and Ring leads of the Controller). Do not open the Controller as this will void the w&anty. ,Th&e must be a zrtAy with battery, .or simulated C.O. trunk, present on the C.O. side of the RJ31X
. n
SUBSCRIBER
2. With the power to the Controller disconnected, go o&hook. While holding down the * key on the DTMF set you will hear a tone in the earpiece of the handset. Connect the ljower to the Controller. When the power is first applied, there will be a click from the Controller as it disconnects (splits) you from the C.O. side.
3. Continue to hold the * key for 10 seconds or more after applying power to the Controller (See Note 1).
4. Release the * key. The unit should respond immediately with a short tone E from the handset receiver. If a single tone is not heard, return to Step 2 above and start over. The tone burst indicates that the Controller is initialized and remains in programming. mode.
Dial 942 903 and two EE bursts of tone will be heard indicating that default data has &zf;$ed. It also indicates that it is still in the programming mode and awaiting a
.
Idling in programming mode for more than two minutes will automatically exit programming mode. There will be three warning tones after 60 seconds of no activity in programming. 5. Go On-Hook and programming going on hook, dial 999.
will be exited. To exit programming
mode without
Note 1: When you press * key on the telephone (connected to the Controller for programming ustng the #O* sequence ) AND IF YOU HEAR reorder tone from the C.O., or customer equipment, the telephone may be on the wrong side of the telephone block. Check your connections per Figure 1.6 .
PAV
PAGE
1.15
ISSUE 1, JUNE
1988
SECTION
8350-345012-NA
3. INITIALIZATION
3. 2. Effects Of Initialization
When you have initialized the Controller all dialing will be passed straight through it, to the CC.. The Controller will not attempt to analyze, route or screen calls.
3. 3. Waking Up the Controller

After initializing, you must wakeup the Controller. You murt be in programming mode to w&-up the Controller. If you are not in programmin g mode you should enter # 0 * , or from a terminal a <CR> to enter programming mode. Waking up the Controller for all ,trunks (while in programming), can be done by dialing 5238. This causes the Controller to: *A E will be heard by the user, when the user makes a call. o Only respond to the programming command of # 0 % from a DTMF telephone carriage return (<CR>) from a terminal. e Set all trunks to loop start, DTMF 8 Route all no-n 1 + (local) calls go via DDD @ Route all 911, f-411, l-555, l-area code-555, l-800 calls go via DDD Q Route all other l+ (long distance) calls go via CCC e Route all local calls after the first digit is dialed e Route all l+ calls after fourth digit dialed. or a
FOR ADDITIONAL PROGRAMM@=G LvPROCEED TO ikXANUAL2~ FOR C-G INSTALLATION AND PROGRAMMING
ePROCEED TO MANUAL 3-a
PAGE
1.16
PAV
SECTION
8350-345-012-NA
ISSUE 1, JUNE 1988
APPENDIX 1 TABLE Al-l

HARDWARE
SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATIONS
MIN. TYP. MAX. UNITS
FCC RINGER EOUIVALENCE IDLE LINE. LOOP START

RINGER IMPEDANCE:
15 60 HZ, 70 -1lOVAC 10 V 20 - 3500 HZ, 10 1 40
.7 B
20
K MQ
RINGING SENS~TWITYZI~ - 60 HZ LEAKAGE:

TIP TO RING, 1OOV TIP TO EARTH, 1OOV
VOLTS
20 20 15 80
Ma Ma MA
OFF-HOOK
CURRENT
IDLE LINE. GROUND START

SENSING RESISTANCE: Tip to earth Tip to Ring 36 -22 -5 TIP-GROUND 10 n/a 40 -25 0 45 -28 +lO 150 K n OPBN CIRCUIT VOLTAGE: GROUNDING VOLTAGE VOLTS VOLTS MS
TIME TO RECOGNIZE RESISTANCE:
Sending Ring-Ground
BATTERY FEED
OPEN CIRCUIT VOLTAGE FEED RESISTANCE BALANCE: SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT
DC 22 550 36 24 600 40 50 26 650 VOLTS n DB MA
TERMINATION
RESISTANCE:
DC, 20 MA DC, 40 MA AC, 300 - 3000HZ mm Loss: 600 OHMS, 20 MA 200 200 550 20 13 600 26 80 300 300 650 sz n R DB MA
OPERATING CURRENT
PAV
PAGE
1.17
ISSUE 1, JUNE 1988
SECTION
8350-345-012-NA
APPENDIX 1 TBLE Al-l I-XARDWmE SPECIFICATIONS

DIAL TONE
CO FEED: Gain 300 Hz
DTMF .RECElVER
LEVEL LEVEL DIFFERENCE FREQUENCY: To receive To not receive DURATION TIME BETWEEN TONES
ROTARY RECEIVElR M&E IMPEDANCE

MAKE DURATION
BREAK IMPEDANCE
BREAK DURATION RATE 20 7 100 20 MS PPS
DTMF SENDER
LEVEL FREQUENCY DUIWTION (PROGRAMMABLE) -8 -1.3 40 60 -6 -3 +1.3 130 DBM % MS j
ROTARY SENDER
TIMING TIMING (Programmable) (60/40): Make Break 30120 35 5s 9.9 400 10 800 60140 60140 45 65 10.1 1300 MS/MS MS MS PPS MS
RATE (at 60/40) INTERDIGIT PAUSE (Programmable)
OPERATING RANGE Ac SUPPLY

TIZMPERAW mw
103.5 0 0
117.0
126.5 40 85 300
VAC C % VOLTS
ALLOWABLE VOLTAGE (Connected to any point) With reference to 600 CI termination
PAGE
1.18
PAV
SECTION
8350-345-012-NA
ISSUE
1, JUNE
1988
APPENDIX 1 TABLE Al-2 ORDERING INFORMATION

The Controller is available as a single or dual or four line unit, complete with power supply, cabling; documentation and can be ordered under the following part numbers: PAV Call Controller For U.S. applications: SMART-1 Call Controller SMART-l Call Controller SMART-l Call Controller For Canadian applications: SMART-1 Call Controller SMART-l Call Controller SMART-l Call Controller PAV Chaining (four line unit) (two line unit) (one line unit) (four line unit) (two line unit) (one line unit) 8350-005 8350-006 8350-003-PAVAXX 8350-005-CDN 8350-006-CDN 8350-003-PAVCXX
Call Controller
8350-OOl-CHNAXX 8350-002-CHNAXX 8350-003-CHNAXX 8350-OOl-CHNCXX 8350-002-CHNCXX 8350-003-CHNCXX 8350-026 8350-027 8350-345-012-NA 8350-345-013-NA 8350-345-014-NA 8350-345-o 15-NA
For U.S. applications: SMART-l Call Controller (four line unit) SMART-l Call Controller (two line unit) SMART-l Call Controller (one line unit) For Canadian applications: SMART-l Call Controller (four line unit) SMART-l Call Controller (two line unit) SMART-l Call Controller .(one line unit) The Call Controller Cables can be ordered as:. SMART-l Call Controller Chain Cable SMART-l Call Controller Chaining Printer Cable Call Controller documentation is: -_ Hardware Installation General Programming Guide Chaining Installation and Programming Technical Guide
Other Components
You can order the- following components: Wall Mount Bracket Right Angle Mounting Bracket Power Pack RJ31X Cable 8350-010 8350-017 8350-O 12 8350-013
PAV
PAGE
1.19
ISSUE 1, JUNE 1988
SECTION
8350-34%012-NA
>
C
Chaining, 1.6
Electrical, 1.7, 1.8
FCC, 1.21
HEED
SERVICE,
1.1
Ground Start Testing,
1.14
H
HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS, 1.17
I
Installation of a Recording Unit, 1.12
Mechanical
Description.
1.7 1.7
Electrical Description,
0
ORDERING INFORMATION; 1.19
Positive Account Code Verification, Power Failure. See Power Up Power Up, 1.13
1.5
PAGE 1.20
PAV
SECTION
8350-345012-NA
ISSUE
1, JUNE 1988
FCC INTERCONNECFION REQUIREMEmS

This asuipmant hu been approved by the Federal Communications Cornmiss ton (FCC) es not being harmful to the telephone network when connected directly to the telephone lines through the standard connection cabling provided with the unit. This section is applicable to telephone intersottnection in the United States. Prior to interconnection of this equipment. the local teiephotte company is to be notif3edt Inform tits company that you have FCC-registered equipment that you wish to Connect to their trunks. Give them the foIlowing information:
l l l l l
The telephone number of the line that you will
connect the unit to,
The equipment number being connected is a MITEL INC. model SMART - 1 Call Controller, The FCC registration number for the SMART - 1 Call Controller is EMP 46K-72059-L&E.
The FCC Ringer Equivalence Number (BEN) is 0.7B,
The connector jacks are BJ31X.
CONNECTION
LXMITATIONS
Due to the FCC Part 68 Rule, no connection can be made to party lines and to coin telephone service. This unit is designed to be used on standard-device telephone lines. If there are any questions about the telephone line, such as how many pieces of equipment may be connected to it, the telephone company will provide this information upon request.
NETWORK CHANGES
The telephone company may make changes to its communication service: such changes may include the change of tNI& circuits, changes in opwatiod characteristics of its trunks, etc. Before doing this, however, the company shall provide official notification. so that the operation of the Call Controller service will not be interrupted.
MAINTENANCE
LIMITATIONS
This equipment has been registered with the FCC for direct connection to the telephonu network. Under the FCC program, the user is restricted from making any changes or repairs and from performing any maintenance operations other than those specifically included in this document. There are no user repairable parts within the unit. It is sealed against user maintenance.
to be used for all external connections
If opened ail warranties are voided.

are
No cabiing or wiring changes within the unit are permitted by the user. Plug-ended cables, as detailed in this document, between the unit and the unit and the telephone interface jack.
Power supply components MITEL INC.
and cabling are only to be changed or maintained by MITEL INC. or by an authorized agent of
TROUBLE
CORRECTIONS
appropriate field service is provided by MITEL INC. or its authorized agents.
For all malfunctions.
DISCONNECTION
If ever it is decided to permanently disconnect the SMART - 1 Gail Controller from the present telephone company of this change
line. please notify the
PAV
PAGE
1.21
.... . .._ ___-.. ;-,-.
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988
SECTION
8350-~3%S-O13-F&%~
SMART-1
SMAJXT-1 CALL
MAN&J&L2
,..:.
CONTROLLER
, i. .
GENERAL
PROGRAMMING
GUIDE
@ Copyright
@ Regisvxcd
19S8 MlTEL
INC.
Trademark of MITEL FfMTED m CANADA
All rights rcscrved. Corporation
SECTION
8350-345-013rNA
ISSUE 2, AUGUST
1988
HEADING
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE .......................................................
.....................................................
I. GENERAL
2.6
2.6 2.6 2.6 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.12 2.12
1. 1. About This MANUAL

1. 3. Wakeup The Controller 2.
1. 2. As Outlined In MANUAL
1 ................................................
....................................................
GENERAL
NOTES ON PROGRAMMING
............................
2. 1. Programming With a DTMF Telephone ....................................... 2. 2. Terminating Variable Length Entries .......................................... 2. 3. Acknowledgment Tones .................................................... 2. 4. Typical Resulting Controller Action ........................................... 2. 5. Terminating A Variable Length Entry ......................................... 2. 6. Programming With a Terminal ............................................... 2. 7. Changing Terminal 2. 8. Legal and Illegal Entries .................................................... Program Security Code ..................................... ......................
(942 908)............................. 2. 9. TandemMode 2. 10. Cloning (942 906) ....................................................... ................................................... Verification(902) 2. ll.Data 2. 12. Special Functions ........................................................
3. SELECTING THE CONTROLLER TYPE ............................. 3. 1. Specifying the Unit As A Call Controller Or A PAV Controller ....................
4. SYSTEM WIDE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 0 0 .

4. 1. General .................................................................. 4. 2.. Programming Speed Calls ................................................... 4. 3. Defining The Maximum Number Of Speed Calls ................... 1 ...........................................
I. ..........
2.13
2.13 2.13 2.13 2.13 2.15 2.15
4. 4. Setting up a Speed Call Method
4. 5. Setting up a Speed Call Method 2 ........................................... 4. 6. To Use A Speed Call Number From a DTMF Phone ............................ 4. 7. To Change the Speed Call So It Can Be Accessed From a Rotary Dial Phone 4. 8. If You Wish To Delete The Old Speed Call Access Code ........................ 4. 9. To Use The New Number From a Rotary Dial Phone ............................ 4. 10. Re-Order Tone Supplied By the Controller ................................... 4. 11. Trunks To Be Monitored For Call Detail Recording ............................ 4. 12.RS-232 Baud Rate ....................................................... 4. 13. Nulls After A Carriage Return ............................................... 4. 14. Print Out Incoming Calls .................................................. 4. 15. Print Format For CDR .................................................... ................................................ 4. 16. RoutetoMonitorfosCDR 4. 17. Route Progress Tone Length
............................................... .......
2.15 2.15 2.15 2.16 2.16 2.16 2.16 2.16 2.17 2.17 2.17
PAGE - 2.2
PAV
ISSUE
2. AUGUST
1988
SECTION
8350;345-013~NA
HEADING
5. 1. General 5. 2. Type 5. 3. Rotary 5. 4. DTMF 5. 6. Flash 5. 7. Time 5. 8. Ground
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE ..................................... 2.18

2.18 2.18 2.18 2.19 2.19 2.20 ..................... 2.20 2.20 2.21 2.21 2.21 :: ..................... 2.22 2.22 2.22 2.22 2.23 2.23 2.23 2.24 2.24 2.24 2.25 2.25 2.25 2.26 2.26 2.26 2.27 2.27 ........................... ................................................................. And Trunk Rates ................................................ Dialing Dialing Time Allowed Between .......................................................
5. LINE AND TRUNK OPTIONS

Of Dialing
Rates ....................................................... .............................................................. Time Trunk ....................................................... Release And Next Attempt to Connect. ..................................................... .............................................. Time ............................................... Side .................. ........................................... Dialing ...........................
5. 5. On Hook
Start Attempts Digit Refusal Time Time Time Interdigit
5. 9.GroundStartAttemptTimer.. 5. 10. Off-Hook 5. 12. Interdigit 5. 13. Interdigit 5. 14. Interdigit 5. 15. Rotary 5. 17. Incoming 5. 18. Controller 5. 19. Specify 5.20. 5. 21. Centrex 5. 22. Time 5. 11. User DialTone
.......................................................... Out Subscriber Out On 0+ Calls Out On Ol+ Calls Pause ............................................
On Calls On Outgoing ............................
5. 16. Off-HookTone
..........................................................
Call Detection Operation Default Route
.: .....................
On Off-Hook
.......................................... ........................................ ! ...............................
...................................................... ...................
SpecifyTheDigitForCentrexAccess Enable/Disable To Auto-Answer Security Application
..................................................... .............................................. Lockout Timer Timer ............................................... ................................... ......................................... Code Trunk Timer Recognition Calls
5. 23. Wait For Security 5. 24. Incorrect/Failed 5. 25. Off-Hook 5. 26. Tip Ground
Code Timer
Recognition
5. 27. Digit Recognition 5. 28. Digit Recognition 5. 29. Tip Ground
On Outgoing On Incoming Timer
Calls ......................................... ................................................
Removal
6. PRIMARY SEARCH TABLES

6. 1. General 6. 2. Primary 6. 3. Warning 6. 5. Default 6. 6. Search 6. 7. Search 6. 8. Search 6. 9. Search 6. 10. Search .......................... Search Tables .............. .......................... .................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................ Data Tables Tables Tables Tables Tables ...................... 801 803 804 807 808
......................................
...................................... ...................................... ....................................... ........................... ...................................... ...................................... ...................................... ...................................... ...................................... ...................................... . ..........
2.28
2.28 2.28 2.28 2.28 2.31 2.31 2.31 2.31 2.32 2.32
6. 4. Digits In A Table
PAV
PAGE,
- 2.3
SECTION
830-34%OIJ-NA
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988
HEADING
.O..e........................
810
. . . . . . . . ..e.*..*.*....o..e...
PAGE
2.32 2.32 2.32 2.32
6. 11. SearchTables 6. 13. Special Note
....................................................... ....................................................... ..................................
6. 12. Search Tables 811
............................................................
6. 14. Warning.............................~
7. COMMON
7.1.UserAreaCode 7. 2. Machine 7. 4. Terminal
OPTION DATA. oa s e o 0 0 a e o 0 . 0~.~.0~..~~00~0~0~0~~~~~~~~

.......................................................... Identifier Program ........................................................ Code ................................................ Code ............................................. Security
~ 2.33
2.33 2.33 2.33 2.33
7. 3. Auto-Answer
Security
8. ROUTE PARAMETER
8. 1. General 8. 2. Primary 8. 3. Primary 8. 4. Route 8. 6. Account 8. 8. Action 8. 9. Account . 8. 10. Account And And Progress Code Alternate Alternate Tones Entry
PROGRAMMING
Routes
..o....oo.i....e.........*a.
2.34
2.34 2.34 2.34 2.35 2.36 2.36 2.37 2.38 2.39 2.40 2.$% 2.41 2.41 2.41 2.43 2.44 2.44 2.44 2.45 2.45
..e.
................................................................. ............................................... Number Format ............................. Destination
...................................................... ............................................... Timer ........................................ . .... . ............................ Inter-Digit .....................
8. 5. NumberofAccountCodeDigits 8. 7. AccountCodeType on Call Failure Code Code Warning
..................................................... Tones ............................................... And Reroute Tones
Confirmation
. . . _. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ .
9. CALL CONTROL
9. 1. General
DATA ENTRY 0~~00~~000~00000.~....~.~~~.~.~~.~~~
................................................................. Strings.. Control Of Route Number ............................................................ Sequences (6RS) ............................................. . ................................. Network .................................. ...............
9. 2. Route . 9. 3. Access 9. 5. Name 9. 6. Access 9. 8. Dummy 9. 9. Centrex
9. 4. A and B Dial Tone Timers
........................................................... For OCC Telephone ..................................................... ......................................................
9. 7. Authorization
Number
AccountCode Number
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..~.....~.....~............................
10. POSITIVE ACCOUNT

10. 1. Description 10. 2. Specifying 10. 3. Number 10. 5. Action 10. 6. String
CODE ORIONS
os s
.....................
................................ the Unit As A Controller Of Account Codes Code Or PAV ..... ................... ...................
............................
............................ ............................ ............................ ............................ ............................
2.46
2.46 2.46 2.46 2.47 2.47 2.48
10. 4. PAV List Maintenance Digits Data
............................... ................................. Positive Account Codes ...........
10. 7. Programming
.............
..r........i
...
2.48
PAGE
- 2.4
PAV
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988
SECTION
8350-345-013-NA
HEADING
.......................................................... ..............................
PAGE 2.50
2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50
APPENDIX 1 - SYSTEM INFORMATION .............................................................. Al. 1 GENERAL

Al, Al. Al. 2 Print Format 3 MITEL 4 SMARTFormat ............................................................. ........................................................... .......................................................... Format
APPENDIX
2 - SITE INFORMATION
FORM
..................................
2.53
2.54 2.56 2.57 2.58 2.58 2.58 2.59 2.60 2.60 2.61
CONTROLLERSITE SEARCH SEARCH TABLE TABLE
.....................................................
.............................................................. FORM
........................................................
SPEEDCALL
....................................................................
Call Method Call Method 1 ................................................. 2 ....................................................
Setting up a Speed Setting up a Speed SPEED CALL
FORM
........................................................... CODE .................................................... Codes FORM
POSITIVE Programming POSITIVE
ACCOUNT
Positive Account ACCOUNT CODE
............................................... ...............................................
INDEX
.............................................................
2.62
PAV
PAGE
- 2.5
SECTION
8350-345013-NA
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988
1. GENERAL
1. 1. About This MANUAL
This manual shows the Controller as a four line unit. Your unit may be one, two or four lines. While programming you should disregard programming for lines that you do not have.
1. 2. As Outlined In MANUAL 1
In order to program the Controller: You must have powered up the unit for at least 24 hours to charge the memory battery. You must have initialized the unit if this is an initial installation You must have either a terminal, or a DTMF telephone-.connected to the Controller.
You must have C.O. trunk with battery present, or a simulated CO.. trunk connected to the line you are programming the Controller with (this is not required if you are using a terminal) D
1. 3. Wakeup The Controller

After initializing, if you did not do so in MANLJAL 1, you must wakeup the Controller. You mwf be in paagramnsirog m&e %owakeup the Controller. If you are not in programming mode you should enter # 0 * s or from a terminal a xCfQ> to enter programming mode. To wakeup all the lines on the Controller: dial 5238. For further information on the X23 (see also page 2.23) parameter see below: REGISTER X23
ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER I FOR 2 FOR 3 FOR 4 FOR 5 FOR LINE LINE LINE LINE ALL 1 + 23T 2 + 23T 3 + 23T 4 + 23T + 23T I
DESCRIPTION
T = 0 IMMEDIATELY DIAL ROUTE (HOT LINE OPERATION) X24T SEE PAGE 2.24 SEE 9
T = 8 WAIT FOR DIGITS AND SCREEN AND ACT ON THEM AS PROGRAMMED T = 9 CUT THROUGH; ROUTING, ETC NO SCREENING,
Controller functions at this time are as follows: A . will be heard by a user, when the user goes off-hook. All trunks loop start, DTMF. l The security access code is # 0 * , or from a terminal a <CR>. l All non 1 + (local) calls go via DDD. l 911, l-411, l-555, l-area code-555, l-800 calls go via DDD. l All other l+ (long distance) calls go via OCC. l All local calls go directly after the first digit is dialed. 8 All l+ calls go after fourth digit dialed.
l l
PAGE
- 3.6
PAV
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988
SECTION
8350-345013-NA
2. GENERAL NOTES ON PROGRAMMING

2. 1. Programming With a DTMF Telephone
Programming can be done using DTMF tones. The default programming code is # 0 *. If your situation does not allow the entry of ## (for example: behind a PBX that will not pass the #, or * to the Controller) you should change the programming code before installing it. To exit programming, hang-up (go on-hook), or idle for more than 2 minutes while in programming mode.
2. 2. Terminating
Variable
Length
Entries
To terminate a variable length entry (e.g. Speed Call, Account Codes,,6RX strings, etc.) use ##. If your situation does not allow the entry of ## (For example: behind a PBX that will not pass the ## to the Controller) there is an automatic timeout on variable length information. The entry will be made automatically for you if you do not enter the ## within the time specified by the inter-digit timer (X11 by default 6 seconds. See page 2.22).
2. 3. Acknowledgment
Tones
While programming the Controller, with a telephone, you will receive audible indications as to correct entries, incorrect entries and programming timeouts. In general, after each correct entry, the Controller will respond with a double tone. If You Hear J-
-s means the command you have entered has been recognized as legal (correct), i.e.
you entered # 0 *.
If You Hear 11 JJ means the entry you have made has been accepted. This occurs after a parameter has all the digits it needs to program it, or you entered ## on a variable length parameter indicating completion of the entry.
For example: If you dial 100 you will hear
J- ,
then dial 2 and you will hear
J-J-
If You Hear J-uJ-J-J

will be heard, should you idle in the programming mode for more than sixty seconds. After two minutes of idling, you will be automatically logged out of programming mode.
If You Hear J-J-J-Jlong > means you have made an incorrect programming entry. J-J-J-J-( Note: In the event of an illegal entry, wait for the tones to stop and then try again. No data was accepted by the Controller for that entry.
PAV
PAGE
- 2.7
SECTION
8350-345013-NA
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988

Example
1IAL HEAR DIAL DIAL HEAR TO TELL THE CONTROLLER:
I
942 903 0
I
J-J
LOo;;CESS
PROGRAMMING
ERASE ALL PREVIOUSLY ENTERED NON-DEFAULT PROGRAMMING DATA AND RELOAD DEFAULT DATA LOOP START, ROTARY DIAL DIAI
500
J-
OR 1 OR2 OR3
GROUND
START,
ROTARY
IJJ-I
USER S AREA
TURN
ON
OFF-HOOK
TONE
DIALED
BEFORE
SENDING
TO
USERS
AREA
CODE
- 3 DIGITS
622
ar
CUSTOMER S AUTHORIZATION CODE
##
USUALLY A 3 TO AUTHORIZATION
10 DIGIT CODE
To exit programming,
hang-up
(go on-hook).
2. 4. Typical Resulting Controller
Action
will (due to the 625
Access
When the user dials a destination number the Controller Control Sequence see page 2.41): Detect dial tone. Dial the OCC Access Number (621). Detect dial tone from the OCC. Dial the Authorization Code (622). Dial the Destination Number. Connect the Caller to the line.
PAGE
- 2.8
PAV
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988
SECTION
8350-345-013-NA
2. GENERAL NOTES ON PI~~MAMMING

2. 5. Terminating A Variable Length Entry
Because some commands that you will give to the Controller require variable length information (after them) that only you will know, a terminator is required to indicate the end of an entry. Generally this occurs with Speed Call information, 8XX and 6RX parameters. This terminator is ##. When using a terminal you can substitute the letter A for the * and B for the #. You can exit programming mode by dialing 999, or idle for more than 2 minutes while in programming mode.
2. 6. Programming
With a Terminal
Programming can be done using a terminal (does not apply to Chain Programming, for Chain Programming see MANUAL 3). The default programming code is <CR> (a carriage return). When you enter a carriage return the following screen appears:
,, : ..:. . .: ..:.: .::: :.
.I.
.:.
R&tiiw
1. .; ,::. j ::
-RING
: :
PR()G
MODE
.. .:y:::: .-pi:
,....I
2. 7. Changing
Terminal
Program
Security
Code
access code by:
At this time you may wish to change the terminal programming ..604. MMM##:
->-,. ..
Where MMM is the new programming code and ## is the termination DTMI? telephone access (#O*) will not be affected. 2. 8. Legal
indicator.
The
and Illegal
Entries
will
Each time you enter a legal command e.g. 005, from a terminal, the Controller . aa automatlcally space to the next entry point waiting for more input. For example:
I
t Area for Data fiat
You Enter To Be Displayed
Left By Legal Command
Should you make an illegal entry, you will receive:

> ?5 > 0 5 FOLLOWED BY A CARRIAGE RETURN (USED TO CANCEL THE 5 ENTRY)
indicates an incorrect entrv
PAV
PAGE
- 2.9
SECTION
8350-345013-NA
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988

2. 9. Tandem Mode (942 908)
The Controller can be programmed from a remote site by using a personal computer or terminal connected to a Tandem-capable unit. This configuration allows you to dial up and access Controllers in the customer s premise. Programming is done using DTMF tones supplied by the Controller as instructed by the terminal. For further information see MANUAL 4. 2. 10. Cloning
. A
(942 906)
Controller can be programmed to operate identically to another Controller by using a method called Cloning. One Controller is programmed (referred to as the Master) and then connected to another Controller you wish to program, using a Cloning cable. For further information see MANUAL 4.
2. 11. Data Verification
(902)
Data Verification is a convenient and fast way to confirm the contents of a Controllers database. You must use a terminal to use this mode and data will be displayed for each parameter entered. Data Verification does not alter the contents of the Controller s database. For further information see MANUAE 4.
2. 12. Special Functions

Special Function Commands are commands that allow access to specific data in the Controller. If you are using DTMF Chaining, consult CHAINING PAIWVIETERS AND COMMANDS in MANUAL 3 before using these commands, as they are not functional in a chained access programming session. This is especially true when using 942 903, 942 906, 942 908. There should never be a requirement to use these commands when a Controller is in a Chain. Note: the commands are valid, however, on Chained Controllers as long as Chain Programming has not.been accessed. You must be in the programming mode to use these commands. COMMANDS
902
DEFINITION
DATA CONFIRMATION MODE: AFTER EACH 2 OR 3 DIGIT PREFIX THE CONTROLLER WILL DISPLAY PROGRAMMED DATA LOAD DEFAULT DATA. EXISTING INFORMATION, CLEAR ENTER ALL SEARCH CLONE iMASTER DELETES ALL OTHER RELOADS DEFAULTS (801-815, 821-835) FROM DATP CODE. MODE
942 942 942
903 904 906 907
TABLES
RETURN TO DATA PROGRAMMING CONFIRMATION M[ODE. ENTER TANDEM MODE REMOTE CONTROLLERS) EXIT PROGRAMMING (FOR
942
908 999
PROGRAMMING
MODE
980MMDDHHMM
SET THE INTERNAL CLOCK WHERE MM = MONTH, DD = DAY, HH = HOURS, MM = MINUTES.
PAGE - 2.110
PAV
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988
SECTION
8350-345-013~NA

Figure 2.1 Programming
SYSTEM
The Controller
000 - 015 WIDE OPTIONS LINE/TRUNK OPTIONS C.O. TYPE, TIMING, ETC. 50X - 53X = ALL LINES LINE . 10x 1 3x ALL 50 X TO 53X 1 LINE 20x 2Tpx 2 LINE 30x 3Tfox 3 LINE 40x qT1ox 4
-l--L
DISABLED PASS ALL DIGITS DIRECTLY THROUGH M DISABLED 9 HOTLINE DEFAULT ROUTE
SPEED CALL 700-799 PRIMARY SEARCH TABLES
PRIMARY 55X = ALL 15x

ROUTE 1
ROUTES ROUTES 35x

ROWE
w 45x
ROUTE
SECONDARY ROUTES 57X = ALL ROUTES 17x

ROUTE 1
25x
ROUTE
27X
ROUTE
37x
ROUTE
47x
ROUTE
PRIMARY
ROUTES
610 -645
ALTERNATE
ROUTES
650 -685
610 613 1 623 1 633 1
t
DDD
0
L
t
1ST occ 1
t
2ND occ 2
t
3RD occ 3-4 DDD =F= 1ST occ 5 2ND occ 6 3RD occ 7
Warning: When programming Dial Plan/Search T emplates, care should be taken to not affect calls that are dialed for emergency, e:g. 911 calls. After programming a Controller, check that the operation of emergency dialing has not been adversely affected.
PAV
PAGE
- 2.11
ISSUE 2, AUGUST
1988
3. SELECTING THE CONTROLLER TYPE

3. 1. Specifying the Unit As A Call Controll& Or A PAV Controller As it defaults to a regular Controller when initialized, you must specify the Controller as a
PAV Controller if you wish to use it as. a Positive Account Code Verifier. This can be done by setting 011 to 1 as shown below:
REGISTER 011 ENTER OllT I DESCRIPTION
T = 0 FOR REGULAR OPERATION T = 1 FOR PAV CONTROLLER
1DEFAUL I
0
CONTROLLER
PAGE - 2.12
PAV
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988
SECTION
8350-345013-NA
4. SYSTEM WIDE DATA

4. 1. General
You may want to change System Wide Data, because the default data does not meet your requirements. For example, all telephone lines are specified as loop start when default data is loaded. If you are using ground start lines, this must be changed. There is a series of Charts in APPENDIX 2 that will aid you in recordihg the information that you enter.
4. 2. Programming
Speed Calls
Speed Calls apply on a SYSTEM wide basis, but access can be restricted. There is a SPEED CALL Chart in APPENDIX 2 that will aid you in recording the speed calls used and the numbers assigned to them.
4. 3. Defining The Maximum Number Of Speed Calls

You can define the maximum number of Speed Call-s by:
REGISTER 000 ENTER OOOT DESCRIF TION
T = 1 FOR T = 2 FOR 100 SPEED CALLS MAXIMUM 1000 SPEED CALLS MAXIMUM
DEFAULT
1
Note: An additional programming change will be necessary if you selected 2 for 1,000 Speed Calls, if the Speed Call trigger is to be recognized by the Primary Search Table and acted on. 1. The information in the 803 register (*#9#9#2) must be deleted by entering 803 *#9#9#9. 2. A new value must be added to the 804 register as 804 *#9#9#9#2. 3. This changes the Speed Call trigger range from *NN to *NNN. The * can be a different digit if required.
4. 4. Setting up a Speed Call Method 1

Speed Call can be programmed in one of two ways. The first is generally of installation programming and has the following format: done at the time
7NN(N)DKMM...MM
J~=P...PP##
T
, I D INDICATES
K INDICATES HOW ROUTING WHICH TRUNK(S)
PAV
-f -r
## INDICATES ENTRY P IS THE ACCOUNT
END OF CODE
* INDICATES THAT THE NEXT ENTRY BEGINS AN ACCOUNT CODE
MM IS THE PHONE NUMBER WILL BE ACCOMPLISHED IS TO BE ALLOWED ACCESS
INN(N) IS THE SPEED CALL NUMBER LOCATTON
PAGE
- 2.13
SECTION
8350-345OP3-NA
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988
4. SYSTEM WIDE DATA

When you programmed available. To program OOOT(see page 2.13), you selected either 100 or 1000 speed calls a speed call use one of the formats in the following Chart:
REGISTER
(FORMAT)
DEFINITION
FORMAT FOR UP TO 100 ENTRIES. NN IS THE SERVICE CODE TO BE DIALED BY THE SUBSCRIBER AND MM...MM IS THE NUMBER TO WHICH THE CODE IS TRANSLATED
FOR 100 SPEED CALLS 7NNDKh4M...MM## OR 7NNDKMM.. MM * P. .PP## FOR 1000 SPEED CALLS 7NNNDKMh&..MM## OR 7NNNDKMM...MM* P..PP##
D is
FORMAT FOR UP TO 1000 ENTRIES. NNN IS THE SERVICE CODE TO BE DIALED BY THE SUBSCRIBER AND MM...MM IS THE NUMBER TO WHICH THE CODE IS TRANSLATED
the key that selects the lines to access the call number
MUST FROM
BE ENTERED A TERMINAL
K specifies 0 - 7 8 9
how routing will be accomplished Force on Route 0 7. 7 Use the screening table to determine routing Dial immediate. no Route # (transoarent) number by
PP is an Account Code and is se arated from the destination the * . The +c and the Account c?ode are optional. Enters the information into memory
Speed Call Programming Example 1: Since the screen 803 *#9#9#2 already default, up to 100 Speed Calls with the X&N format can be programmed: Enter 722 085551818## will cause 555-1818 to be dialed out whenever
exists by
a user dials *22. you
Speed Call Programming Example must set OOOT to 0002. Then:
2: To program
411 calls to go to l-555-1212
Enter 803 411 #2##, sets 411 as a Speed Call trigger digit. Enter 7411 08 15551212## enters the Speed Call digit. The unit is now set to dial out l-555-1212 whenever 411 is dialed into any trunk.
PAGE
- 2.14
PAV
-.
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988
SECTION
8350-345-013-NA
4. SYSTEM WIDE DATA

4. 5. Setting up a Speed Call Method 2
Generally, this method of programming Speed Call is used by a user after an installation is complete. All trunks will have access to the Speed Calls and all calls will be screened because DK as outlined previously is automatically set to 08. By default the user Speed Call programming code is ###. STEP DIAL
###
DESCRIPTION IS THE USER SPEED CALL PROGRAMMING CODE IS THE LOCATION 00 THROUGH 99 OR 000 THROUGH 999 IS THE TELPHONE NUMBER TO BE DIALED ENTERS THE INFORMATION pgAEPE;TEPS 2 - 4 UNTIL ALL NUMBERS ARE
NN(N)
MM... ##
HANG UP TO EXIT. DO NOT DIAL 999
4. 6. To Use A Speed Call Number From a DTMF Phone

1. Dial * NIT(N), where NN(N) is the two or three digit location number. The number entered at the Speed Call location specified will be dialed out, if it exists. If it does not exist, or the particular trunk being accessed is not allowed access, re-order tone will be supplied to the user.
4. 7. To Change the Speed Call So It Can Be Accessed From a Rotary Dial Phone
To change the Speed Call Access Code to 1lNN instead of * NN: I. Dial # 0 *, or the current programming access code. 2. Dial 80411#9#9#2## add new Speed Call access code, which will be 1lNN in this case. 3. Hang-up to exit program mode if done programming.
4. 8. If You Wish To Delete The Old Speed Call Access Code

I. While in programming
*N-N.
mode Dial 803 e #9#9#9## to delete the old access code of
2. Hang-up to exit program mode if done programming.
4. 9. To Use The New Number From a Rotary Dial Phone

1. Dial
1lNN where NN is the two digit location number. The number entered at the Speed Call location specified will be dialed out, if it exists. If it does not exist, or the particular trunk being accessed is not allowed access, re-order tone will be supplied to the user.
PAV
PAGE
- 2.15
SECTION
8350-345-013-NA
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988
4. SYSTEM WIDE DATA

4. 10. Re-Order
REGISTER
ENTER 001 T
Tone Supplied By the Controller

DESCRIPTION
WHERE T IS: INTERRUPTED 0 = 400HZ, 1 = 400 HZ CONTINUOUS AT
001
DEFAUL I
180 IPM
0
: :
4. 11. Trunks To Be Monitored Por Call Detail Recording

You can control which trunk(s) are to be monitored for Call Detail Recording (CDR see page 2.17) by:
ENTER
005T
WHERE
T IS:
Note: C, D, E can only be entered from a terminal. 4. 12.
RS-232
Baud Rate
006 DESCRIPTION
T = 1 FOR 110 T = 2 FOR 300 T = .3 FOR 600 T = 4 FOR 1200 T = 5 FOR 2400 T = 6 FOR 4800
REGISTEfi
ENTER 006T
DEFAULT
A
4. 13. Nulls After A Carriage

REGISTER 007
ENTER 007T
Return
DESCRI[PTION DEFAULT
(O-9) 2
T = THE
NUMBER
OF NULLS
4. 14. Print Out Incoming Calls

You can control the printing of records of incoming calls in Call Detail Recording (CDR see page 2.17) by:
PAGE
- 2.16
PAV
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988
SECTION
8350-345-013-NA
4. SYSTEM WIDE DATA

4. 15. Print Format
You can change
l
For CDR
(CDR) format as required:
Call Detail Recording
The MIIEL format was developed for PBX applications (specifically MlTEL PBXs). Some fields are used for call transfers, attendants, etc., and are not supplied by the Controller. The SMART format is similar to the MlTEL format, however it has reduced the printing width to fit in 80 columns and the R field is in ASCII instead of numeric. For further information format can be changed REGISTER 009
ENTER 009T
on the print by:
format
see APPENDIX
1 (page 2.50).
The print
DESCRIPTION.
T = 0 FOR OFF T = 2 FOR SMART
DEFAUL Z
1
T = 1 FOR ,&fITEL
PROVIDE A CARRIAGE RETURN LINE FEED AT START OF RECORD PROVIDE A CARRIAGE RETURN LINE FEED AT START OF RECORD AND END
T = 5 FOR M[TEL T = 6 FOR S,MART
4. 16. Route to Monitor for CDR

You can specify which route(s) are to be monitored for CDR by: DEl?AUL?
9
REGISTER 010
ENTER OIOT
DESCRIPTION
T = 0 FOR ROUTE T = 1 FOR ROUTE T = 2 FOR ROUTE T = 3 FOR ROUTE T = 1 FOR ROUTE T = 5 FOR ROUTE T = 6 FOR ROUTE T = 7 FOR ROUTE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
T = 8 ROUTED CALLS AND OUTSIDE CENTREX CALLS ONLY T = 9 ALL CALLS
4. 17. Route Progress Tone Length

REGISTER
ENTER 015T
015
I
t T = 0
DESCRIPTION
JO0 MS T = 1 100 MS
DEFAUL I
n
PAV
PAGE - 2.17
SECTION
8350-345-013-NA
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988

5. 1. General
When programming line and trunk options you should remember Trunk 1 is not related to Route 1, or Trunk 2 is not related to Route 2, etc. Line and Trunk refer to the physical line that is supplied by your telephone company. Route refers to the way the Controller will attempt to route the call through the Public Switched Telephone Network. For example: l-800 numbers may be routed on Route 0, while a l-201 is routed to a common carrier via Route 1. Any trunk may access any Route depending on how you program the Controller. All entries in this part are of a predetermined length. When you have entered the correct number of digits, the Controller will automatically accept the entry (informing as to the correctness as outlined on page 2.7).
_.: .,..-
5. 2. Type Of Dialing
And Trunk
You can specify the type of trunk as loop or ground start, and the type of dialing as BTMP or rotary by: REGISTER X00
ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER I FOR 2 FOR 3 FOR 4 FOR 5 FOR
LINE LINE LINE LINE ALL 1 + OOT 2 + OOT 3 + OOT 4 + OOT + OOT T T T T = = = = 0 1 2 3
DESCRIPTION
FOR LOOP START, ROTARY GROUND START, ROTARY FOR LOOP START, DTMF FOR GROUND START. DTMF
DEFAULT
2
5. 3. Rotary Dialing
REGISTER XOP
LINE LINE LINE LINE ALL
Rates
DESCRIPTION
T = 2 FOR OUTPULSE WHICH EQUATES T = 4 FOR OUTPULSE WHICH EQUATES AT 30120 MS 20 PPS TO 60% BREAK AT 60140 MS 10 PPS TO 60% BREAK
I
1 DEFAULI
4
1 + OlT 2 + OlT 3 + OlT 4 + OlT + OlT
.-. .__
PAGE
- 2.18
PAV
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988
SECTION
8350-345-013-NA
5.
LINE AND TRUNK OPTIONS

Dialing Rates
DESCRIPTION
T = ; T 1 2 T=3 T = 4 T = 5 $ lMi(fast) 60 :MS 70MS 80 MS. 90 MS T .T T T = = = = 6 7 8 9 100 110 120 130 MS MS MS MS(slow)
5. 4. DTMF
ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER 1 FOR 2 FOR 3 FOR 4 FOR 5 FOR
RJZGISTER X02
LINE LINE LINE LINE ALL 1 + 02T 2 + 02T 3 + 02T 4 + 02T + 02T
DEFAULT
1
5. 5, On Hook Time
You can specify the on-hook
recognition time by: DESCRIPTION

T T T T T T = = = = = = 0 1 2 3 4 5 FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR 80 MS 100 IMS 150 MS 200 MS 300 MS 500 MS T T T T T T = = = = = = 6 FOR 750 MS 7 FOR 1000 MS 8 FOR 1330 MS 9 FOR 1660 MS * FOR 2 S # FOR 2.5s
REGISTER X03
ENTER ENTER.2 ENTER ENTER ENTER 1 FOR FOR 3 FOR 4 FOR 5 FOR
DEFAUL I:
6
Note: There is a relationship
X04, all switch-hook 0
between X03 and X04 (see page 2.20). If X03 is less than flashes will be recognized as on-hooks as outlined below: TIME INTERVALS
*
FLASH TIME AS SET BY X04T
ON-HOOK TIME AS SET BY X03T
IF THE FLASH TIME IS SET TO MORE THAN THE ON-HOOK THE FLASH IS NOT ALLOWED
TIME
PAV
PAGE
- 2.19
SECTION
8350-34%013-NA
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988
5.

DESCRIPTION I DEFAULT
5. 6. Flash Allowed Time

1 REGISTER X04
LINE LINE LINE LINE 1 + 04T 2 + 04T +04T 3 + 04T 4 + 04T SPECIFY A TIME THAT IS GREATER
THAN XO?T
gg$J)
~igjJ/j:
TO DISABLE
ALL THE FLASH
Note: This feature should generally be set to #, except in those cases where you require the ability to use conference features. This is usually required for C.O. conference feature, or when betweebn the user s equipment (telephone or Key system) and a PBX.
5, 7. Time Between Trunk Release And Next Attempt to Connect
ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER
! FOR 2 FOR 3 FOR 4 FOR 5 FOR
1 + 05T 2 + 05T 3 + 05T 4 + 05T
T T T T T
= = = = =
0 1 2 3 4
FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR
500 MS 650 MS 800 MS 950 MS IL100 MS
T T T T T
= = = = =
5 6 7 8 9
FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR
1250 1400 1550 1400 1850
MS MS MS MS MS
5. 8. Ground Start Attempts

If you have a ground start trunlc, you can specify the number of ground start attempts. In most cases this should not have to be changed.
REGISTER X06
ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER % FOR 2 FOR 3 FOR 4 FOR 5 FOR
DESCRIITION
T = THE NUMBER OF TIMES THE CONTROLLER WILL ATTEMPT TO CONNECT TO A GROUND START TRUNK BEFORE STOPPING
DEFAUL I
PAGE
- 2.20
PAV
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988
SECTION
8350-345-013-NA
5. LINE. AND TRUNK- OPTIONS

5. 9. Ground Start Attempt Timer If you have a ground start trunk, you can specify ground start attempt time, which in most
cases should not have to be changed: REGISTER X07
DESCRIPTION
T = THE AMOUNT OF TIME IN SECs. CONTROLLER WILL ATTEMPT TO CONNECT TO A GROUND START TRUNK BEFORE STOPPING
DEFAULI
3
5. 10. Off-Hook Digit Refusal Time

You can specify the time between a user going off-hook and when the Controller will accept digits on a per trunk basis. The time can be set by: REGISTER X08
ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER
-
.
T T T T T = = = = =
DESCRIPTION
0 1 2 3 4 FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR
DEFAULT
T T T T T = = = = = 5 6 7 8 9 FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 SEC SEC SEC SEC SEC 3
1 FOR 2 FOR 3 FOR 4 FOR 5 FOR
1 + 08T 2 + 08T 3 + 08T 4 + 08T + OBT
NONE
.I .2 .3 .4
SEC SEC SEC SEC
ENTER
Note: In the PAV Controller, if X19T (see page 2.23) Off-Hook Progress Tone is set to a 1 or enabled, the progress tone will not occur until the X08T (see page 2.16) timer has expired or reached 700 ms. The off-hook progress tone is 200 ms in duration.
5. 11. User Dial Tone

You can specify the dial tone supplied, and what the caller will hear while the Controller is dialing as silent, or ticking by: REGISTER X09
DESCRIPTION
SILENT DAILOUT TICKING DIALOUT T = 0 NONE T = 1 INTERNAL* T.= 4 FROM C.O.
DEFAULT
T = 2 NONE
T = 3 INTERNAL* T = 6 FROM C.O. 4
*You should note that internal dial tone interacts with the X19 (see page 2.23) feature.
PAV
PAGE
- 2.21
SECTION
8350-345-013-NA
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988
5. LINE AND TRUNK OPTIONS 5. 12.

I
Interdigit
Time Out Subscriber
Side
( DEFAULS
= = = = = = 6 FOR 12 SEC 7 FOR 14 SEC 8 FOR 16 SEC 9 FOR 18 SEC * FOR 20 SEC # FOR 22 SEC
REGISTER Xl 1
I FOR 2 FOR 3 FOR 4 FOR 5 FOR
LINE LINE LINE LINE ALL 1 + flT 2 + 11T 3 + 11T 4 + 1lT + 1fT T T T T T T = = = = = =
DESCRIPTION
0 FOR NO TIMEOUT 1 FOR 2 SEC T 2 FOR 4 SEC T 3 FOR 6 SEC T 4 FOR 8 SEC T 5 FOR 10 SEC :
5, 13. Interdigit
REGISTER X12
ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTEk ENTER 1 FOR 2 FOR 3 FOR 4 FOR 5 FOR
Time Out On O+ Calls
I
1 + 12T 2 + %%T 3 += l2T 4 + f2T + 12T T T T T T T = = = = = = 0 1 2 3 4 5
DESCRIPTION
FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR NO TIMEOUT 2 SEC T 4 SEC T 6 SEC T 8 SEC T 10 SEC : = = = = = = 6 FOR 12 SEC 7 FOR 14 SEC 8 FOR 16 SEC 9 FOR 18 SEC * FOR 20 SEC # FOR 22 SEC
DEFAUL1
2
5. 14. Interdigit
REGISTER Xl3
ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER % FOR 2 FOR 3 FOR 4 FOR 5 FOR
LINE LINE LINE LiNE ALL
Time Out On Ol+ Calls

DESCRIPTION
1 + 13T 2 + 13T 3 + l3T 4 + l3T + 13T T T T T T T = = = = = = 0 1 2 3 4 5 FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR NO TIMEOUT 2 SEC T 4 SEC T 6 SEC T 8 SEC T 10 SEC ; = = = = = = 6 FOR 12 SEC 7 FOR 14 SEC 8 FOR 16 SEC 9 FOR 18 SEC * FOR 20 SEC # FOR 22 SEC
DEFAULT
5. 15. Rotary Interdigit

REGISTER Xl4
Pause On Calls On Outgoing

DESCRIPTION
T T T T = = = = 0 1 2 400 MS 500 MS 600 MS T = 4 2 T r T = 7 T = 8 800 MS ~O$o#
Dialing
DEFAUL J
4
700 hii
1.2 SEC
1.1 S&Z
PAGE
- 2.22
PAV
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988
SECTION
8356345-613-NA
5.
5. 16. Off-Hook Tone

You can specify whether, or not, a caller will receive an Off-Hook Tone. The tone is 200 mS in duration, and if enabled, will occur after the XOST timer (see page 2.21) has
expired, or reached 700 mS. Note: If the Off-Hook Tone is enabled and internal dialtone has been programmed, the Off-Hook Tone will be 300 mS long, followed by NO dialtone. The Off-Hook Tone is controlled on a per trunk basis by:
REGISTER X19
ENTER
DESCRIPTION
WHERE T IS: 0 FOR DISABLED 1 FOR ENABLED
I DEFAULl
I FOR 2 FOR 3 FOR 4 FOR

t7FOR
1 + 19T 2 + 19T 3 t 19T 4 + 19T + 49T
5. 17, Incoming Call Detection

You can specify the Controller s sensitivity to incoming ringing on a scale of 0 to 9 (where 0 is the most sensitive and 9 the least). If the setting is too sensitive you will receive false incoming calls. If the setting is not sensitive enough, you may miss incoming calls as the Controller will not detect them. It should not be necessary to change the default value for normal operation, but you can by:
REGISTER X20
ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER 1 F-OR 2 FOR 3 FOR 4 FOR 5 FOR
LINE LINE LINE LINE ALL 1 + 20T 2 + 20T 3 + 20T 4 + 20T + 20T I
DESCRIPTION
WHERE T IS ENTERED AS 0 THROUGH 9. WHERE 9 IS LEAST SENSITIVE AND 0 IS MOST SENSITIVE
DEFAULT
2
5. 18. Controller
Operation
0,n Off-Hook
When the Controller loads default data, it will not yet screen or route digits dialed by a user. You change this for each trunk by:
REGISTER X23
ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER I FOR 2 FOR 3 FOR 4 FOR S FOR
LINE LINE LINE LINE ALL 1 t 23T 2 t 23T 3 t 23T 4 t 23T t 23T
DESCRIPTION
T = 0 IMMEDIATELY DIAL DEFAULT ROUTE (HOT LINE OPERATION) SEE X24T (SEE PAGE 2.24) T = 8 WAIT FOR DIGITS AND SCREEN AND ACT ON THEIM AS PROGRAMMED T = 9 CUT THROUGH; ROUTING, ETC NO SCREENING,
1DEFAUL I
9
PAV
PAGE
- 2.23
SECTION
83@-345013-NA
ISSUE
2. AUGUST
1988
5. LINE AND TRUNK OPTIONS 5. 19.

Specify Default Route
You can specify a default route for a trunk (see also #8 Action Digit) by:
ENTER ENTER ENTER
2 FOR 3 FOR 4 FOR
LINE LINE LINE
2 + 24T 3 + 24T 4 + 24T
For the Route specified here to be in effect, X23 (see page 2.23) must be set to X230 or a #8 (Action Digit) must occur in the Primary Search Table (after the number dialed has been matched). This will cause the Controller to use a specific Route. If a Route O-3 has been selected (through programming) all calls will be routed on the Primary Route. If a Route 4-7 has been selected (through programming) all calls will be routed on the Alternate Route.
$
5. 20. Specify The Digit For Centrex Access

You can specify the digit to be used for outgoing centrex access. This usually occurs when the Controller is placed behind a Centrex or PBX unit and you are required to dial a digit - typically a 9 - to access the outside line. If the Controller detects a Centrex Access Digit. it will screen the remaining digits and process the call. If the Controller does not detect a Centrex Access Digit it will not screen and just dial. REGISTER X25
LINE LINE LINE LINE ALL 1 + 25T 2 + 25T 3 + 25T 4 =+25T + 25T
DESCRIPTION
WHERE T IS THE CENTREX DIGIT. IF X26T = X261 (BELOW) THEN ALL CENTREX CALLS ARE DIALED IMMEDIATELY INTRA
DEFAULT
.9
5. 21. Centrex Enable/Disable

You can enable or disable the Centrex by: REGISTER X26
DESCRIPTION
WHERE T IS: 0 FOR DISABLE 1 FOR ENABLE
DEFAULT
0
PAGE
- 2.24
PAV
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988
SECTION
8350-345-013-NA

5. 22. Time To Auto-Answer
You can specify the time the Controller waits before answering an incoming call after the detection of ringing by:
REGISTER X27
ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER AENTER I FOR 2 FOR 3 FOR 4 FOR 5 FOR
LINE LINE LINE LINE ALL 1 t 27T 2 t 27T 3 t 27T 4 t 27T t 27T T T T T T T = = = = = = 0 1 2 3 4 5
DESCRIPTION
FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR DISABLE 10 S 20 S 30 S 40 S 50 S T T T T : 6 FOR 7 FOR 8 FOR 9 FOR *FOR = # FOR = = = = 60 S 70 S 80 S 90 S 100 S 120 S
DEFAULT
0
5.
23. Wait For Security Code Timer
This parameter specifies the time in which a security code (603 Parameter see 7. 3. on page 2.33) must be entered on a trunk after the Controller auto-answers. If timeout occurs or an incorrect password is entered, the trunk will be locked as specified in the X29 parameter (next parameter discussed). The time to wait for password can be changed by:
REGISTER X28
LINE LINE LINE LINE ALL 1 t 28T 2 t 28T 3 t 28T 4 t 28T + 28T T T T T T T = = = = = = 0 1 2 3 4 5
DESCRIPTION
FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR DISABLE 10 S 20 S 30 S 40 S 50 S T T T T : 6 FOR 7 FOR 8 FOR 9 FOR *FOR I# FOR = = = = 60 S 70 S 80 S 90 S 100 S 120 S
DEFAULT
6
5. 24. Incorrect/Failed
Security Code Trunk Lockout Timer
Failure to enter the correct programming password during the time specified by the X28 parameter enables this timer. You can specify the time a trunk is locked out. If the timeout occurs, or an incorrect password is entered, the trunk will be locked out as specified, or until on the user side of the line goes off-hook. The time for password can be changed by:
REGISTER X29
LINE LINE LINE LINE ALL 1 t 29T 2 t 29T 3 t 29T 4 t 29T t 29T T T T T T = = = = = 1 2 3 4 5
DESCRIPTION
T = 0 FOR DISABLE FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR 10 20 30 -10 50 S S S S S T = T = T = T = T= T = 6 FOR 60 S 7 FOR 70 S 8 FOR 80 S 9 FOR 90 S *FORlOOS # FOR 120 S
DEFAUL I
9
PAV
PAGE
- 2.25
SECTION
8350-345013-NA
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988
5. LINE AND TRUNK OPTIONS 5.25.

I
Off-Hook
Recognition
I
Timer
DESCRIPTION
T IS: MS MS MS IMS 4= 80 MS = 100 MS 65=120MS 7 = 140 MS 8 = 160 MS 9 = 180 MS *=2OOMS # = 220 MS
REGISTER X30
I FOR LINE 1 + 3OT 2 FOR LINE 2 + 30T 3 FOR 4 FOR 5 FOR
LINE LINE ALL 3 + 30T 4 + 30T + 30T
DEFAUL I
3
WHERE 0=20 1 = 20 2 = 40 3 = 60
5. 26. Tip Ground
Application
Recognition
Timer
This command selects the time that a tip ground must be applied on a ground starttrunk, for that application to be recognized. If you are using a terminal you can substitute the letter A f6; the * and B for the #. REGISTER X31
ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER I FOR 2 FOR 3 FOR 4 FOR S FOR
LINE LINE LINE LINE ALL 1 i- 31T 2 + 31T 3 -I=3lT 4 + 3lT + 3lT T T T T T T = = = = = = 0 1 2 3 4 5
DESCRIFTXON
FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR 40 MS 40 MS 80 MS 120 MS 160 MS 200 MS T = 6 FOR 240 .T=7FOR280MS T = 8 FOR 320 T = 9 FOR 360 : I# *FOR 400 FOR 440 MS MS MS MS MS
DEFAULT
3
5. 2 7* Digit Recognition
R.EGISTER X32
LINE LINE LINE LINE ALL 1 -I- 32T 2 -+ 32T 3 + 32T 4 + 32T + 32T
On Outgoing
I
T T T T T T T = = = = = = = 0 1 2 3 5 6 7
Calls
1 DEFAULl
0
DESCRIPTION
FOR ALLOW DTMF, JO OR 20 PPS IGNORE ALL ROTARY IGNORE ALL DTMF IGNORE ALL DIGITS FOR GO TO REORDER ON ROTARY FOR GO TO REORDER ON DTMF FOR G.0 TO REORDER ANY DIGITS
PAGE
- 2.26
PAV
ISSUE
2. AUGUST
1988
SECTION
8350-345-013-NA

5. 28. Digit Recognition
REGISTER X33
LINti LINE LINE LINE ALL 1 + 33T 2 + 33T 3 + 33T 4 + 33T + 33T T T T T T T . T T = = = = = = = =
On Incoming
Calls
DEFAULT
0
DESCRIPTION
0 FOR ACCEPT DTMF, 10 OR 20 PPS 1 IGNORE ALL ROTARY 2 IGNORE ALL DTMF 3 IGNORE ALL DIGITS 5 FOR GO TO REORDER ON ROTARY 6 FOR GO TO REORDER ON DTMF 7 FOR GO TO REORDER ANY DIGITS 8 ALLOW DTMF OR 10 PPS ROTARY, IGNORE 20 PPS ROTARY T = A ALLOW 10 PPS ROTARY, IGNORE DTMF AND 20 PPS ROTARY T = D GO TO REORDER ON 10 PPS ROTARY, IGNORE 20 PPS ROTARY T = E GO TO REORDER.ON.DTMF, ALLOW 10 PPS ROTARY,..IGNORE 20 PPS ROTARY
Note: The A, D and E can only be programmed
from a terminal.
5. 29. Tip Ground
Removal
Timer
This command s&lects the time period for the tip ground removal detection. If you are using a terminal you can substitute the letter A for the * and B for the #.
REGISTER X34
ENTER ENTER ENTER.3 ENTER ENTER 1 FOR 2 FOR FOR 4 FOR 5 FOR
LINE LINE LINE LINE ALL 1 + 34T 2 -I; 34T 3 + 34T 4 + 34T + 34T
I
T T T T T T T T T = = = = = = = = = 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DESCRIF TION
FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR 100 100 180 260 340 -120 500 580 660 MS MS MS MS MS MS IMS MS MS T = T= T = T = T = T = T = 9 FOR 740 MS *FOR820MS # FOR 900 .MS C FOR 980 MS D FOR 1060 MS E FOR 1140 MS F FOR 1220 MS
1DEFAUL J
6
PAV
PAGE
- 2.27
-..
SECTION
8350-34-013-NA
ISSUE -. 2, AUGUST
1988

6. 1. General 6. 2. Primary Search Tables
Primary Search Tables consist of a three digit prefix always starting with an 8 as the first digit followed by two digits that indicate how long the digit string will be. The following digits soecifv the number for the Controller to monitor for. followed by an action digit tefiingthe aController what to do once the string has been detected. For example: 803 611#6## / ?I-ERMIN*TOR LAST DIGIT OF PHONE NUMBER HAS BEEN DL4LED MONITOR FOR 611 PRIMARY TABLE NUMBER IS 8 AND 03 MEANS EXPECT. THREE DIGITS 1 1
Primary Search Tables are used to provide call control (Toll. Control) and -routing information Digits dialed by a caller are screened from 1 to 15 digits, depending on the Primary Search Table you select. They can be subject to an action (as described in Figure 2.2 ). The Controller provides 30 Search Tables - 15 PRIMARY and 15 ALTERNATE. These Tables are numbered 801 - 815 for PRIMARY and 821 to 835 for ALTERNATE. If you require ALTERNATE Search Tables consult MANUAL 4.. There is a SUCH TABLE form in APPENDIX 2 that will help you to record the digits you enter in each Primary Search Table.
6. 3. Warning
V&en programming Search Tables, care should be taken to not affect calls that are dialed for emergency, e.g. 911 calls. After programming a Controller, check that the operation of emergency dialing has not been adversely affected.
6. 4. Digits In A Table
When selecting a Primary Search Table you must enter enough digits to fill the Search Template in the Primary Search Table you have selected. For example, if you select Primary Search Table 815, you must enter 15 digits to fill the Search Template. Consult the following table as to the number of digits you must enter in each Primary Search Table.
PAGE - 2.28
PAV
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988
SECTION
8350-345-013-NA

,,.,:-
PRIMARY SEARCH TABLE
YOU MUST ENTER THIS NUMBER PLUS AN ACTION DIGIT
OF DIGITS IN THE TABLI
THE CONTROLLER WILL EXPECT TO SCREEN THE NUMBER OF DIGITS THE TABLE SPECIFIES AND YOU MUST ENTER ENOUGH DIGITS TO FILL THE TABLE. FOR EXAMPLE: 803 MUST HAVE THREE DIGITS TO SCREEN. HENCE 803 WILL USUALLY BE USED TO SCREEN THREE DIGIT CODES LIKE CENTRAL OFFICE CODES AND AREA CODES.
The actual Figure 2.2 Templates.
Search Templates structure of the Primary Search Table is shown in This figure also includes the Action codes that are applicable to the Search
..-
PAV
PAGE
- 2.29
SECTION
835O-345013-NA
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988

Figure 2.2 Search Table Format and Action Codes
115 IS THE REGISTER NUMBER. WHERE THE 8 INDICATES A SEARCH TABLE TOLLOWING TWO DIGITS INDICATE THE NUMBER OF DIGITS TO BE SCREENED, :ASE THE CONTROLLER SCREENS 15 DIGITS.
IN THIS
$NN ARE DIGITS YOU WANT THE CONTROLLER TO MATCH TO WHICH WILL BE MATCHED AGAINST THE DIGITS J MAY BE ANY DIGIT 0 - 9 AND * COMPARE AGAINST A USER DIALED # XALED BYTHE SUBSCRIBER. N CAN ALSO BE: #O #I COMPARE AGAINST A USER DIALED 1 OR 0 #4 COMPARE AGAINST ANY USER DIALED DIGIT #9 COMPARE AGAINST ANY USER DIALED DIGIT i REPRESENTS THE ACTION DIGITS INSTRUCTING THE ACTION FURTHER INFORMATION >R ENOUGH DIGTS HAS OCCURED. f# INDICATES THE END OF THE ENTRY TO BE TAKEN SEE BELOW WHEN A MATCH
2 - 9
ACTION
CODE
DIGITS
FER ROUTE #1 PREFER ROUTE #2 PREFER ROUTE #3 FORCE FORCE FORCE FORCE SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT ROUTE #O ROUTE #I ROUTE #2 ROUTE #3 ROUTE #O ROUTE #l ROUTE #2 ROUTE #3
THE ROUTE SELECTED COULD BE CHANGED LATER IN THE DIALING SEQUENCE, AS MORE DIGITS ARE RECEIVED THESE CODES WILL FORCE THE CALL ONTO THE ROUTE SPECIFIED. ONCE A ROUTE IS FORCED, NO CHANGE OF ROUTES MAY OCCUR THESE WILL NOT DIAL OUT THE *SELECT* DIGITS AND WILL START THE COMPARISONS OVER AGAIN FROM THE FIRST DIGIT FOLLOWING THE SELECT DIGITS
ON
SPEED CALL - ACCESS 7NN ENTRY DIAL WHAT HAS BEEN ENTERED AND PROGRAMMING ABSORB WHAT CONTROLLER) SECURITY CODE HAS BEEN ENTERED
CUT THROUGH(N0
ROUTING)
AND
CUT THROUGH(BY-PASS
LAST DIGIT OF THE PHONE NUMBER HAS BEEN DIALED. FURTHER DIGITS DIALED ARE ACCOUNT CODES, UNLESS R54T = 1 IF ACCOUNT CODES ARE ENABLED; OTHERWISE FURTHER DIGITS ARE IGNORED. DIALING INFORMATION MUST HAVE BEEN SCREENED PRIOR TO ENCOUNTERING A SEARCH TABLE WITH THiS CODE TO PROVIDE A ROUTE ON WHICH TO DIAL DO.NOTHING(WAIT PREFER DEFAULT WHEN ENTERED (I.E. 803#00 * FOR MORE ROUTE DIGITS) IN X24T SPECIFIED
AS A PROGRAMMING ACTION THE ENTRY IS REMOVED #9) REMOVES THE PROGRAMMING CODE # 0 *
SUBSCRIBER SIDE ONLY, LIMITED ACCESS SPEED CALL PROGRAMMING CODE. THIS PERMITS A USER TO ENTER SPEED CALL NUMBERS IN THE 7NN08MM.. .MM## FORMAT., BY JUST DIALING THE NNMMM.. .MM DIGITS BY DIALING THE SPEED CALL LOCATION NUMBER AND THE NUMBERS
t Tk~e digit C can only be entered from would be considered as one digit.
a terminal.
The
# is used
as a shift
character
where
#O, #l,
#2,
etc.
PAGE
- 2.30
PAV
_. ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988
SECTION
8350-345Ql3-NA

6. 5. Default Data
The following outlines the default data that is loaded into each Primary a Search Template) and a brief explanation of each piece of data. Search Table (as

Note 1 Note 2 Note 3
Note 1: If the Note 2: If the Note 3: If the route
first digit dialed by the user is a 1 the Controller will do nothing. first digit dialed by the user is a * the Controller will do- nothing. first digit dialed by the user is not a 1 or * the Controller will prefer 0.

Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 Note 6
Note 1: Alternate end-user speed dial programming access code, used in a situation where the Controller is behind a device that will not pass ### (see Note 6). Note 2: If the digits dialed by the user are 911 the Controller will stop searching, dial 911 and cut-through. Note 3: A * + two more digits specify a speed call number to be dialed. Note 4: This specifies the Programming Access Security Code as # 0 * . Note 5: Specifies the PAV List Maintenance Access Security Code as # * *. Note 6: Specifies the end-user as speed dial programming access code ###.

Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5
Note Note Note Note Note
1: 2: 3: 4: 5:
Dial and Prefer to Prefer to Prefer to Alternate
cut-through after 1411. place 1555 calls on Route 0. place 1800 calls on Route 0. place 1NXX calls on Route 1. program access code (any digit plus #O*).
PAV
PAGE
- 2.31
SECTION
8350-345013-NA
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988

Note 1
Note 2 5 5 0 #4 #4 #9 #9 #9 #9 #9 #6
#4
#l
#9
Note 1: Place l+N(O or 1)X-555-XxXx (XXXX not in screen) calls on route 0. Note 2: Stop searching after receipt of NNX-XXXX (local call).

Note 1
#l
#4
#9
#9
#9
#9 #6
Note 1: Stop searching after receipt of (0 or 1) NNX-XXX% (long distance. inside the area code) D
6. 1%. Search Tables 810

Note 1
Note 1: Stop searching after receipt of N (0 or I) jc-XXX-XxXx the area code).
(long distance outside

Note 1
#l
#4
#l
#9
#9
#9
#9
#9
#9
#9
#9 #6
Note 1: Stop searching after receipt of 0 or 1 +N (0 or 1) X -XXX-XxXx outside the area code).
(long &stance
6. 13. Special Note

To enable OCC dialing, 621 (OCC access code), and 622 (authorization must be programmed. The 601 (area code) should be programmed. code) values
6. 14. Warning
When programming Dial Plan/Search Templates, care should be taken to not affect calls that are dialed for emergency, e.g. 911 calls. After programming a Controller, check that the operation of emergency dialing has not been adversely affected.
PAGE - 2.32
PAV
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988
SECTION
8350-345013-NA
7. COMMON OPTION DATA

Common Option Data refers to data that is common to all aspects of the Controller. Each entry must be terminated with a W .
7. 1. User Area Code

You can define the user area code and it can be output automatically for calls in that area code: 1 REGISTER 601 1 ENTER 601 xxx DESCRIPTION I I DEFAUL
ooo
THIS AREA CODE IS INSERTED INTO THE DIGITS BEING DIALED OUT WHENEVER THE DESTINATION NUMBER FORMAT (RSOT) CALLS FOR THE ADDITION OF THE AREA CODE FOR THAT SPECIFIED ROUTE.
7. 2. Machine Identifier
Every Controller may be assigned a unique ID. This is especially useful when using chaining or RS-232 multiplexer, as it keeps the machines identified in their CDR outputs (see also Al. 2 ). REGISTER 602 ENTER 602 xxx DESCRIPTION
THIS ID MUST BE ENTERED AS ASCII AND CAN T BE MORE THAN 15 CHARS., BUT ONLY THE FIRST THREE CHARS. APPEAR ON THE CDR. THIS MUST BE ENTERED IN ASCII HEX. SEE APPENDlX 1.
DEFAULT 43484E
KJv
Note: If you are using a PAV Controller (non-chaining)
the default will be 504156 (PAV).
7. 3. Auto-Answer
Security Code
You can enter a security code that must be dialed by an incoming caller to program the
Controller. The Controller will auto-answer the incoming call and the security code must be entered at that time (see 5. 22. , 5. 23. and 5. 24. on page 2.25). To enter a code: REGISTER 603 ENTER 603 xx DESCRIPTION
WHERE XX REPRESENTS THE DIGITS TO BE DIALED TO ENTER PROGRAIMMING MODE WHEN THE CONTROLER AUTO-ANSWERS. (MAXIMUM 33 DIGITS)
DEFAULT
#O *
7. 4. Terminal
Program
Security Code
You can and should enter a unique security code for terminal programming access to the Controller. This can be done by: REGISTER 604 EmR 604 XX
1 I
DESCRIPTION
WHERE XX REPRESENTS THE ASCII CODE EQUIVALENT ENTERED FROM A TERMINAL TO ENTER PROGRAMMING MODE. THIS CODE IMUST BE ENTERED IN ASCII HEX (MAXIMUM 15 CHARS.) SEE APPENDIX 1.
OD
ww
PAV
PAGE
- 2.33
SECTION
835th34-013-NA
ISSUE 2, AUGUST
1988
8. ROUTE PARAMETER PROGRAMMING

8. 1. General
Routing allows you to specify a route. A route will specify a common carrier (based on the digits dialed), for a call to be routed. Either a complete number, or a digit stream can be acted on. 8. 2. Primary And Alternate
Routes
Route numbering starts at 0 and ends at 7. In the REGISTERS that follow R = 1 through 8 for Routes 0 to 7 respectively. You can select either a Primary or Alternate Route for each trunk as outlined by the X24 parameter (see page 2.24).
8. 3. Primary And Alternate
Destination
Number Format
You can specify the number of digits and the format which willbe dialed out by the Controller when it executes the dialed destination number command in the 6R5 Access Control Sequence. This can be done for either PRIMARY, or ALTERNATE routes. by:
ENTER ENTER
4 FOR .5 FOR
ROUTE 3 + 50T ALL + 5QT
ROUTE 4 + 70T ENTER ENTER ENTER 2 FOR 4 FOR 5 FOR ROUTE 5 + 70T ROUTE 7 + 70T ALL + 70T
PAGE - 2.34
PAV
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988
SECTION
8350-345-013-NA
8.
ROUTE PARAMETER PROGRAMMING
8. 4. Route Progress Tones

You can specify tones to be supplied to a caller, that keep the caller informed as to the
progress of a call (being routed). The tones are 400 ms long with a 400 ms space of silence in between by default ( 015 see page 2.17 for information to change these tones to 100 ms long with a 100 ms space of silence in between). These tones are heard by the caller before the Controller cuts-through to the C.O.. This can be done for either PRIMARY, or ALTERNATE routes by:
REGISTER R51
PRIMARY WHERE
DESCRIPTION
T IS: 0 + 51T 1 + SlT 2 + 51T 3 + 51T
DEFAUL?
ROUTE ROUTE ROUTE ROUTE ALL
0 = NONE
1 = 2 = J JJ
+ 5lT
JJI JJJJ JJW=J JJJJJ$ JU=JJJ=J= 81 JJXJJJJ 3 4 5 6 = = = =
ROUTE 01s 0 11s 9 21s 9 31s 9
REGISTER R71
ALTERNATE WHERE ROUTE ROUTE ROUTE ROUTE ALL 4 + 71T 5 + 71T 6 + 7fT 7 + 71T 1 = 2 =
DESCRIPTION
T IS:
DEFAUL I
0
ENTER .ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER
.I FOR 2 FOR 3 FOR 4 FOR 5 FOR
O=NONE
J= &j=
3 = JIJ
4 = JJPJ 5 = JJJJJ. 6 = pd=Ja!-IJ
+ 71T
PAV
PAGE
- 2.35
SECTION
8350-345-013-NA
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988
8, ROUTE PARAMETER PROGRAMMING

8. 5. Number of Account Code Digits
You can specify the number of account code digits you expect the caller to dial before
accessing each route. This can be done for either PRIMARY, or ALTERNATE routes by:
REGISTER R52 PRIMARY
ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER 1 FOR 2 FOR 3 FOR 4 FOR 5 FOR ROUTE 0 + 52T ROUTE 1 + 52T ROUTE 2 + 52T ROUTE 3 + 52T ALL t 52T
DESCXIPTION
T = THE NUMBER OF ACCOUNT WHERE T = 1 TO 9 DIGITS,
DEFAUL I
REGISTER R72 ALTERNATE

ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER 1 FOR 2 FOR 3 FOR 4 FOR 5 FOR ROUTE 4 t Y2T ROUTE 5 + 72T ROUTE 6 + 72T ROUTE 7 + 72T
ALL + 72T
DESCRIPTION:-
DEFAULl
DIGITS, 4
T = THE NUMBER OF ACCOUNT WHERE T = 1 TO 9
8. 6. Account Code Entry Inter-Digit
Timer
You can specify the time within which you expect the caller to enter each digit of an account code when accessing each route. If this timer expires and R54/R74 is set for flexible Account Codes, the Account Code is then considered complete. If this timer expires and R54/R74 is set for fixed length Account Codes, and if the proper number of digits was not dialed for the Account Code, re-order tone is supplied to the user. This can be done for either PRIMARY, or A.LTEXNAm routes by:
ROUTE 0 + 53T ROUTE 1 + 53T ROUTE 2 t 53T ROUTE 3 t 53T ALL t 53T
T T T T T
= = = = =
1 2 3 4 5
FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR
2 S 4 S 6 S 8 S 10 S
= = = =
6 7 8 9
FOR FOR FOR FOR
12 14 16 18
S S S S
= # FOR 22 S
REGISTER ALTERNATE!
R73
ROUTE 4 t 73T ROUTE 5 t 73T ROUTE 6 t 73T ROUTE 7 t 73T ALL t Y3T
DESCRIPTION
FOR NO TIMEOUT FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR 2 S 4 S 6 S 8 S 10 S = 6 FOR 7 FOR = 8 FOR ;= 9 FOR = *FOR ;= # FOR ;= 12 S 14 S 16 S 18 S 20 S 22 S
DEFAUL I
PAGE
- 2.36
PAV
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988
SECTION
8350-345-013-NA

8. 7. Account Code Type
You can specify the type of account code you expect on each route. The following programming applies only if you set 011 to 0110 (see page 2.12). If a redial situation occurs
due to a failure (as set out in the Access Control Sequence), as defined on page 2.38. The action to be taken is defined by R58 (see page 2.38). This can be done for either PFUMARY, or ALTERNATE routes by:
A
REGISTER R74 ALTERNATE

0 + 54T 1 + 54T 2 + 54T 3 + 54T
DEFAULl
. 1
I FOR
2 FOR
0 + 74T 1 + 74T 2 + 74T 3 + 74T
3 FOR 4 FOR 5 FOR
ENTER
+ 54T
+ 74T
DESCRIPTION
INITIAL ACCOUNT CODE FOR CALL T=O FOR FLEXIBLE WAIT FOR TIMEOUT THEN CONTINUE NO ACCOUNT CODE WAIT FOR RE-ORDER NEW ACCOUNT CODE ON REDIAL T= 6.
T=l T=2
T=7 T=8
FIXED LENGTH, TIMEOUT THEN
T=3
FIXED LENGTH, WAIT FOR TIMEOUT THEN ENTER DUMMY ACCOUNT CODE FIXED LENGTH OF 10 + .
T=9
T=4
T=*
THE NUMBER OF DIGITS SPECIFIED BY R52/R72 FOR T = 2 AND 3 ABOVE. WAIT FOR TIiMEOUT THEN RE-ORDER T=5 FIXED LENGTH OF 10 + THE NUMBER OF DIGITS SPECIFIED BY R52/R72 FOR T = 2 AND 3 ABOVE. WAIT FOR TIMEOUT THEN ENTER DUMMY ACCOUNT CODE T=#
Note: Flexible account codes and dummy account codes are not supported when PAV is enabled.
PAV
PAGE
- 2.37
SECTION
8350-345-Of3-NA
8, ROUTE PARAMETER PROGRAMMING

8. 8. Action on Call Failure
You can specify the type you expect due to a call failure (as set out in the Access Control sequence, see 9. 3. )OThis can be done for either PRIMARY, or ALTEwG6Am routes by:
0 + 58T 1 + 58T 2 + 58T 3 + 58T
T = 1 T = 2 T = 3 T = 4 T = 5 T = 6 T = 7 T = 8 T = 9
FOR REDIAL FOR REDIAL FOR REDIAL FOR REORDER ;;;FDL;AME
ON ROUTE ON ROUTE ON ROUTE ROUTE
1 2 3 ONCE, THEN
+ 58T
REDIAL SAME -ROUTE THEN REORDER
TWICE,
REDFAL SAME ROUTETHREE TIMES, THEN REORDER REDIAL SAME ROUTE THEN ROUTE 0 REDIAL SAME ROUTE THEN ROUTE 0 AGAIN, TWICE,
ENTER ENTER ENTER SNTER
2 FOR 3 FOR 4 FOR 5 FOR
ROUTE ROUTE ROUTE ALL
1 =I-78T 2 + 78T 3 + 78T
T = 2 T = 3 T = 4 T = 5 T = 6 T = 7 8
FOR REDIAL FOR REDIAL FOR REORDER REDIAL SAME REORDER
ON ROUTE ON ROUTE ROUTE
2 3 ONCE, THEN
+ 78T
REDIAL SAME ROUTE THEN REORDER
TWICE,
REDIAL SAME ROUTE THREE TIMES, THEN REORDER REDIAL SAME ROUTE THEN ROUTE 0 ROUTE AGAIN, TWICE,
PAGE - 2.38
PAV
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988
SECTION
8350-345-013-NA
S...ROUTE PiiRAMETER PROGRAMMING

8. 9. Account Code Warning Tones
You
can specify warning tones to be supplied to a caller that start after the expiration of the R53 (timer) for PRIMARY Routes, or R73 (timer) for ALXERNATE Routes. The tones are 400 ms long with a 400 ms space of silence in between If the caller fails to enter a digit before the specified number of tones expires, the user will receive re-order tone (of 200 ms ON, 200 ms OFF), and will have to restart the call. This can be done by:
ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER P FOR 2 FOR 3 FOR 4 FOR 5 FOR
ROUTE ROUTE ROUTE ROUTE ALL 0 + 59T 1 + 59T 2 + 59T 3 + 59T
DESCRIPTION
WHERE 1 = 2 = ar JJ ,. T IS:
DEFAULTI
0
O=NONE
+ 59T
3 4 5 6
Jj=J U-H JXJJ JJ$JIJ JJJJJJJ : : J=JJaiXl=JJ
= = P =
REGISTER R79
ALTERNATE
ROUTE ROUTE ROUTE ROUTE ALL 0 + 79T 1 + 79T 2 + 79T 3 + 79T WHERE 1 = 2 =
DESCIiII TION
T IS:
DEFAULII
0
O=NONE
ai.i=J-
3 = JpJ
4 = JJ-JJ= 5 = J=HJJ6 = JrJJi-1
+ 79T
PAV
PAGE..-
2.39
SECTION
8350-345-013-NA
XSSUE 2. AUGUST
1988

8. 10. Account Code Confirmation And Reroute Tones YOUcan spesify a reroute or confirmation tone to be supplied to a caller after a successfully entered Account Code, or on a failed route/reroute sequence. The tones are 200 ms I duration. his can be done for PRIMARY routes by: DESCRIFTlON
ENTER ENTER ENTER
i ENTER
ROUTE ROUTE ROUTE
0 + 60T 1 + 60T 2 + 60T
WHERE T IS: 0 FOR ACCOUNT REROUTE TONE 1 FOR ACCOUNT REROUTE TONE
CODE OFF
OFF ASD ON AND
CODE TONE OFF
ENTER
ROUTE 3 -I- 60T ALL + 60T
2FORACCOUNTCODETONEOFFAND REROUTE TONE ON 3FORACCOUNT
REROUTETONE
CODETONEONAND ON
This can be done for ALTJZRNATE routes by: REGISTER R80

ALTERNATE
ENT+R ENTER2 ENTER3 ENTER ENTER 1 FOR FOR FOR 4 FOR 5 FOR
DESCRIPTION
4 5 6 7 + + + + 80T 8OT 80T 80T
WHERE T IS: 0 FOR ACCOUI\T CODE REROUTE TONE OFF 1 FOR ACCOUNT REROUTE TONE 2 FOR ACCOUNT REROUTE TONE 3 FOR ACCOUNT REROUTE TONE OFF AND ON AND OFF AND ON AND
ROUTE ROUTE ROUTE ROUTE ALL +
CODE TONE OFF CODE TONE ON CODE TONE ON
80T
PAGE - 2.40
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988
SECTION
8350-345-013-NA
9. CALL CONTROL DATA ENTRY

9. 1. General
Call Control Data defines such system wide information as the Controller s access number and authorization code. Information entered here provides site specific information and each entry must be terminated with a ##.
9. 2. Route Strings
The following TABLE explains the Route relationship to GRO, GRl, 6R2, 6R3, 6R4 and 6R.5. Note: if you program X24 (see page 2.24) to be: X240, X241, X242, X243 the trunk will access Primary Routes 0 - 3. If X24 is set to X244 or greater, the trunk will access Alternate Routes 4 - 7.
6R0, 6R1, 6R2, 6R3, 6R4, 6R5 PRIMARY ROUTES R = 1 WHEN USING ROUTE O(ROC) LOCAL R = 2 WHEN USING ROUTE l(VAC 1) LONG DISTANCE
R = 3 WHEN USING ROUTE 2(VAC 2) LONG DISTANCE R = 4 WHEN USING ROUTE 3(VAC 3) LONG DISTANCE
ALTERNATE ROUTES R = 5 WHEN USING ROUTE 4(ROC) LOCAL R = 6 WHEN USING ROUTE R = 7 WHEN USING ROUTE R = 8 WHEN USING ROUTE 5(VAC
1) LONG DISTANCE
6(VAC 2) LONG DISTANCE 7(VAC 3) LONG DISTANCE
VAC Value Added Carrier ROC Regional Operating Company
9. 3. Access Control Sequences (6R5)

Access Control Sequences instruct the Controller on how to access a particular carrier telephone network. Entries in this part control how the Controller will access the telephone network. Calls are routed here, after a match in the Search Tables. Each entry (6R5) can be any sequence of commands and there are a maximum of 33 characters per entry.
PAV
PAGE
- 2.41
SECTION
835O-343-013-NA
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988

DESCRIPTION
#O * #OO #Ol DIAL A * DIAL A # IF THE PREVIOUS COMMAND WAS A 2 (SEE 2 BELOW) A # WILL BE DIALED, UNLESS THE LAST DIGIT DIALED OUT WAS A # THEN NO ACTION WILL BE TAKEN WAIT DIAL DIAL DIAL FOR ACCOUNT THE THE THE CODE (IS NOT OUTPUT)
WHERE R EQUALS l-8 FOR ROUTES SEE Note 2
#02
DESTINATION NUMBER ROUTE OCC ACCESS NUMBER AUTHORIZATION CODE (6~2)
(6Rl)
DIAL .THE TRUNK NUMBER CUT THROUGH, DIALING FINISHED CHANGE TO DTMF DIAL-OUT
#2AB #3AB #4AB #5AB #6AB #7AB #8AB #DAB
PAUSE. CONTINUE AFTER PAUSE IF A=5. SEE Note 1 578-680 HZ DETECTOR SEE Note 1 440 HZ DETECTOR SEE Note 1 480 HZ RINGBACK DETECTOR SEE Note 1 400 HZ DETECTOR SEE Note 1 360-620 HZ ENERGY DETECTOR SEE Note 1 PRECISE DIAL TONE DETECTOR SEE Note 1 DTMF DETECTOR Note 1,4
t 6R5 DEFAULTS: 685 DEFAULTS: Note Note 1 Refer to Table
ENTRIES 615 & 655 TO #85327 #8533#62*427 on next page
and
625, 635. 645,
665,
675 AND
2 The 6R5 Access Control Sequences are called as a result of a dialed digit match within the Search Tables. At some point in the Search Tables, a route is usually chosen. That route will be one of Routes 0 through 7, which pass control to the appropriate 6R5 Access Control. 3 Can be used for PBX outgoing access 4 Can only be entered from a terminal code (e.g. 9)
Note Note
Example
#85327 is the default on Route 0 (615) this string translates to: Wait for a minimum of precise dial tone for up to 6 seconds #8 Is from the A and B dial tone timers (next page) where 5 is the A value - wait 53 for the minimum time for dial tone and 3 is the B value - 6 seconds 2 Dial destination number 7 Cut-through
PAGE - 2,42
PAV
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988
SECTION
8350-345-013-NA

9. 4. A and B Dial Tone Timers
The Controller expects a certain minimum duration of dial tone to occur within a specified time, before attempting to dial. This is specified by A and B timers as shown below.
-A VALUE, B VALUE,
LENGTH OF TIME DIAL TONE MUST EXIST
.-
TIME DIAL TONE MUST OCCUR IN.
If the duration of dial tone does not occur (or does not occur within the time specified in B) the Controller will redial if the A value is O-4, OR it can assume the dial tone is present, but can not be detected and will continue to dial out if the A value is 5-9.
A
A
0
1 MIN. 200 MS 4130 MS 1.0 SEC 2.55
CODES - MINIMUM
TONE DURATION
PER R58 OR R78 PER R58 OR R78 PER R58 OR R78 PER R58 OR R78 PER R58 OR R78
DIAL TONE DURATION

A
5 MIN. 200 MS JO0 MS 1.0 SEC 2.55
MINIMUM
MINIMUM
THEN THEN THEN THEN
TONE DURATION
CONTINUE CONTINUE CONTINUE CONTINUE CONTINUE TO DIALOUT TO DIALOU-I TO DIALOU-I TO DIALOUT TO DIALOIJT
REDIAL REDIAL REDIAL REDIAL
6
7
8 9
3
4
SEC REDIAL
SEC THEN
B
B
CODES - TIME DIAL TONE MUST BE DETECTED IN

B 5 SEARCH TIME 10 SECONDS
SEARCH TIME 0 SECONDS
0
1 2 3 4
2 4
6
SECONDS SECONDS
SECONDS
6
7 8
12 SECONDS
14 SECONDS 16 SECONDS 18 SECONDS
SECONDS
9
*
20 SECONDS
PAV
PAGE
- 2.43
SECTIBN
8350-345013-NA
ISSUE 2, AUGUST
1988

9. 5. Name Of Route
You can program a name for a route from a terminal that will appear on CDR records. This provides rapid identification of the carrier used as a word represents the name of the carrier. The default is 444444 for routes 0 and 4 (typically DDD on 610, 650) and 524F55544544 for routes 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 and 7 (ROUTED calls on value added carriers, 620, 630, 640, 660, 670, 680). The R (1 through 8) specifies the route number and all entries must be terminated with a ##.
REGISTER
6R0
DESCRIIYI ION
THIS IS THE NAME OF ROUTE IN THE CDR AND CAN NOT EXCEED 16 CHARS. (ONLY 6 WILL BE RPINTED) MUST BE ENTERED IN ASCII. SEE APPENDIX 1.
DEFAULT
444444 524F555 . ._. .
6R0
9. 6. Access Number For OCC Telephone Network

When programmed this access number will be output on calls routed as an OCC. connection requiring an access number to be dialed out before allowing access. The default value for all Routes is blank. This entry can be a maximum of 33 digits. This can be done by:
RJZGISTER 6Rl 6Rl
G d WHERE R IS THE
DESCRIPTION
ROUTE NUMBER
DEFAUL?
BLANK
9. 7. Authorization
Number
You can enter an authorization
number that can be output automatically, to access an OCC, or value added carrier. The default value for all Routes is blank. This entry can be a maximum of 33 digits. This can be done by:
REGISTER 6Ft2
,7_J $ 2/
6R2
WHERE R IS THE
DESCRIl?TION
ROUTE NUMBER
DEFAULT.
BLANK
PAGE - 2.44
PAV
ISSUE
2. AUGUST
1988
SECTION
8350-345-013-NA

9. 8. Dummy Account Code
You can program a Dummy Account Code that will act as an account code, if a complete Account Code is not dialed by the user. This entry can be a maximum of 33 digits. This
can be done by:

REGISTER 6R3 6R3
WHERE R IS THE
DESCRIPTION
ROUTE NUMBER
DEFAUL J
BLANK
9. 9. Centrex Number
You can program a number to be used as the Centrex Access Cbdk. This entry can be a
maximum of 33 digits. This can be done by:

REGISTER 6R4 t D&XIPTION
WHERE R IS THE ROUTE NUMBER
1 DEFAULT
PAV
PAGE
- 2.45
SECTION
8350-345-013-NA
ISSUE
2. AUGUST
1988
10. POSITIVE ACCOUNT CODE OPTIONS

10. 1. Description l%e SMART-l PAV Controller provides most of the functions of the regular Controller.
The PAV Controller does not allow the Alternate Search Tables to be used for screening destination numbers, as it is reserved for the Account Codes in the PAV list. In addition, the PAV Controller provides the ability to verify user dialed Account Codes. Other differences from the standard Controller are: The maximum Verifiable Tables 821 through 835. Account Code length is 15 digits as dictated by the Search
10. 2:Specifying
the Unit As A Controller
Or PAV
If you have not done so, you must specify the Controller as a PAV controller if
you wish to use it as a Positive Account Code Verifier. The programming in this part applies only if you set 011 to 0111. This can be done by:
REGISTER 011
ENTER 011 T
DESCRIPTION
T = 0 FOR REGULAR OPERATION CONTROLEER
DEFAULT
0
T = 1 FOR PAV CONTRT)I.T.ER
10. 3. Number Of Account Codes

The number of Account Codes that can be programmed, depends on the table selected. For example if you select: Table 823, you can program 3 digit Account Codes in the range 000 to 999 (equal to 1000 Account Codes) or, Table 827, you can program 7 digit Account Codes in the range 0000000 to 9999999 (equal to f,OOO,OOO Account Codes). Of course, the PAV does not have enough memory to program l,OOO,OOO or more Account Codes, but the PAV does have enough memory to satisfy most situations. The following table indicates the number of digits that must be entered in each Account Code table.
PAGE - 2.46
PAV
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988
SECTION
8350-345-013-NA

ACCOUNT CODE TABLE. 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 YOU MUST ENTER THIS NUMBER PLUS AN ACTION DIGIT OF DIGITS IN THE TABLE
THE CONTROLLER WILL EXPECT TO SCREEN THE NUMBER OF DIGITS THE TABLE SPECIFIES AND YOU MUST ENTER ENOUGH DIGITS TO FILL THE TABLE. FOR EXAMPLE: 823 MUST HAVE THREE DIGITS TO SCREEN.
10. 4. PAV List Maintenance
Code
When you configure the Controller as a PAV Controller an additional default entrv is enabled in the Primary Search Tables to the allow the use of the PAV List Maintenance Code. The PAV List Maintenance Code is always present (see page 2.31), but is not active unless you set 011 to 0111 (see page 2.46). This code is dialed by a user who maintains the Positive Account Code List. TABLE1
. I
TEMPLATE1
I
ACTION1
I #* I 1
DESCRIPTION DTMF CODE # ** IS THE PAV LIST MAINTENANC
803
#O **
10. 5. Action Digits

When you configure the Controller as a PAV Controller an additional Action Digit is added to the Primary Search Tables (Figure 2-2 ) to the allow the use of the PAVr List Maintenance Code. ACTION #* DIGIT DESCRIPTION ACTION CODE DIGIT FOR (PAVJ SEARCH MAINTENANCE TABLE
PAV
PAGE - 1.47
SECTION
8350-345013-NA
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988
10. POSITIVE ACCOUNT CODE .OPTIONS

10. 6. String Data
When you configure the Controller as a PAV Controller the following Action Digits are available for the Alternate Search Tables only. Each Account Code you enter must have an Action Digit associated with it.
1 AcTION 0 1 * #9 DIGIT1 DESCRIPTION
RETURN USER =-ORDER TONE. DENY CALL VALID ACCOUNT CODE. ALLOW CALL VALID ACCOUNT CODE. ALLOW CALL DELETE SPECIFIED ACCOUNT CODE
10. 7. Programming
Positive
Account
Codes
To program the Controller with the Positive Account Codes accomplish the following steps and write the information. in the Positive Account Code Form in APPENDIX 2: 1. Select the users that will have access to the Positive Account Code feature and write their names down under the Account User s Name. 2. Select unique Account Codes for each of the users and write them down beside the user s name under Account Code. 3. Select the action digit to be associated with the user s Account Code. Write down the Action Code beside the user s Account Code. 4. Use a DTh4F phone that can access the PAV Controller and go off-hook. 5. Dial the PAV Maintenance
Note: The
Access Code. The default Access Code is # L *.
procedure outlined in step 5 needs only be repeated once for each programming session It does not have to be repeated for each Account Code being entered into the PAV Controller s memory. 6. Start by entering the Account Code for the first user. Next the Action Code for the Account Code, and a terminating ##. For example if the the first Account Code is 386261 the dialing sequence would be: Dial # * * and a single J- will be heard. Dial 386261 * # # and J J will be heard.
l-r ~
Note: The single beep, indicates that you have successfully entered the Account Code Maintenance Mode, and the double beep indicates that the Account Code has successfully been entered.
7. Enter all of the Account Codes from the worksheet. Ensure that the double beep is returned each time an Account Code is entered.
PAGE - 2.48
PAV
ISSUE 2, AUGUST
1988
SECTION
8350-345-013-NA

Note: Once one line that is connected to the Controller connected to that particular Controller are programmed If there are multiple Controllers in an installation, each separately to use the Account Codes from all lines that has been programmed, all lines with these same Account Codes. Controller must be programmed are connected to the them.
.
8. After entering all the Account Codes from the worksheet, simply hang up the phone. This action terminates the programming session, and the Controller is now programmed with the Account Codes.
PAV
PAGE - 2.49
SECTION
8350-345-013-NA
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
$988
APPENDIX
Al. 1 GENERAL
- SYSTEM INFORMATION
This provides various information that you will find useful for extended use of your Controller.
Al. 2 Print Format You can change Call Detail Recording format as required:
l
The MITEL format was developed for PBX applications (and specifically MTTEL PBXs). Some fields are used for call transfers, attendants, etc., and are not supplied by the Controller. The SMART format is similar to the MOTEL format, however it has reduced the printing width to fit in 80 columns and the R field is in ASCII instead of numeric.
Al. 3 MITEL Format

MY/DD BB:BB CC:CC:CC II.11 DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD TSEERR AAAAAAAAAAAANNN
MM/DD is the month day BB:BB is the start time of the call . CC:CC:CC is the duration of the call 11161 is the indication of an incoming call D is the number that was dialed T occurs if the call was denied S occurs if the call was speed dialed, a space otherwise LL is the trunk number that was used RR is the route number that was used A is the Account Code that was entered when accessing another carrier
Al. 4 SMART Format

12345678901234567890123456789012345678Q012345~78901234567890123458789012345078901234507890 MM/DD
HH:YY
DH:DY:DS
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
TSEE
RRRRRRAAAAAAAAAAAA
NNN
MMIDD is the month day HH:MM is the start time of the call DH:DM:DS is the duration of the call as DH hours, DM minutes and DS seconds N is the number that was dialed T occurs if the call was denied S occurs if the call was speed dialed, a space otherwise LL is the trunk number that was used RR is the route number that was used (ASCll) A is the Account Code that was entered when accessing another carrier NNN is the system ID
PAGE
- 2.50
PAV
_.-
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988
SECTION
8350-345-013-NA
APPENDIX 1- SYSTEM INFORMATION

LEGAL CONTROLLER FROM TERMINAL
0 through 9 #, * 0 through 9 #, * A or a B or b BB or bb C or C D or d E or e F or f FF or ff Period Comma Hyphen LF CR Space
999 999
INPUTS INTERPRETATIOB
CONTROLLER
0 through 9
#, * * # ## C D E F it is within a string. SPACE if it is the last character of string. ## # # # # # # Exit PROGRAM MODE Exit PROGRAM MODE
I
X or x Go ON-HOOK
1
Exit PROGRAM MODE
PAV
PAGE
- 2.51
SECTION
8350-345013-NA
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988
APPENDIX l- SYSTEM INFORMATION

ASCII CODES
BS HT LF VT FF CR so SI DLE DC1 DC2 DC3 NAK DC4 SYN ETB .cAN %B ESC FS GS RS US
08 09 OA OB oc OD OE OF 10 11 12 13 iz 16 17 18 IA 19 1B 1c 1D 1E 1F
( ; =+ 9 i 0 1 2 3 2 4 7 8 : 9 <
= ;
28 29 2A 2B 2c 2D 2E 2F
30
H : LK M N 0 P RQ S T vu W :! f
1
48 49 4A : c :; 4F z: 52 53 z4 56 57 58 59 5A z z; 5F
h J k 1 m n
0
68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 70 71 72 73 ;z 76 77 78 79 7A ;Bc ;; 7F
31 32 33 35 34 36 37
!l r s u t
V W
> ?
38 39 3A 3B 3c 3D 3E 3F
y ?
I 1
:.
DEL
PAGE
- 2.52
PAV
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988
SECTION
8350-345-013-NA
APPENDIX 2 - SITE INFORMATION

For your convenience APPENDIX 2 consists of the following site forms:
CONTROLLERSITEFORM SEARCHTABLEFORM SPEEDCALLFORM
These forms are designed to help you document your customer s site information. When calling for technical assistance you should have these forms available to you. The information contained will aid the technical assistance personnel in resolving difficulties you may encounter.
PAV
PAGE - 2.53
SECTION
8350-345-013-NA
ISSUE
2. AUGUST
1988

CONTROLLER
CUSTOMER NAME:
REGISTER
000
SITE FORM
DATE
SEE PAGE 2.13 2.16 2.16 2.16 2.16 2.16 2.17 2.17 2.17 2.18 2.18 2.19 2.19 2.20 2.20 2.20 2.21 2.21 2.21 2.22 2.22 2.22 2.22 2.23 2.23 2.23 2.24 2.24 2.24 2.25 2.25 2.25 2.26 2.26 2.26 2.27 2.27 2.3-1 2.35 2.36 2.36 SITE lNF0
DEFAULT 1 0 0 4 2 0,l.t 1 9 0 2 4 1 6 1 5 3 3 3 4
DESCRIPTION Speed Call Numbers Reorder Tone Trunks Monitored For CDR RS-232 Baud Rate Nulls After A Carriage Return Print Out Incoming Calls Print Format Route to Monitor for CDR Route Progress Tone Length Type Of Central Office Rotary Dialing Rate DTMF Dialing Rate On-Hook Timing Flash Allowed/Time Time Between Release And Reseizure T = Number Of Ground Start Tries T = Ground Start Timeout In Seconds Off-Hook Digit Refusal Time User Dial Tone Inter-Digit Timeout On Subscriber Inter-Digit Timeout On 0+ Calls Inper-Digit Timeout On 01+ Calls Rotary Inter-Digit Pause Beep Options Ringing Sensitivity Side
001 005 006 007 008 009 010 015

X00
T T T .T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T
X01 X02 X03 X04 X.05 X06 X07 X08 .X09

Xl1 Xl2
T Xl3 T Xl4 T Xl9 T X20 T X23 X24 X25 X26 X2? X28 X29 X30 X31 X32 X33 X34 R50 R51 R52 R53 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T O,l,l,l 0 4 3 14 the default
Activation Of Controller Default Route Centrex Outgoing Digit Centrex Enable Code Auto-Answer Timer In Tens Of Sets Auto-Answer Wait-for-Security-Code Auto-Answer Lockout Timer Off-Hook Recognition Time Tip Ground Appiication Timer Subscriber Outgoing Digit Recognition Subscriber Incoming Digit Recognition Tip Ground Removal Timer Destination Number Format PAV Route Progress Tones Account Code sumber Of Digits Account Code Wait Timer In Seconds :10 the default is 0.
f In Generic
is 1. In Generic
PAGE
- 2.54
PXV
ISSUE 2, AUGUST
1988
SECTION
8350-345-013-NA

CONTRQLLER
REGISTER R54 T R58 T R59 T R60 T R70 T R71 T R72 T R73 T R74 T R78 T R79 T R80 T 601 602 603 604 610, 650 620-640, 6Rl 6R2 6R3 6R4 DEFAULT 1 496,696 0 0 O,l,l,l 0 4 3 1 4.6.6.6 0 0 000 43484E #o* OD 444444 660-680
524F55544S44
SITE FORM
SEE PAGE 2.37 2.38 2.39 2.40 2.34 2.35 2.36 2.36 2.37 2.38 2.39 2.40 2.33 2.33 2.33 2.33 2.44 2.44 2.44 2.44 2.45 2.45 SITE INFO
DESCRIPTION Account Code Type Action As A Result Of Call Failure Account Code Warning Tones Account Code Confirm/Reroute Tones Destination Number Format PAV Route Progress Tones Account Code Number Of Digits Account Code Wait Timer In Seconds Account Code Type Action As A Result Of Call Failure Account Code Warning Tones Account Code Confirm/Reroute Tones User Area Code Machine Identifier Auto-Answer Security Code Terminal Program Security Code Name Of Route Name Of Route Access Number Authorization Number Dummy Account Code Centrex Number
Blank Blank Blank 9
615 625 635 645 655 665 675 685

700-799
~$85327 #8533#62*427 #8533#62*427 #8533#62%427 #85327 #8533#62*427 #8533#62$427 #8533#62*427 Blank Blank 100 Speed Call 1000 Speed Call Search Tables 1#7*#7#90 119X9 11#6$#9#9#2#00~#4#O~~#~#O#O#o#C 1411#315550180001#4#9#91#9#001#4 1#4#1#95550#4#4#9#9#9#9#9#6 #1#4#4#9#9#9#9#9#6 #4#1#9#9#9#9#9#9#9#9#6 #1#4#1#9#9#9#9#9#9#9#9#6
2.41 2.41 2.41 2.41 2.41 2.41 2.41 2.41 2.13 2.13
7000-7999 801-815 801 803 804 807 808 810 811
2.31 2.31 2.31 2.32 2.31 2.32 2.31
PAV
PAGE - 2.55
SECTION
8350-345-013-NA
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988

SEARCH TABLE
THE
CALLER
TO DIAL
IN THIS
NUMBER. WHERE THE 8 INDICATES A SEARCH TABLE 115 Is THE REGISTER TOLLOWING TWO DIGITS INDICATE THE NUMBER OF DIGITS TO BE SCREENED, :ASE THE CONTROLLER SCREENS IS DIGITS.
JNN ARE DIGITS YOU WANT THE CONTROLLER To MATCH TO WHICH WILL BE MATCHED AGAINST THE DIGITS II MAY BE ANY DIGIT 0 - 9 AND * COMPARE AGAINST A USER DIALED # l&LED BY THE SUBSCRIBER. N CAN ALSO BE: #O COMPARE AGAINST A USER DIALED 1 OR 0 #I #4 COMPARE AGAINST ANY USER DIALED DIGIT #9 COMPARE AGAlNST ANY USER DIALED DIGIT L REPRESENTS THE ACTION DIGITS INSTRUCTING THE ACTION )R ENOUGH DIGTS HAS OCCURED. FURTHER INFORMATION f# INDICATES THE END OF THE ENTRY TO BE TAKEN WHEN SEE BELOW. A MATCH
2 - 9
RECEIVED FORCE FORCE FORCE FORCE SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT ROUTE ROUTE ROUTE ROUTE ROUTE ROUTE ROUTE ROUTE #O #l K! #3 #O #1 #2 #3 THESE CODES WILL FORCE THE CALL ONTO THE ROUTE SPECIFIED. ONCE A ROUTE IS FORCED, NO CHANGE OF ROUTES MAY OCCUR THESE WILL NOT DIAL OUT THE SELECT DIGITS AND WILL START THE COMPARISONS OVER AGAIN FROM THE FIRST DIGIT FOLLOWING THE SELECT DIGITS
SPEED CALL - ACCESS 7NN ENTRY DIAL WHAT HAS BEEN ENTERED AND CUT THROUGH(N0 PROGRAMMING ABSORB WHAT CONTROLLER) SECURITY CODE HAS BEEN ENTERED
ROUTING)
AND CUT THROUGH(BY-PASS
LAST DIGIT OF THE PHONE.NUMBER HAS BEEN DIALED. FURTHER DIGITS DIALED ARE ACCOUNT CODES, UNLESS R54T = 1 IF ACCOUNT CODES ARE ENABLED; OTHERWISE FURTHER DIGITS ARE IGNORED. DIALING INFORMATION MUST HAVE BEEN SCREENED PRIOR TO ENCOUNTERING A SEARCH TABLE WITH THIS CODE TO PROVIDE A ROUTE ON WHICH TO DIAL DO NOTHING(WAIT PREFER DEFAULT FOR MORE DIGITS) ROUTE SPECIFIED IN X24T
WHEN ENTERED AS A PROGRAMMING ACTION THE ENTRY IS REMOVED (I.E. 803#00 * #9) REMOVES THE PROGRAMMING CODE # 0 * R SIDE ONLY, LIMITED ACCESS SPEED CALL PROGRAMMING S PERMITS A USER TO ENTER SPEED CALL NUMBERS 1N THE ..MMw FORMAT., BY JUST DIALING THE NNMMM.. .MM DIALING THE SPEED CALL LOCATION NUMBER AND THE
: :
T lne aqgr L can only f3e enrerea rrom a termmal. would be considered as one digit. #* is the PAV 011 is set to 0111.
I he B IS used as a shift character where #O, #l, #2, etc. list maintance code, and is active only when parameter
PAGE - 2.56
PAV
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988
SECTION
8350-345-013-NA

SEARCH TABLE FORM
LOCATION NUMBER ACTION DIGITS
PAV
PAGE
- 2.57
SECTION
8350-345013-NA
ISSUE
2, AUGUST
1988

SPEED CALL Setting up a Speed Call Method 1
DEFINITION
FORMAT FOR UP TO 100 ENTRIES. NN IS THE SERVICE CODE TO BE DIALED BY THE SUBSCRIBER AND MM...MM IS THE NUMBER TO WHICH THE CODE IS TRANSLATED FORMAT FOR UP TO 1000 ENTRIES. NNN IS THE SERVICE CODE TO BE DIALED BY THE SUBSCRIBER AND MM...MM IS THE NUMBER TO WHICH THE CODE- IS TRANSLATED
REGISTER (FORMAT) FOR 100 SPEED CALLS 7NNlxMM...MM## OR 7NNDKMM. D MM * P. .PP## FOR 1000 SPEED CALLS 7NN-NDKMM...MM## OR 7NNNDKMM...MM* P..PP##
D is the key that selects the lines to access the call number
I
DIGIT
SELECTS TRUNK1 DIGIT
SELECTS TRUNK 1
MUST FROM
BE EI iTERED A TERMINAL
K specifies how routing will be accomplished 0 - 7 Force on Route 0 - 7 Use the screening table to determine
98
routing Dial immediate, no Route # (transparent)
PP is an Account Code and is se arated from the destination number by the aie . The gc and the Account 3 ode are optional. Enters the information into memory
Setting
STEP 1 2 3 4 5 6
up a Speed Call Method

DIAL
### 1
NNU O
MM... ##
DESCRIPTION IS THE USER SPEED CALL PROGRAMMING CODE IS THE LOCATION 00 THROUGH 99 OR 000 THROUGH 999 IS THE TELPHONE NUMBER TO BE DIALED ENTERS THE INFORMATION REPEAT STEPS 2 - 4 UNTIL ALL NUMBERS ARE ENTERED HANG UP TO EXIT. DO NOT DIAL 999
PAGE - 2.58
PAV
ISSUE 2, AUGUST
1988
SECTION
8350-345013-NA
APPENDIX
2 - SITE INFOR~MATION
SPEED CALL FORM
LOCATION
NUMBER
DESTINATION CODE
AND ACCOUNT
PAV
PAGE - 2.59
SECTION
835Q-34%013-NA
ISSUE
2. AUGUST
1988
APPENDIX
Programming
2 - SITE INFORMATION
POSITIVE ACCOUNT CODE Codes
Positive Account
To program the Controller with the Positive Account Codes accomplish the following steps and write the information in the Positive Account Code Form: 1. Select the users that will have access to the Positive Account Code feature and write their names down under the Account Users Name. 2. Select unique Account Codes for each of the users and write them down beside the users name under Account Code. 3. Select the action digit to be associated with the users Account Code. Write down the Action Code beside the users Account Code. 4. Use a DTMP phone that can access the PAV Controller and go off-hook. 5. Dial the PAV Maintenance Access Code. The default Access Code is # * *. 6. Start by entering the Account Code for the first user. Next the Action Code for the Account Code, and a terminating 6##9For example if the the first Account Code is 386261 the dialing sequence woulld be: Dial # * * and a single s will be heard. Dial 386261 * # # and JJ will be heard. 7. Enter any and all of the Account Codes from the worksheet in the same manner. Ensure that the double beep is returned each time an Account Code is entered. 8. After-entering. all the Account Codes from the worksheet, simply hang up the phone. This action terminates the programming session, and the Controller is now programmed with the Account Codes. Note: The procedure outlined in step 5 needs only be repeated once for each programming session It does not have to be repeated for each Account Code being entered into the PAV Controllers memory. Note: The single beep indicates that you have succ.essfully entered the Account Code Maintenance Mode, and the double beep indicates that the Account Code has successfully been entered. Note: Once one line that is connected to the Controller has been programmed, all lines connected to that particular Controller are programmed with these same Account Codes. If there are multiple Controllers in an installation, each Controller must be programmed separately to use the Account Codes from all lines that are connected to the them. Note: Each Account Code you enter must have an Action Digit associated with it. MXION DIGIT 0 1 * #9 DESCRIPTION RETURN USER RE-ORDER TONE. DENY CXLL VALID ACCOUNT CODE. ALLOW CALL VALID ACCOUNT CODE. -4LLOW CALL DELETE SPECIFIED .ACCOUNT CODE
PAGE
- 2.60
PXV
ISSUE 2, AUGUST
1988
SECTION
8350-345013-NA

POSITWE ACCOUNT CODE FORM
NUMBER OF DIGITS IN ACCOUNT CODE1 POSITn7E ACCOUNT CODE MAINTENANCE ACCESS CODE1
I DIGIT
ACCOUNT
USERS NAME
ACCOUNTCODE
ACTION
PAV
PAGE - 2.61
SECTION
8350-34%013-NA
ISSUE 2, AUGUST
1988
INDEX
A
A&B Dial Tone Timers, Account Account 2.43 Machine MITEL Code Type, 2.37 Coude Warning Tones, 2.39 Tones, 2.7 2.52 Number. 2.44
M
ID, 2.33 PRINT FORMAT, 2.50
Acknowledgement ASCII CODES, Authorization
N
Nulls After A Carriage Return, 2.16
@ Centrex, 2.24, 2.45 2 010 Program Security Code, 2.9 2.54, 2.55 2.23 Off-Hook
0
Tone, 2.23
CHAINING, Cloning, Controller 2.10
Changing Terminal CONTROLLER
P
PAV LIST, 2.47 Codes, 2.48 2.50 Positive Account PRINT FORMAT,
SITE FORM,
Operation
On Off-Hook,
D
Data Verification, Defining 2.10 Of Speed Calls, 2.13 the Number Dialing Rates, 2.18, 2.19 Digit Recognition, Dummy Account 2.26, 2.27 Code, 2.45
Primary And Alternate Routes Destination Number Format, 2.34 Route Progress Tones, 2.35 Primary Search Tables, 2.28 Print Format, Programming Programming 2.17 Calls, 2.16 Telephone, 2.9 2.7 With A DTMF Print Out Incoming
With A Terminal,
G
Ground Start, 2.20, 2.21
R
Re-Order Tone From The Controller, 2.16 Rotary Dialing, DTMF Trunk, 2.18 Route Name, 2.44 Dialing, Type Of
I
Interdigit Time Out, 2.22
Route Strings, 2.41 Route To Monitor For CDR. 2.17 RS-232 Baud Rate, 2.16 INPUTS, 2.5 1
e
LEGAL CONTROLLER Legal and Illegal Entries, 2.9
PAGE - 2.62
PAV
ISSUE 2, AUGUST
1988
SECTION
8350-345013-NA
INDEX
S
SEARCH TABLE RECORD, 2.57 Search Table Default Data, 2.31 . Search Table Format, 2.30 Security Code, 2.25, 2.33 Setting Up A Speed Call, 2.13, 2.15 SMART PRINT FORMAT, 2.50 SPEED CALL FORM, 2.59 SPEED CALL PROGRAMMING, 2.13 Special Functions, 2.10 Specifying PAV, 2.12
T
Tandem IMode, 2.10 Terminating A Varaible Length Entry, 2.7 Terminating A Variable Lenght l&-y. 2.9 -Tip Ground. 2.26,. 2.27
u
User Area Code, 2.33 User Dial Tone, 2.21
W
Wakeup The Controller, 2.6
PAV
PAGE - 2.63
ISSUE 1;.$tJNE 1988
SECTION
83$0-34&014-NA
I .
MANUAL3
:-. ;.j . .: :: ,y
SECTION
8350-345-014-NA
ISSUE
1, JUNE
1988
HEADING
..........................................................
.............
PAGE
3.2 3.2 3.3 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.8 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.10 3.11 3.12 3.13 3.14 3.14 3.15 3.15 3.15 3.17 3.17 3.17 3.17 3.17 3.19
1. INTRODUCTION ............................................ 1. 1. Chaining ............................................................... 2. 3. 3. 4. 5. 5. 6. 6. 6. 7. 8. SETTING UP A CHAIN .................................................... INSTALLATION OF A RECORDING UNIT .................................. 1. Flow Control ............................................................ CHAINING PARAMETERS AND COMMANDS ............................................................. TONES SUPPLIED BY THE CONTROLLER .......................................................... 1. Acknowledge DTMF Tones ................................................ CHAIN PROGRAMMING .................................................. 1. Entering Programming .................................................... 2. Exiting Programming ..................................................... PROGRAMMING AN INDIVIDUAL CONTROLLER ........................... REMOVING A CONTROLLER FROM A CHAIN .............................. A CONTROLLER FROM A CHAIN .............................. DATA VERIFICATlON ........................................
8. REMOVING 9. CHAINING
10. CDR AND CHAINING .................................................... 10. 1. Polling Scheme ........ . ................................................ 10. 2. CDR Buffering ......................................................... 10. 3. Suspending the CDR ................................................... : 10. 4. Enabling CDR .......................................................... 11. CHAINING CONDITIONS ..................... ............................. 11. 1. Parameter 013 ......................................................... 11. 2. Parameter 014 ......................................................... 11. 3. Chains ................................................................. 11. 4.Other Notes ........................................................... INDEX ..*........................... .......................................
PAGE - 3.1
ISSUE 1, JUNE
1988
SECTION
8350-345-014-NA
1. INTRODUCTION
1. 1. Chaining
feature allows multiple Controllers to be Chained through their RS-232 port via cabling supplied with each unit (Figure 3.1 ). This Chaining feature provi.destwo distinct features: 1. The units which are chained together via their RS-232 ports (cable supplied) may be addressed remotely or locally with DTMF instruments which can access any port on a Controller in a Chain. From that access point any combination of units within the set, may be programmed with DTMF signals. The recommended methods of accessmight be either a DTMF instrument itself, or a Tandem (see MANUAL 4) accessfrom a remote location. 2. With the addition of an optional cable, a printing device may be connected to the Chain. This allows the collection of call records from all units in the Chain, to be output to one printing device without the need for a data concentrator or multiplexer. The call detail records of the units within the chained set will be output one at a time to the printing device. Programming from this device through the printer Chaining cable is not supported. Figure 3.1 Setting up a Chain
This
OPTIONAL RS-232 CABLE FOR PRINTER OR RECORDING
CONNEaION Ri%%%G DEVICES OR OPTIONAL RS-232 CONNECTOR
JACK
PLUG
PAGE - 3.2
SECTION
83&3JWllJ-NA
ISSUE 1, JUNE 1988
2. SElTmG UP A CHAIN
I
El I
2. You s/zouLd have initialized each Controller (MANUAL 1).
1. In&l and power oil the Controllers up individually (maximum of ten), they must not be connecred to each other (see MANUAL 1).
3. At each Controller individually enter the programming accesscode (default # 0 * see Note 1) and turn the CDR off, by entering 0090. 4. Make sure that all the Controllers are programmed to the same Baud rate (maximum 1200 Baud when the Chaining Cable is attached). Leave the programming mode by either entering 999, or by going On-Hook. 5. Connecta DTMF telephone to a telephone port on a Controller that has not been programmed for an ID (013T).
El
0 I
I I
6. Enter the programming accesscode of # 0 * from the DTMF. telephone. 7. Specifyrhe Controller number by entering 013T where T is the Controller number (see Note 2). Go On-Hook. 8. Repem steps 5 through 7 for each remaining Controller except the Tail Controller.
I 9.
Poivet all the Controllers down.
10. Attach the Chaining Cab!e to each of the Controllers in the Chain per Figure 3.2 .
11. This step should only be done for the Tail Controller (which must be programmed last). Note: Do not do this until the Chaining cables are connected. Connect u DTMF telephone to a telephone port on the Taii Controller. Then power the unit up, and enter programming mode. Enrer 013T where T is the number of the Tail Conuoiler (largest number). Enter Ol4T where T is the number of Controllers in the Chain. T must be the same in both 013T and 014T.
12. To exit programming completely enter 999 or go on-hook.

OF A RE-
If you are using the Optional Printer Chaining Cable, see 3. INSTALLATION CORI XNG UNIT. i..
AGOODIDEA
As you install the Controilers in a Chain, it is a good idea to label each Controller and cable, with the labels provided, for programming identification. Note 1: You can not use a terminal to program in a Chain unlessyou arc in tandem mode (see MANUAL 4). Note 2: Before doing Chain programming on any of the Controllers in the Chain vou must assign each contrqller in the Chain a specific number. - !D (1 - P or * ). The first Controller is referred to as the Head and is numbered 1 and the remaining units are numbered and programmed sequentially (e.g. Controller 2, then 3, 4, etc.). The last unit is referred to as the Tail, and is programmed with the highest number in the Chain.
PACE - 3.3
XSSUE 1, JUNE
1988
SECTION
8350-34%014-NA
2. SETTING UP A CHAIN
Figure 3.2 Setting up a Chain
TAIL CALL CONTROLLER(4)
CONTROLLER(
PAGE - 3.4
-SECTION
8350-345-014-NA
ISSUE 1, JUNE
1988
3. INSTALLATION
OF A RECORDING UNIT
The recording device you use must meet the requirements and be installed as indicated in Figure 3.3 . Figure 3.3 Connecting a Terminal TERMINAL or Printer
SPECIFICATIONS
Parity = None = 8 with 1 stop bit Bit 8 Sense = Spat eration = Full D
RS-232 CONNECTOR
DIRECTION
You can not program the Controllers with a terminal unless you are using tandem mode.
PAGE - 3.5
ISSUE
I, JUNE
1988
SECTION
8350-345014-hA
3. INSTALLATION
3. 1. Flow Control
OF A RECORDING UNIT
While in the programming mode, to turn CDR on,-crater009X (See-Ttible on page 3.16). X-ON/X-OFF flow control from the receiving device connectedto the printer cable is not supported by the Controller. The Controller Chain may be programmed to temporarily suspend output by setting 014T in the-Tail Controller to a 0140.
PACE - 3.6
SECTION S350-31%014-NX
ISSUE 1. JUNE
1988
4. CHAINING PARAMETERS COMMANDS
AND
The following is a list of Chaining Commands and Parameters specific to Controllers in a Chain: Number of this Controller in.Chain (l-9, t = IO;- l=Head; O=not in Chain) 013 t 014 t Total number of Controllers in Chain (programmed in Taii Controller only; 1-9, t =IO, O=not Tail Controller). 950 Enter DTMF Chain Programming mode. Select Controller number n in Chain to accept DTMF Chain Programming. 944 II You can enter more than one 944n to seiect more than one Controller at a time.7 Select all Controllers in Chain to accept DTMF Chain Programming at the 945 same time.7 Deselect Controller number n in Chain from..accepting DTMF Chain Pro946 n gramming. t 947 Deselect all Controllers in Chain from acceptingDTMF Chain Programming? 952 n Select Controller number n in Chain for data verification, and deseiecrall others (multiple 952-ns may be used in successionwithout using 957)-t Exit Chain verification mode and remain in Chain programming mode. with 957 all Controllers selected.? 959 Exit DTMF Chain Programming mode, remaining in normal program mode in the unit you are connected to.7 t To use these commands you must be in Chain programming mode. The following commands(normally used in programming mode) do not work in the DTMF Chain Programming mode: 902 Normal data verify (use 952 n) 942 903 Initialize Controller to defaults 942 906 Clone 907 Normal exit verify (use 957) 942 908 Tandem accessof another Controller Note: You can use tandem mode on a remote Controller to call into ,a Controller in the Chain for programming and/or verification using a terminal. Note: The command 980, if entered in DTMF Chain programming mode, sets the time and date in all the Controllers even if you have not selected them all.
PACE - 3.7
ISSUE 1. JUNE
1988
SECTION
8350-315Old-N.1
5. TONES SUPPLIED BY THE CONTROLLER

5. 1. Acknowledge DTlMF Tones
While programming the Cdntroller inChain-mode you will receive>audibleindications as to correct, incorrect entries and programming timeouts. In general, after each entry, the Controller will respond with a double tone.
If You Hear E
A
single DTMP $ means the command you have entered has been recognized as legal(correct), i.e. you entered # 0 1.
For Example
Parameters: After the three digit parameter prefix has been dialed, the Controller will respond a single short tone. Strines: After the three digit string prefix has been dialed, the Controller will respond a single short tone. Search Tables: After the three digit search table prefix, the Controller will respond a short tone. You will hear E upon entering commands, 952, 946, and 944.
If You Hear EE
If you hear a double tone it means the entry you have made has been accepted. This occurs after a parameter has all the digits it needsto make it legal or you entered ## on a variable length parameter. For example: @If you enter 942 you will hear EE . Then enter 903 and you will hear EE . e If you enter 957 to exit Chain data verification mode you will still be in Chain programming modee In this case when you enter a valid parameter you will hear a P , and when valid data is entered for that parameter you will hear SE .
l You will hear EE at the end of a string, or a parameter that needs a single digit, 950, 947, or after 952 followed by a digit you wish to look at.
If You Hear $J
Four long DTMF arLLr means you have made an incorrect programming entry. Note: In the event of an illegal entry, wait for the tones to stop and then try again.
PAGE - 3.8
SECTION
8350-345-014-NA
ISSUE 1, JUNE
1988
6. CHAIN
6. 1. Entering Programming
PROGRAMMING
You must have given each Controller in the Chain an ID and entered the number of Controllers in the chain in the Tail Controller. By leaving the DTMF telephone connected to a telephone port on any one of the Controllers,,.you-can.program all Controllers simultaneously with the same information. It is not necessaryto use DTMP Chain Programming if a Chaining Cable is connected to a Controller; normal DTMF programming may still be done for that Controller as before, if desired. If command 950 is entered at a Controller during reeular oroeram mode, it (and the rest of the Chain) enters the DTMF Chain Programming mode. After the programming access code and the 950 command have been entered, programming may be done per normal except for the following: 0 While in the Chaining mode, the Controller does NOT give the one-minute warning as it does in normal programming mode; after two minutes of no activity, the Controller will exit programming. 0 Only one line, on one Controller, per Chain, may do DTMF Chain Programming at a time. Additional accessattempts will be refused. 0 Chaining operations can not be done any faster than 1200 baud. Dont change 006 (RS-232 Baud Rate) with the Chaining Cable attached, and make sure that all the Controllers are set to the same Baud rate when the Chaining Cable is attached. You can not change the baud rate or set the ID of a Controller while it is in a Chain.
6. 2. Exiting
Programming
To exit programming completely enter 999 or go on-hook. Enter 959, to exit Chain programming mode, but remain in normal programming mode for the Controller you are connectedto. Warning: If you are doing a remote accessyou must enter 999 before hanging up, or you will leave the trunk locked up until it times out.
PAGE - 3.9
ISSUE 1. JUNE
1988
SECTION
8350-34%014-NA
7. PROGRAMMING AN INDMDUAL CONTROLLER

To program an individual Controller while using Chaining, (you must make sure you address the correct Controller(s) you wish to program) you can: _ II I. C&nect Q DTMF telephoneto a telephone port on any Controller which is in the Chain and enter the programming accesscode followed by 950. This starts Chain Programming mode and selects all the Controllers in the Chain for programming. I] 1 2. If you want to program all the Controllers in the Chain with the same information, go to step 4. Otherwise, enter 947 which deselectsall Controllers in Chain. 1 3. Enter 944 n which selects a specific Controller where n is the unique ID (1 - 9 or dc for 10). This command may be repeated to select more than one Controller in the Chain for programming. 4. Enter the individual programming information for the Controller(s). 5. To exit programming completely enter 999 or ga on-hook. Enter 959, to exit Chain programming mode, but remain in normal programming mode for the Controller you are connected to.
I] 1-1
PAGE - 3.10
SECTION
8350-345-014-N.\
ISSUE 1, JUNE
1988
8. REMOVING A CONTROLLER CHAIN
FROM -A
Should the requirement occur, you can remove a Controiler from a Chain. The example in Figure 3.4 shows a four controller Chain for simplicity. However, there can be any number of Controllers in the Chain: (up to. IO) :andfanynumber may be removed. Essentially, the easiestmethod of removing a Controller is to remove it, put the Tail Controller in its place and reprogram to the removed ControllersID, then reprogram the last Controller in the Chain to be the new Tail Controller. The following steps outline this technique in greater detail. El 1. Connecta DTMF telephone to a telephone port on the Controller that has been selected for removal. Enter the programming accesscode. 2. Enter 0130 (this removes the Controller from the Chain).
3. Go on-hook.
4. Connecta DTMF tele hone to the Tail Controller and enter the programming access code. Enter 0140 P deselectsthis Controller as the Tail, turns off Chaining activity, and suspendsCDR output if it was enabled). Go on-hook. Power all Controllers down.
I I I I
5. Move the Tail Controller into the position indicated in Figure 3.4 ~ 6. Power up all Controllers. 7. Connecta DTMF telephone to a telephone port on the old Tail Controller. 8. Program 013T on the old Tail Controller to match its new position in the Chain. Go on-hook. Connecte DTMF telephone to a telephone port on the new Tail Controller. 9. Reprogram 014T on the new Tail Controller with the new total number of Con: trollers in the Chain. This turns on Chaining activity, and starts CDR output if it was enabled.
I I
10. To exit programming completely enter 999 or go on-hook. Enter 959, to exit Chain programming mode, but remain in normal programming mode for the Controller you are connected to.
Note: Any _. . CDR records _ _ which have not been output by a Controller are lost if that Controller is powered down.
PAGE - 3.11
ISSIJE 1, JUNE
1988
SECTION
8350-345014-NA
8, REMOVING A CONTROLLER FROM A CHAIN

Figure 3.4 Removing A Controller
CONTROLLE; TO BE TAKEN THIRD
From A Chain
OUT
CONTROLLER
TAIL
CONTROLLER
TAIL CONTROLLER IS REPROGRAMMED TO BE THE SECOND
Notes
Do?zt attach or detach the Chaining Cable from any of the Controllers unless Register 014T in the Tail Controller has been set to 0140. You should also turn off the CDR by setting Register 009T to 0090. To suspend CDR (for a short time) you can set 014T to
0140.
WARNING:
If you wish to discontinue, or take down a Chain, DO NOT attempt to use the sequence: # 0 * 950 013 0. The Controller will refuse this command if it is in Chain programming mode. The command to remove the Controller from the Chain, must be entered separately, for each Controller in the Chain.
PAGE - 3.12
SECTION
8350-345014-NA
ISSUE
1, JUNE
1988
9. CHAINING DATA VERIFICATION

There are three ways to verify the data in Controllers in a Chain: A. Use a DTMF telephone on the subscriber side of one line of one of the chained Controllers and a DTMF digit decoder/collector on the C.O. side of the same line; B. Call in to one of the chained Controllers from a remotely-located DTMF telephone which has a DT..!,d!glt, decoder/collector,connected.in parallel (remote programming); C. Use a terminal with another Controller in its Tandem mode to call in to one of the chained Controllers. Using any of these three methods, go into program mode on one of the chained Controlllers. [ ]] ]] I] ] 1. Enter the 950 command to enter the Chaining mode. 2. Enter 952 n, where n is the number of the Controller in the Chain which you desire to examine. 3. Enter the number of the parameter for which you wish to,verify the value. The value appears on the terminal (tandem mode). or DTMFdigit decoder/collector. 4. Continue entering parameter numbers until you have all your desired information. You may then verify another Controller by entering 952 n, where n is the number of the next Controller to be verified. 5. To leave the verification mode and remain in the Chaining mode, enter the command 957. Alternatively, the commands 959 or 999 may be used to exit from Chaining mode and from programming mode respectively, with the expected results.
I]
PAGE - 3.13
ISSUE 1, JUNE
1988
SECTION
8350-345014-NA i
10. CDR AND CHAINING

10. 1. Polling Scheme
In the Chain, the Tail Controller queries the other Controllers for their CDR status. The Controller with the most records sends its call records first, through the Chain, to the Tail Controller, which passesthem out to the printer cable. This process continues until each Controller has sent all availablerecords.. There is a set of printable and non-printable characters used to perform the polling scheme. These characters are also sent to the printer cable. Characters used were chosen with care to prevent interface problems with popular printers, SMDA equipment, and other call recording devices. A list of characters sent by the Controllers is listed below:
START OF BUFFER STATUS REPORT END OF BUFFER STATUS REPORT DUMP CDR COMMAND (START OF BINARY DUMP NR.. ELEMENT OF BINARY DUMP NUMBER *. ELEMENT OF BINARY DUMP NUMBER END OF BINARY DUMP NUMBER SEQUENCE STA.RT OF CDRDUMP ' END OF CDR DUMP DTMF CHAIN PROG. ENTRY CODE INTRODUCTION CHAR
1E 1C 7E. 01 00
7E 04
RS
FS
(note (note
(note
2) 2)
-\
SOH
1)
NUL
-
(note11
"A -e -. -D -P
10
EOT DLE
Notes: 1. This is a printing character, but it does not normally appear in a CDR record. 2. This character is not sent to the printer. Example 1 .A line in Controller 3 in a Chain goes on-hook.
<SOH><SOH><SOH -<NULxNUL><SOH><SOH> CRXLF><NULxNUL> [CDR data] CEO A I
ENQUIRY CHARACTERS
f
COMMAND TO DUMP CDR IN CONTROLLER 3 START-OF-CDRDUMP CHARACTER
T
CDR RECORD(S)
T
END-OF-CDRDUMP CHARACTER ENQUIRY CHARACTER
As a printout, the output from the above would be: -w. . a. (previous CDR record)...
01/27 09:49 00:02:34 1315393121 T3 ROUTED CHN
The - may be missing from a multiple-CDR output of consecutive records from one Controller.
PAGE - 3.14
SECTION
8350-345-014-NA
ISSUE 1, JUNE
1988
10. CDR AND CMNPNG

Example 2
Someoneenters DTMF Chain Programming Mode at Controller 5 in a Chain, programs 523 8 980 01270945 009 2 and then goes on-hook.
<DLE>!5i38$8~012709450092X T
ENQUIRY CHARACTERS
SOH><SOH>-YNUL><SOH><NUL><SOH>A I
; I
I
PROGRAMMING INFORMATION ENQUIRY CHARACTERS
COMMAND TO START-OF-CDRDUMP DUMP CDR IN CONTROLLER 5 CHARACTER
On paper, the output (t) from the above would be: . . . (previous CDR record)...... ..CHN!523898001270945Oo92x--;
05/22 08:37 00: 1:57 #0* T3 DDD CHN--: . . . (next CDR record I....
t The recording of your programming does not include carriage returns in its output. If your recording devicedoes not have an auto wrap function, you may lose some of the output beyond the right side of your page. However, the next call record will start in column 1 as normal; since each call record begins with a carriage return - line feed sequence.
10. 2. CDR Buffering

Sufficient RAM has been dedicated to the storage of the call records until they can be printed. If the buffer becomes full, newest records will not be stored. There is sufficient memory allocated to store at least 12 call records in each Controller.
10. 3. Suspending.
the CDR
The CDR can be temporarily suspendedby:

1. Entering the programming mode using a DTMP telephone connected to the Chain or
accessingthe Chain remotely through Tandem mode. 2. Selecting the Tail Controller. 3. Entering 0140.
Note: Collection of call records will continue in all Controllers which have call recording
enabled.
PAGE - 3.15
ISSUE
1, JUNE
1988
SECTION
8350-345-01
d-N.4
10. .CDW AND CHAINING

10. 4. Enabling CDR
You can change Call Detail Recording (CDR) format as required: 0 The MITEL format was developed for PBX applications (specificaiiy MITEL PBXs). Some fields are used..for call .transfers, ~attendants,eta, -and .are not supplied by the Controller. l The MART format is similar to*the MITEL format, however it has reduced the printing width to fit in 80 columns and the R field is in ASCII instead of numeric. For further information on the print format see APPENDIX 1 of MANUAL 2. The print format can be changed or disabled by:
REGISTER 009 DESCRIPTION
T 0 FOR T : 1 FOR T = 2 FOR T = 3.f OFF MITEL SMART PROVIDE A CARRIAGE RETURN LINE-FEED AT START OF RECORD
DEFAULT
ENTER 009T
I
T = 5 FOR T = 6 FOR T = 77 MITEL SMART PROVIDE A CARRIAGE RETURN LINE FEED AT START OF RECORD AND END
$ Note: Pleasego to your Manual 2 for an explanation of additional options for this parameter.
PAGE
- 3.16
SECTION
8350-345-014-NA
ISSUE
1, JUNE
1988
11. CHAINING CONDITIONS

Certain conditions and restrictions apply to Controllers and Chaining. This part outlines those restrictions under these headings:
Parameter 013 Parameter 014 Chains Other N&es
11. 1. Parameter
by 013T.
013
A Controller may be in one Chain only, and the Controller must have a unique ID as set
The Controller must be programmed such that 013T is the same as the number you labeled the RS-232 connector, on the Chaining Cable. The Head Controller is always Controller number 1 in a Chain. (013&l). If 013T is set to anythingotherthan 0130 the RS-232. port can not be used for terminal programming.
11. 2. Parameter
014
Parameter 014T is always set to 0140 on each Controller, except on the Tail Controller, where it is set to the same value as 013T.
11. 3. Chains
The number of Controllers in a Chain must be exactly equal to the number of Controller ports in the Chaining Cable you are using(i.e. if you leave any of the Controller ports in the Chaining Cable open, or do not have a unit programmed as a Head, or do not have sequential ID numbers, it wont work). Chains can not be hooked together. A Controller may be in one Chain only. No Controller in a Chain may be programmed locally-from any device other than a DTMF source. The maximum number of Controllers in a Chain is 10. The Controller in the Chain with the highest Controller number is always the Tail.
11. 4. Other Notes

When DTMF Chain Programming mode is first entered, all the Controllers are considered selectedfor the purpose of DTMF Chain Programming.
User speed call programming
and user PAV programming work around the Chain just as they do in a non-Chained Controller. If either is invoked, the software checks 013T to see if the Controller is in a Chain. If so, it automatically.sendsthe proper commands around the Chain. If not in a Chain, it doesnttry to send the commands out to the RS-232 port. When setting up a Chain, program the Tail Controller with its 013T and 014T LAST. When taking down a Chain, take the Tail Controller out of the Chain FIRST by programming its 014 to 0, 013 to 0, 009 to 0, then do the others, then take the cable off.
PAGE - 3.17
* ISSUE 1, JUNE 1988 SECTION 8350-345-014-NX
11. CHAINING
CONDITIONS
It is not necessaryto use DTMP Chain Programming if a Chaining Cable is connected to a Controller; normal DTMF programming may still be done for that Controller as before, if desired; only if command 950 is dialed will that Controller (and the rest of the Chain) enter the DTMF Chain Programming mode.
A printer is NOT necessaryto perform DTMF Chain Pro&ramming;;If a printer is at-
tached to the printer port of a Chaining Cable, DTMF Chain Programming activity will be shown on it. The baud rate on the RS-232 port is defaulted to 1200 (006-T = 0064). Make sure that the printer or terminal you use is set to the same baud rate as you have set in 006T, and make sure that all the Controllers are set to the same baud rate when the Chaining Cable is attached. You may use a terminal with a keyboard on the printer port of the Chaining Cable, but the keyboard will have no effect; this port is for a Receive Only device. After a Chain is set up, it will stay set up even if the power to the Controllers is lost. Any CDR which had accumulated but had not yet printed out before the power outage is lost. Any call activity during the power outage, of course, generates no call records.
PAGE
- 3.18
SECTION
8350-345-o
14-NA
ISSUE
1, JUNE
1988
INDEX
C
CDR AND CHAINING: CHAINING CI-iAINING, DATA 3.15 3.14 3:17, 3-18 .: 3.13 CONDITIONS,VERIFICATION.
CDR buffering.
F
FIGURE, 3.2
P
Parameter Parameter 013, 3.17 014, 3.17
S
SETTING Suspending UP A CHAIN, 3.3 CDR. See CDR buffering
PAGE - 3.19
MlTEL
ENGINEERING
PRACTICE .
SECTlON
MITL8350-047-l OO-lVA Issue 2, May 1985
COMMON
CARRIER ACCESk PIALER
AND CALL CONTROLLER GENERAL INFORMATION lh. !
. i
0 - Copyright of MITEL DATACOM INC.1985 TM Trademark of MITEL DATACOM INC. m w - Registered Trademarksof MITEL CORPORATION
, :t. z;
SECTION
MITL8350-047-IOO-NA
---
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
---
SECTION
MlTL8350-047-l OO-NA
NOTICE
TO U.S. CUSTOMERS
The information contained in this document is believed to be accurate in all respects but is not warranted by MITEL DATACOM INC. The information is subject to change without notice and should not be construed in any way as a commitment by MITEL DATACOM INC. or any of its affiliates or subsidiaries. MITEL DATACOM INC. and its affiliates and subsidiaries assume no responsibility for any errors or omissions in this document. Revisions of this document or new editions of it may be issued to incorporate such changes.
WARNING
The SMarT- lTM Common Carrier Access and Call Controller generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions manual, may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case the user, at his own expense, will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.
Page i
SECTION
MITL8350-047-l OO-NA
---
LEFT BLANK
---
._ i
.I
Page
ii
SECTION
MlTL8350-047-IOO-NA
NOTICE
TO CANADIAN
CUSTOMERS
WARNING
The Canadian Department of Communications label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety requirements. The Department does not guarantee that the equipment will operate to the users satisfaction. Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissable to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method oc connection. In some cases, the companys inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure, for their own protection, that the electrical ground connections to the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
CAUTION
Users should not attempt to make such connections appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician,
themselves, as required.
but should
contact
the
The Load Number (LN) assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load, to be connected to a telephone loop, that is used by the device to prevent overloading. The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load Numbers of all of the devices doesn not exceed 100. An alphabetic suffix is also specified in the Load Number and designates the appropriate ringing type (A or B), if applicable. For example, LN = 20 A designates a Load Number of 20 and an Atype ringer.
Page iii
SECTION
---
LEFT BLANK
---
Page iv
SECTION
IMPORTANT
NOTES
Please note that MITEL DATACOM INC. has set up a National Field Service number for technical and installation assistance located in Dallas, Texas. This number is [214] 386-9400 for U.S. customers only (outside of normal working hours, a telephone answering service has been established for your convenience at this same number). For Canadian customers, please contact your local MITEL Regional Office. The SMarT-lTM Dialer includes an on-board battery back-up system to loss of customer database. Besides protecting against loss of data during power outages, this battery back-up should also provide sufficient memory allow the Dialer to be programmed by the distributor and then transported tomers site for installation. This battery back-up, however, is not intended for periods and cannot be guaranteed to support memory for long periods of time. prevent the momentary retention to to the cuslong storage
As received from the factory, the Dialer battery is not guaranteed to have a full charge applied to it. In fact, the battery is likely to be only partially charged in view of the time in transit, and distributor storage time. No guarantee of any battery charge status can be made until the Dialer has been powered up for a period of time. A period of 24 hours is necessary to achieve a full charge on the battery. Upon removal from its shipping carton, the Dialer should be powere.d up for a period of time and then SCINITIALIZED to load the operating system and default database into memory. Initialization may only be performed with a DTMF telephone set and requires connection to a working telephone line or an acceptable substitute. Never rely on programming entered into a Dialer until it has been X INITIALIZED (see Page 10, para. 3.05). Note that there is a short tone burst heard in the earpiece of the phone upon initialization. This tone indicates a successful initialize sequence has occurred. Once initialized, the Dialer should seldom ever have to be initialized again. There is a 903 Load Default Data Command that will restore memory to the initialized state once a X INITIALIZE has been performed. Once initialized, the Dialer will also respond to input via the RS-232 Input.
REASONS
FOR ADDITIONAL
x INITIALIZE
OPERATIONS
Dialer
has just been removed upon release
from
storage
or shipping
carton. - check carefully. codes have been
No toneburst
of the x Key. Maybe have been deleted
the tone was missed accidentally
The program access codes changed and forgotten. The Dialer
or the access
has just been repaired. times. Investigate for reason!
Long storage
Loss of data retention.
Page v
SECTION
---
LEFT BLANK
---
Page vi
SECTION
COWIMON
CARRIER ACCESS
DIALER AND CALL CONTROLLER
CONTENTS ..................................... 1. INTRODUCTION .......................................... GENERAL OVERVIEW OF THIS MANUAL .......................... INTENDED AUDIENCE ................................ 2. GENERAL DESCRIPTION ............................... FEATURES ......................................... DEFINITION OF TERMS ............................... Trunk Side Dialer ................................. Store and Forward ................................ User Transparent ................................. ........................... Ground Start/Loop Start DTMF/Rotary Dial ................................. ........................... Power Failure Conditions Area Code/Office Code/Call Searching ................ Lines ............................................ ........................... Two (2) Models Available Adaptive Call Routing .............................. Call Recording/RS-232 Port ......................... ............................. Versatile Programming .......................................... Power Least Cost Routing ................................ Speed Call ...................................... Centrex Compatible ............................... 3.lNSTALLATlON ...................................... INTRODUCTION ..................................... UNPACKING ....................................... MOUNTING ........................................ CONNECTIONS ..................................... SIMPLIFIED PROGRAMMING .......................... Initializing the Dialer ............................. Action on Dialing ................................ Simplified OCC Programming ........................ 4.OPERATlON ....................................... INTRODUCTION .................................... GENERAL DESCRIPTION .............................
PAGE 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 10 10 10 11 13 13 13
Page vii
SECTION
CONTENTS ............................. DETAILED DESCRIPTION Options ........................................ ...................................... Searching ............................. TEMPLATE DESCRIPTION .............................. OTHER COMPARISONS ROUTES .......................................... SEARCH EXAMPLES ................................. ................... ADDITIONAL SEARCH INFORMATION ................................. ROUTE SELECTION SPEED CALLS ..................................... ................... NOT ON NETWORK (NON) CHECKING .................................... CALL RECORDS CENTREX OPERATION ............................... CALL RECORDING OPERATION ........................ ....................... Connecting a Storage Device CALL RECORD FORMAT .............................. MITEL Format ................................... ............................... SMarT-lTM Format EXAMPLES ...................................... ........................... WIRING CONSIDERATIONS 5. DETAILED PROGRAMMING ............................ INTRODUCTION .................................... PROGRAMMING METHOD 1 (Terminal or Computer) .............. PROGRAMMING METHOD 2 (DTMF PHONE) PROGRAMMING METHOD 3 (TANDEM MODE) ............. .................. PROGRAMMING METHOD 4 (CLONING) DETAILED PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS ............... METHOD 1 ........................................ VT-100 Compatible Terminal ....................... METHOD 2.. ...................................... Entering Programming Mode ....................... ENTERING DATA ................................... ..................................... Parameters Strings ........................................ EXAMPLE 1: ..................................... EXAMPLE 2: ..................................... ............................... Speed Call Entries Search Tables ................................... EXAMPLEl: ..................................... EXAMPLE 2: ..................................... EXAMPLE 3: ..................................... ................................ Special Functions ACKNOWLEDGE TONES .............................. ..................................... Parameters Strings ........................................ ................................... Search Tables METHOD 3 ........................................ Tandem Mode.. .................................
PAGE 13 13 14 14 16 16 17 18 19 22 22 23 23 23 24 25 26 28 30,31 31 33 33 33 33 33 33 34 34 34 36 37 37 38 48 48 48 51 52 52 52 52 56 57 57 57 57 58 58
.......
CI
Page viii
SECTION
MITL8350-047-I
00-NA
CONTENTS METHOD 4.. ...................................... Cloning ........................................ Procedure ......................................
PAGE 59 59 60
6. SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 HARDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 RS-232 PORT 65 ELECTRICAL/M&tklidd; : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 65 7. MAINTENANCE 67 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 8. ORDERING GENERAL INFORMATION ............................ ......................................... 69 69 71 71 A-I A-I B-I B-I B-I B-I B-I B-l B-2 B-2 C-I C-I C-5 D-I D-I PAGE CALL I 8 8 9 C-2 C-3
9. TROUBLESHOOTING GENERAL s........:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: APPENDIX A GLOSSARY ....................................... OF TERMS ..............................
APPENDIX B ....................................... FCC INTERCONNECTION REQUIREMENTS ............... General ....................................... CONNECTION LIMITATIONS ......................... NETWORK CHANGES ; ............. ................. MAINTENANCE LIMITATIONS ........................ TROUBLE CORRECTIONS ............................ DISCONNECTION .................................. APPENDIX C ....................................... DIAGRAMS AND ASCII TABLE LEGAL DIALER PROGRAMMING
........................ INPUT CHARACTERS
......
APPENDIX D ....................................... OVERALL INDEX .................................. FIGURES SMarT-ITM COMMON CARRIER ACCESS DIALER AND CONTROLLER .................................. 2: CONNECTOR PANEL ............................... 3: RS232 INTERFACE CONNECTOR (Viewed from outside Dialer) ....................................... 4: USOCRJBlX JACK AND CABLE ASSY. ................. CI : SMarT-ITM SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM ............... C2: SMarT-ITM SIMPLIFIED ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM ........ I:
Page
ix
SECTION
MITL8350-047-IOO-NA
TABLES 1: TEMPLATE DIGITS ............................... 2: ACTION DIGITS ................................. 3: ACCESS CONTROL SEQUENCE (ACS) CODES ........... 4a: DETECTOR/TIMEOUT (a) CODES .................... 4b: DETECTOR/TIMEOUT (b) CODES .................... 5: GENERAL PURPOSE STRINGS ....................... 6: MITEL CALL RECORD FORMAT FIELDS ................ 7: SMarT-1 TM CALL RECORD FORMAT FIELDS ............ 8: PARAMETERS ................................ 9: STRING DATA ENTRY .......................... 9a: DETECTOR/TIMEOUT (a) CODES .................... 9b: DETECTOR/TIMEOUT (b) CODES .................... 10: SPEED CALL ENTRIES ............................ 11: SEARCH TABLE ENTRIES ....................... 12: SPECIAL FUNCTIONS ............................. 13: SMarT-lTM HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS ........... 14: RS-232 PORT SPECIFICATIONS ..................... 15: ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS ........... 16: SMarT-1 TM ORDERING INFORMATION ................ 17: TROUBLESHOOTING CHART .................... Cl:ASCllCODES .................................. C2: LEGAL DIALER PROGRAMMING CHARACTERS .........
PAGE 15 15 20 21 21 22 27 29 39-47 49-50 50 50 51 53-54 57 63-64 65 65 69 71-74 C-4 C-5
.j
Page x
SECTION
MlTLB350-047-l OO-NA
1. INTRODUCTION GENERAL
This document contains all information that relates to the SMarT-lTM Common Carrier Access Dialer and Call Controller. This particular section (Section 1) is an overview of the contents of the document and outlines the intended audience.
1 .Ol
1.02 Dialer.
From this point forward, the SMarT-lTM Common Dialer and Call Controller will be referred to
Carrier Access in text as the
OVERVIEW
OF THIS
MANUAL
The manual consists of nine sections and four appendices. Sections one through four provide both general and detailed descriptions of the Dialer features and functions while section five provides detailed program data entry information. Sections six through nine provide engineering information and the appendices provide additional information that may be of general use to the reader.
1.04 MING
1.03
For an abbreviated installation and/or programming refer to the INSTALLATION AND ABBREVIATED GUIDE, P/N 8350-953-001 -NA.
description,
PROGRAM-
FIGURE
1: SMarT-lTM
COMMON
CARRIER
ACCESS
DIALER
AND
CALL CONTROLLER
Page
SECTION
INTENDED
AUDIENCE
1.05
This document is intended for use as a general reference document for the installer and user of the SMarT-lTM and SMarTlATM Common Carrier Access and Call Controller.
HISTORY
This is the second issue of the SMarT-lTM Common Carrier Access Dialer and Call Controller General Information Manual. It replaces all manuals previously issued (Issue 1, March 1985). The reason for re-issue was to bring the manual up to the requirements of the present software level (GlO R05 and later) of the Dialer.
I.06
Page 2
SECTION
2. GENERAL
DESCRIPTION FEATURES
2.01
::..: .__: :, ..
The SMarT-lTM Common Carrier ler is a self-contained electronic Compliance
Access Dialer and Call Controlunit that provides:
0 0 0 0
l 0 e
with FCC Parts 68 and 15 for the SMarT-lTM for the SMarT-lATM output to select features either locally, remotely, or limited Other Common unit unit
4 Line capacity 2 Line capacity Call recording Call searching Versatile
programming
Automatic placement Carrier (OCC) facilities Speed unless Several

l
of selected
calls through accessible
calling denied
of up to on a trunk
100 numbers, basis
by all users,
convenience
features:
0
l l
Useable with Centrex Lines Useable behind a PBX Can be configured as a hot line completely port separate for either call screening call recording
Full tenant split that allows patterns for two groups Computer (RS-232) or programming Non-volatile memory during No loss of Memory
OF TERMS
Input/Output
l l
Power
Failure
DEFINITION
The SMarT-lTM Dialer is a versatile unit, and as such, can appear to be complex to the user. It is hoped that, with the following explanations, it can be shown that the Dialer is indeed simple and versatile and that programming is quite simple. To further this concept, a glossary of terms and general information is included in the paragraphs below, that will familiarize the user with the terminology and ideas presented in this document. 2.03 For those who are interested in more complex uses of the Dialer, refer the last sections of this manual that detail complete programming instructions and tables of codes.
2.02
_..
Page
SECTION
Trunk 2.04
Side
Dialer the customers premises. any of the customers customers Trunks/Lines of the telephones within to their Other Common that they have access to
The SMarT-1 fM Dialer is installed on The unit may be connected between equipment and the Central Office. When the are connected to the SMarT-lTM Dialer, all that system may (if selected) have access Carrier (OCC)/Resellers Network, providing those Trunks/Lines. Store 2.05 and Forward
The SMarT-lTM Dialer can be preprogrammed with the OCC/Resellers access telephone number and the customers authorization code. This eliminates the dialing of extra digits by the customer. It also provides a securitv factor, since the authorization code can be used on a need to know basis. This information is stored while programming. When the customer places a long distance call, it is dialed as normally done for a Direct Distance Dialing (DDD) call. The SMarT-lTM Dialer forwards not only the long distance number desired, but all of the stored data to the OCC/Resellers system. User 2.06 Transparent
This term means that the user is unaware (hears nothing) of the Store and Forward process because the routing is completed with no pauses. However, there is an ending tone that the caller will hear. This tone means that the Dialer has completed its routing through the system (Central Office to OCC/Resellers Switch). Ground 2.07 Start/Loop Start that are available with either type. from
These are the two types of Trunks/Lines a CO. The SMarT-lTM Dialer will function Dial
DTMF/Rotary 2.08
These are the types of dialing that are available. tones to dial while the Rotary system uses pulses. lTM Dialer will operate with either type. Failure Conditions
DTMF uses The SMarTw
Power 2.09
In the event of a commercial power outage, the SMarT-lTM Dialer will assume a power down cut-through mode. In this state, the Dialer appears to the network as a metallic path from its tip and ring inputs to the tip and ring outputs. Even though the telephone system may not be operational, the Dialer will not interfere with any telephone operations that may be available (i.e., incoming calls). The battery back up feature inherent in the Dialer allows the customers
Page 4
SECTION
stored data to be retained. There the Dialer once power is restored. Area 2.10 Code/Office Code/Call
is no requirement
for reprogramming
Searching
The SMarT-lTM Dialer can be programmed to look up the Area Code (NPA) and Office Code (NXX) numbers and perform routing decisions (i.e., route through OCWReseller Switch, route DDD, or restrict) depending on the OCWResellers capabilities and the customers requests. Lines 2.11 There are four independent lines in the Dialer. They all share the same search tables. Results of the searching will select a route (in actuality, a routing method). The routing data (the four alternatives) is shared among the lines. Two 2.12 (2) Models Available
The SMarT-lTM Dialer services four independent telephone lines, while the SMarT-lATM services two lines. Both are compact and powerful systems that provide simplified access to the common carrier network. The calling side of the connection may be a telephone, key system line card, or a PBX trunk card. The called side of the connection may be a central office or a PBX line circuit. Operation may be completely transparent to the user. Adaptive 2.13 Call Routing
All calls are made over predetermined routes, with the required authorization codes and account codes being inserted automatically by the Dialer at the appropriate time. The Adaptive Call Routing (ACR) feature allows the SMarT-lTM and SMarT-lATM to automatically detect, remember and re-route all numbers not available on the OCC over the DDD Network. Call Recording/R%232 2.14 Port
The call recording output, via the computer (RS-232) port with programmable Baud rate, provides a complete record of numbers dialed and on-hook/off-hook times for all calls dialed on the lines served by the system. This information can be used by the Common Carrier or user for traffic studies, usage analysis, call costing, etc.. Programming
Versatile 2.15
The Dialer requires some programming before use. Four programming options are provided which allow the installer to choose the best method for the appropriate situation. Programming can be performed locally or remotely using a DTMF or butt-in station,
Page 5
SECTION
and is protected against unauthorized changes by a log-on access code. Programs can also be copied from one Dialer to another by simply interconnecting the systems. In addition, programming can be performed very quickly via the computer (RS-232) port, from selected lap or personal computers, using an available software package. Power 2.16 power Least 2.17 Power is supplied from system. Battery back-up failure. Cost Routing a small transformer prevents memory provided with the loss in the event of
This will allow alternate routing of long distance calls through various OCC facilities. Since toll calls placed through OCC networks are typically less expensive than DDD routes, choosing the most economical medium (i.e., DDD or whatever OCC) will enable the user to capitalize on OCC network rate benefits. Speed 2.18 Call
These are preprogrammed telephone numbers which allow the users to have the capability of simplified dialing. Up to 100 numbers can be stored in the Speed Call area and are accessible for all users. Speed dial telephone numbers are activated by dialing a three digit number. A limited program access code is provided to allow subscriber entry of speed dials. Centrex 2.19 Compatible
In this mode, the SMarT-I TM Dialer will recognize the outside line access code (e.g., digit 9) and will route all internal calls transparently. In addition, the Dialer can be programmed to recognize certain area codes, and direct calls to those areas over an alternate route. This also provides Least Cost Routing capability.
Page 6
SECTION
3. INSTALLATION INTRODUCTION
The word Installation as used in this section means the electrical and mechanical connection to the wires of the user and the associated Central Office along with simplified steps to place the unit into operation.
3.01 UNPACKING
3.02
The SMarT-lTM Dialer is packaged in a box along with the Power Supply and Mounting Bracket. Simply open the box and remove the contents while checking for damage. Check the contents against the packing list. If any items are missing or appear to be defective, notify the vendor for further instructions.
MOUNTING
The SMarT-lTM Dialer is housed in a compact plastic enclosure that measures 10.625 inches (26.99cm) X 7.625 inches (19.37cm) X 1.375 inches (3.49cm). The unit may be operated in any physical orientation, although wall-mount installation by use of the enclosed bracket is recommended. Simply mount the bracket to a surface with screws, and mount the Dialer housing to the bracket by matching the four holes on the rear of the case with the mounting pins of the bracket. Press into place.
CONNECTIONS
3.03
3.04
Seven connections are required for operation. These are made to the connectors located along one edge of the housing (refer to Figure 2). Make the connections as follows: 1) Earth Ground MUST be connected to the screw mount provided on the bottom connector strip. The unit will not function properly without this connection. Power is fed to the Dialer the accompanying Power Power Pack into the Dialer Cord into a source of 11OV via a three wire cord with jack from Pack. Simply plug the cord of the power jack. Plug the Power Pack AC at 60 Hz (normal AC wall outlet). standard RJ31X connectors are one end of the the Dialer. The Telco-supplied
2)
3)
Telephone signals are connected through four non-shorting jacks. Four cables with appropriate supplied with the Dialer for this purpose. Insert supplied cable into each of the four jacks on other end of this cable is to be connected to the jack. The last connector connection, configured
4)
which is optional, is an RS-232 female as DCE. Only the TxD (pin 3), the RxD
Page 7
SECTION
MITL8350-047-IOO-NA
..
FIGURE
2: CONNECTOR
PANEL
(pin 2), and the GND (pin 1) lines are used by the Dialer. Pins 4 through 6, 8 and 20 are shorted internally for the convenience of the user. This port is used for Programming Methods 1, 3, and 4 and also for Call Recording Output. If the latter is desired, simply connect a serial printer to this connector with an appropriate cable wired to the pinouts as specified above.
!JlJ I
SIGNAL
2 3 495 6,8,20 7
FRAME GND RxD (Signal In) TxD (Signal Out) TIED TOGETHER TIED TOGETHER GND
FIGURE
3: RS232
INTERFACE
CONNECTOR
(Viewed
from
outside
Dialer)
Page 8
JACK ON CARD INSIDE CASE
SHORTING
BAR
r------/I PIN 8 - SUB RING
PIN 1 SUB R \
In
PIN 4 CO R -I
5 4
-1 _
m m
PIN 5 CO T-
-l-
kl
ml
-----1 8 08El Al 4
1 PLUG, MECH. RJ31 JACK
PIN 8 SUB T
TO RJ31
BOX / / PCB EDGE BARS
NOTE:
BOX TO HAVE SHORTING ALSO, PER FCC
SECTION
Initializing
3.05
the Dialer
Before using the Dialer for the first time, it must be initialized by the procedure listed below. This provides the Dialer with simple operating instructions. This data default base can be later modified by the customer if required, by the use of one of the methods outlined in the Detailed Programming section that appears at the end of this manual or by the simplified OCC programming in the following paragraph. The simplified programming procedure is:
l
With the RJ31 Cable connected: Connect either a DTMF station or DTMF Butt-set unit to the subscriber Tip and Ring of Line 1 of the Dialer. For Butt-set units, the connections must be made external to the Dialer. If the Dialer is opened, the Warranty Seal will be broken, voiding the unit warranty. It is suggested that the Butt-set be connected at the Telco supplied connections. With from While the DTMF the Dialer. holding station or butt-set off-hook, the power. A disconnect power
1)
2) 3) 4) 5)
the % Key, reconnect
Continue to hold the * Key down for 10 seconds or more. tone should be audible in the earpiece of the handset.
When the x Key is released, the unit will acknowledge with a short tone burst that is audible in the earpiece of the handset. Default programming is now loaded and the Dialer is in the cut-through mode (no Dialer activity - digits are passed straight through the Dialer). Go back On-hook.
6) 3.06
The x23 parameter (see page 43) is used to wake up the Dialer. To wake up the Dialer, simply go off-hook. Enter the program mode by dialing #OX. After dialing #OX, a beep should be heard in the receiver. Then dial 523 (wait for beep). Dial 8 (wait for two (2) beeps), as follows: then go on hook. The SMarT-1 TM Dialer is now configured
0 l
All Trunks
are Loop Start. (or beep) is used to notify the user that the Dialer
A single tone is functioning. There
0 a
are no Speed Access
Call numbers. Code is #OX from a DTMF telephone.
The Security
Action
3.07
on Dialing
At this point, there are some default actions that will occur
Page 10
SECTION
MITL8350-047-IOO-MA
when a number is dialed. The paragraphs that action that will result when specific digits are changed later when more detailed programming paragraphs are structured by listing the dialed beginning, followed by a description of the action 3.08
follow describe the dialed. These may be is accomplished. The digits in bold at the taken by the Dialer.
1st Digit 0 and 2nd Digit 1: This indicates that the call is to an international destination, and, as such, the length or number of digits to be dialed is not known. After the last desired digit is dialed by the user, the Dialer will wait for six seconds before assuming that dialing has been completed. The Dialer will also assume that dialing is completed if a # is dialed. 3.09 1st Digit 0 or 1, 3rd Digit 0 or 1: This indicates that the call destination is within North America, only eleven digits will be dialed. The Dialer assumes that complete after the eleventh digit and does not wait for any further digits. 3.10 to the Dialer and, as such, the number is or recognize
1st Digit 0 or 1, 3rd Digit NOT 0 or 1: This indicates to the Dialer that the call is a local area long distance call, and, as such, only eight digits will be dialed. Once again, the Dialer assumes that the number is complete after the eighth digit and does not wait ,for more digits. 1st Digit NOT 0 or 1: This call is a local call and will be complete after the seventh dialed digit. The Dialer does not wait for more digits. 911 and 1411: If these digits are dialed, the Dialer will assume that the call is complete after these digits. It will complete the call on the DDD Network immediately. 3.13 All Other: The Dialer will wait for the timeout period of six seconds after the last digit is dialed before assuming that the number is complete. Simplified 3.14 OCC Programming version for immein paragraph 3.05 general use with been used before, be accomplished. 3.12 3.11
The programming that follows is a simplified diate change to the default data base loaded above. It allows the Dialer to be programmed for most OCWReseller systems. If the Dialer has never the steps outlined under paragraph 3.05 above must Then follow the steps listed below: 1)
By using the DTMF station or Butt-set connected to the subscriber side of any Dialer trunk, go off-hook and dial the Security Access Code, #OX. A short tone will be sent to the earpiece of the handset (after the x is dialed) that indicates access to programming mode. Programming parameter entries will be punctuated with acknowledge tones.
Page 11
SECTION
MITL8350-047-l OO-NA Dial 903. This string of dialed digits will cause the load Default data, thus deleting all previous non-default Dialer to data.
2) 3)
At this point, the default types of Trunk and Dialing are Loop Start and DTMF respectively. If other than these types are desired, select the appropriate dialing string: TRUNK/DIALING TYPE STRING 5000 5001 5002 5003
Loop Start, Rotary Dialing Ground Start, Rotary Dialing Loop Start, DTMF Dialing Ground Start, DTMF Dialing
(Default
Setting) This will change the
and dial the selected string on the station. trunwdialing data base to the desired type. 4)
Dial 5238. This will change the operating mode of the Dialer from the Cut-through mode to the Wait for digits mode. In other words, the Dialer will wait until digits are dialed before sending these digits to the CO rather than immediately passing the digits onto the CO Line. Dial 601 followed by the users three digit area code and then dial ##I. This will enter the users area code in the data base to be used when the OCC is automatically accessed. For example, if the users area code was 603, the string would be dialed as: 601603##
5)
6)
Dial 621 followed by the carriers access number carriers access number is the telephone number dialed by the user to access the OCC. For example, number is 257-7838, the entry will be: 6212577838##
and ##. The that must be if the access
7)
Dial 622 followed by the users authorization code for the carrier. This authorization code is the special code used by an OCC to identify, bill, and allow access to the OCC/Resellers services. For example, if the carrier authorization code for a particular user is 2219876, the string would be dialed as: 6222219876##
8)
To end the programming then hang-up (on-hook).
session,
simply
hang-up
or dial 999,
Note:
This completes the Simplified OCC Programming. For a more detailed description of the programming, refer to the appropriate sections at the rear of this document.
<
Page
12
SECTION
4. OPERATION INTRODUCTION
The descriptions below outline the SMarT-lTM Dialer. They do not include features that can be selected by programming.
4.01 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
typical operation of the all possible operations or
The SMarT-lTR Dialer controls the dialed access on four trunks simultaneously. The activities on the line are controlled by the information that the installer has entered during programming (see Section 5, page 33). Each of the trunks may be programmed to operate differently, or they may be programmed to be identical in operation. 4.03 Each trunk of the Dialer is connected in series with the Tip and Ring leads of a standard loop start or ground start, DTMF or rotary telephone line (refer to Figure 4 on Page 9). This line can be connected between:
0
4.02
A telephone A key system A PBX trunk A telephone
and a central
office,
or office, or or office,
0
l
line card and a central card and a central and a PBX line card.
0 4.04
In any mode except cut-through, the Dialer monitors the line for activity. When the user lifts the handset, the Dialer notes the beginning of an outgoing call. The detailed operation of the Dialer, at this point, depends on the information programmed into the Dialer by the installer. The following paragraphs describe how this programming is used.
DETAILED Options DESCRIPTION
4.05
There are several programmable options that may be used to originate a call. These include hot line (dial and cut-through automatically on Off-hook), OCC hot line, normal operation, or immediate reconnect to the line. In all cases except the latter, the Dialer will split the line (subscriber pair electrically separated from the Central Office (CO) pair) by use of a relay. Along with the above options, there are two possible Dial Tone options. These are: a) The Dialer will pass the CO generated Dial Tone back to the subscriber so that the normal CO tones are heard, or b) An internally generated Dial Tone is passed back to the subscriber. The internal Dial tone is a single tone that may be used in cases where the Central Office generates non-precise Dial tone.
4.06
Page
13
SECTION
Searching
The Dialer monitors for rotary or DTMF dialing on its subscriber side and compares any subscriber dialed digits against one of two data bases that may be programmed into the Dialer. This comparison is called searching. The data base in use is made up of 15 search tables. After comparison, the Dialer will decide on one of the following actions: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Call must go on DDD Network. Call must go on OCC Network. Call is preferred to go on OCC Network, on DDD Network. Call is denied. Dialer through is cut-through directly). (i.e., no dialer activity-digits pass but failing that, will go
4.07
,. *
The dialed sequence will access the speed in the SMarT-lTM Dialer, and, as a result, telephone number stored in that location.
call directory stored it will outpulse the
In the wait for digits mode, all dialed digits are processed through the search tables. The results of the comparison will be a trigger to perform one of the above actions. There are two sets of 15 tables in all and they can be used to compare against up to 15. dialed digits. For example, the first table (one digit table) is checked after the first dialed digit. If a match is found, the searching for the first digit stops. The second table (two digit table) is checked after the second digit, and so on, until a match is found with an action that terminates the comparisons.
Note:
4.08
The two sets of search tables mentioned above are known as the Primary and Alternate search tables. Each trunk in the Dialer may be programmed to use either the Primary or the Alternate search tables for examination of a dialed digit string. Primary search tables (the normal default setting) are assumed in remaining text. -r
Each entry in a search table consists of a group of digits (called for ease of reference, a template) that is compared to the dialed sequence along with an additional single digit (called the action). The action is a single digit that represents a specific action to be taken by the Dialer when dialing is completed. The action digits are collected, and, on completion of dialing, are performed according to the programming.
4.09 TEMPLATE DESCRIPTION
4.10
The template section of a table may consist or special digits as listed in Table 1 below.
of ordinary The single
digits digits
Page
14
SECTION
used for actions and their meanings are listed action digit must be used with each template. Note:
in Table
2 below.
One
MNEM. in the Table below means mnemonic and is used describe templates in the paragraphs that follow below. TABLE DIGIT o-9,* #O 1: TEMPLATE DIGITS
to
7 DESCRIPTION To be matched against the dialed sequence. Compare against #. MNEM. l/O n
X
the same
digit
in
DIGIT #l #4 #9
DESCRIPTION Compare Compare 9. Compare TABLE against against against 1 or 0. any digit from any digit. DIGITS
2 through
2: ACTION
DIGIT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 lll #l #2 #3 #4 #5 #6
DESCRIPTION PREFER ROUTE 0 (PRO) PREFER CALL TO GO ON ROUTE 1 PREFER CALL TO GO ON ROUTE 2 PREFER CALL TO GO ON ROUTE 3 FORCE CALL TO GO ON ROUTE 0 (FRO)? FORCE CALL TO GO ON ROUTE IT FORCE CALL TO GO ON ROUTE 2jy FORCE CALL TO GO ON ROUTE 3T SELECT CALL TO GO ON ROUTE 0 (SRO)ft SELECT CALL TO GO ON ROUTE l-F? SELECT CALL TO GO ON ROUTE 2Tt SELECT CALL TO GO ON ROUTE 3Tf DENY SPEED CALL DIAL ALL DIGITS THAT USER DIALED AND CUT THROUGH (NO ROUTING) SECURITY ACCESS CODE ABSORB WHAT HAS BEEN ENTERED AND CUT THROUGH (BYPASS) ALL DIGITS HAVE BEEN DIALED IN PHONE NUMBER. AN ACTION MUST BE ENCOUNTERED (e.g., ROUTE SELECTED) BEFORE THE #6 ACTION DO NOTHING PREFER DEFAULT ROUTE (x24) DELETE THIS TEMPLATE FROM SEARCHING TABLE LIMITED PROGRAM ACCESS CODE FOR SPEED CALL PROGRAMMING BY SUBSCRIBER
#7 #8 #9 #C
SECTION
Note:
T These will force the call onto the selected route if possible. If not possible, the call will not be completed. Redial and retry attempts will be directed to the same selected route. TT These will not dial out the select digits comparisons over again from the first digit. Dialer begins dialing search table actions and #9. and will start
out upon encountering any of the above with the exception of #I, #4 through #7,
OTHER 4.11
COMPARISONS
In addition to comparing the dialed digits to the search tables, three other comparisons are made. The first digit dialed is checked for a match against the Centrex Access digit. Every digit after the first dialed digit (prior to call completion) is checked to see if it is the restart character (i.e., the restart character allows the user to start dialing again to correct mistakes). Lastly, after the Dialer has finished dialing, any further digits dialed by the user are compared to the redial on Route #0 and redial on the same route digits. If a match occurs in this case, the call will be dropped and redialed while the telephone remains off-hook (i.e., the Dialer releases and re-seizes the line). 4.12 mode This allows extreme flexibility in the use of the Dialer. It also means that any mode of operation (other than the cut-through on initialization) requires some programming.
ROUTES The four routes (listed in Table 2) are called ROUTE #0 through ROUTE #3. These can be assigned either to the DDD Network or the OCC Network. Each route can be selected by programming the search tables accordingly, and each has its own access method. For example, to access the DDD Network, the user waits for the dial tone and then dials. To access the OCC Network, the user would perform the following steps: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 4.14 Wait for dial tone Dial the access code (OCC phone Wait for further dial tone code number (called party) a route and sequences number) 4.13
Dial the authorization Dial the destination
All of the above steps can easily be associated with dialed automatically by use of the access control (see 4.25).
Page
16
SECTION
SEARCH
EXAMPLES
4.15
The following paragraphs describe the typical uses of the search tables when combined with routing data. Not all possibilities are discussed since programming is very flexible. This example presumes that Route #O is used for the DDD Network and Route #1 is used for the OCC private carrier. The examples associated with these descriptions list the digit to be entered in the template, followed by the action and a description. Digit definition and mnemonic use in the examples is defined in Tables 1 and 2 above.
EXAMPLE TEMPLATE 1
X
4.16
1: 1+ CALLS
TO CARRIER DESCRIPTION
ACTION 5 (FRl)
Any call starting with digit 1 will be forced. onto Route #I. Dont care; any other first digit will force the call onto Route #O is selected over (say, due to an the same route. action used is
4 (FRO)
In the example above, FRl (Force on Route #I) PRl (Prefer Route #l) so that if the call fails OCC network problem), the call can only be retried on The retry is directed to another route only when the PRl.
EXAMPLE TEMPLATE 2: l+ CALLS ACTION TO CARRIER, 1+800
4.17
TO DDD
DESCRIPTION
1800
4 (FRO)
This is the fourth digit search table. All I+800 calls will go on the DDD Network. All other I+ calls will go on Route #l (OCC). After the fourth digit, any other call will go on the DDD.
1 xxx
5 (FRl)
xxxx
4 (FRO)
4.18
The Dialer makes a pass through the search tables after every digit. Once it finds an explicit match, it stops. Therefore, the entry 1 x x x stops the search before it arrives at the x x x x case. Notice that, in the example above, the Dialer holds off dialing until the fourth digit IN ALL CASES. To cause the Dialer to begin dialing after the first digit of a non l+ call, example 3 below would have to be programmed.
Page
17
SECTION
EXAMPLE TEMPLATE
3: BEGIN
DIALING
AFTER
1ST DIGIT
ACTION #7 (Nothing)
DESCRIPTION
1
X
First digit
point calls
search digit
table. table; this

l+ on non
4 (FRO)
Also in first
accessible only.
1800
4 (FRO)
5 (FRl)
Fourth DDD. All other #I.
digit
table;
put call on
1 xxx
I+ calls go to Route
If the Dialer is programmed to assume that a I+ call will go on Route #I, it will begin dialing immediately after the first 1. If the user, in fact, then dials 1+800, the Dialer will drop the call and use the Route #O access method (i.e., DDD) instead. This action is covered in Example 4 below.
4.19 EXAMPLE TEMPLATE 4: l+ CALLS ACTION 1 (PRl) TO CARRIER, 1+800 TO DDD
DESCRIPTION
First digit table; Assume Route #I, begin dialing (actually, begins accessing the OCC network). Not a long distance route over DDD. number,
4 (FRO) 4 (FRO)
1800
Fourth digit table; since this action indicates the DDD route, the call will be dropped and restarted on the DDD network.
4.20
The paragraphs above have covered PRn (prefer route) and FRn (force route). SRn (select route) is different in that the digits dialed to trigger the SRn are absorbed (not dialed out). The preferred method would be to have ~1 to select Route #0 and ~2 to select Route #I.
ADDITIONAL 4.21 SEARCH INFORMATION
A Speed Call trigger code also exists. All digits dialed up to the speed dial trigger are absorbed. The last one or two digits are used to select a speed call. For example, 1 Inn could be used to select from 100 speed call entries where the 11 is the trigger and is absorbed, while the nn is the number of the speed call in memory to be dialed (nn = 00 to 99). Sequences can also be denied.
Page
18
SECTION
The entry in Table 2 on page 15 for digit #6 called ALL DIGITS DIALED causes an action that tells the Dialer that the user has finished dialing the called party, is ready to dial the account code, etc. Before encountering the #6, a previous search table must have selected a route and thus activated an Access Control Sequence (ACS). 4.23 There are two exception actions. These are the cut-through and do nothing action digits. The cut-through does exactly as it says. Whatever dialing is taking place finishes. The line is then reconnected. Screening stops at the search table containing the cut-through action (#3) and no Access Control Sequence is used. This action will quite often result in incompleted calls as only a few digits may have been dialed. It is not recommended for general use. The dial and cut-through action will cause the SMarT-lTM to begin dialing, reproducing the user dialed digits until it catches up with the last entry dialed, and then cut through. This method will access the DDD Network in most applications and may be used instead of the Route #0 in the above examples. However, once a call has been made in this manner, it may not be redialed. The method is not recommended for Centrex applications, or applications that require redialing or DTMF to rotary conversions. 4.24 The do nothing action allows the building match to any digit. This action stops the until the next digit.
SELECTION
4.22
of templates that searching process
ROUTE
There are six groups of data that control the route selection (or define the access method). These consist of the destination, access, authorization, account, Centrex numbers, and the Access Control Sequence (ACS). These are defined as:
4.25
1)
2)
DESTINATION
NUMBER:
party
number
and is dialed
The destination number is the by the user (1 to 23 digits). of the
called OCC, is the and is
ACCESS
NUMBER:
and is dialed 3)
This is the telephone number by the SMarT-lTM unit (1 to 34 digits).
NUMBER: The authorization users special code for access to the Carrier dialed by the Dialer (1 to 34 digits). AUTHORIZATION ACCOUNT NUMBER:
number services
4)
identify digits). 5)
6) CENTREX
the calling
NUMBER:
The account number may be used to party and is also dialed by the user (1 to 23 The Centrex number is the sequence usuthe desired Centrex service (1 to 34 digits).
ally used to access
ACCESS CONTROL SEQUENCE (ACS): The ACS is a sequence of codes that instruct the Dialer on the details of accessing a particular route. These details include such items as what to dial first, when to wait for dial tone, etc.. The codes and their
Page
19
SECTION
meanings used in the construction below. This sequence may contain TABLE CODE I,0 #O* #OO #Ol #02 #2ab #3ab #4ab #5ab #6ab #7ab #8ab #gab #Dab 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ## Dial that digit. 3: ACCESS CONTROL
of an ACS are listed up to 34 characters. SEQUENCE (ACS)
in Table
CODES
DESCRIPTION
Dial a x. Dial a #. Dial a # if the last dial digit Wait for account code after (does pause Hz tone was not #. not dial account code).
Pause. Continue if a = 0. High tone
if a = 5. Fail to x58, x78 qetector).
(570-680 detector. tone
440 Hz tone
480 Hz ringback 400 Hz tone 350-620 Precise Wait
detector.
detector. detector. Hz detector. (NON) tone.
Hz energy dialtone/
for Not On Network
DTMF Detector Dial the destination Dial the access number.
number. code.
Dial the authorization Dial the account code.
Dial the Trunk number (l-4 on the SMarT-lTM 1 or 2 on the SMarT-lATM Dialer). Cut through. Change Reconnect line. Dialing completed.
Dialer,
to DTMF signaling. access code (may be different for
Dial the Centrex each Route). End (used while
programming).
Page 20
SECTION
MITL8350-047-IOO-NA
TABLE a 0 MIN. TONE
4a: DETECTOR/TIMEOUT
DURATION a
(a) CODES MIN. TONE DURATION
1 2 3 4
MIN. 200ms 400ms 1.0 2.55
Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail
to to to to to
x58 x58 x58 x58 x58
or or or or or
x78 x78 x78 x78 x78
5 6 7 8 9
MIN. 200ms 400ms 1.0 2.55
then then then then then
continue continue continue continue continue
TABLE b 0 TIMEOUT/TONE
4b: DETECTOR/TIMEOUT NOT RCVD. b
(b) CODES NOT RCVD.
TIMEOUT/TONE
1 2 3 4 5 4.26 1) 2) 3)
0 Seconds 2 Seconds 4 Seconds 6 Seconds 8 Seconds 10 Seconds For example, the standard
6 7 8 9 *
12 14 16 18 20
Seconds Seconds Seconds Seconds Seconds
procedure
for accessing
the DDD is:
Wait for dial tone Dial the destination number Wait for call connection, then talk by programming to: the ACS with #80327. This of precise dial tone for up to 6
This can be accomplished group of digits translates 1) 2) 3)
#803 Wait for minimum duration seconds 2 Dial destination number 7 Cut through
Since the dialer starts in the split condition, the cut through code must be entered to restore the connection so that talking can occur. An example for access gramming as outlined translate to: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) #803 Wait for minimum seconds 4.27 to a typical carrier may require proby the digits #8033#625427. These duration of precise dial tone for up to 6
3 Dial access number #625 Wait for 400 ms of tone from 4 Dial the authorization code 2 Dial the destination 7 Cut through number
OCC for up to 10 seconds
Page 21
SECTION
MITL8350-047-1
OO-NA
The arrangement above allows for all sorts of combinations. In order to appreciate the range of possibilities, the five strings that can be dialed are named to coincide with typical applications. These names are really general purpose and have the properties as outlined in Table 5 below.
TABLE STRING 5: GENERAL PURPOSE STRINGS/NUMBERS PROPERTY
DESTINATION ACCOUNT ACCESS AUTHORIZATION CENTREX

4.28
First digits dialed by the user; passed through the search tables. Second item dialed by the user; can be substituted; can hold up dialing. Entered Entered Entered at programming at programming at programming time. time. time.
It is evident that these strings can be assembled in any order in the ACS. They do not have to function in the manner that their titles suggest. For instance, a private carrier network requires an authorization code of 1234~~x5678, where the xxx is a code entered by the user to identify the account. 1234 could be assigned to the authorization string, 5678 to the Centrex string, and the route programmed to accept a three digit fixed length account code. Then part of the ACS would be programmed with 459 that translates to Dial authorization, dial account, and dial Centrex.
SPEED CALLS
4.29
The speed call entries have two associated parameters. These are the key and the route override. The key is a single digit that can selectively block dialing to any line. Note that all lines share the same speed call directory, and that any lines can be blocked from dialing any speed call number. The route override can force the call onto any of the four routes, or process the call through the search tables, or force the call to go out without any route selection (transparent).
NOT ON NETWORK (NON) CHECKING
4.30
Some networks return specific tones if the number requested is Not on Network. The ACS has a programmable parameter that, if set, will make the Dialer wait for the programmed number of seconds, and, if a tone is detected, the call will be dropped. The destination number will then be dialed using the Route #0 access method. In addition, the destination string is automatically entered in the search tables as FRO (Force Route 0), along with an expiry date tag. The date tag can be from 0 to 90 days in increments of ten days. Once
Page 22
SECTION
entered, all entries in the search tables that have expiry tags are decremented at midnight. Those tags that return to zero on decrement are cancelled. This means that, after the programmed number of days, the search tables would return to their original state. There is no parameter in the programming that controls DTMF to pulse conversion. if the Central Office type is programmed as rotary dialing, then any route access will start the call with rotary dialing. The ACS can have a change to DTMF code that will instruct the Dialer that the signalling to the private carrier is to be performed in DTMF. Calls that have been cut-through or dial and cut-through due to a searching action will not perform DTMF to pulse conversion. 4.31
4.32
Paragraphs 4.30 and 4.31 illustrate why Route mended for use in accessing the DDD Network.
#0
is recom-
CALL RECORDS Every time a call is terminated, the Dialer will output a call record to the Computer (RS-232) port. This output consists of a string of ASCII characters that describe the call. The format for the output is fixed so that the port can be connected to either a printer or to an external processor. The latter can use the data to generate statistics or call costing data. The printout can label the routes that are selected by using the appropriate programming. CENTREX OPERATION
4.33
If the Centrex access digit is programmed, the Dialer will redognize the outside line access code, routing all internal calls transparently. Note that all of the ACSs should be programmed to include the dial the Centrex code. Each route has a separate Centrex string that would allow one to access WATS or FX groups, instead of regular trunks. CALL RECORDING 4.35 OPERATION
4.34
The SMarT-lTM Common Carrier Access Dialer and Call Controller can easily be programmed to send a printable call record to a variety of electronic storage devices. The call record indicates the originator of the call, the call duration, the dialed numbers, and other data.
THIS CALL RECORD SHOULD NOT BE CONSIDERED A
PERFECT RECORD OF THE CALL, NOR SHOULD IT BE CONSIDERED AS A LEGAL ENTITY. THERE ARE MANY CASES IN WHICH THE CALL RECORD PRODUCED BY THE SMarT-1 TM DIALER MAY DIFFER FROM THAT PRODUCED BY THE OCC.
Page
23
SECTION
Connecting 4.36
a Storage
Device
TERMINAL: Almost any CRT or paper-based (e.g., Silent 7OOT or Brother+/+) terminal may be connected to the SMarT-lTM unit. Using a terminal as a storage device also has the extra advantage in that the terminal keyboard may be used to program the Dialer (refer to Programming Section). When connecting the terminal, the user should be aware that the Dialer is wired as a DCE, so that a normal RS-232 Cable can be used. Refer to the WIRING CONSIDERATIONS on page 30. Telephone digit programming may be used to select the Baud rate and other features. For example, 300 Baud can be chosen as the Dialer operating rate by entering the following from any line of the Dialer: GO OFF-HOOK, #Ox 0062 999 Note: 4.37 To enter THEN DIAL: programming mode.
...
To select 300 Baud. To exit programming. the Dialer is automati-
Once the default data has been loaded, cally set for 1200 Baud.
PRINTER: Almost any serial printer may be connected to the Dialer. The printer allows the user to maintain a permanent (depending on amount of paper) record of the calls placed through the Dialer. Connection of the printer is made via normal RS-232 Cable to the same port that may be used for a terminal. The Dialer must be programmed for the printer baud rate desired. This is accomplished by using one of the four Dialer programming methods. 4.38 Some printers require a modified data stream to handle exceptions (such as Line Feed). There are three main techniques that are used to modify the data stream. These are: 1) The printer may manipulate Terminal Ready (DTR) wires. the Clear to Send (CTS) and Data
Note: 2)
Method 1) above will not work with the SMarT-lTM WIRING CONSIDERATIONS on page 31. The and this this
Dialer.
See
printer may transmit XOFF (DC3) to stop the data source, XON (DCI) to restart the data source. The Dialer accepts protocol and requires no additional programming to enable feature.
3)
The SMarT-lTM Dialer may be configured to add a variable number of NULLS (no character spaces) after the carriage return function, anticipating the time required by the printer. Use Program parameter 007n to enter the required number of nulls.
j- Silent 700 is a Trademark of Texas Instruments Brother is a Trademark of Brother International Corp. Page 24
SECTION
MITL8350-047-IOO-NA
Note:
The XONIXOFF feature is provided to cover cases where the printer must slow the data stream down to handle functions such as carriage returns and line feeds. It is not intended for use in handling paper out and off line pauses. The print buffer that is on board the Dialer contains only three call records at any one time. The size of this buffer is adequate for most slow speed printers. It is not adequate for storing data during long pauses such as may arise when the paper runs out on the printer.
4.39
CALL COSTING UNIT: Most of the call costing units are nothing more than modified personal computers that estimate the cost of the calls made. Some of these units also provide statistics on traffic. If the software of the Call Costing Unit is compatible, the Dialer may be connected to the unit via a normal RS-232 cable. If the unit has multiple inputs, multiple Dialers may be connected. 4.40 CONCENTRATOR: If a site has a lot of Dialers, it may be economical to funnel the output of several Dialers through an electronic concentrator into a single printer or call costing unit for call recording. 4.41
When using a concentrator, the call record from each Dialer must be made to appear individual or different. String 602n can be programmed (using ASCII Codes) to print a unique three character field for each Dialer. For example, Dialer #I at a site may be programmed: 602 202331## which will cause the printer to print #I at the end of each line. The second Dialer may then be programmed: 602 202332## which will cause the number #2 to be printed at the end of each line. The three character field set by 602 is printed in both the MITEL Format and SMarT-lTM Format discussed below. Note: If the Dialers are programmed using the cloning technique, ensure that 602 is modified after cloning. If not, the Clone Master and the Clone Slave will have the same name. FORMAT
CALL RECORD 4.42
The Dialer can print call records in one of two formats. These formats are the MITEL Format and the SMarT-lTM Format. Selection of the appropriate format is made by programming 009n. The MITEL Format is very similar to the call record that was pioneered by MITEL Inc. for use in its line of small PABXs. The call record is up to 86 characters in length and includes all of the information about a call.
Page 25
SECTION
MITL8350-047-IOO-NA
The SMarT-lTM Format is a new format that was developed for this product. It summarizes the call completely within and provides an easy to read printout. In either case, the will show the digits that are dialed by the user and not assembled digits as in an Access Control Sequence.
MITEL Format
specifically 80 columns call record the dialer-
4.43
Since this format was there are fields that SMarT-lTM has no use for this are left blank. Otherwise, the produced by IvlITEL PABXs. Several Format.
developed for use in PABX applications, only pertain to transferred calls. The information and, as a result, these fields format is very similar to the call record
4.44
call costing machines can process the original MITEL For more information on tested systems, call MITEL. long with the following fields:
The record
is 86 characters
M - Month/Day B - Start time
(BBBB means (Note the period instead
that the clock is wrong) of a colon)
C - Call duration Ill1 - Incoming line D - User dialed digits T - Denied S - Speed dialed L - Line number R - Route (8 = Internal A - Account code N - System The above
MM/MM
in Centrex
mode)
identification fields are printed in a line as below:

TSLLRR NNN
named
BB:BBCc:Cc:CC
1111
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
where 4.45
the fields
are as described
in Table 6: .
Each line is ended with a CARRIAGE RETURN (ASCII 13) and LINE FEED (ASCII 10) and a programmable number of NULLS (ASCII 0). All alphabetic fields are in upper case. The dialed number and the dialed account code fields will be numbers 0 through 9, * and #.
Page
26
SECTION
TABLE FIELD COLUMN 1 2-6 7 8-12
6: MITEL
CALL RECORD
FORMAT
FIELDS
NRm CHARS. 1 5 1 5
FORMAT
MEANING
M B
13-14 15-22 23 24-27
2 8 1 4
28-33 34-56 57-59 60 61 62-65
6 23 3 1 1 4
T S L,R
A N
66-72 73-84 85-88
7 12 3
SPACE MONTH; I; DATE SPACE HOURS; Y;MINUTES (This is the time of the start of call rounded out to nearest minute) See note 1. SPACES HOURS: Y;MINUTES; :; SECONDS (Call duration) SPACE TnOO (Printed on incoming calls only; blank on outgoing calls. n is the Line Number [l-4]) SPACES This is the number that was dialed as the destination. See note 2. SPACES T if the call was denied; SPACE otherwise. S if the call was speed called; SPACE otherwise. TnOr (Printed on outgoing calls only; blank on incoming calls. n is the Line Number [l-4]. r is the route chosen 18 = no route].) SPACES Dialed account code. See note 3. System Identification (first three characters of parameter 602). on next page.
See NOTES
Page
27
SECTION
MITL8350-047-IOO-NA
Note:l.
Time Display Field: If the separating character in the start of call field is a period (.), the time has not been programmed into the Dialer. Use parameter 980 to program the time. When a Dialer is powered on, it will continue to use the last time that was programmed (time at power down) but will mark the call record with a period (J. If the loss of power is only a few seconds, it will not significantly affect the timekeeping. Dialed Number Field: This field contains the phone number that was dialed as the destination. The number of digits in this field will be set by: 1) The search tables. If a #6 action (enough digits) is encountered, the destination buffer is marked as full. Only those digits so far received will be printed, or 2) An inter-digit timeout. If the user pauses while dialing, exceeding the inter-digit pause time, the destination buffer is marked as full. Only those digits received so far will be dialed. If there is further dialing, these digits may be collected in the account code. If Centrex mode is being used, the userdialed Centrex Access Code (usually a 9) is not printed. The way to tell internal calls from external calls is to look at the route character (O-7 means a route was used, which probably dialed another 9 for the user; 8 means that the call was not routed, and the Dialer only forwarded the digits as displayed). If a speed call is accessed, the speed call number will appear in this field. The sequence that was dialed to get the speed call (i.e., *cl 1) is NOT displayed. Denied calls are marked with a 7 in column 59.
.:
Note:P.
Note:l.
Dialed Account code: This field shows the digits that were dialed by the user for the account code. If the Dialer substituted a dummy account code, this field still shows the userdialed digits (not the dummy). It can be told by the number of digits that the dummy was substituted. This is done intentionally to allow monitoring for account code fraud attempts. Only the first 12 digits are displayed, even though lTM unit can handle 23 digit account codes. the SMarT-
SMarT-lTM
Format
4.46
Most of the explanations noted above also apply to the SMarTlTM Format with the exception that the R field is in ASCII instead of Numeric. The format was developed to allow the printing to fit within 80 columns and to take advantage of the ability of the Dialer to print ASCII (see note 4 below). A typical line entry would appear as:
GC:CC:CC DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD TSLL RRRRR~ NNN
MM/MM
BBS6
Page 28
SECTION
MITL8350-047-IOO-NA
where
the fields
TABLE
are as described
7: SMarT-ITM
in Table 7 below:
RECORD FORMAT FORMAT MEANING FIELDS
CALL
FIELD
COLUMN
NR CHARS.
M B
l-5 6 7-11
5 1 5
C D
12-13 14-21 22 23-45 46-48 49 50 51-52 53 54-59 60-7 1 72

73-75
2 8 1 23 3 1 1 2 1 6 12 1
3
T S L R A N
MONTH; I; DATE SPACE HOURS; :; MINUTES (This is the time of the start of call rounded out to nearest minute) See note 1. SPACES HOURS: :; MINUTES; :; SECONDS (Call duration) SPACE This is the number that was dialed as the destination. See note 2. SPACES T if the call was denied; SPACE otherwise. 9 if the call was speed called; SPACE otherwise. Tn (n is the Line Number [l-4].) SPACE Up to six character route name. See note 4. Dialed account code. See note 3. SPACE System Identification (first three characters of parameter 602).
Note:4.
Name of route: This field is up to six characters in length. Normally, the name of the route chosen is printed. The name of each route can be programmed into the Diater by entering 6x0, where x is I+ the route number. For instance, the following may be common:
610 41542654## 620 4D4349## 630 535052494E54##
AT&T MCI SPRINT
Any ASCll character may be inserted in a 6x0 string (although only printable characters are recommended). If the call was sent no route (i.e., without being routed by the Dialer), the string THRU will be printed. For an incoming call, the string INWARD will be printed.
Page 29
SECTION
EXAMPLES MITEL
MM/MM II/O2 II/O2 11/02 11/02 IV02 11/02 11/02 BB:BB 07.15 07.15 07.15 07.15 00.00 21:15 21:19 Cc:CC:CC 00:00:03 00:00:02 00:OD:O4 0o:OO:ZB 07:15:28 00:01:37 00:05:02 1111 TIOO 5926032 5926 #H #OX 13153931212 18064553325 TlOO TlOO TIOO TlOO TlOl ST401 4400 501
FORMAT
TSLLRR NNN NTW NTW NTW NTW NM NTW NW
Note:
1) Line 1 above
indicates
an incoming
call on Line 1.
2) Line 2 shows a normal outgoing call on Line 1. It lasted two seconds and was user dialed. The call went on Route #O (usually the DDD network). 3) Line 3 indicates an incorrect outgoing call on Line 1. It lasted four seconds and appears that whoever programmed the call had put something wrong in the fourth digit search table (804). Note that seven digits were dialed, but some of the digits were recorded in the account code. This line indicates that the Dialer should be reprogrammed. 4) Line 4 shows an outgoing call that lasted 28 seconds. By looking at the dialed digits, we can see that this was, in fact, a programming session as shown by the #OX dialed digit printout. 5) Line 5 of the examples shows a call of an extremely long duration after setting the time by programming parameter 980. This may occur and should only happen once after setting the time. 6) Line 6 is an example of an outgoing call that lasted one and a half minutes. It went over Route #I (normally other than DDD). 7) Line 7 is an example of a five minute speed dialed Line 4 with a user entered account code of 4400. call over
Page 30
SECTION
SMarT-1
MM/MM Ol/Ol 1 l/O2 1 l/O2 11/02 lVO2 1 l/O2 1 l/O2 1 l/O2 BB:BB 00:09 OR09 07:16 07:17 D7:18 07:lE 07:19 07:20 CC:Cc:CC 00:00:05 19:21:25 00:00:04 00:00:11 00:00:17 00:00:04 0D:OO:ll 00:00:05
TM FORMAT
TSLL Tl Tl Tl Tl Tl Tl ST1 T Tl RRRRRR AT&T AT&T AT&T AT&T ROUTED INWARD AT&T AT&T NNN SMT SMT SMT SMT SMT SMT SMT SMT
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD 14049602327 #O* 911 959255 5926032 9 5922122 411
Note:
1) Line 1 is a five second It was sent via route #O.
call. The time
has not yet been
set.
2) Line 2 was a programming session time. Note the incorrect duration.
to
probably
set
the
3) Line 3 was a test of the 911 case. It was sent via route #O. Note that the programmer must have changed the default that would have routed 911 transparently. 4) Line 4 was an incomplete call. The Dialer has no way of determining that the call was not completed. This must be deduced from that fact that only six digits were dialed. 5) Line 5 was a normal (7 second) telephone call on Line l at 7:18 AM. The programmer has labeled this route ROUTED by use of 620. 6) Line 6 was an incoming call that lasted four seconds answer. Either the local or the distant party dialed a 9. 7) Line 7 was another normal call routed via the Telco. duration is the after
8) Line 8 is an example of a denied time from off-hook to on-hook. WIRING 4.47 CONSIDERATIONS
call. The
The SMarT-lTM Dialer uses a subset of the RS-232 cable for communications with a printer or a terminal. Contemporary devices will function properly with the interface. Only pins 1, 2, and 3 of the RS-232 cable are used by the Dialer.
Page
31
SECTION
4.48
Pin 1 is the ground for the 7 of the connector and to are Ground Start, there may be prevent this current from entering that the ground bolt is connected 4.49
Dialer. The wire is connected to pin the grounding bolt. If any of the lines moderate (0.5A) ground currents. To the users terminal or printer, ensure to a good earth ground.
Pin 2 is the data +3OV is considered is considered as a low. 4.50
input to the Dialer. Any voltage from +0.5 to as high while any voltage from -0.5 to -30V
Pin 3 is the data output from the Dialer. The transmitted high level is from +3 to +8V while the low is from -12 to -14V into an open circuit. There may be up to 1 Volt of 60 Hz noise superimposed on the logic level. The output impedance of this line is 1.5K& &5%. 4.51 Pin 4 is connected to Pin 5. This causes back to the CTS (request to send echoed the RTS to be echoed to clear to send).
4.52
Pin 6 is connected to pin 8 and, in turn, to pin 20. This echoes the DTR (data terminal ready) back to the CD (carrier detect) and the DSR (data set ready). 4.53
These lines will allow direct connection of the Dialer to a terminal using a one to one cable. If the desired printer can also connect directly to the terminal, it can be connected to the Dialer by use of a NULL MODEM cable. This only involves pins 1, 2, and 3.
Page
32
SECTION
MITL8350-047-IOO-NA
5. DETAILED
PROGRAMMING INTRODUCTION
5.01
There are four ways ods are listed below.

METHOD
to enter
data into the Dialer:
These
meth-
PROGRAMMING Terminal
or Computer
The Dialer may be easily connected to a personal computer via the RS-232 port, and, with an appropriate program, be completely programmed by responding to a series of questions and prompts presented by the personal computer. If a personal computer and a program are unavailable, the Dialer may be connected to a dumb terminal via the RS-232 port, and, by entering data, be programmed via this terminal. The default program access code for this method is <CR>.
PROGRAMMING DTMF Telephone METHOD 2
5.02
The Dialer also has a manual entry mode. Programming is accomplished by keying DTMF sequences on a DTMF telephone. The tones may be on either side of the trunk interface (i.e., remote or local programming). For example, Trunk #2 may be configured as Ground Start by dialing 2 0 0 3. The default program access code for this method is #OX.
PROGRAMMING Tandem Mode METHOD 3
5.03
5.04
The Dialer may be remotely programmed by using a personal computer or a dumb terminal, and a second Dialer, both remotely located. The remote Dialer will dial up and access the Dialer to be programmed. To the user, this method appears identical to programming Method 1 with the exception that the default program access code is #OX.
METHOD 4
PROGRAMMING Cloning
5.05
Several Dialers can be programmed to operate identically. This can be accomplished by cloning. One Dialer is programmed by any of the methods above. The other Dialers are cloned by connecting their computer ports together. The data exchange takes less than five seconds, and is initiated by dialing an access code from a set plugged into the Dialer unit whose program is to be copied.
Page
33
SECTION
Several other techniques may be used and are derivatives of the above. For instance, a cloned unit may have a few parameters changed via method 2. The time saved, compared to complete programming, is substantial. 5.07 An additional feature is an auto-answer mode which, if enabled, allows remote programming of an unattended Dialer while maintaining the security of unauthorized access via a series of parameters. There is also a separate limited access code for subscriber entry of speed calls.
5.06
DETAILED .;::#j~tigi&uii i ,j 1-:-::-
PROGRAMMING
INSTRUCTIONS
Consideration should be given to the programming of 411 and 911 numbers. This is mentioned because of concern that the possibility of having the 411 or 911 codes programmed to be non-functional. In some geographic locations, this consideration extends to 0. Test the Dialer thoroughly for the correct operation of these numbers after installation and programming.
METHOD
5.08
1
programming put the Dialer programming mentioned.
The Dialer, in all cases, is simple to program. The consists basically of two steps. Step one is to into the programming mode. Step two is to enter the information by using one of the four methods previously
5.09
If Method 1 is the selected data entry method, the computer, attached to the Dialer via the Computer (RS-232) port, will present the user with screens of information. These screens may be easily modified by following the instructions also included on the screen. The computer will automatically communicate with the SMarTlTM Dialer by using ASCII characters.
ASCII
5.10
Compatible
Terminal
A second procedure under programming method 1 allows the user to program the SMarT-1 Dialer by using an ASCII compatible dumb terminal. It requires no program to provide screens of information, but has the advantage of visual feedback for the programmer, as well as, access to the data confirmation mode. The reference to dumb terminal means that there are no programs resident to make it smart such as a personal computer.
5.11
This method requires an ASCII terminal such as a DEC I/T-50? or DEC !/T-100? (or compatible unit). If the terminal has an RS-232 port output and can be connected to the Dialer via an RS-232 (NULL MODEM) cable, in most cases, the terminal will support this procedure.
.s
t VT-LOM-100 are Trademarks Equipment Corporation Page 34
of Digital
SECTION
5.12 1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
6)
The Dialer will accept Characters Characters Characters mode.
input from the terminal
as follows:
are 0 through 9 and A through F. a through f are converted to characters A through F. X, x, 999, and <ESC> are used to exit the program
Characters ++ and a are the same as character A. Characters #, B, <LF>, <CR>, <SPACE>, <PERIOD>, <COMMA> and <HYPHEN> are all considered to be the character #.
ALL OTHER CHARACTERS ARE IGNORED.
The Terminal and the Dialer must be set to the same Baud rate (the default rate for the Dialer is 1200) with no parity, eight bits per character with one stop bit and bit 8 sense set to space. The terminal must operate on-line in full duplex mode. The Dialer must already have been * initialized at least once. 5.14 turn). to: Once the Dialer has been powered up, enter the security code. The terminal security code is defaulted to <CR> (carriage reThis will cause the Dialer to display a sign-on message similar
5.13
REV nn ENTERING >
PROG. MODE
5.15
The field nn in the example the software that is contained
above is the in the Dialer.
Revision
number
of
Once this display appears on the screen, the Dialer can be programmed. An example of a simple programming session is included below. The left hand column shows the screen with the operator keyed information included in brackets [I. This is done so that the reader will not become confused with the Dialer responses. The right hand column includes any comments or notes for the particular line.
REV nn ENTERING PROG. MODE
5.16
> [9021
> ES01 I 1#7*#7#90
> 19071
> [SO1 1#9##1
> [9021
> 1801 I #7#90 >[999lX or >[ESCI
Enter data confirmation mode (display memory mode). Display the contents of the 801 search table. Re-enter normal programming mode. Delete the first entry in 801 (#9 = delete). Enter data confirmation mode. Display contents of 801. Exit programming.
Page
35
SECTION
Note:
Since this is operation with a dumb terminal, the contents of search tables will be displayed as one long string. It is up to the user to determine where the actual string entry ends or begins. This is accomplished by counting from the start of the Dialer display for the required number of characters particular to a search table. and left an 60
If an invalid entry is made, the terminal will display a ? proceed to the next line with a new prompt. If the Dialer is in the programming mode for more than a minute without making entry on the terminal, a warning will be displayed saying that seconds are left before exiting. 5.17 Further programming is accomplished sections under programming Method formation by use of the Terminal keyboard.
5.18 METHOD 5.19 2
by reading the applicable 2 and applying this in-
The following paragraphs Dialer from a telephone
deal with the programming of the set. All of the character sequences
data exchange between the Method 1. These paragraphs
are identical to those Dialer and the computer
used in the when using
will allow a user that is conversant with fashion any kind of up-load, down-load, gram.
computer programming or interactive control
to pro-
::i&$&pY~ i;: Consideration I::ij:i.
should be given to the programming of 411 and 911 numbers. This is mentioned because of concern that the possibility of having the 411 or 911 codes programmed to be non-functional. In some geographic locations, this consideration extends to 0. Test the Dialer thoroughly for the correct operation of these numbers after installation and programming.
Before using the Dialer for the first time, a default base of data must be loaded into the unit by a special programming mode. This is accomplished by the procedure outlined below: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Connect Disconnect a DTMF telephone the power from set to Line 1 of the unit. the Dialer. Push and Hold the x Key.
5.20
Using the telephone While holding Continue
set, go off-hook.
the x Key, power
the unit up. or more. a
to hold the * Key for ten seconds
Upon release of the s key, the unit will acknowledge with short tone burst, audible in the earpiece. Default programming is now loaded and the Dialer is in the cut-through mode.
Page
36
SECTION
7) 5.21
0
Place the DTMF telephone The Dialer is now configured All trunks A single functioning There loop start beep is used to
set on-hook. as:
a a 0 Entering
notify
the
user
that
the
Dialer
is
are no speed security
call numbers access
in the 700 speed
call tables
The program Programming (New
code is #OX
Mode
First Time 5.22
Dialer)
If this is the first time that the Dialer is to be programmed, a special method is required to put the Dialer into the programming mode. This method is outlined by the steps listed under para. graph 5.20 above. 5.23 After completing the steps entry must be the security may continue with the programming Other 5.24 Than First Time outlined in paragraph 5.20, the first access code #OX so that the user steps under Data Area below.
To enter the programming mode, enter the security access code that was used in paragraph 5.23 above or #OX if default code is used. ENTERING 5.25 DATA are three distinct are PARAMETERS, types of data that may be entered. STRINGS and SEARCH-TEMPLATES.
There These
1)
PARAMETERS consist of a four digit sequence where the first digit specifies the data area to be programmed, the next two digits specify the parameter to be programmed, and the fourth digit selects the specific information of interest such as number of seconds to wait, number of lines per page, etc.. In the case of the first digit of the four digit sequence, the meaning is: Wide Data and Printer relating relating relating relating to Trunk to Trunk to Trunk to Trunk Related 1, Route 2, Route 3, Route 4, Route Data. #0, or Alternate #I, or Alternate Route Route Route Route # 0. # 1. # 2. # 3.
0 = System
1 = Parameters 2 = Parameters 3 = Parameters 4 = Parameters
#2, or Alternate #3, or Alternate
5 = Entry of data that is common to all four Trunks, Routes, or Alternate Routes. For example, 502t will program the DTMF Dialing Rate for all four trunks.
Page 37
SECTION
2)
STRINGS consist of a three digit prefix with the first digit ways a 6 or 7,followed by an arbitrary number of digits maximum), and ending with ##. SEARCH TEMPLATES consist of digit always an 8,followed by digit prefix selects the search process is closed by entering a
al(24
3)
a three digit prefix with the first a sequence of digits. The three table for data entry. The entry ##I.
::
Parameters 5.26 Table 8 below lists the four digit parameter codes for the Dialer. The letter xor rin the code represents a single user selectable character for entry to select a specific specification of the parameter. The letter trepresents a digit for entry. 5.27 is completed, the unit should be checked to has accomplished the desired dialing charEnsure that the new program access code (if delete the default program access codes as .
After programming insure programming acteristics and activities. used)functions and then follows: GO OFF-HOOK
ENTER PROGRAM Delete 803 804 HANG 5.28 the default
MODE accesses
using
new
access
code
as follows:
#0 0 x #9 #9 #O 0 TX #9 UP codes are to be used, do not perform
If default program access the above deletions.
Page 38
SECTION
TABLE
8: PARAMETERS WIDE DATA INFORMATION
FIRST DIGIT = 0 SYSTEM DIAL ooot DEFAULT/ RECOMMENDED 1
DEFINITION/PARAMETER
Use 10 or 100 Speed Call Numbers, 0 = use 10, 1 = use 100
where:
001t 005t
0 0
Reorder Tone, where: 0 = 400 Hz, 180 ipm, 1 = 400 Hz, Continuous Number DIGIT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 of Trunk ALLOWED to monitor TRUNKS for SMDR where: DIGIT 8 9 G% # C D E ALLOWED TRUNKS
ALL TRUNK 1 TRUNK 2 TRUNKS 1,2 TRUNK 3 TRUNKS I,3 TRUNKS 2,3 TRUNKS 1,2,3
TRUNK 4 TRUNKS 1,4 TRUNKS 2,4 TRUNKS 1,2,4 TRUNKS 3,4 TRUNKS 1,3,4 TRUNKS 2,3,4 above may be
NOTE: The C, D, and E entries made from a terminal. 006t 4 Baud rate 2 = 3 = 4 = 6 = 7 = Number of printer, where: 300 Baud 600 Baud 1200 Baud 9600 Baud 19200 Baud a CARRIAGE
007t 008t
of nulls after
RETURN
<CR>.
Print out IC calls, where: 0 = no 1 = yes Print Format, where: 0 = Print off 1 = MITEL Format 2 = SMarT Format 9 Route to monitor, where: 0 - 3 = Route number (4 - 7 = Alternate routes) 8 = Routed calls and outside Centrex only 9 = All
009t
01ot
Page 39
SECTION
MITL8350-047-IOO-NA TABLE 8 CONT: PARAMETERS FIRST DIGIT (x) = 1,2,3,4, or 5 (ALL) DATA FOR TRUNKS DEFINITION/PARAMETER NOTE: 1,2,3,4, or ALL
DIAL
DEFAULT/ RECOMMENDED
INFORMATION
Trunk #I and Route #I are unrelated. The former controls the operation of the trunk hardware with respect to starting, ending, and dialing a call. This controls things such as the type of CO trunk connected, the type of dial tone and whether the Trunk is DTMF or rotary, i.e., anything that deals with the physical aspects of the Trunk. Route refers to the characteristics of the carrier network. The codes for each are merged below only for convenience sake. Any trunk may access any Route.
xoot
Type, of Central Office, where: t = 0 = Loop Start, Rotary Dialing 1 = Ground Start, Rotary Dialing 2 = Loop Start, DTMF Dialing 3 = Ground Start, DTMF Dialing Rotary dialing, where: t 5 3 = outpulse at 40/30 4 = outpulse at 60/40 DTMF dialing 0 = 40 t I 1 = 50 2=60ms 3 = 70 4 = 80 ms ms
xOlt
x02t
rate, where: ms 5 = 90 ms ms 6 = 100 ms 7=llOms ms 8 = 120 ms ms 9 = 130 ms
x03t
On-hook timing, where t = 0 - 9, or: t I 0 = 80 ms 5 = 500 ms * = 2000 ms l=lOOms 6= 750ms # = 2500 ms 2= 150 ms 7 = 1000 ms 3 = 200 ms 8 = 1330 ms 4 = 300 ms 9 = 1660 ms 3 Flash allowed/time, where t = 0 - 9, or: t = 0 = 80 ms 5 = 500 ms * = 2000 ms l=lOOms 6= 750ms # = 2500 ms 2 = 150 ms 7 = 1000 ms 3 = 200 ms 8 = 1330 ms 4 = 300 ms 9 = 1660 ms If flash allowed/time is longer than the on-hook timing, then flash is hot allowed.
x04t
Page 40
SECTION
MlTLB350-047-l OO-NA
TABLE FIRST DIGIT DIAL DEFAULT/ RECOMMENDED (x) = 1,2,3,4,
8 CONT: PARAMETERS or 5 (ALL) DATA FOR TRUNKS 1,2,3,4, or ALL
INFORMATION
x05t
Time t =
between release and reseizure, 0= 500ms 5=1250ms 1 = 650 ms 6 = 1400 ms 2= 800ms 7=1550ms 3 = 950 ms 8 = 1700 ms 4 = 1100 ms 9 = 1850 ms
where
t = 0 - 9, or:
x06t x07t x08t
3 3 3
t = Number of ground start tries (failure goes to reorder tone). t = Ground start timeout (Wait for TIP GND). Off-hook t= 0 = 1 = 2 = 3= 4 = digit refusal None .I Sec. .2 Sec. .3 Sec. .4 Sec. where: Ticking Dialout 2 = None 3 = internal * 6 = From C.O. with x19 Beep Options. in seconds time, where 5 = .5 Sec. 6 = .6 Sec. 7 = .7 Sec. 8 = .8 Sec. 9 = .9 Sec. t = 1 - 9, or:
x09t
User dial tone,
Silent Dialout 0 = None t = 1 = Internal * 4 = From C.O. * - Interacts xlOt xl 1t 3 Reserved for future use.
x12t x13t
2 2
t = Inter-digit timeout on subscriber side, where t = 1 - 9, x and #, or: t = 0 = No timeout 6 = 12 seconds 1 = 2 seconds 7 = 14 seconds 2 = 4 seconds 8 = 16 seconds 3= 6 seconds 9 = 18 seconds 4= 8 seconds x = 20 seconds 5 = 10 seconds # = 22 seconds = t Inter-digit timeout on 0+ calls. Same as xl It above. t = Inter-digit timeout on Ol+ calls. Same as xllt above.
Page 41
SECTION
MlTL8350-047-l OO-NA TABLE 8 CONT: PARAMETERS FIRST DIGIT (x) = l&3,4, or 5 (ALL) DATA FOR TRUNKS DEFINITION/PARAMETER
t = Rotary inter-digit (outgoing dialing), 0 = 400 ms 5 I = 500 ms 6 2 = 600 ms 7 3 = 700 ms 8 4 = 800 ms
1,2,3,4,
or ALL
DIAL
x14t
INFORMATION
Office side
pause on the Central where t= 0 - 8, or: = 900 ms = 1 second = 1.1 seconds = I.2 seconds dialing.
xI5t xI6t xI7t
t= t= t=
Character used for restart during Use * or # only. 0 = disable. Character used for forcing redial Use * or # only. 0 = disable. Character used for forcing redial as used the first time. Use x or # only. 0 = disable. Redial timeout, 0 = No timeout 1 = 08 seconds 2 = I6 seconds 3 = 24 seconds 4 = 32 seconds where 5 = 6 = 7 = 8 = 9 = t = 40 48 56 64 72
on Route on the
#O. route
same
xI8t
t =
0 - 9, or: seconds seconds seconds seconds seconds
xI9t
t =
Beep options, where: 0 = No beep tones enabled. I = Off-hook beep (see note I). 2 = Account code beep. 1 before account code/2 after. (See note 2). 3 = Account code beep and off-hook beep. 4 = OCC beep. 1 for Route #O after destination number, 2 for all routes other than 0 after destination ber. (See note 3). 5 = OCC beep and off-hook beep. 6 = OCC beep and account code beep. (See note 4). 7 = OCC beep, account code beep, and off-hook beep. (See note 4).
num-
Page 42
SECTION
TABLE 8 CONT: PARAMETERS FIRST DIGIT (x) = 1,2,3,4, DIAL

.. . .
or 5 (ALL) DATA FOR TRUNKS DEFINITION/PARAMETER
1,2,3,4,
or ALL
INFORMATION by itself options, a is lifted off is dialed
NOTE 1: If the off-hook beep options is chosen (i.e., x191) or in conjunction with the other beep beep will be heard when the telephone handset the cradle, regardless of whatever route the call on.
NOTE 2: If the account code beep option is chosen (i.e., x192) the SMarT-lTM Dialer will insert a beep at the end of the destination number (which is before the account code is to be dialed). After the account code is entered, the second account code beep is heard. NOTE 3: If the OCC beep option is chosen (i.e., x194), the SMarT-lTM Dialer will insert one beep after the destination number if the call is dialed on Route #0 (DDD). If the call is dialed on any other route, the OCC beep option will insert two beeps after the destination number. NOTE 4: If the OCC beep option and the account code beep option are employed (i.e., xl96 or x197) and the call is dialed on Route #O (DDD), one beep after the destination number and one beep after the account code will be heard. If dialed on any other route, two beeps will be heard after the destination number and one beep after the account code. NOTE: If parameter x54t has the t value set to 1 (i.e., no account code), then account code beeps are disabled regardless of the x19t options chosen. xzot 2 t= Ringing sensitivity, where t = 0 - 9 (0 is the most sensitive, and decreasing least sensitive). Inter-ring timing, in seconds. search tables. to 9, the
x21t x22t x23t
6 0 9
t= t = t=
Use primary 0 = Primary,
or alternate 1 = Alternate
Activation of Dialer (what is done immediately after off-hook), where: 0 = Immediately dial Default Route (Hotline Operation) 8 = Wait for digits; use search tables 9 = Cut-through (Pass all digits directly through Dialer). (No Call-processing).
Page 43
SECTION
MITL835Q-047-IOO-NA
TABLE FIRST DIAL x24t DIGIT (x) = 1,2,3,4,
8 CONT: PARAMETERS or 5 (ALL) DATA FOR TRUNKS 1,2,3,4, or ALL
DEFAULT/ RECOMMENDED 0 t =
INFORMATION
Default route, see search tables for action digit. This action is accomplished if x23t = 0 or #8 used in Table 11. Centrex outgoing trunk access digit. If enabled via x26t, then all Intra-Centrex dialed immediately. Centrex enable code where 0 = off and 1 = on. Auto-Answer Timer 0 = No Auto-Answer. in tens of seconds. calls are
9
x25t
t=
x26t x27t x28t
0 0 6
t=
t =
Auto-Answer Wait-for-Security-Code Timer in tens of seconds. This is the time period in which the Security Code (603 Parameter) must be entered. If the timer expires or an erroneous security code is entered, Auto-Answer control for the associated trunk drops through to the x29t Lockout Timer. Auto-Answer Lockout Timer in tens of seconds. Failure to enter Program Mode during the x28 parameter time enables this timer. The associated trunk will hold the seizure for this length of time (barring further Auto-Answer activity on that trunk) until the timer expires or the subscriber goes off-hook (which cancels the lock-out). t= OFF-HOOK Recognition 0 = 20 ms 1 = 20 ms 2 = 40 ms 3 = 60 ms 4 = 80 ms 5 = 100 ms 6 = 120 ms 7 = 140 ms 8 = 160 ms 9 = 180 ms * = 200 ms # = 220 ms Time.
x29t
x30t
Page 44
SECTION
MITL8350-047-a
00-NA
TABLE
8 CONT: PARAMETERS FOR TRUNKS 1,2,3,4, or ALL
FIRST DIGIT (x) = 1 , 2 , 3 ,4 , or 5 (ALL) DATA DIAL x31t DEFAULT/ RECOMMENDED 3
INFORMATION
A common timer for: TIP GND Application Recognition (GND START), TIP GND Removal Recognition (GND START) and during GND START Seizure, time between SPLIT and TERMINATE action during RING GND Application. t = 0 = 40 ms 1 = 40 ms 2 = 80 ms 3 = 120 ms 4= 160 ms 5 = 200 ms 6 = 240 ms 7 = 280 ms 8 = 320 ms 9 = 360 ms * = 400 ms # = 440 ms t= Subscriber Outgoing Digit Recognition 0 = DTMF, 10 or 20 PPS (normal operation) I = Ignore all ROTARY 2 = Ignore all DTMF 3 = Ignore all DIGITS 4 = Not Used 5 = Go to REORDER on ROTARY digits 6 = Go to REORDER on DTMF digits 7 = Go to REORDER on any type digits 8 = Not Used NOTE: To cause the Dialer to ignore 20 PPS dialing (both Incoming and Outgoing), add 8 (hexadecimal) to the current value of x33t and set x33t to that new value. DO NOT add the 8 (hexadecimal) to x32t. Subscriber Incoming Digit Recognition Type 0 = DTMF, IO or 20 PPS (normal operation) 1 = Ignore all ROTARY 2 = Ignore all DTMF 3 = Ignore all DIGITS 4 = Not Used 5 = Go to REORDER on ROTARY digits 6 = Go to REORDER on DTMF digits 7 = Go to REORDER on any type digits NOTE: To cause the Dialer to ignore 20 PPS dialing (both Incoming and Outgoing), add 8 (hexadecimal) to the current value of x33t and set x33t to that new value.
x32t
x33t
t =
Page 45
SECTION
MlTL8358-047-IOO-NA
TABLE FIRST DIGIT (r) = 1,2,3,4, DIAL r50t: 150t 250t 350t 450t r5lt r52t r53t r54t DEFAULT/ RECOMMENDED t=
8 CONT: PARAMETERS or 5 (ALL) DATA FOR ROUTES 0 I 1 I 2 I 3 r or ALL INFORMATION
Destination number format where t = 0 - 9, or: 0 = Any number of digits (for Route #0) 1 = ten digits (adds user area code on seven digits) 2 = I+ ten digits (as above) 4 = I+ ten digits or I+ seven digits 8 = ten or seven digits for future code code use. number wait of digits, where t = 1 - 9 (0 = No time.
Reserved t = t= t=
Account Account out).
timer
in seconds
Account code type, where t = 0 - 5, or: 0 = Flexible length account code. Wait for timeout (previous entry) and then continue. 1 = No account code. x53t is not checked if x54t = 1. 2 = Fixed length. Wait for timeout. If not entered, then reorder tone. 3 = Fixed length. Wait for timeout. If not entered, then substitute the dummy account code. 4 = Same as 2 above, except that the number of digits in the account code is lO+ x52t above. 5 = Same as 3 above, except that the number of digits in the account code is IO+ x52t above. Not On Network The length temporary (NON) trigger character. in the when
r55t r56t r57t r58t: 158t 258t 358t 458t
* 3 7
t = t = t = t=
of time that search table stored
a NON entry stays (in tens of days). in the search tables
Number of digits NON is detected.
Action as a result of call failure, where t = 0 - 9, * or: 0 = Redial on Route #0 1 = Redial on Route #I 2 = Redial on Route #2 3 = Redial on Route #3 4 = Reorder 5 = Redial same route once, then 6 = Redial same route twice, then 7 = Redial same route three times, 8 - Redial same route again, then 9 = Redial same route twice, then K = Redial same route three times,
reorder reorder then Route Route then
reorder 0 0 Route 0
Page 46
SECTION
TABLE FIRST DIGIT (r) = 1,2,3,4, DIAL

r70t: 170t 270t 370t 470t r72t r73t r74t
8 CONT: PARAMETERS FOR ALTERNATE ROUTES 4,5,6,7 OR ALL
or 5 (ALL) DATA
t=
INFORMATION
Destination number format where t = : 0 = Any number of digits (for Route #4) 1 = ten digits (adds user area code on seven 2 = l+ ten digits (as above) 4 = l+ ten digits or l+ seven digits 8 = ten or seven digits Account Account code code number wait of digits, where
digits)
t= t = t =
t = 123456789 X 2.
timer
in seconds
Account code type, where t = 0 - 5, or: 0 = Flexible length account code. Wait for timeout (previous entry) and then continue. 1 = No account code. 173t is not checked if 174t = 1. 2 = Fixed length. Wait for timeout. If not entered, then reorder tone. 3 = Fixed length. Wait for timeout. If not entered, then substitute the dummy account code. 4 = Same as 2 above, except that the number of digits in the account code is lO+ 152t above. 5 = Same as 3 above, except that the number of digits in the account code is lO+ 152t above. Not On Network The length temporary (NON) trigger character. in the when
r75t r76t r77t
* 3 7
t = t= t= t =
of time that search table stored
a NON entry stays (in tens of days). in the search tables
Number of digits NON is detected.
r78t:
178t 278t 378t 478t 4 6 6 6
Action as a result of call failure, where t = 0 - 9, * or: 0 = Redial on Route #0 1 = Redial on Route #l 2 = Redial on Route #2 3 = Redial on Route #3 4 = Reorder 5 = Redial same route once, then 6 = Redial same route twice, then 7 = Redial same route three times, 8 - Redial same route again, then 9 = Redial same route twice, then * = Redial same route three times,
reorder reorder then Route Route then
reorder 0 0 Route 0
Page 47
SECTION
Strings Strings are entered as in Table 9 below. Where number appears after the initial three digits, a valid string of digits may be entered. The string entry is terminated by the characters I##. If the ## is not entered, an Automatic Entry Timer will automatically complete the parameter entry after expiration of the Inter-Digit Timer (xllt). Examples of string entries are included below. EXAMPLE 1: #80327 The string lates to: #803 2 7 above is the default on Route #O (615). This string trans5.29
Wait for seconds;
minimum
duration number;
of precise
dial tone
for
up to six
Dial destination Cut-through. 2: #8033#6~5427
EXAMPLE
The string #803 3 #625 4 2 7 5.30
above
is the default minimum number. 400 ms of code. number.
on Route
#I
(625). It translates dial tone for
to: up to six
Wait for seconds.
duration
of precise
Dial access Wait for seconds.
400
Hz tone
from
OCC
for
up
to
ten
Dial authorization Dial destination Cut-through. These strings
are entered
as (refer to Table
8):
615 #80327## for 625 #8033#625427## The 615 and Table 9. 625 strings
Route 0 and for Route
1. from the 6r5 Parameter in
1.
are constructed
Page 48
SECTION
MITL8350-047-IOO-NA
TABLE FIRST DIGIT = 6 STRINGS DIAL
9: STRING (where:
DATA
ENTRY Routes #0 to #7)
r = 1 to 8 for
DEFINITION/STRING
INFORMATION
6OOnumber## 6Olnumber## 602title## 603title## 604title## 6rOtitle## 6rl number## 6r2number## 6r3number##
Reserved
for future
use. must always be entered). and must maximum). be en-
User area code (must be three digits,
MACHINE IDENTIFIER (15 digits tered as ASCII codes). Auto-Answer Security Default = #OS
maximum
Code (34 digits
Terminal Program Security Code (15 digits maximum). Default = <CR> (must be entered as ASCII Codes). Name (Must of Route (Six characters maximum). be entered as ASCII codes). number) maximum). number
.
Access number (OCC phone (34 digits maximum). Authorization number
(34 digits
Dummy account number (34 digits maximum). (If this is empty, the dialer will wait for an account to be dialed in until timeout occurs). Centrex number. (Default = 9) (34 digits maximum, if desired).
6rrlnumber## 6r5number##
615 and 655 Defaults: #80327 625, 635, 645, 665, 675 and 685 Defaults: #8033#62~427 To program 601 and 6rO through 6r5 for DIAL-OUT of 4th column DTMF, see Table C2 SPECIALS on Page C-5.
Access control sequence. This instructs the Dialer on how to access a particular network. All Route access control codes are sequences of digits as follows (and may be combined in any order): 1.0 Dial that digit. Dial a K. #Ox #OO Dial a #I, #Ol Dial a # if the last dial digit was not #. #02 Wait for account code (does not dial account code). #2ab Pause. Continue after pause if a = 5. Fail to x58, x78 if a = 0 (see note 1). #3ab High tone (570-680 detector) (see note 1). #4ab 440 Hz detector (see note 1). #5ab 480 Hz/Ringback detector (see note 1). #6ab 400 Hz detector (see note 1). #7ab 350-620 Hz energy detector (see note 1). #8ab Precise dialtone/ Hz detector (see note 1). #gab Wait for Not On Network (NON) tone (see note 1). #Dab DTMF Detector.
(Continued on next page)
Page 49
SECTION
MITL8350-047-I OO-NA
TABLE
FIRST
9 CONT: STRING (where:
DATA
ENTRY Routes #0 to #7)
DIGIT = 6
STRINGS
r = 1 to 8 for
DIAL
DEFINITION/STRING
INFORMATION
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
Note:l:
Dial the destination code Dial the route access code Dial the authorization code Dial the account code Dial the Trunk number (l-4) Cut-through (done) Change to DTMF Dial the Centrex access code (may be different for each Route) ## End (Used while programming) for an elaboration of
Refer to Tables 9a and 9b respectively the a and b values.

TABLE
9a: DETECTOR/TIMEOUT
a
(a) CODES
MIN. TONE DURATION
a 0
MIN. TONE
DURATION
MIN. 200ms 400ms 1.0 2.55
1 2 3 4
Redial x78 Redial x78 Redial x78 Redial x78 Redial x78
TABLE
per x58 or 5 per x58 or 6 per x58 or 7 per x58 or 8 per x58 or 9 2.55 then continue Dialout 1.0 then continue Dialout 400ms then continue Dialout 200ms then continue Dialout MIN. then continue Dialout
9b: DETECTOR/TIMEOUT NOT RCVD. b
(b) CODES NOT RCVD.
b 0
TlMEOUT/TONE
TIMEOUT/TONE
1 2 3 4 5
0 Seconds 2 Seconds 4 Seconds 6 Seconds 8 Seconds 10 Seconds
6 7 8 9 *
12 14 16 18 20
Seconds Seconds Seconds Seconds Seconds
Page
50
SECTION
Speed 5.31
Call
Entries
Table 10 below lists the number of the determine which trunk or call number. kis a Network routing for the particular phone number to be dialed.
TABLE
digits required for Speed Call entries. nn is entry, while d is the key that is used to trunks have access to the particular speed override and is used to select the allowed speed call number. mmmmmmm is the
10: SPEED CALL ENTRIES = 7 SPEED CALL DEFINITION
FIRST DIGIT DIAL
7nndkmmmmmmm##
Speed
call entry where: nn is the number
of the speed
call entry. to access the
d is the key that selects call number as follows: DIGIT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 * # c D E ALLOWED
the trunks TRUNKS
ALL TRUNK 1 TRUNK 2 TRUNKS 1,2 TRUNK 3 TRUNKS I,3 TRUNKS 2,3 TRUNKS 1,2,3 TRUNK 4 TRUNKS I,4 TRUNKS 2,4 TRUNKS 1,2,4 TRUNKS 3,4 TRUNKS 1,3,4 TRUNKS 2,3,4 above may be made from
NOTE: The C, D, and E entries a terminal.
k is the network 0 - 3 4 - 7 8 9
override:
Force on Route #0 - #3 Force on Route #Oa - 3a Use search table Dial immediate, no Route # (transparent). is the phone Action number. #C for limited access to
mmmmmmm
NOTE:
Speed 7nn## Delete
See Search Table Call Programming. speed dial entry nn.
Page 51
SECTION
Search 5.32
Tables
Table 11 below lists the breakdown of the digits in the search tables to be used for programming. There are four examples that are also included, that, with the use of Table 11, should provide sufficient information for programming. EXAMPLE Force 1: immediately. im-
ail 411 and I+41 1 calls to Dial and Cut-Through 803 411 #3 ## 804 1411 ## #3
Force 411 to Dial and Cut-Through mediately. finished Force 1+411 to Dial and Cut-Through mediately (this is one of the defaults). finished
im-
EXAMPLE
2: executing 1 6r5) if the first #l. three digits dialed
Start the Dialer (begin are an Area Code: 803 #4#1#9 ## EXAMPLE 3:
Prefer Route finished
Deny all calls to 555-1212 803 555 #l ## 804 1555 ## #l
or 1-555-1212
or I-(NPA)-555-1212: 803. 804.
Deny 555. finished programming Deny 1+555. finished programming #l
807 1#4#1#9555 ## Note:
Deny I-Nl/OX-555. N = 2-9 and X = O-9 finished. by these tables any time before digits. are: a) end of
The searches that are not controlled first digit Centrex access, b) restart dialed digits, and c) redial after dialed
Page 52
SECTION
MITL8350-047-IOO-NA
TABLE
11: SEARCH
TABLE SEARCH
ENTRIES TABLES
FIRST DIGIT = 8 DIAL Primaries: 801na 802nna 803nnna 804nnnna 805nnnnna 806nnnnnna etc. to 815 ALTERNATES: 821na 822nna 823nnna 824nnnna 825nnnnna 826nnnnnna etc. to 835 TO ACCESS ALTERNATE SEARCHES, SEE x22t Parameter
DEFINITIONS/DESCRIPTIONS Where n are the user dialed digits for a match, and a is the action that is performed in the case of a match.
n may be any digit from 0 through 9 and *, to be matched against the same digit in the dialed sequence. n may also be: #O #I #4 #9 Compare Compare Compare Compare against against against against a dialed I#. a dialed 1 or 0. any digit dialed from any digit dialed.
2 through
9.
After the match as follows: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Prefer Prefer Prefer Prefer Force Force Force Force Select Select Select Select
string
is entered,
one action (a) is entered,
Route Route Route Route Route Route Route Route Route Route Route Route
#0 (PRO) #I #2 #3 #0 (FRO) #l #2 #3 #0 (SRO) #I #2 #3
NOTE: A 601 entry is required when accessing routes 1,2,3 and 5,6,7. These will force the call onto that route if possible; redial and retry cannot change the selection. These will not dial out the select digits, and will start the comparisons over again from the first digit following the select digits.
a
9 * #O #I #2 #3 #4 #5
Deny Speed Call - Access 7nn entry, Table 10. Dial what has been entered and cut through (no routine). Security access code. Absorb what has been entered and cut through (bypass). on next page)
(Continued
Page 53
SECTION
TABLE
11 CONT: SEARCH
TABLE
ENTRIES
FIRST DIGIT = 8 DIAL #6
SEARCH
TABLES
DEFINITIONS/DESCRIPTIONS This is the last digit of the phone number; any other dialed digits are the account code unless 154t = 1. A route must have been chosen prior to encountering a search table with #6 as an action. Do nothing (wait for more digits). Prefer default route (see x24t). When entered as an action, that template entry is removed from the search table (i.e., 803#00++#9). Subscriber side only, Limited Access Security Code. Access for programming speed calls only with a format of 7nn08mm....mm##. Once this mode is accessed, entry consists of nn mm......mm##. If the subscriber does not have the capability of dialing the ##, a short wait for a timer expiration will automatically complete the entry (see Table 10 for format description). End of entry, return to programming. NOTE: One (and only one) action must be programmed for each template entered.
#7 #8 #9 #C
##
Page 54
SECTION
5.33
The following paragraphs list the default descriptions that are included in the search data is first loaded.
TABLE 801 AND 111#71 821
settings and their tables when default
SEARCH
DEFAULT:
If the first
DEFAULT:
digit
is a 1, do nothing.
1 x I#71
If the first
DEFAULT:
digit digit
is a x-, do nothing. is not a 1 or a SC,force

823
I#9 1 0 1
If the first
SEARCH TABLE
the call onto
Route
#O.
803 AND )g)/
DEFAULT:
Stop searching after the receipt force onto Route #O.

DEFAULT: 1 x I#9 I#9 I#21
of 911. 801 search
above
will
* and two
DEFAULT:
more
digits
is a speed
dial number.
1#01oIx/#41
DTMF #Ox is the program

DEFAULT: [#o1#01#01#cl
access
code. Access Code.
DTMF ### is the Speed

SEARCH TABLE 804 AND 111 824
Dial Programming
DEFAULT:
Dial and cut through

DEFAULT: 11151515101
after
1+411.
Place I+555
DEFAULT:
calls on Route
1118101010]
#O.
Place 1+800 calls on Route

DEFAULT: 11
#O. #I.
Place l+NXX
DEFAULT:
calls on Route
#9 #0 0 x #4
Alternate
program
access
code.
Page
55
SECTION
SEARCH
TABLE
807 AND
827 #9 5 5 5 0 on Route #O. T(local call).
DEFAULT: Place l+N(O DEFAULT: Stop SEARCH
1 #4 #I
or 1)X-555-xXxX
calls
#4 #4 #9 #9 #9 #9 #9 #6 after receipt 828 of NNX-XXXX
searching
TABLE
808 AND
DEFAULT:
#1 #4 #4 #9 #9 #9 #9 #9 #6 of l+NNX-XXXX (long distance call
Stop searching after receipt within the same area code). SEARCH TABLE 810 AND #4 #I 830
DEFAULT:
#9 #9 #9 #9 #9 #9 #9 #9 #6 (long dis-
Stop searching tance, outside SEARCH TABLE
after receipt of N(0 or 1)X-XXX-XxXx of local area code). 831 #9 #9 #9 #9 #9 #9 #9 #9 #6
811 AND #I
DEFAULT:
#4 #I
Stop searching after receipt of a l+N(O or 1)X-XXX-XxXx distance, non-international call). Note: To enable OCC dialing parameters, (OCC access), and 622 (authorization programmed. The search tables by using numbers same manner as The as used for definitions for the search tables can Functions the 601 code)
(long
(area code), 621 values must be
Note:
for the Alternate Routes are programmed 821 through 835. These are used in the the numbers in the primary search tables. 821 through 835 remain the same as the ones used for 801 through 815. Alternate be accessed via x22t.
Special 5.34 Modes
Table 12 (on the following page) contains the description of the programming entries required to invoke some special functions. 903, 904, 906 and 908 will affect calls in progress.
Page
56
SECTION
MlTL8350-047-I OO-NA
TABLE
12: SPECIAL FIRST DIGIT
FUNCTIONS = 9
DIAL 902
DEFINITION/DESCRIPTION
903 904 906 907 908 980mmddhhmm 999 (or go on-hook)
Data confirmation mode: After each three digit prefix described above, the Dialer will display the data if programming method 1 is employed, or if using methods 2 or 3, the Dialer will wait for 0.5 seconds, then send the data out in DTMF format. Load default data - delete all non-default data. Clear all searches (including defaults, primary and alternate). Enter clone master mode. Return to normal programming mode from data confirmation mode. Enter tandem operation mode (ASCII - DTMF conversion). Set the internal clock where mm = month, dd = day, hh = hours, mm = minutes. Exit programming.
ACKNOWLEDGE TONES
5.35
In general, after each entry, the Dialer will respond with a double tone. During programming, the Dialer will punctuate the entry with short tones as follows:
Parameters
5.36
After the three digit parameter prefix has been dialed, the Dialer will insert a single short tone. After the fourth digit, the Dialer will send a double tone that indicates the Dialer is ready to continue programming.
Strings
5.37
After the three digit string prefix has been dialed, the Dialer will insert a single short tone. After the ## has been dialed, the Dialer will send a double tone indicating Dialer is ready to continue programming.
Tables
Search
5.38 double
After the three digit search table prefix, the Dialer will send a short tone. After the ## has been dialed, the Dialer will send a tone indicating the Dialer is ready to continue programming.
Page
57
SECTION
Note:
In the event of an illegal entry, the Dialer will send four slow beeps to indicate that the entry has been ignored. for the tones to stop and then try again. 3 Mode
long, Wait
METHOD Tandem 5.39
Remote programming may be accomplished using a PC or dumb terminal in conjunction with a Dialer. The local Dialer will perform as an ASCII to DTMF convertor in this mode and also has the advantage of visual feedback while programming a remote Dialer. This mode is also useful for data confirmation of a problem remote Dialer. 5.40 The network connection between must be of reasonable quality with the local and not more than remote Dialer a 20 dB loss.
5.41
To initiate TANDEM MODE, enter the PROGRAM MODE, then enter 502 9 (for a more reliable DTMF transmission) and then enter the TANDEM MODE with the 908 command. The Dialer will be self-prompting on the screen. It will ask which line to use, will acknowledge receipt of the dial tone and will prompt for the phone number to dial. The user may pick up the associated phone at this point to converse with someone at the remote location. Once the remote Dialer has answered, enter the program access code. Upon receipt of the remote acknowledge tone, the remote phone will be split away and may be hung up. 5.42
The first command issued to the remote Dialer should be 502 9 (130 ms DTMF tones for more reliable data transmission) unless it has been pre-set. At this point, standard terminal programming techniques may be used. For data confirmation (902 mode), the TANDEM 7 turn-around mode is most convenient. This places the local and remote digits on separate lines on the screen which makes the data confirmation much easier to read. Use Xto return to regular mode from the turn-around mode. 5.43 The next to last command return the x09t parameter gramming. 5.45 5.44 to the remote to its original Dialer setting should be to before pro-
The ** LAST ** command to the remote Dialer order to exit the program mode in the remote do so will result in the remote Dialer trunk having to program mode which essentially, results in that trunk for the duration of the time-out.
should be 999 in Dialer. Failure to time-out of the being locked-up
Page 58
SECTION
MITL8350-047-IOO-NA
METHOD Cloning
Cloning is a programming method whereby several Dialers can be programmed to operate identically once one Dialer has been set to the desired functions by another programming method. The Dialer that has the pr8-programmed instructions and is used to clone another is called the Master. The unit to b8 programmed by this method is called the Slave. 5.47 This method conditions: The Master must be accomplished be processing by meeting any calls. and programmable b8 set for the same the following
5.46
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
unit cannot
The Slave unit(s) must be fully operational from either a terminal or a DTMF handset. Both the Master Baud rate. and the Slave units must
This procedure will work correctly only if one Slave is connected to one Master at any one time during the cloning. The Master unit must not be allowed to exit the program mode and no off-hook to on-hook transitions may occur in either unit while the RS-232 Cloning Cable is connected between the units. These transitions will cause an SMDR output that will confuse the units and possibly corrupt the programming of both units. The Slave unit must b8 powered down, then up after cloning and before attempting to use it. The Cloning Cable must be disconnected prior to powering the Slave unit up. The following is a list of required equipment accomplish this method of programming: Pr8-programmed, dedicated Master unit. the Master that is needed to
Note:
6.
5.48 1. 2. 3.
DTMF handset or other DTMF source that will allow unit to seize the line and generate tones.
A method of audibly detecting clone acknowledge tones on the Master Unit. A DTMF handset is allowable, or any other means of monitoring the audio on the subscriber side of the Master unit. A battery A power or dummy CO source for the Master unit.
4. 5. 6.
pack for each Dialer.
RS-232 Cloning Cable. The Dialer requires pins 1, 2, and 3 only. It is a NULL MODEM type with pins 2 and 3 reversed at one end.
Page
59
SECTION
Procedure 5.49 The following clone a Dialer: Ensure that para. 3.05). Power steps are the procedure to be accomplished to
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. IO.
the
Dialers unit.
have
been
x initialized
(see
Page
IO,
up the Master desired
Verify that the Master unit. Power Match
programming
is already
resident
in the
up the Slave unit. the Master and Slave Baud rates. RS-232 port connectors together
Connect the Master and Slave with the Cloning Cable. Go off-hook Dial the changed). on the Master program access unit.
code
(#
0 x
unless
it
has
been
Dial 906 to start the Clone
procedure. one of two responses will
In approximately four to five seconds, occur. These are: a) b)
A double beep that indicates a successful clone has taken place and data has been transferred, or Four long, slow beeps that indicate a failure of the cloning process. If this occurs, check the cable, the Baud rates, and the power connections, etc., to determine the cause of the failure. the Cloning Cable and the
11. 12.
After successful cloning, disconnect power down the Slave unit.
DO NOT attempt to make the Slave unit function while Cloning Cable is connected or prior to this power down.
5.50
Upon the next power up of the Slave unit, it will be functional and ready for operation with its data base being a copy of the Master unit data base. If more units are to be cloned, repeat steps 2 through 11 for each unit. Note: The 906 Clone Command any number of consecutive units are cloned. may be repeated at the Master unit times until the desired number of
Page
60
SECTION
MlTL8350-047-IOO-NA
Do not allow the Master to time out of the program mode or otherwise exit the program mode while the units are connected via the RS-232 Cloning Cable. The resulting SMDR output could cause data corruption of both units. The user may wish to turn the Master SMDR off (009 = 0) during the cloning and later restore it to its original setting if needed to minimize this error. A good rule to follow is to only have the Cloning Cable connected while actually cloning the unit. Note: The cloning process occurs at a 19,200 Baud rate in order to proceed quickly (four to five seconds). The length of the Cloning Cable should be kept to a minimum and not coiled to allow uncorrupted transfer of data. The Master unit reverts to the programmed Baud rate upon completion of cloning and the Slave unit returns to its programmed Baud rate on the first power-up transition.
Page 61
SECTION
MITL8350-047-IOO-NA
---
THIS
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
---
Page
62
SECTION
MITb6%60-Q47-l OO-NA
6. SPECIFICATIONS HARDWARE Table 13 lists all of the hardware specifications for the SMarTlTM Common Carrier Access Dialer and Call Controller. These specifications also apply to the SMarT-lATM unit unless otherwise noted. TABLE SPECIFICATION FCC RINGER EQUIVALENCE 13: SMarT-lTM HARDWARE MIN. SPECIFICATIONS TYP. MAX. 0.78 UNITS 6.01
IDLE LINE, LOOP START RINGER IMPEDANCE: RINGING LEAKAGE: OFF HOOK CURRENT IDLE LINE, GROUND SENSING RESISTANCE: VOLTAGE: VOLTAGE TIP-GROUND Sending Ring-Ground START Tip to Earth Tip 36 -22 -5 10 n/a 40 -25 0 . .45 -28 +lO 150 Kfi Volts Volts ms SENSITIVITY: 15-60 Hz, 70-IIOV 20-3500 Hz, 1OV 15-60 Tip to Ring, Tip to Earth, Hz 1OOV IOOV 10 1 40 20 20 15 80 20 K& Mfi Volts MQ M!J mA
OPEN CIRCUIT GROUNDING
TIME TO RECOGNIZE RESISTANCE: BATTERY FEED
OPEN CIRCUIT
VOLTAGE
22 550 DC 36
24 600 40
26 650
Volts sz dB
FEED RESISTANCE BALANCE: SHORT CIRCUIT TERMINATION RESISTANCE: DC, 20 mA DC, 40 mA AC, 300-3000 Hz 600 ohms, 20mA CURRENT
50
mA
200 200 550 20 13
600 26
300 300 650
D sit i-l? dB
RETURN
LOSS: CURRENT
OPERATING
80
mA
Page 63
SECTION
TABLE
13 CONT: SMarT-lTM
HARDWARE MIN.
SPECIFICATIONS TYP. MAX. UNITS
SPECIFICATION DIAL TONE CO SIDE FEED: INTERNAL DTMF LEVEL LEVEL DIFFERENCE FREQ: DURATION TIME BETWEEN TONES ROTARY RECEIVER To receive To not receive FEED: Gain 300 Hz 350 Hz
-2
0 n/a
+2
dB
RECEIVER -20 -6 -1.5 -3.5 40 30 +3 +6 +I.5 +3.5 dBmt dB % % ms ms
MAKE IMPEDANCE MAKE DURATION BREAK IMPEDANCE BREAK DURATION RATE DTMF LEVEL FREQUENCY DURATION ROTARY TIMING TIMING (Programmable) SENDER (Programmable) (At 60/40): Make Break 40/30 35 55 9.9 400 10 800 60140 SENDER -8 -1.3 40 60 -6 20 8 20 7
700 100
fl ms Ka
100 20
ms PPS
-3 +I.3 130
dBmt % ms
60/40 45 65 10.1 1300
ms/ms ms ms PPS ms
RATE (At 60/40) INTERDIGIT OPERATING TEMPERATURE HUMIDITY ALLOWABLE point T With VOLTAGE: connected to any PAUSE (Programmable) RANGE
0 0
55 85 300
C % Volts
reference
to 6000
Termination.
Page 64
SECTION
RS-232
PORT
6.02 iliary output.

TABLE PARAMETER
Table 14 below contains the specifications for the SMarT-lTM Common Carrier Access Dialer and Call Controller RS-232 AuxPort., This port may be used for programming or for SMDR
14: RS-232
PORT SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATION
BAUD RATE: PARITY: BITS PER CHARACTER: BIT EIGHT SENSE: MODE: OPERATION:
ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL
300 to 19200 Baud programmable; fault = 1200 Baud None Eight bit. Space On line. Full duplex mode. bits per character with
de-
one stop
Table 15 contains the Electrical and Mechanical specifications for the SMarT-lTM Common Carrier Access Dialer and Call Controller. These specifications also apply to the SMarT-lATM unit unless otherwise noted. 6.04 received.
TABLE 15: ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATION
6.03
This section does not contain all of the specifications for the Dialer at present. Other specifications will be added as they are
PARAMETER
DIMENSIONS:
7.625 (19.37cm) Wide X 10.625 (26.99cm) H X 1.375 (3.49cm) D 2 Ibs (0.907 Supply 1 lb (0.453 Wall Mount 115 Volts kg) kg) (Approximately) with Supplied Bracket
WEIGHT:
Dialer Power
MOUNTING: POWER: Range: CONNECTIONS:
AC, 60 Hz @ 300 mA
103.5 to 126.5 VAC Standard RJ31X Network Connections
Page
65
SECTION
The specifications in the Tables above are subject to change without notice. The inclusion of n/a for a specific parameter means that the specification is not available at the time of this publication. It will be added at a later date. .I
6.05
Page
66
SECTION
7. MAINTENANCE GENERAL
The Dialer, as is evident, is a fully self-contained unit. As such, it has no user repairable parts. If the warranty seal over the unit fasteners is broken, the warranty is void. In case of failure, replace the Dialer as follows:
7.01
1) 2) 3) 4)
Power down the unit. This will cut-through to the CO side. Remove shorting Replace Proceed the RJ31 plug from the Telco bars in the RJ31X will cut-through the Dialer and re-connect. as if a new installation.
the subscriber
side
supplied socket. The to the line. Then,
Page 57
SECTION
---
THIS
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
---
Page 58
SECTION
8. ORDERING
INFORMATION GENERAL 8.01 Table 16 below lists the part numbers and descriptions that can be ordered from MITEL DATACOM INC. 16: SMarT-lTM ORDERING INFORMATION DESCRIPTION of items
TABLE PART NO. 8350-00 1 SMarT-1:
4 Line Common Includes Power Bracket. 2 Line Common Includes Power Bracket. o SPARES
Carrier Access Dialer and Call Controller. Pack, RJ31 Cables, and Wall Mount
8350-002
SMarT-1A:
Carrier Access Dialer and Call Controller. Pack, RJ31 Cables, and Wall Mount
8350-010 8350-011 8350-012 8350-013 8350-015 8350-953-00 8350-047-l 1-NA 00-NA
Wall Mount Power Power RJ31X Cloning Installation General
Bracket
for SMarT-lTM
and SMarT-lATM units. units. units.
units.
Pack for SMarT-lTM Pack for SMarT-lTM Cable Cable and Abbreviated Information Manual for SMarT-lTM
and SMarT-lATM and SMarT-lATM and SMarT-lATM
Programming
Guide
Page
69
SECTION
MITL8350-047-IOO-NA
---
THIS
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
---
Page 70
SECTION
9. TROUBLESHOOTING GENERAL
The following pages technician in locating the form of trouble followed Figures Cl and C2 on pages and 3 will aid in locating the
9.01 TABLE PROBLEM
are a troubleshooting chart to assist the problems on installation. It is presented in by a description of a probable cause. C2, C3, along with Section 3 and Figures 2 problem.
CHART PROBABLE CAUSE
17: TROUBLESHOOTING
Cannot cation. Cannot
be programmed program Start a remote
from unit.
remote
lo-
Caused Ground
by faulty or missing connection.
Earth
No Ground Intermittent
operation.
Dial-out.
Failure to recognize incoming call (one-way voice path or internal dialtone on incoming call). SMDR errors. Failure to properly Start detect operation. dial tones. Caused by CO side Tip-Ring reversal.
No Ground Incoming outgoing Failure
calls recorded on SMDR as (Ground Start trunks only). to access program mode Access code has been preceded by an action code, causing cessation of searching before reaching the access code string. Improper Missing access or erased code. access code.
A 904 erase search command was issued without re-entering an access code. Missing tion. or faulty Earth Ground connecof
If a unit has been stored for a period time, batteries may have been discharged. Cold initialization required.
Page 71
SECTION
TABLE PROBLEM No Dial out. Progress tones are followed by dialtone.
17 CONT: TROUBLESHOOTING
are okay,
but
Unit has been programmed to output DTMF while CO is Rotary type. Programmed for Loop Start Ground Start. while CO is
No Dial out after
programming.
Improper Dialer
programming. mode (x23 = 9).
in Cut Through
If remotely programmed, programmer may have neglected to exit program mode upon completion. Dialer will time out of program mode automatically after about two minutes. No speed dials. Speed es. dial trigger not defined in search-
7nn speed call entry calls for an 8 action (use search table) but no table exists for the number in the speed dial. The trunk being used is not programmed to speed dial in the 7nn D key. No SMDR output. Output turned off (parameter 009 = 0).
Connecting cable is not NULL MODEM (pins 2 and 3 in contention). Dialer baud baud rate. Printer rate does not match printer
inoperative. with a
Dialer output has been suspended <CTRL>S (stop) command. Issue <CTRL>Q to restart output. Faulty or incorrect SMDR output. Faulty or missing baud Earth rates Ground.
Dialer/Printer Printer Return
do not match. after Carriage word
requires more nulls (parameter 007).
No parity, two stop not set on printer.
bits, or 8-bit
Page 72
SECTION
MITL8350-047-IOO-NA
TABLE PROBLEM
Call waiting .drops call.
signal
or flash-hook
for hold
On-hook
timing
too short timing
(x03). (x04). pe-
Flash allowed
too short
Flash allowed timing set for a longer riod that on-hook timing. Failure to acquire functions. Dialer re-order dialtone on redial x05 time between release and reseize too short for the particular CO. xl 1 inter-digit Not enabled timeout (parameter too short. x26 = 0). to if oc-
is
tone
during
slow
dialing.
No Centrex
operation.
x25 Centrex digit desired digit.
not programmed
Parameter 6R4 not programmed curring on auto dialing. Improper OCC dialing.
601 area code not programmed (must be programmed to something even if not used in access control sequence). 6R5 access control sequence not programmed for dial tones present, or wrong route programmed (615 = route 625 = 1, etc.). Access number route (6Rl). No cut through eter. not programmed (7) code
0,
for that
in 6R5 paramresults in de-
No #6 code in 8xx search; lay before cut through. Carefully check 800 searches control sequences. Improper (x70). 911 Emergency not work. number, or 411, etc., will destination number
and access format
One of the 800 searches has superseded it. Always be sure to check the function of emergency numbers. 911, 411, etc., not available change. on that ex-
Page 73
SECTION
MITL835t.b047-l OO-NA
TABLE PROBLEM Alternate cessed. search tables
CHART PROBABLE CAUSE with a 903 comin
not being
ac-
Unit has been mand. Alternate parameter search x22.
defaulted tables
not selected
Improper programming of alternate search tables (821 through 835). Alternate access, authorization, code, etc., not programmed. Correctly programmed going out over DDD. OCC number is area
May be normal if NON detection is enabled (see 6R5); the destination may have been automatically placed in the temporary search tables for the preprogrammed length of time. Memory checksum error has occurred. Check all Dialer functions as soon as possible to ensure their integrity. If all functions are in tact, a power-down, then power-up may clear the problem. A recurrence of this symptom is a sign of Dialer memory problems. An illegal entry has been made and was not accepted by the Dialer. Re-enter the preceding data.
Three
long
spaced
beeps
on off-hook.
Dialer
always
cut through.
Power
supply
module not fully
not plugged seated
in.
Power cord connector. Line cords Power
in Dialer
disconnected. module defective.
supply
Parameter Internal
x23 set to 9. failure, return for repair.
Page 74
SECTION
APPENDIX
A GLOSSARY OF TERMS
The following pages include a Glossary of Common Terminology that might be encountered in this manual. It is presented in the tabular format of term followed by definition. It does not include all possible terms that may be encountered, but tries to include those that may not be common knowledge to the reader.
GLOSSARY TERM ACCESS NUMBER OF TERMS DEFINITION
Al.01
The telephone Carrier (OCC).
number
used to access
the Other
Common
AREA CODE
(NW
ASCII
A three digit code used to designate bering plan area used in nationwide
the geographical dialing.
num-
The American Standard Code is an eight bit alphanumeric seven bits represent one of The eighth bit is a parity bit Other Common Carrier
for Information Interchange. transmission code. The first 128 standard ASCII characters. for error checking. authorization number.
It
AUTHORIZATION
NUMBER
(OCC) required
BAUD
A term used to define the data transfer rate between a computer and a printer, data cassette, floppy disk drive, etc.. It is the reciprocal of the length in seconds of the shortest element of the digital code used in transmission.
BUFFER
An area in the computers memory temporary storage of data. The process of sending printer (via the RS-232
(RAM) that
is used for
CALL RECORDING
dialing information Computer Port).
to an external
CALL SEARCHING
The process of comparing dialed digits (one by one) to data stored in the search tables. The result of the comparison usually results in some action being taken by the Dialer.
Page
A-l
SECTlON
TERM CENTRAL OFFICE
DEFINITION
(CO)
A telephone switching system scribers together. It is usually tral to the subscribers.
used to interconnect sublocated at a point that is cen-
CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
The circuitry in a computer that controls the computers eration by interpreting and manipulating the information stored in the computers memory (RAM or ROM).
op-
CENTREX
Service providing direct inward and outward dialing for PABX extensions. The PABX is assigned a distinct Central Office code, and made part of the numbering plan. A main listed number will give access to the PABX operator.
CUT THROUGH
MODE
All digits ity).
passed
directly
through
the Dialer
(no Dialer
activ-
DATA
TRANSMISSION RATE DDD
See BAUD. Direct dialed Distance Dialing that allows long distance calls to be direct, rather than going through an operator.
DOT MATRIX PRINTER
A printer whose printer head forms its characters by the use of numerous metal pins that punch out the image required on paper. Another method would use jets of ink to form the image. Any method that uses a matrix of dots to form a character on paper.
DTMF
DIALING
A system of dialing that uses tones number to the Central Office.
to transmit
the dialed
END OFFICE
A local central office arranged for terminating subscriber lines and provided with trunks for establishing connections to and from other central offices and toll offices. Telephone subscribers service that allows subscribers in one area to call in another area without a toll charge.
EXTENDED AREA SERVICE (EAS)
Page A-2
SECTION
MITL8350-047-l
QO-NA
TERM FOREIGN EXCHANGE
DEFINITION
(FW
A classification of subscriber service that indicates service from any other central office other than the central office that would normally serve a subscriber. For example, a telephone in N.Y. has a Washington number assigned to it.
GROUND
START
A method of signaling to the Central Office. This signaling requires that a ground be applied to the RING side of the Line to indicate an Off-hook condition.
HERTZ
(Hz)
A term adapted as a unit of frequency preferred for world wide standardization and replacing cycles per second. 1000 Hz = 1000 cycles per second. Companies other than the main telephone companies supply telecommunications service and equipment. that
INTERCONNECT
KEY SYSTEM
A versatile switching system located on the customers premises consisting of one or more multi-button telephone sets and associated equipment. Permits the mutual access to and control of several central office lines. An installed telephone with its associated wiring and auxiliary equipment. Also referred to as a station or extension.
LINE
LOOP START
A method of signaling the Central Office. This signaling requires that a termination be placed across the Tip and Ring to indicate an off-hook condition to the Central Office.
MAIN
DISTRIBUTION FRAME
A frame where cables terminate for cross-connecting central office or private automatic branch exchange, ment and connections to lines.
to a equip-
MEMORY
The part of a computer where information binary form, and retrieved at any time.
can be stored,
in
OFF PREMISE EXTENSION (OPX)
A line connected to the PABX that the location of the PABX.
is at a location
other
than
Page A-3
SECTION
TERM OFFICE CODE NW
DEFINITION Any of the 792 codes that can be used 10,000 line unit of Central Office. as an address for a
OTHER COMMON CARRIER (OCC)
A telephone other than
system that provides normal carrier facilities,
long distance calls via usually at a lower rate.
PRIVATE AUTOMATIC BRANCH EXCHANGE (PABX)
A telephone system located on the customers premises (Private Exchange), that allows calling between extensions without the assistance of an operator (Automatic), and having trunks going to the central office (Branch).
PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE (PBX)
The same as PABX above, dant (operator) is required
with the exception to process calls.
that
an atten-
ROM
Read Only Memory, a memory storage chip that may be programmed by someone other than the manufacturer. This chip can only be programmed once, and becomes a permanent modification when the process is completed.
RAM
Random Access Memory, a section of memory written to or read from at any point in time.
that
can be
RESERVE POWER
A backup operations
DC battery system used to maintain in the event of a power failure.
normal
switch
ROTARY
DIAL
A dialing system that uses pulses number to the Central Office.
to transmit
the dialed
SEQUENTIAL ACCESS
A manner in which to read or write data as complete of information, with each byte accessed in the exact which it was stored.
blocks order in
SOFTWARE
Electrically stored memory, either on a permanent basis (ROM) or for a short time (RAM), that causes a computer type system to operate (a set of instructions).
SPEED CALLING
A method of automatically by use of Speed Dialing.
completing
a call to a subscriber
Page A-4
SECTION
TERM SPEED DIALING
DEFINITION
The automatic dialing of a stored number by a microprocessor or similar unit. The process presupposes that the user will dial a single digit to cause the unit to dial many digits automatically, saving time and effort.
STATIC
Interference caused by electrical disturbances in the atmosphere, or any man-made electromagnetic device.
SWITCHING
SYSTEM
A device
that
interconnects
two
or more
subscriber
circuits.
TANDEM
MODE
When used with reference to the SMarT-lTM Dialer, this means that the dialer is used as an interface between a centralized personal computer and the telephone line (i.e., the Dialer becomes a TONE-to-ASCII converter to allow the display of received tones to the screen, and an ASCIIto-TONE converter to allow the remote programming of another Dialer (or any other device that can be programmed by the use of DTMF).
TIE TRUNK
A trunk
between
two
PABXs.
TIP & RING
Indicates each side of a pair of wires used throughout the telephone industry. The first wire is the tip and the second wire is the ring. Normally, the tip is ground and the ring is battery.
TOLL OFFICE
The office that tional charges).
handles
toll
calls (calls where
there
are addi-
TRUNK
A telephone or between
circuit or channel between two Central a Central Office and a PBX or PABX.
Offices,
VOICE
FREQUENCY
The sound waves when speaking.
produced
by the vibration
of the voice
box
WIDE AREA TELEPHONE SERVICE (WATS)
For a basic monthly charge, the customer is allowed to make calls within a specific region without any additional charges. A WATS line can be incoming or outgoing, but not both. Outgoing WATS is OUTWATS and incoming WATS is INWATS.
Page A-5
SECTION
---
LEFT BLANK
---
; ..
Page A-6
SECTION
APPENDIX
B FCC INTERCONNECTION General REQUIREMENTS
This equipment has been approved by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) as not being harmful to the telephone network when connected directly to the telephone lines through the standard connection cabling provided with the unit. This section is applicable to telephone interconnection in the United States.
81.01
Prior to the interconnection of this equipment, the local telephone company is to be notified; inform the company that you have FCC-registered equipment that you wish to connect to their trunks. Give them the following information:
0
81.02
The telephone
number
of the line that will connect
to the unit.
The equipment being connected is a MITEL model SMarT-lTM or model SMarT-IA Common Dialer and Call Controller. The FCC Registration is EMP 85B-14558-LR-E The FCC Ringer The Connector Number for the SMarT-lTM Number (REN) which
DATACOM INC. Carrier Access or SMarT-lATM is 6.7B.
0 0
Equivalence Jacks required
are RJ31X.
CONNECTION 81.03
LIMITATIONS
Due to the FCC Part 68 Rule, no connection can be made to party lines and to coin telephone service, This unit is designed to be used on standard-device telephone lines. If there are any questions about the telephone line, such as how many pieces of equipment may be connected to it, the telephone company will provide this information upon request.
NETWORK 81.04 CHANGES
The telephone company may make changes to its communication service; such changes may include the change of trunk circuits, changes in the operational characteristics of its trunks, etc. Before doing this, however, the company shall provide official notification, so that the operation of the Dialer service will not be interrupted.
MAINTENANCE B1.05 LIMITATIONS
This equipment has been registered with the FCC for direct connection to the telephone network. Under the FCC program, the user is restricted from making any changes or repairs and from performing any maintenance operations other than those specifically included in this document.
Page
B-l
SECTION
B1.06
There are no user repairable parts within the unit. It is sealed against user maintenance. If opened, all warranties are voided. changes within the unit are permitted cables, as detailed in this document, connections between the unit and jack. by are the
No cabling or wiring the user. Plug-ended to be used for all external telephone company interface
81.07 B1.08
Power supply components and cabling is only to be changed or maintained by MITEL DATACOM INC. or by an authorized agent of MITEL DATACOM INC.
TROUBLE B1.09 CORRECTIONS
For all malfunctions, appropriate field service MITEL DATACOM INC. or its authorized agents.
is provided
by
DISCONNECTION
If it is ever decided to permanently disconnect the SMarT-lTM or SMarT-lATM Dialer from the present line, please notify the telephone company of this change.
B1.10
Page
B-2
SECTION
MITL8350-047-1
OO-NA
APPENDIX
C DIAGRAMS Cl.01 AND ASCII TABLE
Figures Cl and C2 on the following pages are a block diagram and a simplified electrical diagram for the SMarT-lTM Dialer. Table Cl is a listing of the standard 7-bit ASCII codes followed by the code equivalents. Table C2 contains Legal Dialer Programming Input Characters.
Page
C-l
SECTIQN
> INPUT #1 >
RECJGEN. LINE CCT #l <
<
OUTPUT
#l
-i
OUTPUT
I
#3 t-i I
I
#3
I
> INPUT #4 >
RECJGEN. LINE CCT #4 c

-I
<
OUTPUT
#4
<
ROM
BATTERY
FIGURE
Cl:
SMarT-lTM
SYSTEM
BLOCK
DIAGRAM
Page C-2
SECTION
.01&F SUB T TIP GND SENSE
.43PF 1OK 1 100 61 *-..
LINE
II
iNT ----
IIr
1 I I I
, , ,I, r
--------A
---------I
I I , I
I I
I
I I
I I
P TO 1 OTHER CIRCUIl
ITHERE AP
UART
PROM
FIGURE C2: SMarT-lTM
SIMPLIFIED
ELECTRICAL
DIAGRAM
Page C-3
SECTION
TABLE CHAR. HEX. CODE CHAR.
Cl: [;tE
ASCII
CODES J;;E CHAR. t;;i
CHAR.
NUL SOH STX ETX EOT ENQ ACK BEL BS HT LF VT FF CR SO SI DLE DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 NAK SYN ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS GS RS us
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 OA OB oc OD OE OF 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 IA IB 1c 1D 1E IF
Note:
SP ! rr # $ % 84 i * + L ; 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : . ;: 3 ?
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2c 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 38 3c 3D 3E 3F
@ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N 0 P Q R S T U v W X Y Z c A _
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4c 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5c 5D 5E 5F
z : e f 9 h i L I ni n
0
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 78 7c 7D 7E 7F
P cl r
S
t
U
v
W X
Y z 1 DEL
Due to Dialer processing necessities, ASCII entries in the 602, 6rO and 604 paramters of FF or BB will be treated as ## (end the string entry) and can not be entered. Similarly, the last character of the string may not be B, F or #. However, a single F or B within a string is allowed. If the last character of a string must be B, then it must be followed with a non-printing character such as a space (hexadecimal 20). If necessary, the LF, FF, CR, BEL and so on may also be used within a string.
Page C-4
SECTlON
MITLS350-047-100-NA
TABLE FROM STANDARD DTMF PHONE 0 through #, * 9
C2: LEGAL DIALER FROM TERMINAL 0 through #, * A or a B or b BB or bb C or c D or d E or e F or f FF or ff Period Comma Hyphen 9
PROGRAMMING
INPUT
CHARACTERS
DIALER 0 through #,* * # ## C D E F if it is within of a string. ## # # # # # # Exit PROGRAM Exit PROGRAM Exit PROGRAM Exit PROGRAM mode mode mode mode a string. 9
INTERPRETATION
SPACE if it is last character
I .
LF CR Space 999
999
<ESC> X or x
Go ON-HOOK SPECIALS co Cl c2 c3
For LlH4 Tone Pair dial-out 6rO through 6r5 For L2H4 Tone Pair dial-out 6rO through 6r5 For L3H4 Tone Pair dial-out 6rO through 6r5 For L4H4 Tone Pair dial-out 6rO through 6r5
in parameters in parameters in parameters in parameters
601 and 601 and 601 and 601 and
Note:
The fourth column DTMF (LlH4 through L4H4) can only be programmed for dial-out via the terminal. The Dialer can not recognize these Tone Pairs (per se) and therefor can not be programmed via any 16-button DTMF keypad.
Page C-5
SECTION
MITL8360-047-IOO-NA
---
THIS
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
---
Page C-6
SECTION
APPENDIX D OVERALL INDEX

CONTENTS PAGE CONTENTS PAGE
ACCESS CODE SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS A-l ACCESS CONTROL SEQUENCE (ACS) DEFINITION 19 ROUTEACCESS .__._._..__....._...__.....__....____ 19 SEE ROUTE SELECTION. 19 SEE TABLE 3 20 ACCESS CONTROL SEQUENCE CODES SEE TABLE 3 20 ACCESS METHOD NUMBER SEE ROUTE SELECTION 19 ACCESS NUMBER SEE STORE AND FORWARD 4 SEE ROUTE SELECTION 19 ACCOUNT NUMBER DEFINITION 22 SEE ROUTE SELECTION 19 e ACKNOWLEDGE TONES PARAMETERS 57 SEARCH TABLES . .._................ ._ 57 SEE DETAILED PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 57 STRINGS .._ _... ., _. .._..... 57 ACTION DIGITS SEETABLEZ....................................... 15 SEE TEMPLATE DESCRIPTION 14 ACTION ON DIALING SEE SIMPLIFIED PROGRAMMING 10 ADAPTIVE CALL ROUTING SEE DEFINITION OF TERMS 5 ADDITIONAL SEARCH INFORMATION CUT-THROUGH ..__ __ ._ ..__ 19 DO NOTHING _. .._ _.._ ____ _. 19 ENOUGH DIGITS _. __... _.... _._ _. 19 SEE OPERATION :_ 18 SPEED CALL .._ .._ _____ ___ .._....._ 18 SPEED CALL TRIGGER 18 ALTERNATE ROUTES SEE PARAMETERS 47 ALTERNATE ROUTING SEE LEAST CALL ROUTING 6 APPENDIX A GLOSSARY OF TERMS A-l APPENDIX B CONNECTION LIMITATIONS B-l CONNECTOR JACKS B-l DISCONNECTION 8-2 FCC INTERCONNECTION REQUIREMENTS B-l FCC REGISTRATION NUMBER B-l MAINTENANCE LIMITATIONS B-l NETWORK CHANGES __.. ______.. __.____ ._ ., B-1 RINGER EQUIVALENCE NUMBER B-l TROUBLE CORRECTIONS B-2 APPENDIX C ASCII CODES _. _.__ __ _.....__...__. _.__ C-l ASCII TABLE C-4 DIAGRAMS __._.._,...____...._..__....._.,.__..__ C-l LEGAL DIALER PROGRAMMING INPUT CHARACTERS C-5 SMarT-1 SIMPLIFIED ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM . C-3 SMarT-1 SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM C-2 APPENDIX D OVERALL INDEX : D-l AREA CODE SEE DEFINITION OF TERMS 5 SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS A-l AREA CODE (NPA) SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS A-l ASCII SEE CALL RECORDS 23 SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS . A-l ASCII CHARACTERS SEE CALL RECORD FORMAT 29
ASCII CODES SEE APPENDIX C ................................... SEE TABLE Cl ..................................... ASCII COMPATIBLE TERMINAL CONNECTIONS ..................................... ERRORS .......................................... PROCEDURE PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE ............................. PROTOCOL ........................................ SEE METHOD 1 ..................................... ASCII TABLE SEE APPENDIX C ................................... AUTHORlZnTlON CODE SEESTOREAND FORWARD .............................. AUTHORI2ATION NUMBER DEFINITION ....................................... SEE ROUTE SELECTION ................................
C-l C-4 34 36 35 35 34 34 C-4 4 19 19
.......................................
BASIC PROGRAMS SEE DETAILED PROGRAMMING .......................... BATTERY BACK-UP SEE POWER ........................................ SEE POWER FAILURE CONDITIONS BAUD SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS ............................ BEGIN DIALING AFTER 1ST DIGIT SEE EXAMPLE 3 ................................... SEE SEARCH EXAMPLES .............................. BUFFER SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS ............................
33 6 4 A-l 16 18 A-l
.........................
CABLING SEE CONNECTIONS ................................. CALL COSTING SEE CALL RECORDING ................................. CALL COSTING UNIT SEE CALL RECORDING OPERATION ........................ SEE CONNECTING A STORAGE DEVICE ..................... CALL RECORD FORMAT ASCII CHARACTERS .................................. MITEL FORMAT ..................................... RECORD EXAMPLES ................................ SEE CALL RECORDING OPERATION ........................ SMarT-1 FORMAT ................................... SMarT-1 CALL RECORD FORMAT ......................... CALL RECORDING CONNECTING A STORAGE DEVICE ........................ SEE DEFINITION OF TERMS .............................. SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS ............................ CALL RECORDING OPERATION CALL COSTING UNIT ................................. CALL RECORD FORMAT ............................... CALL RECORDS ..................................... CONCENTRATOR .................................... CONNECTING A STORAGE DEVICE ........................ MODEM .......................................... .................................... SEE OPERATION CALL RECORDS ASCII ............................................ PAGE TITLE ....................................... PRINTER.. ........................ __ .............. RS-232 PORT ....................... .............. SEE CALL RECORDING OPERATION ......... .............. SEE OPERATION .................................... CALL SEARCHING SEE DEFINITION OF TERMS SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS ............................ CENTRAL OFFICE (CO) SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS ............................
5 23 25 29 26 30.31 23 28 29 24 5 A-l 25 25 23 25 24 25 23 22 22 22 22 23 23 5 A-l A-2
..............................
Page
D-l
SECTION
CONTENTS
PAGE
CONTENTS
PAGE
CENTFIAL PROCESSING UNIT (CPU) SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS CENTREX SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS CENTREK ACCESS DIGIT SEE CENTAEX OPERATION SEE OTHER COMPARISONS CENTRW COMPATIBLE SEE OEFINITION OF TERMS CENTREK NUMBER SEE ROUTE SELECTION CENTREX OPERATION CENTREX ACCESS DIGIT CENTREX STRING SEE OPERATION CENTREX STRING DEFINITION SEE CENTREX OPERATION SEE ROUTE SELECTION CHANGES TO DEFAULT DATA BASE SEE SIMPLIFIED OCC PROGRAMMING CLONING CONDITIONS PROCEDURE REQUIRED EQUIPMENT SEE METHOD4 ,__.._..______. SEE PROGRAMMING METHOD 4 CLONING TIME SEE PROGRAMMING METHOD 4 CO SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS CO GENERATED DIAL TONE SEE OPTIONS COMPARISON SEE SEARCHING COMPARISON RESULTS SEE SEARCHING COMPUTER SEE PROGRAMMING MEHTOD 1 COMPUTER CONNECTION SEE RS-232 PORT CONCENTRATOR SEE CALL RECORDING OPERATION SEE CONNECTING A STORAGE DEVICE CONFIGURATION SEE CALL RECORDING OPERATION SEE SIMPLIFIED PROGRAMMING CONNECTING A STORAGE DEVICE CALL COSTING UNIT PRINTER SEE CALL RECORDING OPERATION TERMINAL CONNECTION LIMITATIONS SEE APPENDIX B CONNECTIONS EARTH GROUND POWER RS-232 PORT SEE FIGURE 2 SEE FIGURE 3 SEE FIGURE 4 SEE INSTALLATION SEE MODELS AVAILAELE . SEE TELEPHONE LINES CONNECTOR JACKS SEE APPENDIX B CONNECTOR PANEL SEE FIGURE 2 CUT-THROUGH MODE SEE ADDITIONAL SEARCH INFORMATION SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS
A-2 A-2 23 16 6 19 23 23 23 19 23 19 11 59 59 59 59 33 33 A-2 13 14 14 33
25 25 23 10 25 24 24 24 E-1 7 7 7 8 6 9 7 5 7 B-l 8 18 A-2
DAMAGED GOODS SEE UNPACKING _........_ DATA FOR ALTERNATE ROUTES SEETABLE 8 .., _. _...._
.., .._
_...._ ..___ _. _.........._
.._
..__ _.,
7 47
DATA FOR ROUTES SEE TABLE 8 DATA FOR TRUNKS SEE TABLE 8 DATA TRANSMISSION RATE SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS DATA TYPES PARAMETERS SEARCH TEMPLATES SEE ENTERING DATA STRINGS DCE SEE RS-232 PORT DDD SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS DDD ACCESSING PROCEDURE SEE ROUTE SELECTION DDD ACCESSING USING ACS SEE ROUTE SELECTION DDD NETWORK SEE ROUTES _.. _... .._..... _... DEFAULT ACTIONS SEE SIMPLIFIED PROGRAMMING DEFAULT CONFIGURATION SEE METHOD 2 SEE SIMPLIFIED PROGRAMMING DEFAULT DATA BASE SEE METHOD 2 .._..._.__... SEE SIMPLIFIED PROGRAMMING DEFAULT DATA BASE CHANGE SEE SIMPLIFIED PROGRAMMING DEFAULT DATA BASE LOADING PROCEDURE SEE METHOD 2 DEFAULT SETTINGS SEE TABLE 11 DEFAULT TRUNK AND DIALING SEE SIMPLIFIED OCC PROGRAMMING DEFINITION OF TERMS ADAPTIVE CALL ROUTING AREA COOE .._ .._ .__ CALL RECORDING CALL SEARCHING CENTREX COMPATIBLE DTMF/ROTARY DIAL GROUND START/LOOP START LEAST COST ROUTING LINES MODELS .......................................... OFFICE CODE ....................................... POWER ........................................... POWER FAILURE CONDITIONS ............................ RS-232 PORT ....................................... SEE GENERAL OESCRll=rlON ............................. SPEED CALL ........................................ STOREANDFORWARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRUNK SIDE DIALER TWO (2) MODELS AVAILABLE ............................ USER TRANSPARENT .................................. VERSATILE PROGRAMMING .............................. DESTINATION NUMBER DEFINITION ....................................... SEE ROUTE SELECTION ................................ DETAILED DESCRIPTION OPTIONS ......................................... SEARCHING ....................................... SEEOPERATION .................................... DETAILED PROGRAMMING ACKNOWLEDGE TONES ............................... DETAILED PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS ................... ENTERING DATA .................................... INTRODUCTION ..................................... METHOD 1 ........................................ METHOD 2 ........................................ PROGRAMMING METHOD 1 ................. ........... PROGRAMMING METHOD 2 .................. .......... PROGRAMMING METHOD 3 ............................. PROGRAMMING METHOD 4 .............................
46 40-45 A-2 38 38 37 38
A-2 19 19 16 10 36 10 36 10 11 36 53-54 11 5 5 5 5 6 4 4 6 5 5 5 6 4 5 3 6 4 5 4 5 19 19 13 14 13 57 34 37 33 34 36 33 33 33 33
_._
...4
Page
D-2
SECTION
CONTENTS PAGE
PAGE
CONTENTS
DETECTOR/TIMEOUT CODES SEE TABLE46 _. __ ..__............ _..._..., __ ._ SEE TABLE 4b __. ___...... _.......... _... __....... SEE TABLE9e __...... _. _._ __........... SEE TABLE 9b DIAGRAMS SEE APPENDIX C DIAL TONE OPTIONS SEE OPTIONS .__ . . . ..__._ .._...... DIALER CONNECTIONS SEE GENERAL DESCRIPTION DIALER OPERATION SEE GENERAL DESCRIPTION DIALER PROGRAMMING SEE METHOD 2 __.., __ _... __... __.. _.... DIALER REPLACEMENT SEE MAINTENANCE DIALING TVPES SEE DTMF/ROTARY DIAL DIGIT 9 SEE CENTREX COMPATIBLE DISCONNECTION SEE APPENDIX B DO NOTHING SEE ADDITIONAL SEARCH INFORMATION DOCUMENT SECTIONS SEE INTRODUCTION _.._..._ ._ __........ _......... DOT MATRIX SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS DOT MATRIX PRINTER SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS DTMF DIAL SEE DEFINITION OF TERMS SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS DTMF DIALING SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS DTMF TELEPHONE SEE PROGRAMMING METHOD 2 DTMF TO PULSE CONVERSION SEE NON CHECKING.
21 21 50 50 C-l 13 13 13 36 67 4 6 E-2 16 1 A-2 A-Z 4 A-4 A-2 33 22
EXTENDED AREA SERVICE (EAS) SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS
A-2
FCC INTERCONNECTION REQUIREMENTS GENERAL SEE APPENDIX B FCC REGISTRATION NUMBER SEE APPENDIX 6 FEATURES SEE GENERAL DESCRIPTION FIELD FORMAT EXAMPLE MITEL FORMAT SMarT-1 FORMAT FIRST TIME SEE ENTERING PROGRAMMING MODE FORCE ON ROUTE SEE SEARCH EXAMPLES FORCE ROUTE SEE SEARCH EXAMPLES FOREIGN EXCHANGE (FX) SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS FORWARD SEE STORE AND FORWARD FX SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS FX GROUPS SEE CENTREX OPERATION
B-1 B-I E-1 3 30 31 37 17 18 A-3 4 A-3 23
EARTH GROUND SEE CONNECTIONS 7 EAS SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS A-2 ECONOMICAL USAGE SEE LEAST CALL ROUTING ___. _. ___ .._ _. 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS SEE SPECIFICATIONS 65 SEETABLE . . . ..____._..._......_..... 65 ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL SEE SPECIFICATIONS 65 ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS SEETABLE ___.__......._...________..__.___..... 65 END OFFICE SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS A-2 ENDING TONE SEE USER TRANSPARENT .._ _.. _, . . . . . . . . 4 ENOUGH DIGITS SEE ADDITIONAL SEARCH INFORMATION 16 ENTERING DATA DATATYPES _.. __....___. __ .,_._. _____. __._..... 37 PARAMETER CODES _. _........._ ,_ ._. ____... _....... 36 PARAMETERS 39-47 SEARCH TABLES __ ., .__.. _.. _._ .__ ____. _... _.._ 52 SEARCH TEMPLATE _..__., ..__._ _..__.. _._ 36 SEE DETAILED PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 34 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS . 56 SPEED CALL ENTRIES _._, _, _____ _._ __._ .__...._. 51 STRINGS . 3846 ENTERING PROGRAMMING MODE FIRST TIME 37 OTHER THAN FIRST TIME 37 SEE METHOD 2 _...__._. _.._ .._...___.... 37 MPIRV DATE TAG SEE NON CHECKING.................................. 22
GENERAL SEE FIGURE 1 SEE INTRODUCTION GENERAL DESCRIPTION DEFINITION OF TERMS FEATURES SEE OPERATION GENERAL INFORMATION SEE DEFINITION OF TERMS GENERAL PURPOSE STRINGS SEE ROUTE SELECTION SEE TABLE 5 GENERAL USE SEE SIMPLIFIED OCC PROGRAMMING GLOSSARY OF TERMS SEE APPENDIX A SEE DEFINITION OF TERMS GROUND START SEE OEFINITION OF TERMS SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS
1 1 3 3 : 13 3 21 22 11 A-l 3 4 A-3
HARDWARE SEE SPECIFICATIONS HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS SEE TABLE 13 SMerT-1 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS HERTZ (Hz) SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS HISTORY SEE INTRODUCTION HOT LINE SEE OPTIONS ___ ._ _... __
63 63.64 63 A-3 2 13
IMMEDIATE RECONNECT SEE OMIONS INITIALIZATION SEE SIMPLIFIED PROGRAMMING INITIALIZING THE DIALER SEE SIMPLIFIED PROGRAMMING INSTALLATION CONNECTIONS DEFINITION INTRODUCTION MOUNTING SIMPLIFIED PROGRAMMING
13 10 10 7 7 7 7 : 10
Page D-3
SECTION
MITL8350-047-100-N/A
CONTENTS
PAGE
CONTENTS
PAGE
UNPACKING INTENDED AUDIENCE SEE INTRODUCTION INTERCONNECT SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS INTERNAL DIAL TONE SEE OPTIONS INTRODUCTION DOCUMENT SECTIONS GENERAL HISTORY INTENDED AUDIENCE OVERVIEW
7 2 A-3 13
2 2
JACKS SEE APPENDIX
B-l
KN SEE SPEED CALLS KEY SYSTEM SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS 22 A-3
DEFAULT DATA BASE DEFAULT DATA BASE LOADING PROCEDURE DIALER PROGRAMMING ENTERING PROGRAMMING MODE. SEE DETAILED PROGRAMMING METHOD 3 SEE ENTERING DATA TANDEM MODE METHOD 4 CLONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROCEDURE .._ . . _.... SEE DETAILED PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS SEE ENTERING DATA MITEL FORMAT EXAMPLE . ..___ _.. _. SEE CALL RECORD FORMAT _, _. SEETABLE 6 . .._ ._ __.._ MODELS AVAILABLE SEE DEFINITION OF TERMS MODEM SEE CALL RECORDING OPERATION MOUNTING SEE INSTALLATION MOUNTING BRACKET SEE MOUNTING :.
36 36 36 37 36 56 56 _. ., 59 60 34 59 ._ .__ ._.._.... ..__ ___ ., __. _._ _, _. _.. _. 30 26 27 5 24 7 7 *
LEAST CALL ROUTING SEE DEFINITION OF TERMS LEAST COST ROUTING SEE CENTREX COMPATIBLE SEE DEFINITION OF TERMS LEGAL DIALER PROGRAMMING INPUT CHARACTERS SEE APPENDIX C SEE TABLE C2 LINE SEE DEFINITION OF TERMS SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS LINE SPLIT SEE OPTIONS LINE TYPES SEE GROUND START/LOOP START LINES OPERATION SEE DEFINITION OF TERMS LOADING DEFAULT DATA SEE SIMPLIFIED OCC PROGRAMMING LOCAL PROGRAMMING SEE PROGRAMMING METHOD 2 LOGIC LEVELS SEE RS-232 CABLE LOOP START SEE DEFINITION OF TERMS . SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS i SEE GROUND START/LOOP START
6 6 6 C-l c-5 5 A-3 13 NETWORK CHANGES SEE APPENDIX B NNX SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS NON CHECKING SEE NOT ON NETWORK (NON) CHECKING NOT ON NETWORK (NON) CHECKING DTMF TO PULSE CONVERSION EXPIRY DATE TAG NON TONE .._ _. SEARCH TABLES _...__ _, _. SEE OPERATION NON TONE SEE NOT ON NETWORK (NON) CHECKING NORMAL OPERATION SEE OPTIONS NPA SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS NPA NUMBERS SEE AREA CODE NUMBER OF LINES SEE MODELS AVAILABLE NXX NUMBERS SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS SEE OFFICE CODE B-l A-4 22
13 A-l 5 5 A-4 5
MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS MAINTENANCE DIALER REPLACEMENT GENERAL ._..... ___.. _.___ MAINTENANCE LIMITATIONS SEE APPENDIX I3 MANUAL ENTRY MODE SEE PROGRAMMING METHOD 2 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS SEE SPECIFICATIONS SEE TABLE 15 MEMORY SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS MEMORY RETENTION SEE POWER FAILURE CONDITIONS METHOD 1 .......................... SEE DETAILED PROGRAMMING ASCII COMPATIBLE TERMINAL ........................... METHOD 2 411 AND 911 PROGRAMMING DEFAULT CONFIGURATION
A-3 67 67 B-l 33 65 65 A-3, 4 34 34 36 36
SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS OCC HOT LINE SEE OPTIONS . . . . . .._ OCC NETWORK SEE ROUTES _...... ___ .._ OFF PREMISE MTENSION (OPX) SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS OFFICE CODE (NNX) SEE OEFINITION OF TERMS SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS OPEFtATION ADDITIONAL SEARCH INFORMATION CALL RECOROING OPERATION CALL RECORD FORMAT CALL RECORDS CENTREX OPERATION DETAILED DESCRlmlON GENERAL OESCRIFTION INTRODUCTION NOT ON NETWORK (NON) CHECKING OTHER COMPARISONS ROUTE SELECTION
A-4 __......_... __. 13 16 A-3 5 A-4 16 23 25 23 23 13 13 13 : 22 16 19
Page
D-4
SECTION
MITL8350-047-1
OO-NA
CONTENTS
PAGE
CONTENTS
PAGE
ROUTES SEARCH EXAMPLES SEE ADAPTIVE CALL ROUTING SEE LINES SPEED CALLS TEMPLATE DESCRIPTION WIRING CONSIDERATIONS OPTIONS SEE DETAILED DESCRIPTION OPX SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS ORDERING INFORMATION GENERAL ._ .._ _____ _. __. SEE TABLE 16 SMerT-1 ORDERING INFORMATION ORIENTATION SEE MOUNTING OTHER COMMON CARRIER (OCC) SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS OTHER COMPARISONS CENTREX ACCESS DIGIT REDIAL RESTART CHARACTER SEE OPERATION OTHER TECHNIQUES SEE DETAILED PROGRAMMING OTHER THAN FIRST TIME SEE ENTERING PROGRAMMING MODE OUTGOING CALL SEE GENERAL DESCRIPTION OVERALL INDEX SEE APPENDIX D OVERVIEW SEE INTRODUCTION
.-.
16 17 5 5 22 14 31 13 A-3 69 69 69 7 A-4
37 13 D-l
PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS PROCEDURE SEE METHOD4 _......__ __....... PROGRAMMING COPIES SEE VERSATILE PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE SEE ASCII COMPATIBLE TERMINAL PROGRAMMING METHOD 1 COMPUTER _...... __ ._ _.......... SEE DETAILED PROGRAMMING TERMINAL . . . . . . . _.......... PRDGRAMMING METHOD 2 DTMF TELEPHONE LOCAL PROGRAMMING MANUAL ENTRY MODE REMOTE PROGRAMMING SEE DETAILED PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING METHOD 3 REMOTE PROGRAMMING SEE DETAILED PROGRAMMING TANDEM MODE . . . . . . . PRDGRAMMING METHOD 4 CLONING .._ _. ._ SEE DETAILED PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING METHODS SEE DETAILED PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING OPTIONS SEE VERSATILE PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING SECURITY SEE VERSATILE PROGRAMMING PULSES SEE DTMF/ROTARY DIAL.
A-4 _..... _..... .__ 60 5 . ___ _..... __ _. 34 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 _......... 33 33 33 5 5 4
. . . . _.....
PABX SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS PACKAGE CONTENTS SEE UNPACKING .._ _. ___ .__ PACKING LIST SEE UNPACKING PAGE TITLE SEE CALL RECORDS PARAMETER DATATYPES .._ __.... _. __... ,_. PARAMETER CODES SEE ENTERING DATA PARAMETERS ALTERNATE ROUTES DEFINITION SEE ACKNOWLEDGE TONES SEE ENTERING DATA SEE TABLE 6 TRUNKS ..__..... __ ._ .._ __., PBX SEE GLOSSARY OF TERM5 PERSONAL COMPUTER SEE PROGRAMMING METHOD 1 POWER SEE CONNECTIONS SEE DEFINITION OF TERMS POWER FAILURE CONDITIONS SEE DEFINITION OF TERMS POWER OUTAGE SEE POWER FAILURE CONDITIONS POWER PACK SEE POWER PREFER ROUTE SEE SEARCH EXAMPLE5 PRINTER SEE CALL RECORDS SEE CONNECTING A STORAGE DEVICE PRINTER CONNECTION SEE RS-232 PORT PRIVATE AUTOMATIC BRANCH EXCHANGE (PBX) SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS
A-4 7 7 23 37 37 47 37 57 38 39 40-45 A-4 33 7 6 4 4 7 17.16 23 24 7 A-4
RAM SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS RECORD EXAMPLES MITEL FORMAT SEE CALL RECORD FORMAT SMerT-1 FORMAT REDIAL SEE OTHER COMPARISONS REMOTE PROGRAMMING SEE PROGRAMMING METHOD 2 SEE PROGRAMMING METHOD 3 RESERVE POWER SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS RESTART CHARACTER SEE OTHER COMPARISONS RINGER EQUIVALENCE NUMBER SEE APPENDIX B RJBlX JACKS SEE TELEPHONE LINES , . SEE FIGURE4 . . . . _. ._...... ROM SEE GLOSSARY OF TERM5 ROTARV DIAL SEE DEFINITION OF TERM5 SEE DTMF/ROTARY DIAL SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS ROUTE ACCESS OCC NETWORK STEP5 . SEE ACCESS CONTRDL SEQUENCE SEEROUTES...................................... ROUTE OVERRIDE SEE SPEED CALLS ROUTE SELECTION ACCESS CONTROL SEQUENCE (ACS) ACCESS NUMBER ACCOUNT NUMBER __....... AUTHORIZATION NUMBER CENTREX NUMBER DDD ACCESSING PROCEDURE DDD ACCESSING USING ACS DESTINATION NUMBER GENERAL PURPOSE STRINGS
A-4 30 29 31 16 33 33 A-4 16 B-1 7 9 A-4 4 4 A-4 16 19 16 22 19 19 19 19 19 21 22 19 22
___
___........
. _..__.._. . . ___ .,_ .
Page
D-5
SECTION
CONTENTS
PAGE
CONTENTS
PAGE
SEE OPERATION SEE TABLE 3 SEE TABLE 4a SEE TABLE 4b SEE TABLE 5 TYPICAL CARRIER ACCESS EXAMPLE ROUTES ODD NETWORK .._...__..__. OCC NETWORK ROUTE ACCESS SEE OPERATION SEE PARAMETERS ROUTING SEE LINES ROUTING DATA SEE LINES ROUTING DECISIONS SEE CALL SEARCHING RS-232 CABLE SEE LOGIC LEVELS SEE WIRING CONSIDERATIONS RS-232 INTERFACE CONNECTOR SEE FIGURE 3 RS-232 PIN-OUT SEE RS-232 INTERFACE CONNECTOR RS-232 PORT SEE CALL RECORDS SEE CONNECTIONS SEE DEFINITION OF TERMS SEE SPECIFICATIONS RS-232 PORT SPECIFICATIONS SEE SPECIFICATIONS SEE TABLE 14
5 5 5 32 31 6 a 23 7 5 63 63 65
SEARCH ACTION SEESEARCHING ., ____ ..__ __...__. __ ._ SEESEARCH TABLES _. __ .._ _.. ._. __ SEARCH EXAMPLES l+ CALLS TO CARRIER (EXAMPLE 1) 1-c CALLS TO CARRIER, 1+800 TO DOD (EXAMPLE 2) 1+ CALLS TO CARRIER, 1+600 TO DDD (EXAMPLE 4) BEGIN DIALING AFTER 1ST DIGIT (EXAMPLE 3) FORCE ROUTE __. ___ .__ .._ ..__ .._ PREFER ROUTE SEE OPERATION SELECT ROUTE TRIGGER CODE ._. _.. __ .._ .._ ___. SEARCH TABLE DESCRIFTION .._ SEARCH TABLE CODING EXAMPLES .._ _.. _____ _. _. __ SEARCH TABLE ENTRIES SEETABLE .._..._....._.__..___.._.. SEARCH TABLE 801 AND 802 SEE ENTERING DATA SEARCH TABLE 803 AND 823 SEE ENTERING DATA SEARCH TABLE 804 AND 824 SEE ENTERING DATA . SEARCH TABLE 807 AND 827 SEE ENTERING DATA SEARCH TABLE 808 AND 828 SEE ENTERING DATA SEARCH TABLE 810 AND 830 SEE ENTERING DATA SEARCH TABLE 811 AND 831 SEE ENTERING DATA SEARCH TABLES CODES ._____. ______ . ..__ .._ DEFAULT SElTlNGS SEE ACKNOWLEDGE TONES SEE ENTERING DATA SEE NON CHECKING SEESEARCHING . . . .._.___.__._ ___.._.. SEETABLE ._........................
14 53.54 17 17 18 18 16 16 17 16 16 14 52 53,54 55 55 55 56 56 56 56 : 55.56 52 57 52 22 14 53.54
SEARCH TEMPLATE DEFINITION SEE ENTERING DATA SEARCH-TEMPLATES DATATYPES . ..____...... SEARCHING COMPARISON COMPARISON RESULTS SEARCH TABLES _.__.. _.. _. SEARCHING ACTION SEE DETAILED DESCRIPTION SEARCHING ACTION SEE SEARCHING SECURITY SEE STORE AND FORWARD SECURITY ACCESS CODE SEE SIMPLIFIED OCC PROGRAMMING SELECT ROUTE SEE SEARCH EXAMPLES SEQUENTIAL ACCESS SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS SERVICE SEE MODELS SIMPLIFIED DIALING SEE SPEED CALL SIMPLIFIED ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM SEE FIGURE C2 SIMPLIFIED OCC PROGRAMMING SEE SIMPLIFIED PROGRAMMING ACTION ON DIALING SEE INSTALLATION SEE SIMPLIFIED OCC PROGRAMMING SIMPLIFIED PROGRAMMING ACTION ON DIALING INITIALIZING THE DIALER SEE INSTALLATION SIMPLIFIED OCC PROGRAMMING SMarT-1 CALL RECORD FORMAT FIELDS SEE TABLE 7 SMarT-1 FORMAT EXAMPLE SEE CALL RECORD FORMAT SEE TABLE 7 SMarT-1 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS SEE TABLE 13 SMerT-1 ORDERING INFORMATION SEE ORDERING INFORMATION SMarT-1 SIMPLIFIED ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM SEE APPENDIX C SEE FIGURE C2 SMerT-1 SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM SEE APPENDIX C SEE FIGURE Cl SOFTWARE SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS SPECIAL FUNCTIONS CODING .._... _._ .._ SEE ENTERING DATA SEE TABLE 12 SPECIFICATIONS ELECTRICAL ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL HARDWARE .__ .._ __ .____..._ ., MECHANICAL RS-232 PORT SPEED CALL SEE ADDITIONAL SEARCH INFORMATION SEE DEFINITION OF TERMS SPEED CALL ACTIVATION SEE SPEED CALL SPEED CALL AREA SIZE SEE SPEED CALL SPEED CALL ENTRIES CODES ..__ _.__ _,_ .._ ., SEE ENTERING DATA SEE TABLE 10
17 A-4 5 6 c-3 11 10 10 7 10 10 10 11 29 31 26 29 63.64 69 C-l c-3 C-l c-2 A-4 55 56 57 65 65 63 85 65 16 6 6 6 51 51 51
.-
Page
D-6
SECTION
MITUWO-047-1
OO-NA
CONTENTS
PAGE
CONTENTS
PAGE
SPEED CALL TRIGGER SEE ADDITIONAL SEARCH INFORMATION SPEED CALLING SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS SPEED CALLS KEY .._ .._ ___ ___.........._ ROUTE OVERRIDE __ ._ ___................. SEE OPERATION ._ __ ____.................. SPEED DIALING SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS STATIC SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS STORAGE DEVICE PRINTER. _. ..__ ___ __.._ ..__ TERMINAL ._...... __ ._ ___ ___.........__ STORE SEE STORE AND FORWARD STORE AND FORWARD SEE DEFINITION OF TERMS STRING DEFINITION STRING DATA ENTRV SEE TABLE 9 STRING ENTRV EXAMPLE SEE STRINGS ._ ___...... _.... STRINGS DATATYPES _. _...., ..__........... SEE ACKNOWLEDGE TONES SEE ENTERING DATA SEETABLE 9....................................... SEE TABLE 9a __...._ SEETABLE9b . . . . . . . STRING ENTRY EXAMPLE SWITCHING SVSTEM SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM SEE FIGURE Cl SYSTEM WIDE DATA PARAMETERS SEE TABLE 6................................----.--
16 A-4 22 22 22 A-5 A-5 24 24 4 4 36 49.50 46 37 57 48 50 50 . 50 46 A-5 C-4 39
TROUBLE CORRECTIONS SEE APPENDIX B TROUBLESHOOTING GENERAL _.... __.. _... TROUBLESHOOTING CHART SEE TABLE 17 SEE TROUBLESHOOTING TRUNK SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS TRUNK ACCESS SEE GENERAL DESCRIPTION TRUNK PROGRAMMING SEE GENERAL DESCRIPTION TRUNK SIDE DIALER CONNECTIONS SEE DEFINITION OF TERMS TRUNK NPES SEE GROUND START/LOOP START TRUNKS SEE TABLE 6 TVPE OF LINES SEE GENERAL OESCRll=rlON TYPE OF UNIT SEE APPENDIX B TYPICAL CARRIER ACCESS EXAMPLE SEE ROUTE SELECTION
B-2 71 71-74 71 A-5 13 13 .,. 4 4 4 39-45 13 B-l 21
. . .
UNIT SIZE SEE MOUNTING UNPACKING SEE INSTALLATION USERTRANSPARENT SEE DEFINITION OF TERMS USOCRJ31X JACK AND CABLE ASSEMBLY SEE FIGURE 4
.......
....... ....... .......
7 7 4 9
TANDEM MODE SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS SEE METHOD 3 SEE PROGRAMMING METHOD TELEPHONE LINES SEE CONNECTIONS TEMPLATE SEE TEMPLATE DESCRIPTION TEMPLATE DESCRIPTION SEE OPERATION TEMPLATE DIGITS SEETABLE 1 _. ____.... SEE TEMPLATE DESCRIPTION. TERMINAL SEE CONNECTING A STORAGE SEE PROGRAMMING METHOD TIE TRUNK SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS TIP & RING SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS TOLL OFFICE SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS TONES SEE DTMF/ROTARY DIAL TRAFFIC STUDIES SEE CALL RECORDING TRANSFORMER SEE POWER _. _..... _. TRIGGER CODE SEE SEARCH EXAMPLES
.._ 3 .._
_._
A-5 56 33 ..__ 7 14 14
VERSATILE PROGRAMMING SEE DEFINITION OF TERMS VOICE FREQUENCY SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS VOLTAGE REQUIREMENTS SEE POWER
.A-5
_____
__
_..,
.._
..____
.___
._ _._
__ 15 14 24 33 A-5 A-5
WATS SEE CENTREX OPERATION SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS WIDE AREA TELEPHONE SERVICE (WATS) SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS WIRING CONSIDERATIONS RS-232 CABLE SEE OPERATION
23 A-5 A-5 31 31
DEVICE 1
A-5 4
1+ CALLS TO CARRIER SEE EXAMPLE 1 SEE SEARCH EXAMPLES l+ CALLS TO CARRIER, 1+800 TO DDD SEE EXAMPLE 2 SEE SEARCH EXAMPLES l+ CALLS TO CARRIER, l+BOO TO DDD SEE EXAMPLE 3 SEE SEARCH EXAMPLES
......
...... ...... ...... ....... .......
17 17 17 17 16 16
.._. ___ __.. ____
___............ __________ ._ .._.
5 6 16 411 AND 911 PROGRAMMING SEE METHOD 2
34
Page
D-7
SECTION
MlTtL
ENGINEERING
PRACTICE
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA Issue 1, April 1986
SUPPLEMENT GENERAL INFORMATION
TO MANUAL
COMMON
CARRlER ACCESS DIALER
AND CALL CONTROLLER WITH POSITIVE ACCOUNT VERIFICATION
- Copyright of MITEL DATACOM INC. 1986 TM - Trademark of MITEL DATACOM INC. @ - Registered Trademark of MITEL CORPORATION
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
---
THIS
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
---
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
NOTICE
TO U.S. CUSTOMERS
WARNING
Common Carrier Access and Call Controller (PAV) generates, uses, and can The SMarT-lTM radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions manual, may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operatedin a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case the user, at his own expense, will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.
Page
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
---
THIS
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
---
Page
ii
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
NOTICE
TO CANADIAN
CUSTOMERS
WARNING
The Canadian Department of Communications label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety requirements. The Department does not guarantee that the equipment will operate to the users satisfaction. Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissable to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some cases, the companys inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure, for their own protection, that the electrical ground connections to the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
CAUTION Users should not attempt to make such connections appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, themselves, as required. but should contact the
The Load Number (LN) assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load, to be connected to a telephone loop, that is used by the device to prevent overloading. The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load Numbers of all of the devices doesn not exceed 100. An alphabetic suffix is also specified in the Load Number and designates the appropriate ringing type (A or B), if applicable. For example, LN = 20 A designates a Load Number of 20 and an Atype ringer.
Page
iii
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
---
THIS
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
---
Page
iv
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
IMPORTANT
NOTES
Please note that MITEL DATACOM INC. has set up a National Field Service number for technical and installation assistance located in Dallas, Texas. This number is 12141 386-9400 for U.S. customers only (outside of normal -working hours, a telephone answering service has been established for your convenience at this same number). For Canadian customers, please contact your local MITEL Regional Office. The SMarT-lTM Dialer includes an on-board battery back-up system to loss of customer database. Besides protecting against loss of data during power outages, this battery back-up should also provide sufficient memory allow the Dialer to be programmed by the distributor and then transported tomers site for installation. This battery back-up, however, is not intended for periods and cannot be guaranteed to support memory for long periods of time. prevent the momentary retention to to the cuslong storage
As received from the factory, the Dialer battery is not guaranteed to have a full charge applied to it. In fact, the battery is likely to be only partially charged in view of the time in transit, and distributor storage time. No guarantee of any battery charge status can be made until the Dialer has been powered up for a period of time. A period of 24 hours is necessary to achieve a full charge on the battery. Upon removal from its shipping carton, the Dialer should be powered up for a period of time and then X INITIALIZED to load the operating system and default database into memory. Initialization may only be performed with a DTMF telephone set and requires connection to a working telephone line or an acceptable substitute. Never rely on programming entered into a Dialer until it has been X INITIALIZED (see Page 19, para. 5.04). Note that there is a short tone burst heard in the earpiece of the phone upon initialization. This tone indicates a successful initialize sequence has occurred. Once initialized, the Dialer should seldom Load Default Data Command that will restore INITIALIZE has been performed. Once initialized, RS-232 Input. ever have to be initialized again. There is a memory to the initialized state once a X the Dialer will also respond to input via the
REASONS Dialer has just been
FOR ADDITIONAL from storage
?c INITIALIZE or shipping the tone carton.
OPERATIONS
removed
No toneburst
upon release
of the x Key. Maybe have been deleted
was missed
- check
carefully. have been
accidentally
or the access
codes
Long storage
Page
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
---
THIS
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
---
Page vi
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
COMMON
CARRIER ACCESS DIALER AND CALL CONTROLLER
WITH
POSlTlVE ACCOUNT
VERIFICATION
PAGE 1
1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 5 5 7 7 . . 9 9 9 9 9 12 12 12 16 16 16 19 19 19 20 20
CONTENTS ...................................... 1. INTRODUCTION ............................. DOCUMENT OBJECTIVES ............................... DOCUMENT OVERVIEW ................................ INTENDED AUDIENCE ................................ DOCUMENT HISTORY ................................. READER COMMENTS ........................... DOCUMENT CONVENTIONS
2. GENERAL
............................... DESCRIPTION .......................... FEATURES AND CAPABILITIES ................................ DIALER DESCRIPTION .................................... ........................................ HARDWARE ...................................... RS-232 PORT ..... ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL .-. .....................
3. SPECIFICATIONS
4. UNPACKING,
INSTALLATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION ............................ SHIPPING AND RECEIVING Unpacking.. ..................................... Repacking ....................................... ........................ INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ............................. POWER REQUIREMENTS MOUNTING ....................................... .................................... CONNECTIONS ......................... RS-232 Port Configuration ....................... RJ31X USOC Jack and Cable ............................ ORDERING INFORMATION ............................ DESCRIPTION GENERAL ......................................... ............................ INITIALIZING THE DIALER ................................ SPECIFIC DEFAULTS 903 Default Command - Standard O.C.C. Dialer .................................. DEFAULT LISTING .................................. USER OPERATION ............................ PROGRAMMING .................................... INTRODUCTION
5.OPERATING
.........
20
22 23 23
6. DETAILED
Page vii
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
CONTENTS SPECIAL FUNCTIONS ................................ SYSTEM WIDE PARAMETERS .......................... TRUNK RELATED PARAMETERS ........................ ROUTE RELATED PARAMETERS ........................ SEARCH TABLE ZERO CHANGES ....................... Default Addition ................................. Action Digit Addition ............................. SEARCH TABLE ONE ................................ Action Digit Changes ............................. STRING DATA ENTRY CHANGES ....................... PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES ........................... Assumptions ................................... PAV LIST MAINTENANCE EXAMPLE ..................... ENTERING SPEED CALLS ............................. SEARCH TABLE PROGRAMMING CONSIDERATIONS Parameter OOOt .................................. MEMORY CAPACITY 7. CONTROLLER ...................... MEMORY SPACE ESTIMATING METHOD ................. CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION 8. TECHNICAL INTRODUCTION .................................... .....................
PAGE 23 26 27 29 35 35 35 35 35 35 36 36 37 37 39 39 41 41 47 47 ........ 49 49 49 A-l A-l A-l A-l A-l A-2 A-2 B-l B-l PAGE
........
AND TROUBLESHOOTING 9. PHYSICAL MAINTENANCE PHYSICAL MAINTENANCE ............................ TROUBLESHOOTING ................................ APPENDIX A ....................................... FCC INTERCONNECTION REQUIREMENTS ............... CONNECTION LIMITATIONS ......................... NETWORK CHANGES ............................... MAINTENANCE LIMITATIONS ........................ TROUBLE CORRECTIONS ............................ DISCONNECTION .................................. APPENDIX B ....................................... OVERALL TOPICAL INDEX ........................... FIGURES 4-1, 4-2, 4-3, 4-4, 4-5, 4-6, 4-7, 6-1, 7-1, 7-2, 7-3,
Equipment Unpacking and Repacking ............... Multi-Unit Packing and Repacking ................. Controller I/O Connections ....................... Typical Controller Installation Configuration ......... Typical Connection Configuration .................. RS-232 Interface Connector ...................... USOC RJBIX Jack and Cable Assy ................. Terminal Data Verification Example ................ Calculation Sht. 1 .............................. Calculation Sht. 2 .............................. Calculation Sht. 3 ..............................
10 11 13 13 14 14 15 25 44 44 45
Page viii
SECTION MITL8350-047-102-NA
TABLES
PAGE
3-1, SMarT-I Hardware Specifications .................. 3-2, RS-232 Port Specifications ........................ 3-3, Electrical/Mechanical Specifications ................. 4-1, SMarT-1 Ordering Information .................... 5-1, Listing of 903 Defaults .......................... 6-1, System Special Parameters ..................... 6-2, System Wide Parameters ........................ 6-3, Trunk Related Parameters ...................... 6-4, Primary Route Related Parameters ............... 6-5, Alternate Route Related Parameters .............. 6-6, Search Table 1 Action Digit Changes ............... 6-7, String Data Entry Changes ....................... 6-8, Programming Examples (PAV) ................... 6-9, PAV List Maintenance Example .................... 6-10, Speed Call Entries ...........................
$6 7
7 17
21 23,24 26 27,28 30,31 31,32 35 36 36,37 37

38,39
Page :ix
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
---
THIS
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
---
Page
SECTION
MIlL8350-047-102-NA
I. INTRODUCTION DOCUMENT 1 .Ol OBJECTIVES
This document contains all information that relates to the SMarT-I Common Carrier Access Dialer and Call Controller with Positive Account Verification. The title of the Section is Supplement to General Information Manual, SMarT-I Common Carrier Access Dialer and Call Controller with Positive Account Verification . For ease of reference, the Section can be noted by its MITEL Part Number MITL8350-047-102-NA . This part of the Section is an overview of the contents of the document and outlines the intended audience. From this point forward and for ease of understanding, the SMarT-1 tm Common Carrier Access Dialer and Call Controller with Positive Account Verification will be referred to in text as the Dialer . Positive Account Verfication will be referred to in text as PAV . DOCUMENT 1.03 OVERVIEW 1.02
The document contains important notices to customers at the front on pages i through v. The first notice is for U.S. customers. The second is for Canadian customers. The third is general. in nature and applies to all customers. If a particular notice does. not apply, that page containing the notice may simply be removed from the manual. Following the notices is a general Table of Contents. This table lists the major parts of the Section, along with subheadingsin the order that they appear within the Section. The manual is divided into 9 parts and two appendices. This part is a general overview of the manual. The second part is a description of the features and capabilities of the Dialer. The third lists all specifications for the Dialer. 1.05 The fourth part describes in detail, all procedures for receiving, shipping, unpacking, installation and connection for the Dialer. This part is followed by an operating description. The sixth part outlines programming of the Dialer for use as PAV. The seventh part describes the memory space of the Dialer, while the eighth part is intended to be a technical circuit description. The ninth and final part describes physical maintenance and troubleshooting. The appendices provide additional information that may be of some use to the installer, programmer, or user of the Dialer. The first appendix includes FCC information, while the second contains an overall index listing topics in alphanumeric order. This index is included to provide an easy reference guide in locating specific information. 1.07 1.06 1.04
Page
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
INTENDED 1.08
AUDIENCE
This document is intended for use as a general information manual for the installer, programmer, and user of the SMarT-1 Common Carrier Access Dialer and Call Controller with Positive Account Verification. The document does not attempt to teach programming concepts. It is assumed that the reader has some programming experience. DOCUMENT 1.09 HISTORY
This is the first formal issue of this document. It is a supplement to the SMarT-I Common Carrier Access Dialer and Call Controller, General Information manual, MITEL P/N MITL8350-047IOO-NA . Subsequent issues will be provided as information is changed or upgraded. These subsequent issues will replace any previous issue. READER 1.10 COMMENTS
If the user has any comments or corrections that pertain to this document, please forward a reply in writing to MITEL Documentation Control in Ogdensburg, N.Y., U.S.A., quoting document number SECTION MITL8350-047-IOZ-NA . DOCUMENT 1.11 CONVENTIONS this manual, the following conventions will be used:
Throughout
SYMBOL . . . A horizontal be repeated
MEANING ellipsis means that the preceding one or more times. item may
A vertical ellipsis means that not all of the statements in a figure or an example are shown; their content is not important to the example. tI
II
I
Double square brackets scriptions enclose items
in statement and that are optional.
format
de-
Braces enclose lists from which the user must choose one item. Each item is separated from the other by a comma , . The less than and greater than signs, used in statement and format descriptions, usually enclose a special key to be pressed, such as a carriage return <CR> key. The greater the terminal than sign, when appearing alone, indicates prompt as shown on the terminal display.
<>
>
Terminal lines use two conventions. If the characters are printed in capitalized characters (upper case), the words are typed as listed. If they are printed in small characters (lower case), they require that some character(s) be entered in their place.
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
2. GENERAL
DESCRIPTION FEATURES AND CAPABILITIES Dialer has the following features and capabil-
The SMarT-1 ities: Compliance with
FCC Parts 68 and 15 for the SMarT-1 for the unit (MITEL P/N 8350-005) unit (MITEL P/N
Four Line capacity Two Line 8350-006) CDR Output Versatile Automatic
capacity
SMarT-1A
Programming Route Selection (ARS) on length of Speed Call
Up to 1,000 Speed
l
Calls, depending or
Installer programmable, Customer programmable
Tone to Pulse Conversion Pulse to Tone Each Code Speed Conversion Call entry may contain its own unique Account
Account
Code Verification selection
(PAV) on a System of Routes to use PAV program
wide
basis
Programmable Safeguarding tent erasure
of Customer s
database
against
inadver-
Separate program entry tenance of PAV lists Progress tones
to allow
customer
update
and
main-
programmable for Account of Speed
on a route
by route on Route related
basis change Account Code
Progammable
Code change Call and its
SMDR Indication number In addition,

l l l
the unit has the following
convenience
features:
Useable with Centrex Lines Useable behind a PBWPABX Hot Line operation
DIALER 2.02
DESCRIPTION
The SMarT-I PAV Dialer is a self-contained electronics unit that provides most of the functions of the standard SMarT-1 Dialer with four times the amount of memory. The Dialer with PAV does not allow search table #I to be used for screening destination numbers. It is reserved for the PAV list. For a description of the
Page
: SECTION MITL8350-047-102-NA
. . ..
standard Dialer, refer to the General Information Manual (P/N 8350-047-IOO-NA). In addition, the PAV Dialer provides the ability to verify user dialed account codes. Other noteable differences from the standard Dialer are: . 1. 2. The unit verifies Account Codes on a System wide basis. _. :::
Only routes that have Account Codes enabled use the verifiable code list. This allows the Dialer to be programmed to do tasks such as to force the verification of account codes on toll routed calls only. The PAV Dialer reserves search table #l for the entry of account codes only. This table cannot be used to screen destination digits. A two step operation is required to accomplish maior database changes such as default database loads, search table flushes, etc. This safeguards against the inadvertent erasure of a customer s database program by programmers or installers. The unit includes a separate programming access the end-user or customer can update and maintain code so that the PAV list.
3.
4.
5.
6.
The unit has provisions for the addition of programmable Progress Tones (beeps heard in the user s telephone receiver) on a route by route basis. These progress tones are IOOms in duration and can be programmed in any number from none to eight for a specified event. The standard Dialer has progress tones (beeps). mentioned above, are in addition to the standard These tones Dailer tones.
Note:
7.
The number of Account Code warning tones (similar to progress tones, but 400ms in duration instead of looms) can be programmed on a route by route basis. The warning tones can be programmed in any number from 1 to 8 tones. These tones are issued to the user if an Account Code is not entered within the programmable timeout period. The Dialer can be programmed to prompt the caller for a new Account Code if the primary carrier is unavailable and the call overflows to another route or carrier. This feature is valid for both automatic and user forced redials. If the call fails to the same route, the user will not be required to reenter the Account Code.
8.
, Page 4
, SECTION MITL8350-047-102-NA
3. SPECIFICATIONS HARDWARE 3.01 Table 3-l lists all of the hardware specifications for the SMarTltm Common Carrier Access Dialer and Call Controller with Positive Account Verficication (PAV). These specifications apply to all models of the Controller (4- or Z-line units) unless otherwise noted. 3-1, SMarT-1 Hardware MIN. Specifications TYP. MAX. 0.7B UNITS
Table SPECIFICATION FCC RINGER IDLE LINE, RINGER RINGING LEAKAGE: OFF HOOK CURRENT IDLE LINE, SENSING GROUND RESISTANCE: VOLTAGE: VOLTAGE START EQUIVALENCE
LOOP START 15-60 Hz, 70-11OV 20-3500 Hz, IOV 15-60 Hz IO 1 40 20 20 15 80 20 KQ MO Volts Mn Mfi mA
IMPEDANCE: SENSITIVITY:
Tip to Ring, IOOV Tip to Earth, 1OOV
Tip to Earth Tip
36 -22 -5
40 -25 0
45 -28 +10 150
KB Volts Volts ms
TIP-GROUND Sending Ring-Ground
10 n/a
OPEN CIRCUIT
VOLTAGE
22 550 DC 36
24 600 40
26 650
Volts 52 dB
FEED RESISTANCE BALANCE: SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT
50
mA
TERMINATION RESISTANCE: DC, 20 mA DC, 40 mA AC, 300-3000 Hz 600 ohms, 20mA 200 200 550 20 13 300 300 650 sl 0 D dB 80 mA
600 26
RETURN
LOSS: CURRENT
OPERATING
Page
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
Table
3-l
(Cont d),
SMarT-1
tm Hardware MIN.
Specifications TYP. MAX. UNITS
SPECIFICATION DIAL TONE CO SIDE FEED: INTERNAL DTMF LEVEL LEVEL DIFFERENCE FREQ: To receive To not receive FEED: Gain 300 Hz 350 Hz
-2
0 n/a
+2
dB
RECEIVER -20 -6 -1.5 -3.5 40 TONES 30 +3 +6 +I.5 +3.5 darn? dB % % ms ms
DURATION TIME BETWEEN
ROTARY
RECEIVER 700 20 8 20 7 100 20 100 fi ms KQ ms PPs
MAKE IMPEDANCE MAKE DURATION BREAK IMPEDANCE BREAK DURATION RATE DTMF LEVEL FREQUENCY DURATION ROTARY TIMING TIMING (Programmable) SENDER (Programmable) (At 60/40): Make Break 40/30 35 55 9.9 (Programmable) 400 10 800 60/40 SENDER -8 -1.3 40 60 -6
-3 +I.3 130
dBmT % ms
60/40 45 65 10.1 1300
ms/ms ms ms PPs ms
RATE (At 60/40) INTERDIGIT OPERATING TEMPERATURE HUMIDITY ALLOWABLE point j+ With VOLTAGE: connected to any PAUSE RANGE
0 0
55 85
C %
300 reference to 600~ Termination.
Volts
Page
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
RS-232 3.02
PORT
Table 3-2 below contains the specifications for the SMarT-I Dialer RS-232 Auxiliary Port. This port may be used for programming or for SMDR Output. Table 3-2, RS-232 Port Specifications SPECIFICATION 110 to 9600 Baud programmable; = 1200 Baud None Eight bits per character bit. Space On line. Full duplex mode. with one stop default
PARAMETER BAUD RATE:
PARITY: BITS PER CHARACTER:
BIT EIGHT SENSE: MODE: OPERATION: ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL 3.03
Table 3-3 contains the Electrical and Mechanical specifications for the SMarT-1 Dialer with PAV. These specifications apply to all models of the Controller (4- or 2-line units) unless otherwise noted. 3.04 This section does not contain all of the Controller at present. Other specifications are received. 3-3, Electrical/Mechanical Specifications SPECIFICATION 7.625 (19.37cm) Wide X 10.625 (26.99cm) H X 1.375 (3.49cm) D 2 Ibs (0.907 kg) kg) (Approximately) with Supplied Bracket specifications will be added for the as they
Table PARAMETER DIMENSIONS:
WEIGHT:
Dialer Power SUPPlY
1 lb (0.453 Wall Mount
115 Volts
AC, 60 Hz 8
300 mA
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
3.05
The specifications in the Tables above are subject to change without notice. The inclusion of n/a for a specific parameter means that the specification is not available at the time of this publication. It will be added at a later date.
Page
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
4. UNPACKING,
INSTALLATION SHIPPING 4.01 AND
AND
ORDERING
INFORMATION
RECEIVING
The SMarT-I Dialer with PAV is shipped in a single carton that contains the Dialer, the Power Supply, a Wall Mounting Bracket, four RJ31X Cables and appropriate documentation. All of these items are protected within the carton by Styrofoam inserts. Note: Some production units do not require brackets since these units are mounted keyslots included on the unit case. the wall to a wall mounting by use of
4.02
In some instances where more than one unit is shipped, a larger carton may be used that would contain five of the smaller cartons. Each of the smaller cartons would contain the items listed in 4.01 above. Unpacking
4.03
The procedure below lists steps to take equipment (refer to Figures 4-l and 4-2): Open carton Check Check and remove contents. for damage. the packing items are list.
when
unpacking
the
1) 2) 3) 4)
each item removed each item against
Notify the vendor if any damaged or defective.
missing
or appear
to
be
Repacking 4.04 If an item is found to be defective or damaged and is to be returned to the vendor, it should be tagged and packaged to to prevent damage. If units are to be shipped from one location another, these units should also be packaged in such a manner as to prevent damage. Figure 4-1 shows how the equipment was originally packed. This method of packaging should be followed as closely as possible. If the original packaging material is no longer available, the returned parts should be wrapped in several layers of aircushion type of wrap, placed in a suitable container, and surrounded with paper to minimize the movement of the items. INSTALLATION 4.06 REQUIREMENTS
4.05
The SMarT-1 Dialer is position independent. It may be mounted anywhere that will accommodate the unit size as listed in the specifications in Table 3-3 on Page 7. 4.07 The Dialer will operate within a 0-55C temperature and a
Page
RJ31WCA31A CABLES
DOCUMENTATIOI
DIALER
CARDBOARD
FLAP
DETAIL
Figure 4-1, Equipment
Unpacking
and Repacking
Page 10
SECTION
MlTL8350-047-102-NA
SINGLE UNIT CARTON
Y---
/--
_--
/--
/--
/-MULTI-UNIT CARTON
/.-\
I-
Figure
4-2,
Multi-Unit
Packing
and
Repacking
Page
11
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
O-85% POWER
humidity
range.
REQUIREMENTS The customer must provide a single with the following recommendations: 115V, 60Hz installed. fused and capable phase power receptacle
of delivering
350mA
per
unit
The power receptacle should be wired and fused independently from all other receptacles that are not controller related. A warning to prevent The power tag should be attached to circuit unauthorized manual operation. receptacle should not be controlled breaker type fuses
by a switch. should be
The live and wired to their
neutral conductors at the receptacle proper respective connections.
The power receptacle must be a 3-wire type, with the wire connected to the ground of the electrical system. The receptacle should be easily the plug for maintenance. The receptacle location should tal removal of the power cord. accessible for the
ground
removal
of
be selected
to prevent
acciden-
The power cord between the receptacle present a hazard to the user. MOUNTING
and the unit should
not
If the unit requires the wall mounting bracket, simply mount the bracket to a surface with screws. Mount the Dialer housing to the bracket by matching the four holes on the rear of the case with the mounting pins of the bracket. Press firmly into place. 4.09 If the unit is the keyslot type, mount by using the provided template to find screw locations. Insert #6 X 3/4 wood or selftapping screws in these locations, leaving approximately l/8 inch gap between the surface and the cap-head. Mount the Dialer by positioning the keyslots over the screw heads, pressing toward and then down from the mounting surface. CONNECTIONS Note: prior to accomplishThe Dialer with PAV should be initialized ing any connections. Refer to Part 6, paragraph 6.06 for the initialization procedure. 4.10
Connections to the Dialer are made at the Connector Panel located along the bottom edge of the housing. Figure 4-l illustrates the connection panel. The steps below outline the connection procedure:
4.11
Page
12
TRUNK CONNECTIONS
[Cl
/ COMPUTER PORT (RS-232) [Dl
Figure 4-3, Controller
I/O Connections
SMART-1 CONTROLLER
POWER SUPPLY RJ3lX CA31A
110 VAC 0 cl
1 L__-_______I L______--____-___I L-,-,___,,__,__,,,,_,,I =n
Figure 4-4, Typical Controller
Installation
Configuration
Page 13
, SECTION MlTL8350-047-102-NA
MDF CENTRAL T_ --a-_ ------- 66 BLOCK OR RJZlX MDF OR CAPlA (T) TIP (R) RING L--l-aI-,ld----J OFFICE T DEMARC _
DF SPLIT TYPE STATION _-_ BLOCK ST
CENTRAL OFFICE LINES
SR _ _ BRIDGE CLIPS BRIDGE CLIPS 1 1 RJBlX I I
EQUIPMENT --
Figure 4-5,
Typical
Connection
Configuration
yrJ 1 2 3 4,5 6,8,20 7
SIGNAL FRAME GND RxD (Signal in) TxD (Signal Out) TIED TOGETHER TIED TOGETHER GND
14
20
25
Figure
4-6,
RS-232
Interface
Connector
(Viewed
from
outside
Dialer)
Page
14
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
I
!-
Figure
4-7,
USOC
RJ3lX
Jack
and
Cable
ASSY.
Page
15
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
1)
Refer to Figure 4-3. Connect a suitable Earth Ground to the screw mount [Al provided on the connector panel. This connection MUST be made for the unit to function properly. Plug the Power Plug the Power AC receptacle. Pack jack into the Dialer Pack AC line cord into power connection [Bl.
2)
3)
a suitable
(1 IOV-6OHz)
4)
Using the supplied RJ31X jack on the Dialer [Cl. Connect the Telco-supplied other end jack.
cables,
insert
one end of a cable
in a
5)
of the
cable
used
in
step
4 to
the
6)
Repeat steps 4 and 5 above for the appropriate number of times depending upon the model of Dialer being installed (4- or 2-line units). Connect a suitable terminal to the RS-232 Computer Port [Dl via a suitable cable. Configuration of this cable is described in paragraph 4.13 below.
7)
This completes the mechanical installation of the SMarT-I Common Carrier Access Dialer and Call Controller. Continue by programming the unit from a DTMF telephone attached to the Dialer or from the terminal. 4.12 RS-232 4.13 Port Configuration
The RS-232 Computer Port connector (refer to Figure 4-6) is a female connector configured as DCE. Only the TxD (pin 3), the RxD (pin 2), and the GND (pin 1) lines are used by the Controller. Pins 4 through 6, 8, and 20 are shorted internally for the convenience of the user. This port is used for programming and call recording output. 4.14 During programming, a suitable terminal may be connected to this port. For call recording output, a suitable printer is connected in place of the terminal. Refer to General Information Manual, Part 6 paragraph 6.02 for the configuration of the terminal or the printer. RJ31X 4.15 USOC Jack and Cable RJ31X Connector and cable Figure 4-5 illustrates the inRJ31X USOC jack and other the unit to operate properly, block must be removed.
Figure 4-7 illustrates the USOC assembly as used by the Dialer. stallation wiring of the Telco-supplied connections from the Central Office. For the bridge clips at the split type station ORDERING 4.15 INFORMATION
Table 4-l on the following page lists the part descriptions of items that can be ordered from COM INC.
numbers and MITEL DATA-
Page
16
Table 4-1, SMarT-It PART NO. 8350-005 I

SMarT-1 :
Ordering
Information
4-1, SMarT-1
Ordering
Information
DESCRIPTION
4 Line Common Carrier Access Dialer and Call Controller (PAV). Includes Power Pack, RJ31 Cables, and Mounting Hardware. 2 Line Common Carrier Access Dialer and Call Controller (PAV). Includes Power Pack, RJ31 Cables, and Mounting Hardware.
8350-006
SMarT-18 :
SPARES
8350-010 Wall Mount Bracket for SMarT-I Call Controller (PAV). Power Pack for SMarT-1 Controller (PAV). RJ31X Cable for SMarT-1 Controller (PAV). 02-NA General Information Manual Common Common Carrier Access Dialer and
8350-012
Carrier
Access
Dialer
and Call
8350-013
Common
Carrier
Access
Dialer
and Call
8350-047-l
Supplement
for Dialer
with
PAV.
Page 17
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
---
THIS
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
---
Page
18
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
5. OPERATING
DESCRIPTION GENERAL The primary function of the SMarT-1 Common Carrier Access Dialer and Call Controller with Positive Account Verification is to provide the ability to verify user dialed account codes when the Dialer is used as described in the General Information Manual (SECTION MITL8350-047-IOO-NA). This feature can be enabled or disabled by programming. 5.01 5.02 The PAV function provided areas. These areas are: by the Dialer lies in three distinct
Expanded memory enabling the Dialer to have up to 1000 Speed Calls and depending on memory use, storage of Account Codes. The inclusion of additional programmable Code route by route basis and Account user. progress tones on a warning tones for the
Account Code verification against programmed to eliminate unauthorized use of the facility. also includes Call Detail Recording output.
Account Codes This verification
5.03
The following descriptions outline typical operating modes for the SMarT-lTM Dialer with Positive Account Verification. These operating modes are unique to this unit. Except as noted below, the General Information Manual applies in its entirety. INITIALIZING THE DIALER
The Dialer is initialized in the same manner as the standard SMarT-lTM Dialer. The procedure for initialization listed below is repeated from the General Information Manual to reduce cross referencing and to include the default command upon completion of initialization.
5.04
1) 2)
3)
Connect
an earth ground
to the Dialer. set to the subscriber side
Connect a DTMF telephone or butt Tip & Ring leads of the Dialer. Connect a standard of the Dialer. With the power telephone
line or network
to the
C.O. side
4) 5)
to the Dialer
disconnected,
go off-hook.
While holding down the * key on the DTMF set, connect the power to the Dialer. A DTMF tone should be audible in the handset receiver. Continue to hold the x key for 10 seconds ing power to the Dialer. or more after apply-
6)
7)
Release the x key. The unit should respond immediately with a short tone from the handset receiver. If the tone is not heard,
Page
19
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
return to step 1 above and start over. The tone burst indicates that the Dialer is initialized and defaulted to its standard configuration. It also indicates that it is in the programming mode
and awaiting a command. the user
5.05
Once the above listed procedure has been completed, has only one option available. This is:
1)
GO ON-HOOK: The Dialer is defaulted as a standard O.C.C. Dialer as noted in the General Information Manual. The only difference is that it is capable of up to 1,000 Speed Calls (with account codes). All of the programming information in the General Information Manual applies to the Dialer in this configuration. DEFAULTS
SPECIFIC 5.06
The paragraphs that follow list specific defaults and values for the Dialer with PAV. Any parameters that are not listed appear in the General Information Manual. They are also the same defaults as for the standard SMarT-lTM Dialer. For more information on these defaults, refer to the General Information Manual, Section 5. 903 Default 5.07 Command - Standard O.C.C. Dialer
All defaults are unchanged from the standard SMarT-lTM unit defaults except that there are no Alternate Search Table entries. Refer to the General Information Manual, Section 5, for a complete listing. Also refer to Table 5-3 of this manual for Speed Call and Account Code enhancements that are provided in the Expanded Memory unit under the 903 default. DEFAULT 5.08 LISTING
Table 5-3 is a listing of the 903 defaults. In this listing, the reader will note that there are some enhancements that are possible with the 903 defaults that are not included or possible with the standard SMarT-lTM Dialer. Once again, the General Information Manual (MITEL P/N 8350-047-IOO-NA) is applicable to all parameters and functions for the 903 command, but with the addition of the listed enhanced operation capabilities. Specifically, in the 903 standard mode, up to 1,000 Speed Call positions are now possible. Each Speed Call may now contain its own unique Account Code, if desired.
Page
20
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
Table
5-3,
Listing
of 903 Defaults
903 DEFAULTED PARAMETER OOOt: 0 = 10 SPEED CALLS 1 = 100 SPEED CALLS 2 = Maximum 1000 possible
speed
calls (3 digit
address)
To use Selection 2, the default 803 Speed Call trigger search table entry must be NOTE: deleted and replaced in the 804 Table ot other table as desired. The recommended Speed Call trigger is: 804 = #I9 #9 #9 #2 (user dialed as xnnn). SPEED CALL PARAMETER DIGITS: The number of digits that must be dialed Speed Call parameter slot is two or three, depending on OOOt above. SPEED CALL PROGRAMMING FORMAT: 7nnn, followed by dk mm . . . mm##. The Speed Call programming format into the
is: 7nn or
If OOOt is set to 0, the programming slot number is still two digits. This must be NOTE: within the range of 00 through 09. A single-digit Speed Call trigger (i.e., 802 *#9#2) is possible for the Search Tables, but must be programmed in the range of 700 through 709 in the Speed Call slots. If a x is entered as a part of the mm . . . mm sequence above, all of the digits placed before the * are entered into the destination buffer. The digits after the x are entered into the account code buffer. The x is not dialed out. It is ignored in the dial-out procedure and only notes the beginning of the account code number. This means that a x may not be a part of a destination number, but if multiple X S are entered in the Speed Call format, the second and succeeding X S will be made a part of the account code. They will also appear in the Call Recording output. The x separating the Speed Call and the Account Code may be positioned anywhere in the mm . . . mm string, or left out entirely. If it is left out entirely, the entire entry will be considered as a destination number. The maximum of a Speed length of the field is 30 characters (29 digits and a x). The maximum Call or Account Code field alone within the 30-character limit is 23 i
length digits.
In the 903 Mode, the 6r5 Access dial out the Account Codes, if desired.
Control
Strings,
of course,
must
be programmed
to
The User Speed Call programming access and speed calls go to search tables (dk = 08). Note:
code is ###.
All trunks
are allowed
access
For installations not capable of transmitting the # sign to the dialer, the program access may be changed to any desired series of digits via search table programming. Waiting for expiration of the interdigit time-out will automatically complete the entry, thus avoiding the ## terminating entry.
Page
21
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
USER OPERATION 5.09 Once installed and programmed, the user will have to follow a predefined procedure when making telephone calls. The steps below outline the procedure to be followed when using the telephone and provide important operational notes: 1) When a user desires to place a call from a telephone, it will be necessary to dial in an account code that is unique to the user. It does not matter which telephone connected to the SMarT-I is used. It is the responsibility of the user to dial his/her particular account code after dialing a telephone number. a) The person responsible for maintaining and assigning the account codes will issue a code to the user. It will be the user s responsibility to retain and secure this code.
; :.::.L .
2)
The Dialer is preprogrammed with certain dialing information for local and long distance calls. This information may be customized at the time of installation. If so, the person in charge of maintenance and programming should provide the user with specific dialing information. a) This information may consist of dialing details when making certain types of calls. For instance, and account code may or may not be required when making a local call. Codes when dialing numbers, do the fol-
3)
When using Account lowing steps: a) b) c)
Go off-hook on the telephone set. Obtain dialtone from the Dialer. Dial the desired telephone number.
Note:
The Dialer may now prompt with a series of tones (beeps) that indicate either the type of call that is being placed, or requesting an account code be dialed, or both. d) Dial your account code. 1 .. .-
Note:
The Dialer may or may not be programmed to return a single confirmation tone (beep) that indicates the account code was valid. The Dialer may or may not be programmed to return a series of slow tones when the account code is not dialed within a certain time period. If the account code is not dialed or is invalid, the user will receive a fast busy (reorder) tone. The call should be tried again. If still unsuccessful, the user should contact the appropriate person in charge to ascertain what problem has occurred.
Page 22
SECTION
MlTL8350-047-102-NA
6. DETAILED
PROGRAMMING INTRODUCTION The SMarT-I Common Carrier Access Dialer and Call Controller with Positive Account Verification (PAV) should be programmed according to normal site specific information. Refer to Section 5 of the Genera! Information Manual for detailed programming information and procedures in accomplishing programming. It is assumed that the user or programmer has read these sections and understands the programming methods. 6.01 Only those areas of special interest to Positive Account Verification or those registers that are affected by PAV software will be dealt with in the following tables and paragraphs. SPECIAL 6.03 FUNCTIONS 6.02
Table 6-l below lists System Special Parameters along with descriptions of each parameter. Special Function commands that are preceded with a 942 are actually two step operations. These commands require the entry of the 942 followed by three more digits (903, 904, etc.) to select the command parameter. When 942 is dialed, it is followed by a double progress tone (two beeps) in the receiver of the DTMF telephone, or by a <CR> (carriage return) on the display of the terminal. Dialing the next three digits will cause the receiver to emit another double progress tone, or the terminal to display another <CR>. Table ENTER 999 980mmddhhmm Exit program mode. for Call Detail Record and Time-of-Day 6-1, System Special Parameters DESCRIPTION
Enter Date and Time Access Control.
902
Enter Data Confirmation Mode. This parameter grammed data to be read back for verification. Exit Data Confirmation Mode. Return to program
allows
pro-
907 942903
mode.
Load Factory Installed Default Database. re-install all default database parameter lete any other programmed data.
This command will settings and will de-
942904
Delete All Search Table Entries. CAUTION - This command deletes all data resident in the 801 through 835 Search Tables. The Controller cannot operate without data entered in these tables. The only reason for erasing this data is if the user wishes to restart with an entirely new data program (continued)
Page 23
Table 6-l ENTER
(Cont d), System Special Parameters DESCRIPTION
and where it is not convenient piece at a time. 942906 942908 Enter Clone Master Mode.
to delete
the old data one
Enter Tandem Operation Mode. CAUTION - This command will affect other traffic on the Dialer. The command puts the Dialer into the ASCII to DTMF conversion mode for Dialer Remote Maintenance. 999 - This command causes the Dialer to exit from the programming mode. If the command is entered from a DTMF telephone, there will be no progress tones following the dialing of the command. If the command is entered from a terminal attached to the RS-232 Computer Port, the terminal will display one space after the command, the notice QUITTING PROG. MODE . When using a DTMF telephone to program, another method of exiting the programming mode is to simply hang up the receiver (on-hook). programs the Dialer for the current 980 - The 980 command date and time to set the clock. The date and time will be printed in the Call Detail Record (current date and time) and will also be used for time-of-day access control. The data string associated with the command must be entered in two digit groups such as: 6.05 6.04
[980mmddhhmml
where mm is the two digit month, dd is the two digit day, hh is the two digit hour (24 hour base), and mm is the two digit minute. For example, if the Dialer was being programmed on Tuesday, February 11, 1986 at 01:OO PM, the entry would be:
[980021113001
902 - This command causes the Dialer to enter the data confirmation mode. Once in this mode, the programmer may check to ensure that all previous data entered was done correctly. It is the method used for verification of data. If a terminal is used to program the Dialer, the data is displayed on the terminal screen. If a telephone is used to program the Dialer, the unit will wait for 0.5 seconds after a parameter entry, then will output the data associated with the entry in DTMF format over the C.O. side of the Dialer. 6.07 For example, if it is desired to verify the Baud Rate of the Dialer that would have been entered by the use of the 006t parameter for 4800 Baud (OOSS), the terminal display would appear as in Figure 6-l on the next page: 6.06
Page 24
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
> /go21 > [0061 6 > 19071 > Figure 6.08 6-1, Terminal Data Verification Example
The > character is the Dialer prompt that requires the programmer to enter some data. The digits in the square brackets [ I are the digits entered by the programmer where 902 is enter data verification mode, 006 is the parameter for setting the Baud rate, and 907 is exit data verification mode. The 6 in the second line is the parameter qualifier returned by the Dialer for the 006 parameter and equates to 4800 Baud for the RS-232 Port. If the same example were verified by use of the DTMF telephone, the programmer would simply dial the numbers. After the 006 entry, the Dialer would wait for 0.5 seconds, then send 6 out in DTMF format over the Central Office side of the Dialer. Each of the command entries would be followed by a double progress tone in the DTMF receiver. This method is not recommended for use in verification but may be used for remote maintenance. Note: All 9Xx therefore, parameters are considered are not verifiable. to be commands and 6.09
causes the Dialer to exit the verificatian 907 - This command mode as described in paragraph 5.06 above. The Dialer returns mode after this command is received from either to the programming the terminal or the DTMF telephone. 6.10 6.11 942903 - The 942903 command causes the Dialer to load a Factory installed Default Database. The command will re-install all default parameter settings as listed in the parameter tables of this manual and the General Information Manual. This load will delete any other previously programmed data. 6.12
942904 - This command causes the Dialer to delete ALL SEARCH TABLE ENTRIES. CAUTION - This command will delete all information contained in the 801 through 835 Search Tables that tells the Dialer what to do when routing a call. The Dialer cannot operate without some basic information entered in these tables. The only reason for using this command to erase the data is when the user wishes to restart with an entirely new data program and where it is not convenient to delete or change old data one piece at a time. Note: After deleting all search table entries with the 942904 command, the default data base can be reloaded by entering a 942903 command. 942908 - This command causes the Dialer to enter the Tandem Operation Mode. The command should only be issued if the is not in service for users as it will affect all other traffic on the
6.13 Dialer
Page
25
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
Dialer. This mode causes the Dialer to become an interface between a centralized terminal and the telephone line (i.e., the Dialer becomes a Tone-to-ASCII converter to allow the display of received tones to the screen, and an ASCII-to-Tone converter to allow the remote programming of another Dialer (or any other device that can be programmed by the use of DTMF (Tone)). SYSTEM 6.14 WIDE PARAMETERS
Table 6-2 below lists the System Wide Parameters that are programmable and different from the General information Manual. Note the addition of the 01 It parameter for Positive Account Verification. Table ENTER ooot DEFAULT 1 Number of Speed 6-2, System Wide Parameters
DESCRIPTION Call Number Entries Available, where t equals:
0 = 10 Speed Call entries 1 = 100 Speed Call entries (default) 2 = 1000 Speed Call entries 006t 4 Baud Rate or RS-232 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 011t 0 = = = = = = = Computer Port, where t equals:
110 Baud 300 Baud 600 Baud 1200 Baud (default) 2400 Baud 4800 Baud 9600 Baud Account Verification, (default) where t equals:
Positive
0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled NOTE:
Enabling PAV forces Search Table #l to be used for storing the user dialed account codes.
System Wide Parameters, if entered by DTMF telephone, will cause a single progress tone (beep) to be heard after dialing the first three digits. After dialing the fourth digit to select the action of the parameter, a double progress tone (two beeps) will be heard indicating that the Dialer is ready for more programming. 6.15 If these parameters are programmed from a terminal, the three digit parameter group and the fourth digit selection is entered as one group after the Dialer prompt > with no spaces. The terminal will display the code group followed by a carriage return. For example, if it is desired to program the Dialer for 10 speed call entries, the display would appear as: 6.16 >
[00001
>
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
where the brackets [ the terminal keyboard on the screen. 6.17
1 enclose
by the
the parameter digits to be entered on user. The brackets will not be displayed
OOOt - This parameter tells the Dialer the number of entries to be entered in the Speed Call tables (7nnn). Any number of speed calls up to the maximum selected number may be entered after programming this parameter. For the method of programming Speed Calls, refer to paragraph 6.43 of this part. The only allowable selections for this command is 10, 100, or 1000 speed call entries. 100 entries is the default that will be loaded if a factory default load command is issued. 6.18 selects the Baud rate that the 006t - This parameter Computer Port will use in communications to either a or a CDR unit. The default rate is 1200 Baud and is loaded initialization. The parameter will only take effect after exiting gramming mode. Selection of rates from 110 to 9600 Baud made in seven steps. 6.19 RS-232 terminal at unit the promay be
Ollt - This parameters enables or disables the Positive Account Verification feature of the Dialer. The default selection is disabled . When disabled, the unit functions as a standard SMarT-I Dialer without PAV (refer to the General Information Manual for more information). In the enabled state, the Dialer forces Search Table #l to be used for the storage of user dialed Account Codes for verification. With the PAV enabled, note that the r54t and r74t Route Related parameters have different meanings from each other. TRUNK 6.20 ual . Table 6-3, Trunk Related Parameters RELATED PARAMETERS Trunk Related Parameters that are from the General Information Man-
Table 6-3 below lists the programmable and different
ENTER x04t
DEFAULT 1 Flash Allowed 1 = IOOms Time, where
DESCRIPTION t equals:
x08t
Off-Hook 0 1 2 3 4 = = = = =
Digit None IOOms 200ms 300ms 400ms
Refusal
Time,
where
t equals: 5 6 7 8 9 = = = = = 500ms 600ms 700ms 800ms 900ms
(continued)
Page 27
Table ENTER DEFAULT
6-3
(Cont d),
Trunk
Related
Parameters
DESCRIPTION NOTE: If x19t Off-Hook Progress enabled, the progress tone x08t timer has expired or Off-Hook Progress Tone is Progress Tone, Progress Progress where Tone Tone t equals: Disabled Enabled Tone is set to a 1 or will not occur until reached 700ms. The 200ms in duration.
x19t
Off-Hook
0 = Off-Hook 1 = Off-Hook x22t Reserved NOTE:
(See 01 It) Whether System Option xl It (PAV Enabled/Disabled) is set to a 0 or a I , Search Table 1 is always dedicated to the PAV list and cannot be used for destination searching purposes. Recognition (GND START), where t equals:
x31t
TIP GND Application 0 = 1 = 2 = 3 = 4= 5 = 40ms 40ms 80ms 120ms 160ms 200ms Removal
6 = 240ms 7 = 280ms 8 = 320ms 9 = 360ms *= 400ms # = 440ms Timer, where t equals: 6 = 240ms 7 = 280ms 8 = 320ms 9 =,360ms *= 400ms # = 440ms
x34t
Tip Ground 0 1 2 3 4 5 = = = = = =
40ms 40ms 80ms 120ms 160ms 200ms
6.21
programs the Flash Allowed Timing. x04t - The x04t command If the Flash Allowed Time is longer than the On-Hook Timing (x03t), then flash is not allowed. The default for the command is IOOms. For more information, refer to the General Information Manual. 6.22
x08t - This command programs the Off-Hook Digit refusal time. The default for the command is 0.3 seconds. The programmable time period ranges from 0.1 to 0.9 seconds and is selectable by entering a number from 0 to 9 respectively, for the t in the command line. For example, if it was desired to program all trunks for a 0.5
second Off-Hook Digit Refusal Time, the command would appear as: > 150851 >
Page
28
SECTION
MITL8350-047-10%NA
on the programming terminal, or when programming telephone, simply dial the 5085 as follows: 1 DIAL 1 HEAR 1 DIAL 1 HEAR 1
with
a DTMF
where p indicates a single progress tone and hb progress tone (two beeps) as heard in the telephone 6.23
indicates receiver.
a double
programs the Controller to use or not x19t - This command use Off-Hook Progress tone when the user lifts the receiver. The default for the command is disable Off-Hook Progress tone. For example, if it is desired to program trunk 1 for an Off-Hook Progress tone, the command would appear as shown below: > Cl1911
>
on the programming terminal, or when telephone, simply dial the 1191 as shown j 3 ; / HEJR ( : 1 HER1 programming below: with a DTMF
x34t - The x34t command selects the time period for the Tip Ground Removal Timer. A period within the range of 0 t0 440 ms can be selected by substituting a number from 0 to 9, or x, or # for t in the command line when programming with a DTMF telephone. If programming is accomplished from a terminal, the x becomes the letter A and the # becomes the letter B . The default for the command is 240 ms (6). For example, to program all trunks for a 120 ms Tip Ground Removal Time, the command would appear as: > [53431 > on the programming terminal, or when telephone, simply dial the 5343 as shown DIAL I 534 I HEAR P I DIAL 3 I HEAR BP I programming below: with a DTMF
6.24
ROUTE 6.25
RELATED
PARAMETERS
Tables 6-4 and 6-5 that follow are the Primary Route Parameters and Alternate Route Parameters respectively, that are programmable and different from the General Information Manual .
Page
29
Table 6-4, Primary Route Related Parameters ENTER r51t DEFAULT 0

Route Progress Tones
DESCRIPTION
(beeps - p), where t equals: 6 = kbbkP& 7 = PbMbPP 8 = &k&h&&b
0 = None I=) 2 = Pb
3 = b&P 4 = Mb& 5 = PPbaP
NOTE:
These Route Progress Tones are 100ms in duration with IOOms of silence between them. Route Progress tones will be given to the user before the Dialer cuts the Central Office audio through.
r54t
Account Code Type where t in System option Ollt is set to a 0 or disabled. t equal to 0 through 5 apply to using initial account code, while t equal to 6 through # apply to using new account code, where t equals:
Initial Acct. Code 0 = Flexible, wait for timeout, then continue. 1 = No Account Code. 2 = Fixed length, wait for timeout, then reorder. 3 = Fixed length, wait for timeout, then enter dummy account code . 4 = Same as 2 plus 10 more digits. 5 = Same as 3 plus 10 more digits.
PAV Code Type, where t in System 1 or enabled, and where t equals:
New Acct. Code

6 = Flexible, wait for timeout, then continue. 7 = No Account Code. 8 = Fixed length, wait for timeout, then reorder. 9 = Fixed length, wait for timeout, then enter dummy account code . x = Same as 8 plus IO more digits. # = Same as 9 plus IO more digits. option 01 It (PAV) is set to a
Use Initial Account

I= 2= 4=
Code
No Account Code. Fixed length of one to nine digits. Send all gathered digits to Search Table 1. Same as 2 with the fixed length being from 10 to 15 digits.
Use New Account 8=

*=
Code
Fixed length of one to nine digits. Send all gathered digits to Search Table 1. Same as 8 with the fixed length being 10 to 15 digits. Flexible Account Codes and Dummy Account Codes are not supported when PAV is enabled.
NOTE:
(continued)
Page 30
Table 6-4 (Cont d), ENTER r59t DEFAULT 0

Account
Primary Route Related
Parameters
DESCRIPTION
Code Warning Tones (beeps - b) where t equals:
0 = None l=b 2 = 6/,
3 = bJJd 4 = 8b6U 5 = bBPbb
6 = bbdP)t) 7 = P&#UPPd 6 = bb#Ub/ld#h
NOTE:
Warning tones are 400ms ON and 400ms OFF. The warning tones start after expiration of r53t Timer. If the user fails to enter a digit before the specified number of tones expires, the user is returned a re-order tone of 200ms ON and 200ms OFF. Confirmation OFF and ON and OFF and ON and code and Reroute Tones, where t equals:
r60t
Account 0 1 2 3 = = = =
Code A/C A/C A/C A/C
tone tone tone tone
Reroute tone OFF Reroute tone OFF Reroute tone ON Reroute tone ON tone is 200ms in duration.
The account
confirmation
Table 6-5, Alternate ENTER r71t DEFAULT 0

Route Progress
Route Related
Parameters
DESCRIPTION
Tones (beeps - p), where t equals: 6 = bk&&k/, 7 = JLUbbPb 8 = bb#UbbLV
0 = None 1=&I 2 = bP NOTE:
3 = MB 4 = bPPP 5 = BMd/i
These Route Progress Tones are 100ms in duration with IOOms of silence between them. Route Progress tones will be given to the user before the Dialer cuts the Central Office audio through.
r74t
Account Code Type where t in System option 01 It is set to a 0 or disabled. t equal to 0 through 5 apply to using initial account code, while t equal to 6 through # apply to using new account code, where t equals:
Initial Acct. Code 0 = Flexible, wait for timeout, then continue. 1 = No Account Code. 2 = Fixed length, wait for timeout, then reorder. 3 = Fixed length, wait for timeout, then enter dummy account code . (continued)
New Acct. Code

6 = Flexible, wait for timeout, then continue. 7 = No Account Code. 8 = Fixed length, wait for timeout, then reorder. 9 = Fixed length, wait for timeout, then enter dummy account code .
Page 31
Table 6-5 (Cont d), Alternate ENTER DEFAULT
Route Related Parameters DESCRIPTION
Initial Acct. Code 2 plus 10 4 = Same as

more digits. 5 = Same as 3 plus more digits. 10
New Acct. Code 8 plus 10 * = Same as more digits. # = Same as 9 plus 10 more digits.
option 01 It (PAV) is set to a
PAV Code Type, where t in System 1 or enabled, and where t equals:
Use Initial Account

I= 2= 4=
Code
No Account Code. Fixed length of one to nine digits. Send all gathered digits to Search Table 1. Same as 2 with the fixed length being from 10 to 15 digits.
Use New Account 8=

X=
Code
Fixed length of one to nine digits. Send all gathered digits to Search Table 1. Same as 8 with the fixed length being 10 to 15 digits. Flexible Account Codes and Dummy Account Codes are not supported when PAV is enabled. Tones (beeps - &) where t equals:
NOTE: r79t 0
Account
Code Warning
0 = None 1 =b 2 = 0U
3 = d&d 4 = bbbP 5=bbPP/i
6 = &bdPb& 7 = #kLLLU 8 = /I,kk%h/l
NOTE:
Warning tones are 400ms ON and 400ms OFF. The warning tones start after expiration of r73t Timer. If the user fails to enter a digit before the specified number of tones expires, the user is returned a re-order tone of 200ms ON and 200ms OFF. and Reroute Tones, where t equals:
r80t
Account 0 1 2 3 = = = =
Code Confirmation A/C A/C A/C A/C tone tone tone tone OFF and ON and OFF and ON and code
Reroute tone OFF Reroute tone OFF Reroute tone ON Reroute tone ON tone is 200ms in duration.
The account 6.26 follow. unless 6.27
confirmation
Since the descriptions for the Primary and Alternate Routes are similar, no differentiation will be made in the paragraphs that The descriptions will apply to both Tables 6-4 and 6-5 equally, otherwise noted.
r51t, r71 t - These

These tones will
parameters select the Route Progress be 100 ms long with a 100 ms silence
Tones. period
Page 32
between tones. The tones will be present in the telephone receiver before the Dialer cuts the Central Office audio through. The default selection for ail eight routes is 0 or no progress tones. A maximum of eight tones can be selected by entering a number from 1 to 8 for t . r is a number from 1 to 4 to select the route for the tones. For example, if it is desired to program Route 2 for four progress tones by use of a terminal, the command would be entered as: > 3514 > When trated using a DTMF below: telephone to program, simply dial 3514 as illus-
Note:
Reroute tones are used in conjunction with registers r51t and r71t (routing tones). If r51t and r71t are set to 0 , there will be no reroute tones if the call changes routes.
r54t, r74t - This parameter selects the Account Code Type when Positive Account Verification (01 It) parameter is disabled. The default selection for this parameter is 1 or no account code. The only time that the type of account code would come into prominence with PAV disabled, would be if the Controller changes routes or defaults to another route on call failure. The controller, depending upon the account code type selected would then either use the initial account code or request a new account . In this case, no account code verification would be performed. If 01 It is enabled, depending on programming, verification will be performed. For example, if it is desired to program Route 3 for an initial account code of fixed length, wait for timeout, then reorder, with PAV disabled, programming from a terminal would appear as: 6.28 > [01101 > 145121 >
When a DTMF telephone is used to program dial the 0110 and 4512 as shown below:
the same example,
simply
6.29
r59t, r79t - This parameter selects the use of Account Code Warning Tones. These tones start after the end of the Account Code Wait Timer period (i.e., the amount of time that a user has to enter an account code, r53t, r73t). Once the tones have started, the user has to enter a digit before the specified number of tones have
Page 33
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
been received, or the user is returned a re-order tone. Warning tones are 400 ms ON and 400 ms OFF. The re-order tone is 200 ms ON and 200 ms OFF. The default selection for this parameter is 0 or no tones. For a programming example, if it was desired to program Alternate Route 3 for eight warning tones, the command during a terminal programming period would be displayed as: > [47981 > 6.30
Or if a DTMF telephone were used simply dial 4798 as illustrated below: 1 DIAL 1 HEAR 1 DIAL 1 HEAR
to
program
the
same
example,
6.31
select the Account Code Conr60t, r80t - These parameters firmation and Reroute Tones. The tones are 200 ms in duration. If enabled, the user will receive a tone in the telephone receiver after entering a a valid account code, and/or upon call failure and rerouting. Either or both of the parameters may be selected by programming a number from 1 to 3 when entering the parameter. The default for the parameter is 0 which disables both tones. 6.32 If routing progress tones are disabled and the Account Code Confirmation tones are enabled, the user will receive one tone before entering the Account Code, and one tone to confirm that all digits have been entered. 6.33
If routing tones and Account Code tones are both enabled, the user will receive the routing tones after the destination number. A tone will also be received at the end of the Account Code entry. If the routing and Account Code tones are both disabled, and r54t is disabled and expects a new Account Code on rerouting, the user will receive the Account Code progress tones. For a programming example, if it is desired to program Primary Route 3 for both Account Code Confirmation tone and Reroute tone, the parameter during a terminal programming session would be: > 146031 > 6.35 6.34
Or if a DTMF telephone were used simply dial 4603 as illustrated below:
to
program
the
same
example,
Page
34
SEARCH TABLE ZERO CHANGES Default 6.36 Addition
An additional default entry has been added to Search Table Zero to allow the use of a PAV List Maintenance Code. This code is dialed by the user when maintaining the Positive Account Code list. It is only valid when PAV is enabled by selection of parameter 01 It where t equals 1 .
Table 803
Template #OH
Action WX Action 6.37
Description
DTMF #K+ is the PAV List Maintenance Code
Digit Addition
One action digit has been added to the action digit list as shown in the General Information Manual, part 4. This action digit is only valid when the PAV is enabled by selection of the parameter 01 It where t equals 1 . It allows the maintenance of Search Table 1.
Action #*
Digit
Action code for (PAV) Search
Description
Table
1 Maintenance
SEARCH TABLE ONE

Action 6.38 Digit Changes
Table 6-6 below lists changes to the action digits used when programming Search Table 1. When programming other search tables, the normal action digits listed in the General Information Manual still apply. The action digits listed in 6-6 are only valid when the PAV is enabled by selection of parameter 01 It where t equals a 1 and ONLY apply to Search Table 1.
Table 6-6, Search Table 1 Action Action 0

1 * #9
Digit Changes
Digit
Return Valid user reorder Account Code, Code, tone, allow allow
Description
Deny call call call
Valid Account Delete specific
Account
Code
STRING DATA ENTRY CHANGES

6.39 Table 6-7 on the next page lists the changes to the string entry as listed in the General Information Manual, part 5. data
Page 35
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
Table
6-7,
String Data Entry Changes Default 504156 #a5327 Description Machine Identifier (PAV in ASCII) Access Control Sequences for Routes 0 and 4
Access
Register 602 615 & 655 625, 635, 645, 665, 675, and 685
#8533#62*427
Control Sequences for Routes 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, and 7 respectively.
PROGRAMMING 6.40
EXAMPLES
lists some programming examples. These examples only cover programming of the registers necessary to enable the Positive Account Verification portion of the Dialer. For other programming examples, refer to the General Information Manual.
Table 6-6 below
Assumptions 6.41 The examples in Table sumptions in mind: The Dialer has been loaded. The programming Route Account been 6-6 are shown with the following as-
1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
initialized
and
the
Default
Program
has
security
code is #OX . dialing. calls only. Code after the
1 is used for long distance Codes are required
on long distance
Users are required to dial in a six digit Account long distance telephone number. Site specific 6-8, Dialer information Examples Hear Enter 1 Enable tion. Verified 6 digits
6)
has been programmed. (PAV) Description programming Positive mode. Verificaof
Dial
Table
Programming
Hear
Dial
Account
252 254 625
6 2 #02 plus rest of sequence to make up the Access Control Sequence followed by ##.
Account Code length for Route 1 only. Codes
Enable Verified Account for Route 1 only.
Program Access Control for Route 1. The #02 causes the Dialer to delay outpulsing until the Account Code has been verified.
Page
36
Table 6-8 (Cont d),

P
Programming
Examples
(PAV) Description
Dial 826 826 826
Hear
_
Dial 123456&k& 654321## 626262##
Hear
P J b
Allows a user dialed Account Code of 123456. Allows a user dialed Account Code of 654321.
Allows a user dialed Code of 626262. Account until all codes
Repeat the 826 sequence of the employees 6 digit
have been added. PAV LIST MAINTENANCE 6.42 Table 6-9 below EXAMPLE
lists an End-user PAV List Maintenance Examillustrates the method to be used to update It has been entered with the following as-
ple. This example the Account Codes list. sumptions: 1) 2) 3) The Dialer Valid
has been programmed Codes
as in Table 654321,
6-8
above.
user Account
are 123456,
and 626262. have been fired new employees
Employees with PAV codes 123456 and 626262 and two new employees have been hired. The codes will be 980934 and 348609. The default Maintenance Access
4)
Code is the DTMF code #w .
Table 6-9, PAV List Maintenance Dial Hear Dial

123456#9## 626262#9## 980934x+Y# 348609*##
Example Description Deletes employee 123456. Deletes employee 626262. Enable employee
980934. Enable employee 348609. Go back On-Hook.
Hear
#u
bb P/i PP
PAV code PAV code

PAV code PAV code
ENTERING SPEED CALLS

6.43 Speed Calls below when may be entered by using programming the Dialer: one of the formats listed
10 Speed Call Entries = 100 Speed Call Entries = 1000 Speed Call Entries =
7nn 7nn 7nnn
dk mm . . . mm x (if used) dk mm . . . mm * (if used) dk mm . . . mm x (if used)
mm . . . ## mm . . . ## mm . . . ##
Page 37
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
Table 6-10 below lists the digits required for Speed Call entries where n is the number or location (bin) of the Speed Call Number. If 10 Speed Call entries are used, nn is 00 through 09. If 100 Speed Call entries are used, nn is 00 through 99. If 1000 Speed Call entries are used, nnn is 000 through 999. d is the key used to determine the trunk(s) that have access to the particular Speed Call Number. k is the Network Override Key that is used to select the allowed routing for the particular Speed Call Number. mm . . . mm is the telephone number to be dialed. * is the delimiter used to tell the Dialer that if any other digits are entered, they will be considered Account Code Digits as illustrated by the p entries. ## is the Speed Call number entry terminator and will cause the number to be entered into the Dialer memory.
6.44
Table FIRST DIAL 7nndkmm...mm## or 7nndkmm...mmxpp...pp## 7nndkmm...mm## or 7nndkmm...mmxpp...pp## -/nnndkmm...mm## or 7nnndkmm...mmxpp...pp##
6-10, DIGIT
Speed = 7
Call Entries SPEED CALL
DEFINITION Format for IO Speed Call entries where: nn is the number of the Speed Call entry
(00 - 09).
Format for 100 Speed Call entries nn is the number of the Speed
where: Call entry
(00 - 99).
Format for 1000 Speed Call entries nnn is the number of the Speed
where: Call entry
(000
- 999).
d is the key that selects call number as follows: DIGIT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 * # C D E ALLOWED
the trunks
to access
the
TRUNKS
ALL TRUNK 1 TRUNK 2 TRUNKS I,2 TRUNK 3 TRUNKS I,3 TRUNKS 2,3 TRUNKS 1,2,3 TRUNK 4 TRUNKS I,4 TRUNKS 2,4 TRUNKS I ,2,4 TRUNKS 3,4 TRUNKS 1,3,4 TRUNKS 2,3,4 above may be made from
NOTE: The C, D, and E entries a terminal.
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
Table DIAL
6-10
(Cont d),
Speed
Call Entries DEFINITION
k is the network 0 - 3 4 - 7 8 9
override:
Force on Route #O - #3. Force on Route #4 - 7. Use search table to determine routing. Dial immediate, no Route # (transparent).
mm...mm is the phone number. If the % is entered, the digits after the * are considered to be Account Code ( p s). ## enters the Speed Call Number into the Dialer s memory. speed dial entry nn (100 entries). speed dial entry nnn (1000 entries).
7nn## 7nnn##
I 1)
Delete Delete
After entering all Speed Calls, exit the programming mode by going On-Hook; or by dialing 999 on the DTMF Handset or, if using a terminal, typing an X . If it is necessary to re-enter the program mode, the default access codes are the same as those of a standard Dialer. They are: a) #Ox from the DTMF Handset, or b) ### from a user Speed Call entry viewpoint, or c) Carriage Return (<CR>) from a terminal. Data confirmation may be accomplished from the programming mode with the use of a terminal. The 902 command will enter the data confirmation mode and allow the reading back of Speed Call entries (or any other parameter). The 907 command is used to exit the data confirmation mode. TABLE PROGRAMMING CONSIDERATIONS (FOR SPEED
2)
3)
SEARCH CALL) Parameter 6.45
OOOt the number of Speed Call entries al-
Parameter OOOt selects lowed where t equals:
0 = 10 Speed Call Entries 1 = 100 Speed Call Entries 2 = 1000 Speed Call Entries 6.46 To use 1000 Speed Call entries, the default Speed Call Trigger in Table 803 must be deleted. It must be placed in Table 804 (or higher). The recommended Speed Call Trigger is the digit K. If this digit is used, a Speed Call is dialed by pressing the * followed by the location (bin) of the Speed Call. To set up the 803 and 804 tables when programming, enter:
Page 39
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
803 *#9#9#9## 804 *#9#9#9#2## 6.47
Deletes Programs
defaulted Xnnn
*nn
into Dialer
If OOOt is set to 0 , the programming slot number is still two digits. This must be within the range of 00 through 09. A single digit Speed Call Trigger (i.e., 802 H9#2) is possible for the Search Tables, but must be programmed within the range of 700 through 709 in the Speed Call slots. The maximum length of the Speed Call field is 30 characters (29 digits and a XC). The maximum length of a Speed Call or an Account Code field alone within the 30 character limit is 23 digits. 6.48
.. ..
.. .
Page 40
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
7. CONTROLLER
MEMORY
CAPACITY
7.01
The PAV useable memory consists of an 8K X 8 bit battery backed up Random Access Memory (RAM) chip that is capable of holding approximately 14,500 characters. This memory area is available for the storage of parameters and data at programming time. The rest of the available space is used for program execution overhead. It is unlikely that a programmer will completely fill the RAM area with data. In the event that memory space becomes a matter of concern, the ground rules for estimating memory usage are discussed in the paragraphs to follow starting with paragraph 7.04.
7.02
If a programmer runs out of space while programming the Controller, none of the previously programmed data will be lost. The controller simply refuses any more programming after complete memory usage by displaying a question mark (?) on the terminal screen at the termination of each data entry on the keyboard. If it is suspected that RAM space has been completely used up, contact the distributor or the MITEL DATACOM Field Service Office. Once contacted, these personnel can verify that all RAM space has been used, and can possibly recommend more efficient programming techniques that can remedy the situation. As previously mentioned, the programmer should almost never run out of RAM space for parameters and data. 7.04 Estimates of the memory space required versus the available memory space are possible. The programmer can, therefore, estimate the memory space required before programming and can determine if the available space is insufficient. MEMORY 7.05 SPACE ESTIMATING METHOD
7.03
The simplest way to determine if the the intended data base will fit into available memory is to calculate the space required by the data. This space is then compared to the space available according to the following rules:
1)
There are approximately 14,500 available data spaces in a freshly initialized Dialer. These spaces are used to store programmed data. All data to be programmed into the Dialer will use this space with the exception of default settings. If a default setting is used, it will not decrease the available space. Space is mainly consumed by the parameters which are defined as string entries and require the ## terminator for entry. Entries that do not require the ## terminator may be ignored in calculations. A Search Table entry (parameters 801 through 815) occupies a number of spaces equal to the length of the template plus the action digits. For example, an 804 Search Table entry such as 804 1315 0 ## is four digits plus one action digit for a total of five memory spaces. The 804 and ## entries are not counted.
2)
Page
41
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
An entry of 803 #9#9#9#2 for a total of eight memory 3)
is six digits spaces.
plus two
action
digits
An Account Code entry (parameters 821 through 835) occupies the number of spaces equal to the length of the template (account code) plus the action digits. The account code 12345 with an action of valid account code, allow call would be programmed as 825 12345 ## and would require six spaces. The 825 and ## entries are not counted. A Speed Call entry occupies a number of spaces equal to the length of the Speed Call plus six (an internal Controller requirement) spaces. This number must be rounded off to the next larger even number if the result is odd. For example, a Speed Call programmed as 7nnn 8 139311212 ## requires 14 spaces in memory. The eight digits of the telephone number plus six additional for the Controller equals 14. The 7nnn and ## entries are not counted. Access Control strings, OCC Access Numbers, OCC Authorization Codes, etc., all count, but in general require so little space that they may be neglected for the purpose of space estimations. Deleting a Speed Call with the 7nnn## command does not reclaim all memory previously occupied by that entry. After deletion, the memory space increase only by the number of digits in the removed speed call number and not by the + 6 factor that was added in the calculation in 4) above.
4)
5)
Note:
Figures 7-l through 7-3 are calculation worksheets that have been included to assist in memory space calculations. Figure 7-l is to be used in calculating Search Table space. Figure 7-2 is to be used in calculating Account Code space, and Figure 7-3 is to be used in calculating Speed Call number space. These figures are located at the end of this part. 7.06 7.07 The sum of the Search Tables + Account Codes + Speed Call Numbers must be less than approximately 14,500 spaces. Using the assumption that there will be one speed call number for each password, and that the 801 through 815 search tables are not required to be programmed (as is the usual case), the following generalizations can be made: Let X = QUANTITY ACCT. (Length 7.08 CODES + 2) X + SPEED (Length CALLS + 6) X = 14,500
For example, assume that the unit is programmed with all 5 digit Account Codes and 7 digit Speed Call numbers. Using the equation under paragraph 7.07 above, the amount of space used would be 725 spaces as shown below: (5 + 2)X + (7 + 6)X = 14,500
Page 42
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
7x + 13x = 14,500 20x = 14500
x=
20
14500
X = 725 Therefore, 725 five digit account codes and 725 seven numbers may be safely stored in the RAM memory. 7.09 Another example would as many account codes are still 5 digits long and speed (5 + 2)2X (7)2X digit speed calls
be to assume that there will be twice as speed call numbers. Account codes call numbers are 7 digits long:
+ (7 + 6)X = 14,500
+ 13X = 14,500
14x + 13x = 14500 27X = I4500
x=
27
14500
x = 537 Therefore, 1,074 five digit account codes (2X) and 537 seven speed call numbers may safely be stored in the RAM memory. 7.10 If the extreme case above, up to 381 speed call numbers could who demand more detailed X and Y unknowns would account code/speed call both lengths and quantities to use the charts included, digit
were considered and based on the formula 15-digit account codes and 381 l5-digit be stored in the RAM memory. For those calculations, simultaneous solutions using allow calculation of uneven numbers of quantities. Calculus formulae would allow to be varied, but for simplicity, it is easier with known intentions.
Page 43
SEARCH TABLES Parameters 801 - 815 Length+1 X Qty. Subtotal Length+2
ACCOUNT CODES Parameters 821 - 835

X
Qty.
Subtotal
Total Space
Total Space
Figure 7-1, Calculation
Sht. 1
Sht. 2
Page 44
1.
SPEED CALL NUMBERS 7nnn Entries Length+6 X my. Subtotal
Total Space
Sht. 3
Page 45
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
---
THIS
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
---
Page 46
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
8. TECHNICAL
CIRCUIT
DESCRIPTION
INTRODUCTION 8.01
This part will be added at a later date. For the present, refer to Appendix C, Figures C-l and C-Z of the General Information Manual for an overall block diagram, and a simplified electrical diagram of the Controller, respectively.
Page
47
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
---
THIS
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
---
Page 48
SECTION
MITL8350-047-1
OZ-NA
9. PHYSICAL
MAINTENANCE PHYSICAL 9.01
AND
TROUBLESHOOTING
MAINTENANCE
The SMarT-1 PAV, as is evident, is a fully self-contained unit. As such, it has no user repairable parts. If the warranty seal over the unit fasteners is broken, the warranty is void. In case of failure, replace the Controller as follows: I) Power down the to the CO side. Remove the The shorting line. Then, Replace Proceed unit. This will cut-through the subscriber side
2)
RJ31KA31 plug from the Telco supplied bars in the RJ31XKA31A will cut-through
socket. to the
3) 4)
the Controller
and re-connect.
as if a new installation.
TROUBLESHOOTING 9.02 This part will be added at a later date.
Page
49
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
---
THIS
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
---
Page
50
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
APPENDlX
A FCC INTERCONNECTION Al.01 REQUIREMENTS
Al.02
0
The telephone
number
to the unit. INC. Ac-
The equipment being connected is a MITEL DATACOM model SMarT-I or SMarT-IA with PAV Common Carrier cess Dialer and Call Controller. The FCC Registration 85B- 14558-LR-E. The FCC Ringer The Connector Number for the SMarT-I units
is EMP
0 -0
Equivalence Jacks required
Number
(REN) which
is 0.7B.
are RJ31X.
CONNECTION Al.03
LIMITATIONS
Due to the FCC Part 68 Rule, no connection can be made to party lines and to coin telephone service. This unit is designed to be used on standard-device telephone lines. If there are any questions about the telephone line, such as how many pieces of equipment may be connected to it, the telephone company will provide this information upon request. NETWORK Al.04 CHANGES
The telephone company may make changes to it s communication service; such changes may include the change of trunk circuits, changes in the operational characteristics of its trunks, etc. Before doing this, however, the company shall provide official notification, so that the operation of the Dialer service will not be interrupted. MAINTENANCE Al.05 LIMITATIONS
Page A--l
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
Al.06
There are no user repairable parts within the unit. It is sealed against user maintenance. If opened, all warranties are voided. by are the
No cabling or wiring changes within the unit are permitted the user. Plug-ended cables, as detailed in this document, to be used for all external connections between the unit and telephone company interface jack. Al.08
Al.07
Power supply components and cabling is only to be changed or maintained by MITEL DATACOM INC. or by an authorized agent of MITEL DATACOM INC. CORRECTIONS is provided by
TROUBLE Al.09
DISCONNECTION Al.10 If it is ever decided to permanently disconnect the SMarT-I Common Carrier Access Dialer and Call Controller with PAV from the present line, please notify the telephone company of this change.
Page A-2
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
APPENDIX B OVERALL TOPICAL INDEX

CONTENTS ACCOUNT CODE CONFIRMATION/REROUTE RELATED 6-4 6-5 TVPE RELATED 6-4 6-5 DESCRIPTION TONES 4 37 35 36 4 19 39 _. _........... 39 A-l _........ ___. _. _, .,.... A-l A-2 REQUIREMENTS NUMBER __._.....___.._..___.______._.._ NUMBER. _. _... ___ __. __ ._._ _.... A-l A-l A-l A-l A-l A-2 PARAMETERS PARAMETERS .._......... _........._...... 37 34 35 19 DATA DATA CONFIRMATION CALL ENTRY MODE ..................................... SPECIFICATIONS ZERO .......................... ..................... 22 5 39 22 22 32 ....................... ....................... 33 45 41 27 ....................... 41 40 33 39 ............. .. 43 39 27 39 30 31 ... .. ................ A-2 2 2 1 1 1 6 6 3 6 7 5-2 ............................... 21 CONFIRMATION SEE SPEED SEE TABLE DC BALANCE SEE HARDWARE DEFAULT DEFAULT ADDITION TABLE CHANGES LISTING DESCRIPTION ........................... 5-3 6-3 ..................................... TABLE ..................................... PARAMETERS CAPACITY SEE SEARCH ._ PARAMETERS _..... __. __ _........_ .__ ._ TONES 38 35 36 PAGE CONTROLLER MEMORY MEMORV SPACE CAPACIN ............................... METHOD ..................... .......................... 48 45 45 CONTENTS PAGE
SEE ROUTE SEETABLE SEE TABLE ACCOUNT SEE ROUTE SEETABLE SEE TABLE ACCOUNT ACCOUNT
CALCULATION SEE DETAILED
SHEETS
ESTIMATING
PROGRAMMING
CODE
CODE VERIFICATION CODE WARNING DESCRIPTION RELATED 6-4 6-5 DESCRIPTION DESCRlmlON ZERO ONE CHANGES ADDITION TABLE CHANGES TABLE
SEE OPERATING SEE DIALER SEE ROUTE SEE TABLE SEE TABLE ACCOUNT SEE OIALER ACTION ACTION APPENDIX DIGIT DIGIT A
CODES
SEE OPERATING SEE TABLE DEFAULT SEE TABLE SEE TRUNK DETAILED CONTROLLER ENTERING LIMITATIONS JACKS _....... INTRODUCTION PROGRAMMING ROUTE SEARCH SEARCH SEARCH SPECIAL STRING SYSTEM TRUNK RELATED TABLE TABLE TABLE DATA WIDE SEARCH
SEE OPERATING SEE SEARCH SEESEARCH CONNECTION CONNECTOR DISCONNECTION
RELATED MEMORY
PROGRAMMING SPEED CALLS .............................. EXAMPLE
..................................... EXAMPLES ONE ZERO ENTRY ............................ .......................... CONSIDERATIONS .......................... ........................
PAV LIST MAINTENANCE
FCC INTERCONNECTION FCC REGISTRATION MAINTENANCE RINGER TROUBLE NETWORKCHANGES EQUIVALENCE CORRECTIONS
PARAMETERS PROGRAMMING CHANGES CHANGES
.................................
LIMITATIONS
FUNCTIONS
............................
PARAMETERS
RELATED
............................ PARAMETERS ........................ ......................... ....................... SPECIFICATIONS
BATTERY BAUD BAUD
FEED SPECIFICATIONS 5 7 31 30 7 7
DIALER
DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION
SEE HARDWARE RATE SEE RS-232 SEE SYSTEM SEE TABLE BIT EIGHT SEE RS-232 SEE RS-232 SENSE
SEE GENERAL DIALTONE SEE HARDWARE DIMENSIONS
PORT SPECIFICATIONS PORT PARAMETERS WIDE 6-2 PORT SPECIFICATIONS PORT SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
RATE/RS-232
SEE ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL DISCONNECTION SEE APPENDIX DOCUMENT DOCUMENT DOCUMENT A
................................... .................................. .................................. ................................... ................................... ................................... SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS ....................... ..........................
CONVENTIONS HISTORY NUMBERING OBJECTIVES OVERVIEW
BITS PER CHARACTER
SEE INTRODUCTION SEE INTRODUCTION
CALCULATION SEE FIGURE SEE FIGURE SEE FIGURE CLEAR CLEAR SEE TABLE SEARCH SEE SPECIAL SEE TABLE CLONE MASTER SEE TABLE CONNECTION CONNECTION CONNECTIONS RJ31X RS-232 USOC
SHEETS MEMORY CAPACITY 48 48 46 ..____ TABLES 22 29 ._ ..__.... _. ._ ._ .._ _., 27 22 A .._ AND ..__ CABLE SPECIFICATIONS AND ORDERING INFORMATION. _.. __ __ .._ _..... _._ A-l 16 16 16 7 12 A-l __ .._ __ 49 7-l 7-2 7-3 5-2 TABLES FUNCTIONS 6-l MODE 5-2 LIMITATIONS PROCEDURE _.
SEE
INTRODUCTION
SEE CONTROLLER
DOCUMENT DOCUMENT DTMF DTMF
SEE INTRODUCTION SEE INTRODUCTION RECEIVER SENDER SEE HARDWARE SEE HARDWARE
ALL SEARCH
ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL SEE SPECIFICATIONS SEE TABLE ENTER DATA SEE SPECIAL SEETABLE6-1 ENTER DATE 3-3
SPECIFICATIONS .................................. MODE 28 27 28 27 22 28 21 7 7
SEE APPENDIX
...................................... .............................. ..................................... ..............................
CONFIRMATION FUNCTIONS TIME
SEE CONNECTIONS JACK
AND 6-1 5-2 6-l
PORT
CONFIGURATION INSTALLATION A
SEE SPECIAL SEETABLE ENTER TANDEM SEE TABLE SEE TABLE ENTERING SEE SPEED
FUNCTIONS MODE
SEE ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL SEE UNPACKING, CONNECTOR JACKS SEE APPENDIX
..................................... ..................................... ..................................... MODE ...............................
PROGRAM
CALL ENTRY
Page
B-l
SECTION
MITL8350-047-102-NA
CONTENTS ENTERING SPEED CALLS PROGRAMMING DESCRIFTION
PAGE SEE TABLE 41 20 20 MAINTENANCE 29 27 28 27 22 SEE APPENDIX MAKING MEMORY MODE SEE USER LIMITATIONS A CALLS SEE TABLE 5-2 6-1
CONTENTS
PAGE 22 27
SEE DETAILED SEE OPERATING SPEED EXIT DATA
CALL FORMAT CONFIRMATION FUNCTIONS 6-l MODE FUNCTIONS 6-l 5-2 MODE CALL ENTRY AREA DESCRIPTION
SEE SPECIAL SEE TABLE EXIT PROGRAM SEE SPECIAL SEE TABLE SEE TABLE EXITING SEE SPEED EXPANDED
A-l 24 METHOD CAPACITY 45 7 7 INFORMATION. 12
TELEPHONE SPACE
OPERATION ESTIMATING MEMORY
CONTROLLER SEE RS-232 MOUNTING
EXIT PROGRAMMING PROGRAM MEMORY
OF OPERATION PORT SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS AN0 ORDERING
21 19
SEE ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL SEE UNPACKING, INSTALLATION
SEE OPERATING
NETWORK FCC INTERCONNECTION GENERAL SEE APPENDIX FCC REGISTRATION SEE APPENDIX FCC RINGER FEATURES FEED FLASH SEE HARDWARE AND SEE GENERAL RESISTANCE SPECIFICATIONS TIME 31 PARAMETERS 32 RELATED 5 OFF-HOOK OFF-HOOK SEE HARDWARE ALLOWED 6-3 SEE TABLE SEE TRUNK A SPECIFICATIONS DESCRIPTION A NUMBER A-l 5 3 _. REQUIREMENTS ..__ _. A-l NETWORK NEW
CHANGES A A-l 20 4 31 30 OVERRIDE 5-1 CODE DESCRIPTION CALL ENTRIES WIDE 6-2 PARAMETERS
SEE APPENDIX SEE TABLE ACCOUNT SEE DIALER NUMBER SEE SYSTEM SEE TABLE
EQUIVALENCE CAPABILTIES
OF SPEED
CURRENT SPECIFICATIONS REFUSAL TIME 31 PARAMETERS 32 32 PARAMETERS 33 5 5 22 20 19 19 .................... .................... 22 24 6 16 INSTALLATION INDEX B . . . . . . . . . ..__.._............ B-l AND ORDERING INFORMATION 16 TONE 5 DIGIT 6-3 RELATED 6-3 RELATED VOLTAGE SPECIFICATIONS
SEE HARDWARE SEE TABLE SEE TRUNK OFF-HOOK
PROGRESS
GENERAL DIALER GROUNDING
DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION AND CAPABILITIES SPECIFICATIONS VOLTAGE 5 3 3
SEE TABLE SEE TRUNK OPEN CIRCUIT
FEATURES
SEE HAROWARE OPERATING CURRENT
SEE HARDWARE
SEE HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OPERATING DESCRIPTION HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS 5 5.6 SPECIFICATIONS 6 3-l DEFAULT ENTERING GENERAL INITIALIZING SPECIFIC USER INITIALIZING INITIALIZING PROCEDURE INSTALLATION INTENDED PROCEDURE THE DIALER .___..................._..........., DESCRIFIION INSTALLATION __ .._.._..._........_....... _.. ___.. AND ORDERING INFORMATION. REQUIREMENTS 9 2 2 2 1 1 .._ _...... 2 2 PARAMETER OOOT TABLE PROGRAMMING CONSIDERATIONS 19 19 DIALER 19 THE OPERATING SEE INITIALIZING LISTING SPEED ................................... CALLS SEE SPECIFICATIONS SEE TABLE HUMIDITY SEE HARDWARE ............................... ......................................... THE DIALER ..............................
DEFAULTS RANGE
OPERATION
SEE HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION SEE TABLE OVERALL 4-1 SEE UNPACKING, TOPICAL SEE APPENDIX
SEE OPERATING SEE UNPACKING, AUDIENCE SEE INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION
DOCUMENTCONVENTIONS DOCUMENT DOCUMENT DOCUMENT INTENDED READER HISTORY OBJECTIVES
SEE SEARCH PARITY SEE RS-232 PART NUMBERS
43 7
PORT SPECIFICATIONS INSTALLATION EXAMPLE PROGRAMMIN AND ORDERING INFORMATION.
OVERVIEW................................. AUDIENCE ____.....__,.._.........., __......
SEE UNPACKING. SEE DETAILED SEE TABLE PHYSICAL 6-9
16 41 41
PAV LIST MAINTENANCE
COMMENTS
MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE AND AND TROUBLESHOOTING 53 53 _.... VERIFICATION PARAMETERS 31 30 SPECIFICATIONS 7 12 .____ ..__ _, _. __ 53 MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING
JACKS SEE APPENDIX A A-l
SEE PHYSICAL PHYSICAL PHYSICAL
TROUBLESHOOTING KEYSLOT MOUNTING 12 POSITIVE ACCOUNT 6-2 SEE MOUNTING SEE SYSTEM SEE TABLE POWER LEAKAGE SEE HARDWARE LOAD DEFAULT SEE SPECIAL SPECIFICATIONS 5 29 DATABASE FUNCTIONS SEE ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL POWER POWER RECEPTACLE REQUIREMENTS SEE POWER REQUIREMENTS WIDE
RECOMMENDATIONS
Page
B-2
SECTION
MlTL8350-047-102-NA
CONTENTS SEE UNPACKING, PROGRAMMABLE SEE DIALER PROGRAMMING SEE DIALER PROGRAMMING SEE DETAILED PROGRAMMING SEE TABLE PROGRESS SEE DIALER 6-6 DESCRIPTION SEE OPERATING INSTALLATION PROGRESS DESCRlmlON DESCRIPTION CODE ACCESS TONES AND ORDERING INFORMATION.
PAGE 12 4 19 4 40 40 4 SEARCH TABLE ONE CHANGES PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING OOOT ZERO PROGRAMMING CHANGES ADDITION
CONTENTS
PAGE
ACTION
DIGIT 6-6
SEE DETAILED SEE TABLE SEARCH TABLE PARAMETER SEE DETAILED SEARCH TABLE
............................. ......
39 ................... 39 39 43 43 39 39 39 5 22
..................................... CONSIDERATIONS .......................... ...................................
DESCRlmlON EXAMPLES PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES (PAW
ACTION DEFAULT SENSING
DIGIT
.............................. .......................... ..........................
ADDITION
..................................
TONES
SEE DETAILED SEE HARDWARE SET INTERNAL
PROGRAMMING SPECIFICATIONS
RESISTANCE CLOCK 5-2 ..................................... INSTALLATION ....................................... ....................................... CURRENT SPECIFICATIONS PROGRAMMING AND .......................... .......................... 5 27 22 22 22 22 24 ................... 7 5 7 42.43 20.41.42 20 20 20 3 22 39 40 22 30 AND ORDERING INFORMATION .....
R51T SEE ROUTE SEE TABLE R64T SEE ROUTE SEE TABLE R59T SEE ROUTE SEE TABLE R60T SEE ROUTE SEE TABLE R71T SEE ROUTE SEE TABLE R74T SEE ROUTE SEE TABLE R79T SEE ROUTE SEE TABLE RBOT SEE ROUTE SEE TABLE READER RECEIVING SEE UNPACKING, RECOGNITION REPACKING SEE SHIPPING RETURN RETURN RINGER RINGER RINGING RJBlX ROTARY ROTARY ROUTE LOSS SPECIFICATIONS PROGRAMMING 22 NUMBER A-l SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS AND CABLE ..__................_....... SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS TONES PARAMETERS __ _........... 36 34 35 PARAMETERS PROGRAMMING .._ _. ___ _._..... __ __ _.. 33 34 16 7 7 6-4 _.. 16 5 5 A 5 TO NORMAL 5-2 EQUIVALENCE IMPEDANCE SENSITIVITV USOC JACK SEE HARDWARE SEE TABLE AND RECEIVING 9 TIME, SEE HARDWARE INSTALLATION TIP TO GND SPECIFICATIONS 5 AND ORDERING INFORMATION. 9 RELATED 6-5 ____ .._ .___ _.___ _.. _. PARAMETERS 36 36 2 RELATED 6-5 PARAMETERS 37 36 RELATED 6-5 PARAMETERS 37 35 RELATED 6-5 PARAMETERS 36 35 RELATED 6-4 PARAMETERS 36 35 RELATED 6-4 PARAMETERS _.... ___ __...._..... ., 37 35 __ __... RELATED 6-4 PARAMETERS 37 34 RELATED 6-4 PARAMETERS 36 34
SEE TABLE SHIPPING
SEE UNPACKING. SHIPPING AND REPACKING.. UNPACKING SHORT CIRCUIT
9 9 9
RECEIVING
SEE HARDWARE SPECIAL FUNCTIONS SEE DETAILED SPECIAL SPECIFIC 903 FUNCTIONS 5-2 DEFAULTS DEFAULT SEE TABLE
COMMANDS
..................................... COMMAND .............................. ........................... ............................... ................................ SPECIFICATIONS .............................
SEE OPERATING STANDARD SPECIFIC SEE USER SPECIFICATIONS
DESCRIPTION
OCC DIALER OPERATION
RESPONSIBILITIES
ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL HARDWARE RS-232 SPEED CALL PORT SPECIFICATIONS ENTRIES
....................................... .................................. CALLS ........................
COMMENTS
SEE TABLE 6-10 SPEED CALL FORMAT SEE ENTERING SEE TABLE SPEED SPEED CALL CALL SEE TABLE SEE TABLE STANDARD STANDARD STRING SEE DIALER SEE SPECIFIC DATA SEE DETAILED SEE TABLE SVSTEM SVSTEM SEE TABLE WIDE 6-7 5-2 5-l KEV 5-l NUMBER 5-l
SEE INTRODUCTION
SPEED
..................................... .................................... ..................................... ..............................
DIALER DESCRlFrlON DEFAULTS OCC DIALER ENTRY ............................... CHANGES .........................
PROGRAMMING
SEE APPENDIX SEE HARDWARE SEE HARDWARE SEECONNECTIONS RECEIVER SEE HARDWARE SENDER SEE HARDWARE PROGRESS 6-4 6-5 SEE ROUTE SEE TABLE SEE TABLE ROUTE RELATED
.................................... .................................... PROGRAMMING ..........................
PARAMETERS PARAMETERS
SEE DETAILED
TECHNICAL 6 6 TEMPERATURE
CIRCUIT
DESCRIPTION
INTRODUCTION SEE HARDWARE TERMIINATION SEE HARDWARE TERMINATION SEE SPEED TIP GROUND SEE TABLE SEE TRUNK TROUBLE SEE APPENDIX TROUBLESHOOTING SEE PHYSICAL TRUNK RELATED 6-3 A SEE DETAILED SEE TABLE CALL 6-3
.....................................
SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS FORMAT TIMER
51 6 5 20 32
..........................
..........................
RELATED
ENTRY .............................. REMOVAL RELATED A
SEE DETAILED SEE TABLE RS-232 RS-232 PORT PORT
..................................... PARAMETERS .......................
33 A-Z
CONFIGURATION .._._.___._...._........... SPECIFICATIONS 3-2
CORRECTIONS ................................... AND ...... TROUBLESHOOTING ................... .........
SEE CONNECTIONS SEE SPECIFICATIONS SEE TABLE
MAINTENANCE PARAMETERS PROGRAMMING
53 31 31 A-l
..................................... ...................................
SEARCH
TABLE
1 DESCRIPTION 4
TVPE
OF UNIT
SEE DIALER
SEE APPENDIX
Page
B-3
CONTENTS UNPACKING SEE SHIPPING UNPACKING UNPACKING, SEE UNPACKING CONNECTIONS INSTALLATION MOUNTING ORDERING POWER SHIPPING USER AND RECEIVING _...._.____........_.__., AND ORDERING INFORMATION _..._._.__. REQUIREMENTS ._.__.._._.__. INFORMATION AND RECEIVING DESCRIPTION _._.__..______..__ _._.....___.._,.,.
PAGE 006T 9 9 OllT SEE SYSTEM SEE TABLE WIDE 6-2 SEE SYSTEM SEE TABLE WIDE 6-2
CONTENTS
PAGE I
PARAMETERS
31 30
PROCEDURE INSTALLATION
PARAMETERS
31 30
902 SEE SPECIAL SEE TABLE SEE TABLE 24 903 SEE SPECIAL SEE TABLE FUNCTIONS 5-2 6-l DEFAULTS FUNCTIONS 5-2 6-l 5-2 FUNCTIONS 5-2 ._._.. 5-2 6-l FUNCTIONS 5-2 6-1 FUNCTIONS 5-2 6-l 29 22 27 22 29 22 27 22 29 22 27 22 26 26 22 27 26 22 27 FUNCTIONS 5-2 6-1 26 22 27
REQUIREMENTS
OPERATION
SEE OPERATING
WALL WEIGHT
MOUNTING
BRACKET 12 964 SPECIFICATIONS 7
SEE TABLE
SEE MOUNTING SEE ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL
SEE SPECIFIC SEE SPECIAL SEE TABLE SEE TABLE
XO4T SEE TABLE SEE TRUNK XOET SEE TABLE SEE TRUNK X19T SEE TABLE SEE TRUNK X22T SEE TABLE SEE TRUNK X34T SEE TABLE SEE TRUNK 6-3 RELATED PARAMETERS 6-3 RELATED PARAMETERS 6-3 RELATED PARAMETERS 6-3 RELATED PARAMETERS 6-3 RELATED PARAMETERS
906 SEE TABLE 907 SEE SPECIAL SEE TABLE SEETABLE6-1 908 SEE TABLE SEE TABLE 990 SEE SPECIAL SEE TABLE SEE TABLE 999 SEE SPECIAL SEE TABLE SEE TABLE
OOOT SEE SYSTEM SEE TABLE WIDE 6-2 PARAMETERS 31 30
Page
B-4
-_:,
;.::
.,(
./:.
il
;,,
S&FION
,MITL8350-047-I
02-NA
NOTES
MITEL DULLES
DATACOM
INC. AIRPORT 20041
P.O. BOX 17266 INTERNATIONAL D.C.. WASHINGTON, TELEPHONE: U.S.A.,
(703)~661-6600
MITEL
ENGINEERING
PRACTICE
SECTION
MITL8350-048-IOO-NA. Issue 2, April 1986

1
3 .,
SECURITY
ACCESS
CONTROLLER
(SAC)
GENERAL
INFORMATION
MITE
0 - Copyright of MITEL DATACOM INC. 1986 tm - Trademark of MITEL DATACOM INC. @a - Registered Trademark of MITEL CORPORATION
SECTION
WARRANTY
NOTICE
THIS PRODUCT IS WARRANTED FOR ONE (1) YEAR AGAINST DEFECTS IN MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP. MITEL DATACOMS LIABILITY IS LIMITED TO REPAIR AND RETURN OF DEFECTIVE GOODS.
MITEL DATACOM MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES REGARDING THE QUALITY, MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE BEYOND THOSE WHICH APPEAR ABOVE. MITEL DATACOM SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF PROFITS, DAMAGE TO BUSINESS OR OWNERS COMPUTER SYSTEM, OR OTHER BUSINESS RELATIONS. THIS WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES.
SECTION
MITL8350-048-100-NA
NOTICE
TO U.S. CUSTOMERS
WARNING
The SMarT-I Security Access Controller generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions manual, may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case the user, at his own expense, will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.
Page i
SECTION
---
THIS
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
---
Page
ii
SECTION
NOTICE
TO CANADIAN
CUSTOMERS
NOTICE
The Canadian Department of Communications label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety requirements. The Department does not guarantee that the equipment will operate to the users satisfaction. Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some cases, the companys inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure, for their own protection, that the electrical ground connections to the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
CAUTION
Users should not attempt to make such connections appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, themselves, as required. but should contact the
The Load Number (LN) assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load, to be connected to a telephone loop, that is used by the device to prevent overloading. The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load Numbers of all of the devices does not exceed 100. An alphabetic suffix is also specified in the Load Number and designates the appropriate ringing type (A or B), if applicable. For example, LN = 20 A designates a Load Number of 20 and an A type ringer.
Page iii
SECTION
---
LEFT BLANK
---
Page iv
SECTION
IMPORTANT
NOTES
Please note that MITEL DATACOM INC. has set up a National Field Service number for technical and installation assistance located in Dallas, Texas. This number is j.2141 386-9400 for U.S. customers only (outside of normal working hours, a telephone answering service has been established for your convenience at this same number). For Canadian customers, please contact your local MITEL Regional Office. The SMarT-I Security Access Controller includes an on-board battery back-up system to prevent the loss of customer database. Besides protecting against loss of data during momentary power outages, this battery back-up should also provide sufficient memory retention to allow the Controller to be programmed by the distributor and then transported to the customers site for installation. This battery back-up, however, is not intended for long storage periods and cannot be guaranteed to support memory for long periods of time. As received from the factory, the Controller battery is not guaranteed to have a full charge applied to it. In fact, the battery is likely to be only partially charged in view of the time in transit, and distributor storage time. No guarantee of any battery charge status can be made until the Controller has been powered up for a period of time. A period of 24 hours is necessary to achieve a full charge on the battery. Upon removal from its shipping carton, the Controller should be powered up for a period of time and then INITIALIZED to load the operating system and default database into memory. Initialization is most easily accomplished via the RS-232 port using 1200 Baud communications from a terminal. Never rely on programming entered into a Controller until it has been INITIALIZED (see Part 6, page 29). Once initialized, the Controller should seldom ever have to be initialized again, From this point, programming may be only accomplished by use of a suitable terminal. There is a 942903 Load Default Data Command that will restore memory to the initialized state once an INITIALIZE has been performed. Once initialized, the Controller will only respond to input via the W-232 port at the default 1200 Baud rate for programming purposes.
REASONS The Controller has just been
FOR ADDITIONAL removed have been repaired. from
INITIALIZE storage
OPERATIONS carton. codes have been
or shipping
The program access codes changed and forgotten. The Controller Long storage has just been times.
deleted
accidentally
or the access
Investigate
for reason!
Page v
SECTION
---
LEFT BLANK
---
Page vi
SECTION
MITL8350-048-100-NA
SECURITY
ACCESS
CONTROLLER
(SAC)
GENERAL
INFORMATION
CONTENTS ..................................... 1. INTRODUCTION DOCUMENT OBJECTIVES .............................. DOCUMENT OVERVIEW ................................ INTENDED AUDIENCE ................................. DOCUMENT HISTORY ................................. ................................. READER COMMENTS ............................. DOCUMENT CONVENTIONS 2. GENERAL DESCRIPTION ............................... FEATURES AND CAPABILITIES ........................... CONTROLLER DESCRIPTION ............................ Network Compatibility .............................. System Power .................................... Lines/Models ..................................... Area Code/Office Code/Call Searching ................... Adaptive Call Routing .............................. Least Cost Routing ................................ Call Recording/RS-232 Port ........................... VERSATILE PROGRAMMING ............................. Description ...................................... Initialization ...................................... Programming ..................................... 3. SPECIFICATIONS .................................... HARDWARE ........................................ RS-232PORT ...................................... ............................ ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL 4. UNPACKING, INSTALLATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION SHIPPING AND RECEIVING ............................ Unpacking ...................................... Repacking ...................................... INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ......................... POWER REQUIREMENTS .............................. MOUNTING CONNECTIONS::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: RS-232 Port Configuration .......................... RJ31XKA31A USOC Jack and Cable .................. ORDERING INFORMATION ............................. 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 9 9 11 11 . 13 13 13 13 13 16 16 16 20 20 21
Page vii
SECTION
CONTENTS 5. OPERATING DESCRIPTION ............................
PAGE 23
SECURITY ........................................ OPERATIONAL SEQUENCES ............................ DETAILED OPERATING DESCRIPTION ..................... With Modems ................................... Other Operational Procedures .......................
6. INITIALIZATION ....................................
23 23 25 25 28
29
I::. .::1
. J
INTRODUCTION .................................... PROCEDURE .......................................

7. PROGRAMMING INTRODUCTION PROGRAMMING ................................... ....................................
29 30
: 33 33
FOR CALLBACK OPERATION ............... Procedural Steps ................................. TESTING THE CONTROLLER INSTALLATION ................ Modem Setup ................................... Theory of the Test ................................ Actual Testing ................................... PROGRAMMING FOR USER-ENTERED CALLBACK NUMBER OPERATION ..................................... Program Verification .............................. DTMF CUT-THROUGH ACCESS ......................... DETAILED PROGRAMMING DESCRIPTIONS ................. System Parameters ............................... Trunk Related Parameters .......................... Non-Controller Pertinent Parameters .................. PASSWORD PROGRAMMING ........................... Password Programming Examples .................... Example 1 ...................................... Example 2 ...................................... Example 3 ...................................... AUTOMATIC CALLBACK (SPEED CALL) PROGRAMMING ....... SEARCH TABLE PROGRAMMING ........................ Action Digit Definitions ............................ Programming Examples ............................ Search Table Defaults ............................. PROGRAMMING ROUTING PARAMETERS .................. 6r5 Access Route, Access Control Sequences ........... Programming Examples ............................ CALL DETAIL RECORD (CDR) PROGRAMMING ............... CDR Description ................................. Call Detail Record Format .......................... Examples ....................................... MITEL Format .................................... CONTROLLER MEMORY CAPACITY ...................... Memory Space Estimating Method ....................
34 35 37 37 37 38 39 41 42 42 43 49 55 59 62 62 62 62 63 64 64 66 66 67 67 69 71 71 71 72 73 75 76
Page viii
SECTION
CONTENTS 8. TECHNICAL CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION .....................
PAGE 81 81 83 83 83 A-l
INTRODUCTION
9. MAINTENANCE
. . . .................................
................
AND TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE . . . . ................................. TROUBLESHOOTING .................................

A . . . . . . . ................................
APPENDIX
FCC INTERCONNECTION REQUIREMENTS ................. A-l CONNECTION LIMITATIONS ....................... ; ... A-l A-l NETWORK CHANGES MAINTENANCE LlMlTATlbJs : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : A-l TROUBLE CORRECTIONS ............................. A-2 DISCONNECTION .................................. A-2
APPENDIX B ....................................... B-l
GLOSSARY OFTERMS
..............................
B-l C-l C-l D-l D-l PAGE 4 14 15 17 17 18 18 19 37 40 42 60 72 73 79 79 80 C-2 C-3
APPENDIX C ....................................... ADDITIONAL INFORMATION .......................... APPENDIX D ....................................... OVERALL TOPICAL INDEX ............................ FIGURES 2-1, 4-1, 4-2, 4-3, 4-4, 4-5, 4-6, 4-7, 7-1, 7-2, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-6, 7-7, 7-8, 7-9, C-l, C-2, SMarT-1 Security Access Controller .................. Equipment Unpacking and Repacking ................ Multi-Unit Packing and Repacking ................... Controller I/O Connections ........................ Typical Controller installation Configuration ........... Typical Connection Configuration ................... RS-232 Interface Connector ....................... USOC RJ31X/CA3lA Jack and Cable Assy. ............ Terminal Display of Data Entry Check ................ Typical Callback Operation, SAC and Modem Timing ..... Terminal Display, User-Entered Callback Number ....... Password Format ............................... Incoming Call Detail Record Examples ................ Outgoing Call Detail Record Examples ................ Calculation Sht. 1 ............................... Calculation Sht. 2 ............................... Calculation Sht. 3 ............................... SMarT-1 System Block Diagram ................... SMarT-1 Simplified Electrical Diagram ..............
Page
ix
SECTION
TABLES Hardware Specifications 3-1, SMarT-1 .................. RS-232 Port Specifications 3-2, ........................ Specifications 3-3, Electrical/Mechanical ................. SMarT-1 Ordering Information 4-1, ..................... Programming Parameters 7-1, Initialization/Default ........ System Special Parameters 7-2, ........................ Parameters 7-3, System Wide Operational .............. 7-4, Trunk Related Parameters ...................... Pertinent Parameters 7-5, Non-Controller .............. 7-6, Password Table Descriptions ...................... 7-7, Password Action Digits (a) ........................ Codes (t) ........................... 7-8, Time-Of-Day 7-9, Network Override Codes ........................ 7-10, Search Table Descriptions ........................ 7-11, Action Digit Descriptions ...................... 7-12, 6r5 Parameter Codes ......................... 7-13, Dialtone Detector Codes ......................... 7-14, aCodes .................................... 7-l 5, b Codes .................................... 7-16, Additional Route Parameters ...................... 7-17, MITEL Call Record Format Fields ................... C-1,ASCll Codes .................................. C-2, Legal Controller Programming Input Characters ....... C-3, Default Parameter Summary C-6 ................
PAGE 9,lO 11 11 21 33,34 44 47,48 50-52 55-57 61 61 61 63,64 65 65,66 67,68 68 69 69 70 74 C-4 C-5 to C-8
Page x
SECTION
MiTL8350-048-l OO-NA
1. INTRODUCTION DOCUMENT 1 .Ol OBJECTIVES
This document contains all information that relates to the SMarT-1 Security Access Controller. The title of the Section is the SMarT- 1tm SECURITY ACCESS CONTROLLER (SAC), General Information and can be referred to as SECTION MITL8350-04%IOO-NA or by its title. This part of the Section is an overview of the contents of the document and outlines the intended audience. From this point forward and for ease of understanding, the SMarT-I Security Access Controller (SAC) will be referred to . in text as the Controller or as the SAC.
1.02 DOCUMENT OVERVIEW
The document contains important notices to customers at the front on pages i through v. The first is for U.S. customers. The second is for Canadian customers, while the third is general in nature. It is advisable to read the applicable notices prior to reading this manual or operating the Controller. If a particular notice does not apply, it may be removed from the manual. 1.03 Following the notices is a general Table of Contents. This Table lists all of the major parts of the manual, along with subheadings in the order that they appear. The manual is divided into 9 parts, with four appendices. The last Appendix is an overall index in alphanumeric order.
1.04
The first part is a general introduction and overview of the manual. The second is a description of the features and capabilities of the SAC followed by a general unit description. The third lists all specifications of the unit. The fourth part describes in detail, all procedures for receiving, shipping, unpacking, installation and connection of the Controller. This is followed by a detailed operating description. The sixth part outlines unit initialization, while the seventh describes detailed programming. The eighth includes a technical circuit description, while the ninth lists maintenance and troubleshooting procedures.
1.06
1.05
The four appendices provide supplementary information that may be of some use to the user/programmer. The first appendix describes FCC interconnection requirements and should be read by all installers. The second and third appendices contain a glossary of terms and additional information, respectively.
1.07
The last Appendix is an overall topical index listed in alphanumeric order. This index lists a topic and the page where the topic is discussed. It is included to provide an easy reference guide in locating specific information.
1.08
Page
SECTION MITL8350-048-l OO-NA
INTENDED AUDIENCE This document is intended for use as a general information manual for the installer and user of the SMarT-1 Security Access Controller (SAC). It is also intended to be a technical description of the SAC for programmers and other interested parties. The document does not attempt to teach programming concepts. It is assumed that the user has some programming experience. DOCUMENT 1.10 HISTORY 1.09
This is the second formal issue of the SMarT-1 Security Access Controller (SAC), General Information. Subsequent issues will be provided as information is changed or upgraded. These subsequent issues will replace any previous issue. READER COMMENTS If the user has any comments or corrections pertaining to this document, please forward a reply in writing to MITEL Documentation Control in Ogdensburg, N.Y. quoting document number SECTION MlTL8350-048-00 1-NA. DOCUMENT 1.12 CONVENTIONS this manual, the following conventions MEANING A horizontal ellipsis means that the preceding item may be repeated one or more times. A vertical ellipsis means that not all of the statements in a figure or an example are shown; their content is not important to the example. will be used: 1.11
Throughout
SYMBOL
*. .
I[
II
Double square brackets in statement and format scriptions enclose items that are optional.
de-
E 1
Braces enclose lists from which the user must choose one item. Each item is separated from the other by a comma ,. The less than and greater than signs, used in statement and format descriptions, usually enclose a special key to be pressed, such as a carriage return <CR> key. The greater than sign, when appearing alone, indicates the terminal prompt as shown on the terminal display. Terminal lines use two conventions. If the characters are printed in capitalized characters (upper case), the words are typed as listed. If they are printed in small characters (lower case), they require that some character(s) be entered in their place. -.
<>
>
Page 2
SECTION
MlTL835Cb048-l OO-NA
2. GENERAL
DESCRIPTION FEATURES AND CAPABILITIES
The SMarT-1 Security features and capabilities:
Access
Controller
has the following
Compliance with FCC Parts 68 and 15 4-, 2-, or l-Line capacity
A Stand Alone Device Interfaces with Modems Switched Network Intercepts Tone Verifiable length that are compatible presenting with the Public a Modem Answer
incoming calls without password protection
ranging from 2 to 15 digits in
Callback feature allows password to be associated to a specific dial back telephone number Bypass of Callback feature (if required) Manual entry of Callback Service number available through Class of
A maximum of 1000 Passwords/Callback
numbers process
Two sets of 4 carriers can be utilized to automatically outgoing calls Compatible with both Loop Start and Ground Start lines Compatible with DTMF and Rotary Dial Central Offices RS-232 Serial purposes Data Port for administrative
and maintenance
Monitors activity on all lines to provide Call Detail Records (if required) Non-Volatile Memory
Optional Progress Tones Automatic disconnect on invalid codes
Time of day restriction Optional use of Other Common Carriers (OCCs) for Callback
CONTROLLER DESCRIPTION
The SMarT-1 Security Access Controller (SAC) is a powerful and compact system that provides advanced callback security to most existing Modems without replacement of equipment. Through the use of password protection, the SAC provides the ability to secure
2.02
Page
SECTION MITL8350-048-IOO-NA
Figure 2-1, SMarT-1 tm Security
Access Controller
Page 4
a data system and to allow access only to authorized personnel. 2.03 The Controller (see Figure 2-l) prevents unauthorized access to a data base that is typically gained through hackers utilizing dial-up telephone circuits and randomly searching for authorization codes. The SAC security features include the disconnection of invalid access attempts and callback technology to protect the integrity of a network. 2.04
The Controller is typically installed on the telephone line between the telephone company interface jack and the Modem of the users system. This installation enables the SAC to prevent connection to the called Modem until it has a chance to verify the validity of the caller. Network 2.05 Compatibility
Telephone Trunks or Lines available to the user from the Central Office can be one of two types. These types are either Ground Start or Loop Start. The Controller can be programmed to function with either type. The available dialing types are typically DTMF or Rotary Dial. DTMF uses tones to dial while the Rotary system uses pulses. The Controller can be programmed to function with either type on dial out. However, DTMF dialing is required for incoming calls. System 2.07 Power 2.06
Power is supplied from a small transformer that is provided with the system. In the event of a commercial power outage, the SMarT-I Security Access Controller will assume a power down cut-through mode. In this state, the Controller appears to the network as a metallic path from its tip and ring inputs to its tip and ring outputs. In essence, the Controller in this mode will appear to not be present and allows all calls to pass. Battery back up prevents memory loss in the event of a power failure. This feature, inherent in the Controller, allows the customers stored data to be retained. There is no requirement for reprogramming the Controller once power is restored. Lines/Models There are up to four independent lines in the Controller depending on the model used (4-, 2-, or l-line units). These lines all share the same search tables. Results of searching through a table will select a route (in actuality, a routing method). The routing data (the four alternatives) is shared among the lines, thus providing powerful systems that gain simplified access to either a Modem or the common carrier network. 2.09 2.08
Page 5
SECTION MITL835C!-048-l OO-NA
Area Code/Office 2.10
Code/Call
Searching
The SMarT-I SAC can be programmed to look up the Area Code (NPA) and Office Code (NXX) numbers and perform routing decisions (i.e., route through OCWReseller Switch, or route through DDD) depending on the OCWResellers capabilities and the customers requests.
Adaptive
2.11
Call Routing
All calls are made over predetermined routes, with the required authorization codes being inserted automatically by the Controller at the appropriate time. The Adaptive Call Routing (ACR) feature allows the Controller to automatically detect, remember and re-route all numbers not available on the OCC over to the DDD Network.
Least Cost Routing

Least Cost Routing allows the alternate routing of long distance calls through various OCC facilities. Since toll calls placed through OCC networks are typically less expensive than DDD routes, choosing the most economical medium (i.e., DDD or whatever OCC) will enable the user to capitalize on OCC network rate benefits.
2.12
Call Recording/RS-232 2.13
Port
Call recording output is accomplished via the RS-232 (computer) port with a programmable Baud rate. This output provides a complete record of numbers dialed and the onhook/off-hook times for all calls on the lines served by the system. This information can be utilized by the user for traffic studies, usage analysis, call costing, etc..
VERSATILE PROGRAMMING Description 2.14

The SMarT-1 Security Access Controller (SAC), as delivered from the factory, will require some programming before actual use. In addition, the Controller may not have been initialized and may not have sufficient charge on the internal NI-CAD battery backup to ensure memory retention. This lack of charge may be due to storage and transit times from the factory to the user.
To ensure that the unit is ready for operation, it should first be powered up for a period of time, then initialized followed by any additional programming that may be required. The paragraphs that follow briefly describe this initialization procedure. For the complete and detailed initialization description, refer to Part 6, page 29.
2.15
Initialization 2.16
The SAC is initialized via the RS-232 port by use of a suitable
Page 6
SECTION MlTL8350-048-l OO-NA
terminal. Upon power on, the SAC monitors the RS-232 port for 7 seconds. During this time period, the unit expects to receive an initialize command at a rate of 1200 Baud. This command consists of the two characters AAand must be entered from the keyboard (in upper case only). 2.17 If, after 7 seconds, the initialize command is not received, the SAC will check its internal memory for the programmed Baud rate (1200 Baud by default) and switch to that Baud rate.
2.18
Initialization of the SAC will load a database for automatic callback operation. The SAC will have the following communications requirements:
1) 2)
3) 4) 5) Note:
1200 Baud Rate No Parity 8 bit Characters with one Stop Bit Bit 8 Sense = SPACE Full Duplex Communications at the RS-232 Port.
Refer to Part 4, page 16 for a complete description of the RS-232 Port connection and communications requirements.
* Programming 2.19 The Controller will require some programming after initialization. The unit will not require re-initialization except under fault conditions. For a complete description of programming, refer to Part 7, page 33. If the default programming is desired, it may be selected by entering a load default command after initialization. This command is 942903. The command will restore all defaults as listed in Part 7. For specific programming, refer to Part 7, page 42.
Page 7
SECTION
---
THIS
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
---
Page 8
SECTION
lVlITL8350-048-l OO-NA
3. SPECIFICATIONS HARDWARE Table 3-1 lists all of the hardware specifications for the SMarTltm Security Access Controller (SAC). These specifications apply to all models of the Controller (4-, 2-, and l-line units) unless otherwise noted. Table SPECIFICATION FCC RINGER EQUIVALENCE 3-1, SMarT-1 Hardware MIN. Specifications TYP. MAX. 0.7B UNITS 3.01
IDLE LINE, LOOP START RINGER RINGING LEAKAGE: IMPEDANCE: SENSITIVITY: 15-60 Hz, 70-11OV 20-3500 Hz, IOV 15-60 Tip to Ring, Tip to Earth, Hz 1OOV IOOV 10 1 40 20 20 15 START Tip to Earth Tip 36 -22 -5 10 n/a 40 -25 0 45 -28 +10 150 Kfi Volts Volts ms . 80 20 Ka Mfi Volts M& Mfi mA
OFF HOOK CURRENT IDLE LINE, GROUND SENSING RESISTANCE: VOLTAGE: VOLTAGE TIP-GROUND Sending Ring-Ground
OPEN CIRCUIT GROUNDING TIME
TO RECOGNIZE
RESISTANCE: BATTERY FEED
OPEN CIRCUIT
VOLTAGE
22 550 DC 36
24 600 40
26 650
Volts fi dB
50
mA
TERMINATION RESISTANCE: DC, 20 mA DC, 40 mA AC, 300-3000 Hz 600 ohms, 20mA 200 200 550 20 13 600 26 80 300 300 650 fi fi a dB mA
RETURN CURRENT
LOSS:
Page
SECTIQN
Table
3-l
(Contd),
SMarT-1
Hardware MIN.
Specifications TYP. MAX. UNITS
SPECIFICATION DIAL TONE CO SIDE FEED: INTERNAL DTMF LEVEL LEVEL DIFFERENCE FREQ: To receive To not receive FEED: Gain 300 Hz 350 Hz
-2
0 n/a
+2
CiB
RECEIVER -20 -6 -1.5 -3.5 40 TONES 30 +3 +6 +I.5 +3.5 dBmt dB % % ms ms
DURATION TIME BETWEEN
ROTARY MAKE MAKE
RECEIVER 700 20 8 20 7 100 20 100 Q ms K!Z ms PPS *.
IMPEDANCE DURATION
BREAK IMPEDANCE BREAK DURATION RATE DTMF LEVEL FREQUENCY DURATION ROTARY TIMING TIMING (Programmable) SENDER (Programmable) (At 60/40): Make Break SENDER
-8 -1.3 40
-6
-3 +I.3
dBmt % ms
60
130
40/30 35 55 9.9
60/40
60/40 45 65
ms/ms ms ms PPS ms
RATE (At 60/40) INTERDIGIT OPERATING TEMPERATURE HUMIDITY ALLOWABLE point t With reference to 6OOa Termination. VOLTAGE: connected to any PAUSE RANGE (Programmable)
10 800
10.1 1300
400
0 0
55 85
C %
300
Volts
Page
10
SECTION
RS-232 3.02
PORT
Table 3-2 below contains the specifications for the SMarT-I Security Access Controller RS-232 Auxiliary Port. This port may be used for programming or for SMDR Output.
Table 3-2, RS-232 Port Specifications SPECIFICATION 300 to 9600 Baud programmable;
PARAMETER
BAUD RATE: PARITY: BITS PER CHARACTER: BIT EIGHT SENSE: MODE: OPERATION:
ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL
default
= 1200 Baud None Eight bits per character with one stop bit. Space On line. Full duplex mode.
Table 3-3 contains the Electrical and Mechanical specifications for the SMarT-1 Security Access Controller. These specifications apply to all models of the Controller (4-, 2-, and l-line units) unless otherwise noted. 3.04 This section does not contain all of the specifications for the Controller at present. Other specifications will be added as they are received.
3-3, Electrical/Mechanical Specifications SPECIFICATION 7.625 (19.37cm)
3.03
Table PARAMETER
DIMENSIONS:
(26.99cm) WEIGHT: Dialer Power Supply MOUNTING: POWER: Range: CONNECTIONS:
Wide X 10.625 H X 1.375 (3.49cm) D
2 Ibs (0.907 kg) 1 lb (0.453 kg) (Approximately) Wall Mount with Supplied Bracket 115 Volts AC, 60 Hz @?300 mA 103.5 to 126.5 VAC Standard RJ31WCA31A tions Network Connec-
Page
11
SECTION
MlTL8350-048-IOO-NA
3.05
The specifications in the Tables above are subject to change without notice. The inclusion of n/a for a specific parameter means that the specification is not available at the time of this publication. It will be added at a later date.
Page 12
SECTION
4. UNPACKING,
INSTALLATION SHIPPING 4.01 AND
AND
ORDERING
INFORMATION
RECEIVING
The SMarT-1 Security Access Controller is shipped in a single carton that contains the Controller, the Power Supply, a Wall Mounting Bracket, four RJ31XKA31A Cables and appropriate documentation. All of these items are protected within the carton by styrofoam inserts.
Note:
Some production units do not require the wall mounting brackets since these units are mounted to a wall by use of keyslots included on the unit case.
4.02
In some instances where more than one unit is shipped, a larger carton may be used that would contain five of the smaller cartons. Each of the smaller cartons would contain the items listed in 4.01 above.
Unpacking
4.03
The procedure below lists steps to take when unpacking the equipment (refer to Figures 4-1 and 4-2): Open carton and remove contents. Check each item removed for damage. Check each item against the packing list. Notify the vendor if any items are missing damaged or defective. or appear to be
1) 2) 3) 4)
Repacking
4.04
If an item is found to be defective or damaged and is to be returned to the vendor, it should be tagged and packaged to prevent damage. If units are to be shipped from one location to another, these units should also be packaged in such a manner as to prevent damage. Figure 4-l shows how the equipment was originally packed. This method of packaging should be followed as closely as possible. packaging material is no longer available, the should be wrapped in several layers of airplaced in a suitable container, and surrounded the movement of the items.
If the original returned parts cushion type of wrap, with paper to minimize
INSTALLATION 4.06
4.05
REQUIREMENTS
The SMarT-1 SAC is position independent. It may be mounted anywhere that will accommodate the unit size as listed in the specifications In Table 3-3 on Page 11.
Page
13
RJ31WCA3lA CABLES \
DOCUMENl
-ATlOh I
--I
DIALER
H.AI
DETAIL
Figure 4-1, Equipment
Unpacking
and Repacking
Page 14
SECTION
SINGLE UNIT CARTON
\ \
\ \__-/
_-- /-
/--
/-MULTI-UNIT CARTON
Figure
4-2,
Multi-Unit
Packing
and Repacking
Page
15
SECTION
4.07
The SAC will operate within a 0-55C temperature humidity range.

REQUIREMENTS
and a 0435%
POWER 4.08
The customer must provide a single phase power receptacle with the following recommendations: 115V, 60Hz fused installed. and capable of delivering 350mA per unit
.: ::
The power receptacle should be wired and fused independently from all other receptacles that are not controller related. A warning tag should be attached to circuit breaker type fuses to prevent unauthorized manual operation. The power receptacle should not be controlled by a switch. The live and neutral conductors at the receptacle wired to their proper respective connections. should be
The power receptacle must be a 3-wire type, with the ground wire connected to the ground of the electrical system. The receptacle should be easily accessible for the removal of the plug for maintenance. The receptacle location should be selected to prevent accidental removal of the power cord. The power cord between the receptacle and the unit should not present a hazard to the user.
MOUNTING
If the unit requires the wall mounting bracket, simply mount the bracket to a surface with screws. Mount the Controller housing to the bracket by matching the four holes on the rear of the case with the mounting pins of the bracket. Press firmly into place.
4.09
If the unit is the keyslot type, mount by using the provided template to find screw locations. Insert #6 X 3/4 wood or selftapping screws in these locations, leaving approximately l/8 inch gap between the surface and the cap-head. Mount the Controller by positioning the keyslots over the screw heads, pressing toward and then down from the mounting surface.
CONNECTIONS Note:
4.10
-.
The Security Access Controller should be initialized prior to accomplishing any connections. Refer to Part 6, paragraph 6.06 for the initialization procedure.
4.11
Connections to the Controller are made at the Connector Panel located along the bottom edge of the housing. Figure 4-3 illustrates the connection panel. The steps below outline the connection
Page
16
SECTION MITL8350-048-l OO-Nk
/ COMPUTER PORT (RS-232) [Dl
Figure 4-3, Controller
I/O Connections
SMART-l CONTROLLER
POWER SUPPLY RJ2lX CA3lA
Figure 4-4, Typical Controller
Installation
Configuration
Page 17
SECTION WTL8350-048-100-NA
MDF CENTRAL OFFICE DEMARC.
DF SPLIT TYPE STATION BLOCK
MODEM OR OTHER PROTECTED EQUIPMENT
CENTRAL OFFICE LINES
----
_ _
--
66 BLOCK OR RJZlX MDF OR CA21A (T) TIP (R) RING
RJ3lX CA318
Figure 4-5, Typical Connection
Configuration
pllJl 1 2 3 4,5 6,8,20 7
SIGNAL FRAME GND RxD (Signal in) TxD (Signal Out) TIED TOGETHER TIED TOGETHER GND
Figure 4-6, W-232
Interface
Connector
(Viewed
from outside
Dialer)
Page 18
SECTION
MITL8350-048-100-NA
Figure
4-7,
USOC
RJ31WCA31A
Jack
and Cable
Assy.
Page
19
procedure:
1)
Refer to Figure 4-3. Connect a suitable Earth Ground to the screw mount [Al provided on the connector panel. This connection MUST be made for the unit to function properly. Plug the Power Pack jack into the Controller power connection [Bl. Plug the Power Pack AC line cord into a suitable (1 IOV-60Hz) AC receptacle. Using the supplied RJ31XKA31A cables, insert one end of a cable in a jack on the Controller [Cl. Connect the other end of the Telco-supplied jack. cable used in step 4 to the
2)
3) 4) 5) 6)
Repeat steps 4 and 5 above for the appropriate number of times depending upon the model of Controller being installed (4-, 2-, or l-line units). Connect a suitable terminal to the RS-232 Computer Port [Dl via a suitable cable. Configuration of this cable is described in paragraph 4.13 below.
7)
This completes the mechanical installation of the SMarT-1 Security Access Controller. Continue by programming the unit from the terminal. RS-232 4.13 Port Configuration
4.12
The RS-232 Computer Port connector (refer to Figure 4-6) is a female connector configured as DCE. Only the TxD (pin 3), the RxD (pin 2), and the GND (pin 1) lines are used by the Controller. Pins 4 through 6, 8, and 20 are shorted internally for the convenience of the user. This port is used for programming and call recording output. 4.14 During programming, a suitable terminal must be connected to this port. For call recording output, a suitable printer is connected in place of the terminal. Refer to Part 6 paragraph 6.05 for the configuration of the terminal or the printer. RJBlWCA31A 4.15 USOC Jack and Cable ,,
Figure 4-7 illustrates the USOC RJ31XKA31A Connector and cable assembly as used by the SAC. Figure 4-5 illustrates the installation wiring of the Telco-supplied RJ31XKABlA USOC jack and other connections from the Central Office through to the Modem or other protected equipment. For the unit to operate properly, the bridge clips at the split type station block must be removed.
Page 20
SECTION
MITL8350-048-100-N/I
ORDERING 4.15
INFORMATION
Table 4-l on the following page lists the part numbers and descriptions of items that can be ordered from MITEL DATACOM INC. tm Ordering Information 4-1, SMarT-1 Ordering Information
Table
4-1,
SMarT-1
PART NO. 8350-007 SMarT-1:
DESCRIPTION 4 Line Security Access Controller. Includes RJ31 Cables, and Mounting Hardware. 2 Line Security Access Controller. Includes RJ31 Cables, and Mounting Hardware. 1 Line Security Access Controller. Includes RJ31 Cables, and Mounting Hardware. SPARES Power Pack,
8350-008
SMarT-1
tm:
Power
Pack,
8350-009
SMarT-1:
Power
Pack,
8350-010 8350-012 8350-013 8350-048100-NA
Wall
Mount
Bracket
for SMarT-1 Security
Security Access Security
Access
Controllers.
Power
Pack for SMarT-1 Cable
Controllers. Access Controllers.
RJ31XKA31A General
for SMarT-1 Manual.
Information
8350-953-003-NA
SAC Maintenance
Programming
Guide.
Page 21
SECTION
---
THIS
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
---
Page 22
5. OPERATING
DESCRIPTION SECURITY
The primary function of the SMarT-1 Security Access Controller (SAC) is to provide security to connected systems such as Modems and to protect these systems from unauthorized telephone access. The security provided by the SAC lies in three distinct areas. These areas are:
5.01
l
The use of optional progress tones, or lack thereof, to make it difficult for an unauthorized caller to recognize that there is protected equipment connected to the telephone line. The inclusion of the callback feature to assure that only those individuals with valid passwords are called back at an assigned number associated with that particular password. Finally, the provision of a call detail record that is available at the RS-232 Computer Port to record the time and duration of the call, along with the number that was called back.
5.02
While it is not recommended, the SAC may also be programmed to allow instant access (circumvention of the call back feature) upon the- receipt of a particular password.
Passwords must be Dual-Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) digit strings that range from 1 to 15 digits in length. Only a DTMF type of telephone can be used to access the SAC. Rotary dial telephones cannot be used since rotary digits can only be received by, but not transmitted through, a Central Office.
OPERATIONAL SEQUENCES
5.03
5.04
The steps listed below show the operational Controller:
sequences
of the
Note:
A single progress tone as used in the steps below indicates that the user will hear a single beep in the receiver earpiece of the telephone. In a like manner, a double progress tone means two beeps and a triple progress tone means three beeps. The user dials the directory telephone device with a DTMF type telephone. number of the protected
1) 2)
The SAC detects the incoming call, disconnects the protected equipment from the line, and answers the call. The SAC may then optionally provide the user with a single progress tone. The user enters his/her password by keying the correct digits on the telephone. This password may be from 1 to 15 digits in length and consists of any of the 12 standard DTMF digits. If an exact match for the password cannot be found in the SAC
3)
4)
Page
23
SECTION
MITL8350-048-IOO-NA
internal memory, the Controller drops the line (hangs up) and may optionally busy out that particular line for a programmable length of time. The unsuccessful password will be printed in the Call Detail Record.
5)
If an exact match for the password is found in the SAC internal memory, the Controller will check for the type of access that the password permits, including the time-of-day period assigned for that particular access. Upon verification of a valid password during the particular time-of-day period, the SAC will then execute its programmed action for that particular password. One of three series of events will occur: Automatic a) Callback Access:
6)
The password action is deemed to be an automatic callback. For this instance, the SAC will hang up the telephone line, reseize the line and dial back to the user by using a preprogrammed call back number associated with this particular password. The user must know that he has to hang up, or may optionally be requested to hang up by receipt of a triple progress tone ,from the Controller. This method of access is considered to be the most secure making it nearly impossible for someone to gain unauthorized access to the protected equipment.
User Entered Callback Access: b) The password action is deemed to be a user controlled callback type. This means that the user must manually tell the controller the telephone number to be used for the callback. The user either must know when to enter his telephone number and hang up, or may optionally be requested to input his telephone number by receipt of a double progress tone, and to hang up on receipt of a triple progress tone. As before, the SAC will then hang up and reseize the line. It will dial out using the user entered telephone number. This action is less secure that the previous action since the user provides the telephone number. However, the call detail record will contain the telephone number that the user has entered and was called back at. Access:
Cut-Through c)
The password action is deemed to be a cut-through type of access. In this case, there will be no progress tones received or any other SAC activity. At the expiration of the wait for password time period, the SAC will connect the caller to the protected device. This action is the least secure of the three actions. While the password must be entered exactly and the access attempt made
Page 24
SECTION
during the allowed time-of-day, there will be no record of the call with the exception of the time and duration of the access and the optional printing of the successful password.
DETAILED With 5.05 OPERATING DESCRIPTION
Modems
The following assumptions are taken into consideration when describing the detailed operating procedures that will follow in paragraph 5.06:
1) There are correctly installed and known functional Modem connections for the Central Processing Unit (CPU) and the remote access. Any installation should first be capable of functioning without the SAC device present to cut down on non-SAC related operational questions.
2)
If installation problems are encountered at any time, the SAC device should be removed to prove that connections are possible without the device. Otherwise, considerable effort could be expended when the problem is in other areas of the system. Persons accessing the system (users) have been previously advised of any necessary sequence of events required in order to establish a valid Modem connection. In some instances, specialized sequences will be required. Callback Access
3)
Automatic 5.06 cess: 1) 2)
The following steps outline the operations of the Security Access Controller that occur when using automatic callback ac-
The caller dials the host system over the telephone
lines.
The protected Modem senses ringing and seizes the line. With proper programming, the SAC then splits the line while the protected Modem is waiting for the line to settle (about 2 seconds). The Modem (at the end of the line settling period) places an answer tone on its output to the SAC. The SAC emits a single progress tone to the caller. No Modem tones are supplied to the caller. The caller, after hearing the progress tone (unless disabled), must enter the assigned password via DTMF dialing. Two conditions must be satisfied at this point. The first is that the protected Modem must be capable of answering in the answer mode for a programmable period of time that is sufficient to allow the callback to occur. The second is that the called back Modem must be capable of being forced into the originate mode upon receipt of the callback. A more efficient variation of the above description would be that the protected Modem answer the incoming call in the
3)
Note:
Page
25
SECTION
MITL8350-048-IOO-NA
originate mode (waiting for answer tone) for a period of time long enough to allow the callback to occur, as previously mentioned. In this case, the callback could be automatically answered by the Modem that is accessing the host system. These events depend upon the sophistication of the Modems and the ingenuity of the user.
4)
After a programmable period of time, the SAC will drop the line. The SAC will reseize the line if the password is valid, and will dial back the caller via the use of speed dialing. If the protected Modem is waiting for an originate tone (via programming), the calling Modem may simply answer the call automatically, thus establishing the connection. The SAC will cut-through upon the completion of its call back and connect the two Modems. If the called Modem is waiting in the answer mode (most common used mode), the caller must place his Modem into the originate mode upon receipt of the callback. Once connection is established, the SAC goes to sleep and appears as a direct through connection to the two Modems. Call disconnection is accomplished as per normal operation, or at a loss of carrier detect at either Modem. In the 2- and 4-line models, the SAC is continually monitoring the other unused lines while the above procedure is taking place. Callback Access
5)
6)
7)
Note:
User-Entered 5.07 access: 1)
The following steps outline the operations of the Security Access Controller that occur when using user entered callback
The caller dials the host system over the telephone
lines.
2)
The protected Modem senses ringing and seizes the line. With proper programming, the SAC then splits the line while the protected Modem is waiting for the line to settle (about 2 seconds). The Modem (at the end of the line settling period) places an answer tone on its output to the SAC. The SAC emits a single progress tone to the caller. No Modem tones are supplied to the caller. Two conditions must be satisfied at this point. The first is that the protected Modem must be capable of answering in the answer mode for a programmable period of time that is sufficient to allow the callback to occur. The second is that the called back Modem must be capable of being forced into the originate mode upon receipt of the callback. The caller, after hearing the progress tone (unless disabled), must enter the assigned password via DTMF dialing. Upon validation of the password, the SAC will emit a double progress tone to the caller. The caller, after hearing the double progress tone (unless dis-
3)
4)
Page
26
_I :
. ..
abled), must enter the telephone number for callback by DTMF dialing. Two conditions must be satisfied at this point. The first is that the protected Modem must be capable of answering in the answer mode for a programmable period of time that is sufficient to allow the callback to occur. The second is that the called back Modem must be capable of being forced into the originate mode upon receipt of the callback.
Note:
A more efficient variation of the above description would be that the protected Modem answer the incoming call in the originate mode (waiting for answer tone) for a period of time long enough to allow the callback to occur, as previously mentioned. In this case, the callback could be automatically answered by the Modem that is accessing the host system. These events depend upon the sophistication of the Modems and the ingenuity of the user. After a programmable period of time, the SAC will drop the line. The SAC will reseize the line if the password is valid, and will dial back the caller using the number just accessed. If the protected Modem is waiting for an originate tone (via programming), the calling Modem may simply answer the call automatically, thus establishing the connection. The SAC will cut-through upon the completion of its call back and connect the two Modems. If the called Modem is waiting in the answer mode (most common used mode), the caller must place his Modem into the originate mode upon receipt of the callback. Once connection is established, the SAC goes to sleep and appears as a direct through connection to the two Modems. Call disconnection is accomplished as per normal operation, or at a loss of carrier detect at either Modem. In the 2- and 4-line models, the SAC is continually monitoring the other unused lines while the above procedure is taking place.
5)
6)
7)
8)
Note:
Cut Through Access The following steps outline the operations of the Security Access Controller that occur when using access via Cut Through Access: 1) 2) 3) The caller dials the host system via the telephone line. 5.08
The protected Modem senses ringing and seizes the line. With proper programming, the SAC splits the line while the protected Modem is waiting for the line to settle (approximately 2 seconds). After line settling, the protected Modem places an answer tone at its output. No Modem tones are supplied to the caller. The answering Modem must remain on the line while the caller,
4)
Page 27
SECTION
after hearing the single progress tone (unless his assigned password via DTMF dialing. 5)
disabled)
enters
Upon verification of the password, the SAC will cut-through (connect the caller to the protected Modem). The calling Modem will respond with an originate tone that establishes the connection. Except for the slight pause required to enter the callers password, this is a standard access and requires no special considerations. The only constraint is that a valid password must be entered within a predetermined length of time. Failure to enter the password within this time frame (determined by the answering Modem and/or SAC constraints programmed as desired) would result in the line being dropped and the access failing. Once the connection is established, the SAC device goes to sleep and appears as a direct connection between the two Modems. Modem disconnection is established as per normal routines or at a loss of carrier detect at either Modem.
Operational Procedures
6)
Other
5.08
Other operational procedures or applications depend on the type of equipment being protected and the related operating conditions. In all applications, the three basic modes of access in descending order of security are:
0
Automatic
Callback on Valid Password
0 0
Callback to User Entered Number on Valid Password Connection upon Receipt of Valid Password.
Page 28
SECTION
6. INITIALIZATION INTRODUCTION
Initialization is the procedure that readies the SMarT-1 Security Access Controller for initial programming. This procedure has been detailed previously in Part 2 of this document. Since it is a very important procedure, it will be listed again in this part in detail.
6.01
There are several reasons for accomplishing initialization of the SAC. These are a) that the Controller has just been removed from storage or has just been received, or b) the program access codes have been deleted accidentally or the access codes have been changed and forgotten, or c) the Controller has just been repaired, or d) the Controller has been stored for a long period of time, or e) the Controller has had a loss of data retention.
Note:
6.02
If the reason for initialization is e) above, it is recommended that the reason for loss of data retention be found and corrected.
6.03
Once. initialized, the Controller should seldom require reinitialization. After initialization, the Controller may be programmed by use of a suitable terminal. A default data base may be loaded by issuing a command via this terminal. Prior to injtialization, ensure that the Controller has been powered on for a sufficient period of time to allow the internal NI-CAD battery to be charged. This period should be approximately 24 hours long. The battery protects the memory against loss of data during power outages and will sustain the memory for several days, once charged.
6.05
6.04
Initialization is accomplished by use of a suitable terminal connected to the RS-232 Computer Port. A suitable terminal is defined as one that meets the following criteria: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Capable of transmitting No parity 8 bit characters with one stop bit Bit 8 sense = SPACE Full Duplex communications Connection to the RS-232 Computer Port with a suitable cable configured as DCE with the following pin connections: a) b) c) d) e) Pins 1 and 7 = GROUND Pin 2 = RxD (Signal in) Pin 3 = TxD (Signal out) Pins 4 and 5 = Tied together Pins 6, 8, and 20 = Tied together. and receiving at 1200 Baud.
Page
29
SECTION
Note:
The Security Access Controller does not respond to DTR, RTS, etc..
PROCEDURE
6.06
The steps below show the procedure to be followed to initialize the Controller: Power the SAC off. Connect a suitable terminal to the RS-232 Computer Port. Power the terminal required). on and set for the required parameters (if the ..
1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
Power the SAC on. Once on, the Controller will monitor RS-232 Computer Port for a period of 7 seconds.
During this 7 second period, enter the characters AAfrom the terminal keyboard (in upper case only). Within another 7 second period, the SAC should respond with:
REV xx-xx ENTERING PROG. MODE
where xx-xx is the revision of the software resident in the controller. Once this message has appeared, the SAC is in the programming mode.
* Note:
The SAC should not be powered down while it is in the programming mode as it will cause the unit to print checksum errors on the next power up sequence.
If, after 7 seconds, the initialize command is not received, the SAC will check its internal memory for the programmed Baud rate (1200 Baud by default) and switch the RS-232 Computer Port to that rate. 6.07 6.08 Initialization of the SAC will load a complete database for automatic callback operation with the following communications parameters: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6.09 1200 Baud Rate No Parity 8 bit Characters with one Stop Bit Bit 8 Sense = SPACE Full Duplex Communications
Once initialized, programming may be immediately started via the terminal. The user may elect to exit the programming mode by entering 999on the terminal keyboard. If 999is entered, the SAC will respond on the terminal display with:
QUITTING PROG. MODE..
Page 30
SECTION
MITL8350-048-IOO-NA
Note:
Pressing <CR> on the keyboard will not allow programming if the default Terminal Program Access Code (<CR>) has been changed. Refer to Part 7, Programming for more details. If nothing is entered on the terminal keyboard for a period of 1 minute, the SAC will automatically print on the terminal display: WARNING . . . LOGOUT IN 60s. exit the programming
6.10
and 1 minute later, the SAC will automatically mode.
Page
31
SECTION
MITL8350-048-IOO-NA
---
THIS
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
---
Page
32
SECTION
MITL8350-048-IOO-NA
7. PROGRAMMING INTRODUCTION
Prior to using the SMarT-I Security Access Controller, some basic programming must be entered into the unit. This basic programming provides the Controller with the date, time, passwords, and other fundamental information that is pertinent to the operation of the unit. The parameters to be programmed depend on the type of operation that is expected of the Controller.
7.01 Note:
Before programming the unit, ensure that it has been initialized and powered on long enough to charge the internal battery. For more information on initializing, refer to Part 6, page 29. Initializing the SMarT-1 Security Access Controller will pro-
7.02
vide the unit with part of the basic programming that is pertinent to the operation. This initialization procedure will cause the unit to be programmed as listed in Table 7-l below. The table also lists the associated parameter label that applies to the default data. Table 7-1, Initialization/Default Programming Parameters ASSOCIATED PARAMETER LABEL
DEFAULT
DESCRIPTION-
INTERNAL PASSWORD
CLOCK = No time or date entered

DATA = No passwords
980 821 thru 835

6r5
present
ACCESS CONTROL SEQUENCE = Callbacks are dialed to the DDD Network
CALLBACK NUMBER DATA = No callback numbers present

TYPE OF CENTRAL OFFICE = Loop Start DTMF Digit output Communications
7nnn
xoot xoot 006t
PRINTER Fixed:
BAUD
RATE = 1200 Baud RS-232 No parity
8-bit words Bit 8 Sense = SPACE Full duplex On line

PRINT FORMAT = Call Detail Record in SMART Format
009t
x27t
AUTO ANSWER TIMER = Automatically

seconds WAIT
answer incoming calls in 3

for password entry x28t
FOR PASSWORD TIMER = Wait 8 seconds

(Continued)
Page
33
SECTION
Table
7-l
(Contd),
initialization/Default
Programming
Parameters ASSOCIATED PARAMETER LABEL
DEFAULT
DESCRIPTION
AUTO
ANSWER
LOCKOUT
TIMER
= Busy Out line for 20 seconds on
invalid password
TONE OPTIONS = Single tone to request password ON
x29t Double tone to request callback number ON Triple tone to request caller hang up ON x35t x35t x35t x36t
602 CODE = <CR>
DIALBACK MACHINE TERMINAL NAME
TIMER
= Wait for 5 seconds before initiating = SAC SECURITY
callback
IDENTIFIER PROGRAM
604 6rO
OF ROUTE
= DDD Common Carrier programming is in default.
No Other
Note:
The letter xor rin the parameter label represents a single user selectable character for entry to select a specific part of the parameter. The letter trepresents a digit that selects a specific operation of the parameter.
While the default parameters listed in the Table 7-l above is not a complete listing of all of the parameters that are resident in the Controller, they are the ones that are the most pertinent to unit operation. The remaining parameters (not listed in the table) are set to defaults that will work in nearly all applications. These other parameters are programmable for those times when standard conditions of the telephone lines or dialing patterns are not present. 7.03
PROGRAMMING FOR CALLBACK OPERATION
Programming is accomplished from a terminal attached to the RS-232 Computer Port of the Controller. Programming consists of entering a parameter identifier consisting of three or more digits, followed by a data string and an entry terminator (if required). For example, if the unit were in the programming mode and it is desired to program the time and date, the parameter 980would be entered. This parameter would be followed by the month, day, hour, and minutes entered as a digit string. The string would be composed of four, two digit groups for the date and time. This string does not require a terminator and the Controller would automatically accept and enter the terminal data.
TERMINAL > USER DATA [mmddhhmm]
7.04
PARAMETER
TERMINATOR (none)
D801
Page
34
SECTION
NOTES ON DATA ENTRY Whenever the Controller knows the length of a parameter entry, the entry will automatically be accepted by the SAC without the need of following the entry with a terminator. For string type entries of unknown length (to the SAC), a terminator of BB or FF must be entered to identify the end of the entry. Technically, BB, FF, and . . are all internally interpreted as the same digit (see Table C-2, page C-5). The last character of an ASCII string may not be B. However, a single B within a string is allowed. If the last character of an ASCII string must be B, then it must be followed with a nonprinting character such as a <SPACE> (hexadecimal 20). If necessary, the <LF>, <FF>, <CR>, <BEL> and so on may also be used within an ASCII string. The greater than sign (>) on the terminal display indicates that the SAC is ready to receive a parameter number followed by data. This character is called the prompt character. If an error is made and noticed during data entry, simply press the carriage return (<CR>) key until the > prompt returns to the screen. In this case, the input string will be ignored. NOTES ON ORDER OF PASSWORD PROGRAMMING In general, passwords with automatic callback actions either should be programmed into the unit first, or a specific block of numbers with the last three digits being used to address passwords should be set up. The same password may not be used with different action digits.
7.05
Prior to accomplishing the programming for callback operation, the following conditions are assumed to exist: The terminal access code will still be <CR>. The Central Office is capable of DTMF dialing input. The Central Office is a Loop Start type common in Modem applications). 1200 Baud communications The protected Modem ringing detection. will suffice. of office (the most
1) 2) 3)
4) 5)
remains ON LINE for 45 seconds after
6)
Callback is to take place on the standard DDD Network.

Steps
Procedural 7.06
To program the SMarT-1 Security Access Controller for Callback Operation, accomplish the steps listed below:
Page
35
SECTION
Note:
User entered data will be enclosed in square brackets. For more information on conventions used in this manual, refer to Part 1, paragraph 1.12. Ensure that the Controller has been powered up and initialized in accordance with Part 6, paragraph 6.06. Press carriage return (<CR>) on the terminal keyboard to start the programming session. The terminal display should respond with:
REV xx-xx > ENTERING PROG. MODE
1)
2)
3)
Enter the time and date by pressing: > 1980mmddhhmml where 980 = the time/date parameter, mm = the two digit month, dd = the two digit day, hh = the two digit hour, and mm = the two digit minutes. Note that single digit entries for mm, dd, hh, mm should be prefixed with a 0to make them double digit entries.
4)
Enter the machine identifier as Tomby pressing: > 1602546F6DBBl where 602 = the machine identifier parameter, 54 = ASCII T, 6F = ASCII o, 6D = ASCII m, and BB = the data terminator.
4)
Enter the password, callback code, and the time-of-day code by pressing: > L825123452OBBl
access
where 825 = the parameter for a five digit password, 12345 = the actual password, 2 = the action digit to be performed (in this case, go to speed call callback location), 0 = the timeof-day code (all day, 24 hour access), and BB = the data terminator.
6)
Enter the callback number for the above password by pressing: > L734583931212BBI where 7 = the register prefix, 345 = the bin number of callback number and is equal to the last three digits of password, 8 = the network override and indicates to use search tables, 393 1212 = the callback number, and BB = data terminator. the the the the
7.07
The last entry above is the end of this example of programming. The user should now proceed with the example listed to show how to check the entered data as given below:
DESCRIPTION
ENTER
SAC RESPONSE
c9021
[6021
<CR>
<LF> >
Data confirmation ASCII for Tom.
mode entered.
546F6D
Page 36
SECTION
MITL8350-048-100-NA
[8251
1234520
The password and its action digits. Use search table code followed number to call back. Returned to programming Programming mode. by the telephone
173451
Km WI91
83931212 <CR> QUIll-ING <LF> > PROG. MODE 7.08
session ended. terminal display for the
Figure 7-1 below above actions.
shows the typical
>902 >602 546F6D >825 1234520 >7345 83931212 >907 >999

QUITTING PROG. MODE
Figure 7-1, Terminal 7.09
Display of Data Entry Check
The Controller is now ready to be placed into service for the purposes of the above example. Assuming that the power has been applied for a sufficient length of time, it is safe to unplug the Controller and to install it on a telephone line between a Modem and the outside telephone wires. No programmed data will be lost. For more information on installation, refer to Part 4, page 13. For a more detailed explanation of programming, refer to page 42 of this Part. TESTING THE CONTROLLER INSTALLATION Some of the activity as described in the Theory steps below is caused by additional default data that is resident in the Controller. More complete details of operation are described in later paragraphs. Prior to proceeding with the testing, install the Controller as outlined in paragraphs 7.06 through 7.09 above. Modem 7.11 Setup Ensure that the protected parameters: Modem is set up with the following 7.10
1) 2) 3)
Answer at the end of the first ring (i.e., after 2 seconds ringing). To look for originate tone for 45 seconds (this parameter require fine tuning). To disconnect on loss of carrier.
of
may
Theory of the Test 7.12 The Modem will answer the line within 2 seconds. In an additional 2 seconds later (after line settling time), the Modem will
Page 37
SECTION
begin transmitting an answer tone. In 3 seconds, however, the Controller will electrically separate the Modem from the line and take over the telephone call. Thus, the Modem is split away from the telephone line before it can begin transmitting the answer tone. The Controller supplies the loop current to the Modem during this split mode. This loop current allows the Modem to believe that the telephone call is still present. Upon answering, the Controller transmits a progress tone (one beep, if enabled), indicating that the caller should enter a password. The Controller will remain in the waiting for password state for 8 seconds (programmable). At the end of the 8 second waiting period and the acceptance of DTMF digits, the Controller will stop accepting digits. The Controller will then analyze what it has received, and, if it was a valid password (12345 in our example above), will emit a triple progress tone (three beeps, if enabled) indicating that the password has been accepted. This indicates that the caller should terminate the call and should wait for the callback to his telephone line. The Controller will remain on the line for 5 more seconds (programmable). It will then hang up and initiate its own telephone call as determined by the 7345 coding (3931212 in the example above). 7.13 7.14 As the Controller dials the last digit of the callback number, it reconnects the Modem to the telephone and drops off the line. From this point, and on until the call is terminated, there is no further activity or interference by the Controller.
When the Modem drops the line (hangs up), a Call Detail Record will be made available at the RS-232 Computer Port. This record will show the time of the call, the duration of the call, and the password that was entered. The password field may be turned off (disabled from printing the password) by programming if desired. Refer to Paragraph 7.85. 7.15 On callback to the user (when the users telephone rings), the users Modem must be placed in the ON-LINE and ORIGINATE modes. On answering the incoming call from the Controller, an answer tone will be received from the protected Modem. Once the users Modem senses this answer tone and responds to it with an originate tone, the Modem connection will be established. 7.16 Termination of the call will occur on the loss of carrier (hang-up). This loss of carrier will cause the protected Modem to drop the telephone line. The Controller will detect the termination of call as a loss of line current. At this time, the Controller will prepare to accept further accesses. 7.17
Actual Testing 7.18

The steps listed below describe the actual troller as installed for Callback Operation: Place word. testing of the Con-
1.
a call to the protected Modem without entering The Controller should time out in approximately
a pass11 sec-
Page 38
SECTION
onds after ringing. This 11 second period includes 3 seconds after start and 8 seconds of waiting for the password digits. After time out, the Controller will keep the Modem separated from the line and holds the line busy for an additional 20 seconds. The controller should return to the waiting for ringing mode. If this occurs, the call has been successfully denied. 2. Place a call to the protected Modem and enter an INVALID password. Once again, the Controller will keep the Modem separated from the line and holds the line busy for an additonal 20 seconds. The controller should time out in 11 seconds and return to the waiting for ringing mode. If this occurs, the call has again been successfully denied. Place a call to the protected Modem. The Modem should answer the call within 2 seconds. The Controller should split the Modem away from the line in 3 seconds and send a progress tone (beep). Enter a valid password. In approximately 15 seconds, the Controller should begin dialing out the digits of the callback number. This last 15 second period includes 8 seconds of waiting for password digits, 5 seconds to allow the caller to hang up, and approximately 2 seconds for the Controller to drop and reseize the line. Approximately 18 seconds should elapse between the protected Modem ringing and the initiation of the Callback function. Allowing IO seconds for the acquisition of dialtone, dialing the number, and for ringing to start at the users telephone, this leaves the user with approximately 17 seconds to answer the call with the users Modem in the ON-LINE and ORIGINATE modes. This time period occurs since the protected Modem has been programmed to drop the line in 45 seconds.
7.19
3.
If it is found to be undesirable to allow the caller to hear the protected Modems answer tone before the line split occurs, it may be necessary to fine tune the Controller and the Modem answer timing until the Controller takes over the control of the line within 2 seconds after the Modem answers the line. 7.20 In general, the Controller timing can be programmed to adapt to most situations encountered as long as the protected Modem is capable of remaining ON-LINE for a long enough period to allow call completion. Refer to Figure 7-2 for a graphic representation of the Modem and Controller timing.
PROGRAMMING TION FOR USER-ENTERED CALLBACK NUMBER OPERA-
7.21
User entered Callback number means that the caller will, upon entry of a valid password, be requested to enter the telephone number (and the # terminator to indicate end of number) that the Controller will use to call back. This method differs from the previously described method in that the SAC does not determine the callback number from the interpretation of the password. The password, in this
Page
39
SECTION
CONTROLLER 0
4
(SAC)
12 17 20 26
IlllLllllllIllIlIllIlllllIllI (A) (6) (C) (D) (E) (F)
>
TIME
(in seconds)
PROTECTED
0 3
MODEM
26
Mlll1Hllllllllllllllllh 0 (H) (0
>
TIME
(in seconds)
Where: A
B
=
=
RINGING ENTERING PASSWORD
USERS TELEPHONE RINGING
= = =
COMM. ESTABLISHED
RINGING ANSWER Modem TONE
C
D
=
=
CALLBACK DELAY
G DIALTONE ACQUISITION & DIALING DIGITS H
Figure
7-2,
Typical
Callback
Operation,
SAC and
Timing
case, does not address a callback memory location. ,,.::i:i&&$&+:~ The programmer must take care to avoid assigning a I::ll;ii-lll,: password that has been already assigned and classed as an automatic callback password. The same password cannot be used for both methods of operation.
TERMINAL > > Note: USER DATA (none) [7627810]
PARAMETER [<CR>] [8251
TERMINATOR (none) [BBI
The first carriage return in the description above causes the Controller to enter the programming mode. The second line of the description is the entry of the password, callback code, and time-of-day access code. For the purposes of this discussion, the password will be 76278 and the access code of 10is wait for the caller to enter the password and access is granted 24 hours a day, respectively. Refer to page 60 for a complete description of password entry.
7.22
This completes the necessary programming for a user entered callback number. The Controller will now wait for 16 seconds after the 8 second wait for password period, to allow the caller to enter the callback number.
Page
40
SECTION
The caller MUST enter the callback number followed by the # terminator to indicate end of number, in the same exact manner as if it were being dialed from the protected Modem. This is particularly true if the callback number is a long distance number. Informing the callers of the procedures to use is left up to the Controller manager.
7.23
7.24
There will be a single progress tone heard in the receiver to inform the caller to enter the password. A double progress tone (two beeps) will be heard to request entry of the callback number. Finally, a triple progress tone will be issued to request that the caller hang up. The timing sequence for the events is the same as those in Figure 7-2 except for the addition of a 16 second period to wait while the Controller waits for the caller to enter the callback number. 7.25 Any or all of the request progress tones may be disabled if desired by programming. Refer to Page 51 for more information on disabling progress tones.
Program Verification
7.26
The steps shown below allow the user to verify that the programming data was entered correctly for User-Entered Callback Number Operation:
DESCRIPTION
ENTER
SAC
RESPONSE
19021 [8251
<CR>
<LF> >
Data confirmation
mode entered.
12345207627810
This data string is the Password and its Action Digits. Note that the 1234520 is still present as entered in the example under Programming for Callback Operation.
7.27
The next two lines of data were entered in the preceding example under Programming for Callback Operation. These are checked in the same manner as the lines above. The last two lines illustrate the end of the programming session.
DESCRIPTION
ENTER
SAC
RESPONSE
[73451 16021 [9071 19991
83931212
Use Search Table code followed by the Telephone Number to call back (from preceding example). ASCII for Tom (from preceding example). Returned to programming Programming mode.
546F6D <CR> <LF> >
QUl-l-TlNG PROG. MODE 7.28
session ended.
Figure 7-3 on the next page shows a typical terminal display for the above actions.
Page
41
SECTION
>902 >825 12345207627810 >7345 83931212 >602 546F6D >907 >999 QUITTING PROG. Figure 7-3,
MODE Terminal Display, User-Entered Callback Number _
7.29
If the Controller was left installed while it was being programmed, the programmer may go directly to testing the userentered callback password. It is not necessary to remove the Controller from service while it is being programmed.
DTMF CUT-THROUGH ACCESS
7.30
This is the least secure method of access to the Controller. The method provides no callback number, automatic or otherwise. Depending on the action digits programmed, the time and date of access and password may optionally be printed in the Call Detail Record.
7.31
Programming simply consists of entering the password along with the proper action digit, along with the time of day access code. Refer to Page 60 for a complete description of passwords and action digits. When the dialed password has been analyzed (approximately 8 seconds after answering the call), the Controller will immediately connect the caller to the protected Modem, if the password is valid.
DETAILED PROGRAMMING DESCRIPTIONS
7.32
The following paragraphs outline the parameter descriptions in the order that they appear in later parts. These parameters help to describe the complete Controller capabilities and show its versatility. They are: 1.
SYSTEM PARAMETERS -
affect the system-wide clude: a.

SPECIAL
System parameters are those that operation of the Controller. They in-
PARAMETERS - These parameters allow data confirmation, the setting of time and date, and the loading of default data base, etc.
b.
OPERATIONAL PARAMETERS - These parameters affect the Baud rate, the Call Detail Recording format, etc.
2.
TRUNK
RELATED PARAMETERS - These parameters affect individual trunk activity and capabilities such as the type of Central Office, and dialing type.
Page 42
SECTION MlTL8350-048-I
OO-NA
3.
PASSWORD PROGRAMMING - This part includes the programming of the password itself. It also describes the accompanying codes that will control whether or not the password is printed in the Call Detail Record, the time of day that the password will be accepted, and the action to perform upon acceptance of the password. Programming is required in this area for either automatic callback operation, user-entered callback numbers, or cut through access. AUTOMATIC CALLBACK PROGRAMMING (SPEEDCALLS) - This programs the area where the numbers to be dialed out for an automatic callback triggered by the password are stored. This area includes the programming of a selected route, if desired. For other modes of operation, no programming is required in this area. SEARCH TABLES - Callback numbers are normally passed through the Search Tables in order to decide which route the callback will be placed on. If the standard DDD route is used for callbacks (no Other Common Carrier used), it will probably not be necessary to program these parameters. The default entries will handle most cases, whether the calls are long distance or local. This area, if programmed properly, could be used to prevent callbacks to certain geographical areas or to prevent any long distance calls whatsoever, or to determine what types of dial out will be allowed in general (user-entered in particular). Both automatic and user-entered callback numbers may pass through these search tables prior to the controller dialing. An instruction to deny calls to a particular area code at this point would not allow the call to that area code even if it were entered in the Automatic Callback Programming data.
4.
5.
6.
ROUTE RELATED PARAMETERS - Routes, as defined for the Controller, are dialing sequences, control of dialtone detection, the sequence of digits to be dialed out, and other related details. A route is actually better defined as the instructions that the Controller uses in accomplishing the callback function. The default programming that is resident in the Controller will place all callbacks on the DDD Route (normal dialing through ATT or whatever standard service is being used). In the event that a customer is using an Other Common Carrier (OCC) such as SPRINT, MCI, etc., these routes may be programmed contain the information for automatic entry of the authorization codes, etc.
System 7.33
Parameters
Table 7-2 on the next page contains System Special Parameters while Table 7-3 (page 47) contains System Operational Parameters. These parameters include default, if applicable, and a description of the options available when entering the parameters.
Page 43
SECTION
MITL8350-048-IOO-NA
Table ENTER x, x, 999 980mmddhhmm
7-2,
System
Special
Parameters DESCRIPTION
Exit program mode. Enter Date and Time for Call Detail Record and Time-of-Day Access Control. Enter Data Confirmation Mode. This parameter allows programmed data to be read back for verification. Exit Data Confirmation Mode. Return to program mode.
902 907 942903
Load Factory Installed Default Database. This command will re-install all default database parameter settings and will delete any other programmed data. Delete All Search Table Entries. CAUTION - This command deletes all callback instructions that are resident in the 801 through 815 and 821 through 835 Search Tables. The Controller cannot operate without data entered in these tables. The only reason for erasing this data is if the user wishes to restart with an entirely new data program and where it is not convenient to delete the old data one piece at a time.
BB
942904
601 ( Number) 602 (ASCII
Area Code of Other Common Carrier (if used). The default for this entry is 000.The entry must always be 3 digits, if used. Machine Identifier for Call Detail Recording Output. The default for this entry is SAC.A maximum of three characters will be printed. Terminal Program Security Code. The default for this entry is <CR> where <CR> = Carriage Return. A maximum of I5 characters may be used for the entry. 7.34 X, x, 999 - Exit program mode. These commands may be used to exit from a programming session. Either the Xor xcommand may be used anywhere in string entry to cause the Controller to immediately exit from the programming mode. The 999 command is only used to exit from a programming session when all programming has been completed. The terminal display will reply with the message:
> 19991 QUITTING Note: PROG. MODE
) BB
604 {ASCII ) BB
If X or x are used to exit programming, the message will be printed, but the [9991 entry in the example above will be either [XI or [xl respectively. In the example above and in the examples to follow, user entered data is enclosed in the brackets [ 1. All other data not enclosed in the brackets is data that the Controller sends to the terminal display.
7.35
The Controller, after sending the message to the display, exits programming mode. To re-enter the programming mode, the user must type a <CR> on the terminal keyboard.
Page 44
SECTION
:.:_,. i,..,
- Enter Date and Time for Call Detail Record and Timeof-Day Access Control. This command must be followed by the two digit groups for the current month, day, hour, and minutes (format mmddhhmm). The command sets the internal clock of the Controller. This internal clock is used for the time printout on the Call Detail Record. It is also used to determine if access is allowed due to the time-of-day programming by comparing the actual time of call against the preprogrammed time-of-day parameter. 7.36 980
7.37
A typical entry for a 980 parameter for January 28, 09:26 AM would be:
> [980012809261 >
902 - Enter Data Confirmation Mode. This command causes the controller to leave the programming mode and enter the data confirmation mode. This mode allows the programmer to verify that the Controller has received the programming data correctly into the internal memory. Once entered, the command causes the Controller to return the > prompt to the display. The Controller then expects the programmer to enter a parameter to be checked. Once entered, the controller will space on the display and show the characteristics of that particular parameter. For example, if a check were made of the machine identifier as entered in paragraph 7.06, the following steps would be accomplished: 7.38 > 19021 > 16021 546F6D
> [9071 > Note: 9xX parameters
are commands and therefore, not verifiable.
7.39
907 - Exit Data Confirmation Mode. The 907 command causes the Controller to exit from a data confirmation session and to return to the programming mode. A typical example of this is shown above where the 602parameter was checked for accuracy.
942903
- Load Factory Installed Default Database. This command should be used with caution. It will cause the Controller to delete all previous programming data and to install all default database parameter settings. In Tables that follow, these default parameter settings are listed in column 2. The example below shows the manner of entry.
7.40
> [9421 > [9031 >

7.41 - Delete All Search Table Entries. This is another command that should be used with extreme caution. It causes the Controller to delete all data that has been entered in the 801 through 942904
Page
45
815 and 821 through 835 Search Tables. If only a few entries in these tables are to be changed, it is recommended that the parameters to be changed be programmed singularly. This command should only be used if there are too many parameters to be changed one at a time and it is desired to re-enter the complete programming for all the Search Tables. Note that the Controller cannot function properly without data in these tables.
Note:
After deleting all search table entries with the 942904 command, the default data base can be reloaded by entering a 942903 command.
> > >
[9421 [9041
7.42
601 - Area Code of Other Common Carrier (OCC). If the OCC requires an area code entry for dialing, it should be entered with this command. Command data entry should be followed with the end of entry indicators BB. The data to be entered must be 3 digits in length, if used. If not used, the default data for this entry is 000. For example, if the area code for the OCC was 613,it would be entered as follows: > [601613BBl > 602 - Machine Identifier for Call Detail Record Output. This command allows the programmer to enter a character or group of characters that will be printed on the Call Detail Record. It appears on the far right side of the printout. Note that only three characters will be printed, regardless of the length of the identifier over three characters. If the identifier is under four characters, all will be printed. The identifier must be entered as ASCII characters. Refer to Appendix C, Table C-l for ASCII equivalents. The command data must be terminated with the BB terminator. The default for this command is SAC. For example, if the Controller is to be identified as CHICAGO (only CHI will appear in CDR output), it would be programmed as: 7.43 > [6024348494341474FBBl > 604 - Terminal Program Security Code. This command allows the programmer to change the security code required for entry into programming. The security code default on initialization is <CR>. Once initialized, the unit enters immediately into the programming mode if the security code has not been changed. The data for this entry is limited to 15 characters maximum and must be entered in ASCII format. The data string entered must be followed by the BB data entry terminator. Refer to Appendix C, Table C-l for the ASCII equivalents. For example, if a programmer wished to change the security code to BOB, the entry would appear as: 7.44 _
Page 46
> [604424F42BBl > 7.45 After entering this command as shown above, and after exiting the programming mode, access to programming can only be gained by entering BOBon the terminal keyboard as shown below: [BOB] REV xx-xx > where xx-xx Controller. Note:
ENTERING PROG. MODE
is the revision
of the software
that is resident
in the
The password BOBis entered on the keyboard, displayed on the terminal for security reasons. Parameters
but is not
Table 7-3, System Wide Operational NTER Dolt DEFAULT 0
DESCRIPTION Re-Order Tone, where tequals: 0 = OFF 1 = ON
D05t
Number of Trunk to monitor for Call Detail Record where tequals: Digit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Allowed Trunk(s)
1
Digit 8 9 A B C D E
Allowed
Trunk(s)
All (default) 2 I,2 3 I,3 23 123
4 I,4 24 I,2,4 3,4

1,3,4
234
006t
Baud Rate of RS-232 Computer Port, where tequals: 0 = 1200 Baud 1 = 110 Baud 2 = 300 Baud 3 = 600 Baud 4 = 1200 Baud (Default) 5 = 2400 Baud 6 = 4800 Baud 7 = 9600 Baud
007t
Number of Nulls to follow after a Carriage Return during Call Detail Recording Output. The default entry is 2. Any digit from 0 through 9 may be entered when programming this parameter. (continued)
Page 47
SECTION
MITL8350-048-IOO-NA
Table ENTER 009t DEFAULT 2
7-3
(Contd),
System
Wide
Operational DESCRIPTION
Parameters
Selection of Print Format for Call Detail Recording Output, where t equals: 0 = Call Detail Recording Disabled. 1 = MITEL Format selected. 2 = SMarT Format selected.
01ot
Route to Monitor, where tequals: 0 4 8 9 7.46 thru 3 = Primary Routes 1,2,3, and 4. thru 7 = Alternate Routes 5,6,7, and 8. = Monitor routed calls only. = All Routes (default).
OOlt
- Re-order Tone. This command enables or disables the re-order tone that is supplied to the caller on an unsuccessful access attempt. The default for the command is OFF (t= 0). Maximum security is obtained by using the default setting. For example, if it is desired to program the Controller to supply the re-order tone, the command would be entered as: > [00111 >
7.47
005t - Number of Trunk to monitor for Call Detail Record. In this command, the letter t designates a digit from 1 through 9 or a letter from A to E must be entered in its place. This character selects the trunks that may be monitored for data output to the Call Detail Record. If 0 is entered, or if no command entry is made (default), all trunks will send data to the Call Detail Record. For example, if It is desired to monitor activity on Trunks 1 through 3, a typical command entry would be:
> 100571 >

- This command selects the Baud rate of the RS-232 Computer Port. This allows the programmer to choose a rate for transmission to the attached device (terminal, printer, etc.) that will be acceptable by the chosen device. This change does not take effect until after exiting the programming mode. The default rate is 1200 Baud and need not be programmed if acceptable. The rate ranges from 110 to 9600 Baud in seven steps. Each step is associated with a particular number. For example, if a terminal that operates at 4800 Baud were to be attached to the RS-232 port after programming, the programming would be entered as: 006t
7.48
> [00661 >
Page 48
SECTION MITL8350-048-1
Il~~~ii~~~~~ =:-_11
OB-NA
~0
NOT
set
the
Baud
Rate
to
value
which
is
not
supported by the device that is connected to the RS232 Computer Port. Doing so will prevent any further programming of any kind, including any efforts to change the value of this parameter in any way. If this is done, the only way to do any further programming of any kind is to follow the initialization procedure detailed in paragraph 6.06 (page 301, which will delete all programming done to this point and will reload the default data base.
007t - This command selects the number of Nulls to be sent to a device attached to the RS-232 port following the transmission of a <CR> to the device. The default entry for this command is 2 where two Nulls will be sent. Any digit from 0 to 9 may be entered. The purpose of this command is to allow some adjustment in the timing of device display where required. For example, if a printer is attached to the port and this device prints in one direction only, it may not have enough time to execute a carriage return before printing additional data sent to it. The nulls allow the carriage to be returned to the start print position before receiving more data. For example, if this period required 4 nulls to accomplish the desired affect, it would be programmed as:
7.49
> 200741 > 7.50 009t - The 009 command selects the print format to be used when outputting data to the RS-232 Computer Port for Call Detail Recording. The only numbers allowed for selection and entry for t are 0, 1, and 2 where 2 is the default selection. 0disables Call Detail Recording. 1 selects the MITEL Format while 2 selects the SMarT-1 Format. For a description of the format, refer to para. 7.124. An example of programming to select the SMarT-1 Format is:
> [00921 >
01ot - This command selects the route to monitor for Call Detail Recording. Appropriate entries for tare a single digit from 0 through 9, where the numbers 0 through 3 equate to routes 1 through 4 respectively, and numbers 4 through 7 equate to alternate routes 5 through 8 respectively. 8 equates to enabling monitor of routed calls only, while 9 equates to enabling all routes and is the default for this command. A sample programming entry for route 4 would be: > jo1041 > Trunk Related 7.52 Parameters
7.51
Table 7-4 on the next page lists the Trunk related programming parameters. Detailed descriptions of the parameters follow the
Page 49
table. The letter x preceding the command digits indicates that a trunk select number be entered to choose the particular trunk to be programmed for the command. These numbers equate to: 1 2 3 4 5 7.53 = = = = = program program program program program only Trunk 1 only Trunk 2 only Trunk 3 only Trunk 4 all trunks simultaneously
For example, if it is desired to program ALL Trunks simultaneously for a Loop Start Central Office using Rotary dial, the programmer would enter: > [50001
> 7.54
To program only Trunk 2 for a Loop Start Central Office using DTMF dial, the programmer would enter:
> >
[20021
The parameters listed in Table 7-4 below may appear at first glance to be entered out of sequence. This sequence was used to list all pertinent parameters for the Controller first, followed by less relevant/less used parameters. Parameters
Note:
Table 7-4, Trunk Related ENTER

xoot
DEFAULT 2
DESCRIPTION Type of Central Office, where t equals: 0 1 2 3 = = = = Loop Start, Rotary Dialout Ground Start, Rotary Dialout Loop Start, DTMF Dialout Ground Start, DTMF Dialout
xOlt
Rotary Dialing Rate, where t equals: 3 = 40/30 ms Outpulse 4 = 60/40 ms Outpulse
x02t
DTMF Dialing Rate, where t equals: 0 1 2 3 4 = = = = = 40ms 50ms 60ms 70ms 80ms (continued) 5 = 6 = 7= 8 = 9 = 90ms 100ms 1lOms 120ms 130ms
I
Page 50
OO-NA
Table 7-4 (Contd), Trunk Related ENTER x05t DEFAULT 5 Time period 0 1 2 3 4 x27t 1 = = = = = 500ms 650ms 800ms 950ms 1100ms between
Parameters
DESCRIPTION Line Drop and Reseizure, 5 6 7 8 9 = = = = = 1250ms 1400ms 1550ms 1700ms 1850ms where t equals:
Call Answer Timer, where if t = 0, The Controller is OFFand all SAC activity is disabled. Calls into the protected Modem will not be processed or interfered with. Other values for t are: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 = = = = = = = = 3 seconds 6 seconds 9 seconds 12 seconds 15 seconds 18 seconds 21 seconds 24 seconds 9 = 27 A = 30 B = 33 C = 36 D = 39 E = 42 F = 45 seconds seconds seconds seconds seconds seconds seconds
x28t
Wait for Password Timer (after Answer), and Wait for User-Entered Callback Number (if called for in the password action digits). The first entry for t below is for the Password Timer, while the second entry is for the User-Entered Callback Number (if used). t equals: 0 = 1 = 2= 3 = 4 = 5 = 6 = 7 = 4/8 seconds 8/16 seconds 12/24 seconds 16/32 seconds 20/40 seconds 24/48 seconds 28/56 seconds 32/64 seconds 8 = 36/72 seconds 9 = 40/80 seconds A = 44/88 seconds B = 48/96 seconds C = 52/104 seconds D = 56/112 seconds E = 60/120 seconds
x29t
Lockout Timer. This timer will be invoked at the end of x28t if either no password has been entered, or if an invalid password has been entered. The timer will busy out the affected trunk for the duration of the its time period, preventing multiple rapid succession access attempts by unauthorized callers. Values for t are: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 = = = = = = = = 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 seconds seconds ,seconds seconds seconds seconds seconds seconds (continued) 8 = 9 = A = B = C = D = E= F= 90 seconds 100 seconds 110 seconds 120 seconds 130 seconds 140 seconds 150 seconds 160 seconds
Page 51
Table 7-4 (Contd), Trunk Related ENTER x35t DEFAULT 0 Progress t 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 x36t 1
Parameters
DESCRIPTION Tones (Beeps), where t equals: Request Password (1 Tone) ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF Request Callback Nr. (2 Tones) ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF . Hang UP (3 Tones) ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
Time to wait after valid password determination before processing of the callback (drop and reseize parameter x05t) is initiated, where t equals: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 = = = = = = = = Callback Immediately 10 seconds 20 seconds 30 seconds 40 seconds 50 seconds 60 seconds 70 seconds
xoot
8 = 80 seconds 9 = 90 seconds A = 100 seconds B = 110 seconds C = 120 seconds D = 130 seconds E = 140 seconds . F = 150 seconds
7.55
- This command configures the Controller for the type of Central Office that will be connected to the line. These types are either Loop Start or Ground Start. The command also selects the type of dialing to be used to access the Central Office when executing a callback sequence. The two types of dialing are either Rotary or DTMF dialout. The two selections are combined into one command allowing the programmer to select one of the four combinations listed in Table 7-4 above. If no command is programmed, the default selection of Loop Start, DTMF dialout will be in the Controller. For example, if the Controller were to be programmed for a Ground Start CO and to use DTMF dialout on Trunk 1, the command would be: .
> DO031 >

xOlt - This command will select the Rotary command xOOt above were programmed for There are two options that are selectable. These are ms Break or 60 ms Make/40 ms Break. The latter default for the command and need not be programmed, example, if all trunks were to use the 40/30 ms Rotary command would be entered as: 7.56 Dialing rate if Rotary dialout. 40 ms Make/30 selection is the if required. For Dialing Rate, the
Page 52
SECTION
MlTL8350-048-lOO-NA
> r50131 > - This command will select the DTMF Dialing rate if command xOOt above were programmed for DTMF dialout. The rate ranges from 40 to 130 ms in 10 ms steps. 60 ms is the default selection for this command. Selection is done by entering a number from 0 through 9 for the letter t in the command line. For example, if Trunk 3 were to use DTMF dialing at a rate of 100 ms, the command would be entered as: 7.57 x02t
> t30261 >

- This command programs the time period length between the point where the Controller drops the line and reseizes the line for a callback execution. The default for this command is 1250 ms. The period length is selectable from 500 to 1850 ms in 150 ms steps. These periods equate to a number from 0 to 9 to be used to replace the letter tin the command line. For example, if a period of 1700 ms were required between drop and reseizure on Trunk 1 for the Controller, the command would be entered as: x05t > DO581 > 7.59 - The x27t command programs the Call Answer Timer to wait for a period of time after detecting the first ring on the line, before answering the call. The default period of time is 3 seconds (i.e., after detecting ringing, the Controller will wait for 3 seconds before answering the call). The period selection ranges from 3 to 45 seconds in 3 second steps. These are designated by a number from 1 to 9, or a letter from A to F to replace the t in the command. For example, if all trunks were to be programmed to wait for 6 seconds after ringing detection before answering, the command would be entered as: x27t
7.58
> 152721 > 7.60

- This command performs two functions, if required. The first and most important is to wait for the password to be received. The second is to wait for a user entered callback number to be received (if called for in the password action digits). The command will cause the controller to perform the first wait period. If the password action digits indicate that a user entered callback number is to be received, the second wait period after entry of the password will be accomplished. For more information on the password action digits, refer to password programming on page 60. The wait period for the wait for password timer is programmable from 4 to 60 seconds in 4 second steps. These steps equate to the number from 0 to 9 or the letter from A to E to be used in place of t.The second timer is programmed automatically from the selection of the first timer. The second timer will always be (if used) two times the period of the first x28t
Page
53
SECTION
timer. The default for this command is 8/16 seconds (i.e., the Controller will wait for 8 seconds for the caller to enter a valid password before timing out and terminating the call and 16 seconds for the caller to enter his callback number (if used). For example, if it is desired to have the Controller to wait 16 seconds for password entry by the caller on Trunk 2, the command would be entered as: .I .: > 122831 > 7.61 The entry of the above command assumes that, if used, the period for waiting for callback number entry will be 32 seconds.
x29t
- The x29t command is used to program the Lockout Timer. This timer will start if, at the end of the x28t wait for password period expires and if either an invalid password, or no password has been received. During the period that this timer is in effect, the Controller will busy out the affected trunk(s) for the period. This prevents multiple rapid succession access attempts by unauthorized users. The default period for this timer is 20 seconds. The period is programmable from 10 to 160 seconds in 10 second steps. To select a period, enter a number from 0 to 9 or a letter from A to F in place of t. For example, if minimum lockout is desired on Trunk 1 and 30 seconds of lockout were desired on Trunk 3, the commands would be entered as:
7.62
> [12901 > r32921 >

7.63 This parameter should be set equal to or greater than the length of time that the Modem waits for Answer Tone. In addition, the SAC monitors for Modem loop current, and, if this timer should expire while the Modem is still on line, the presence of the Modem line state will continue to hold the busy out state. The busy out in this instance, will cease when the Modem goes off line. 7.64
- This command programs the use of progress tones to be sent back to the caller to indicate dialing progress. If 7 is entered into the command line for t,all progress tones are disabled. The default for this command is 0or all progress tones on. If 0is entered, the caller will receive a single progress tone (1 beep) requesting entry of password, a double progress tone (2 beeps) to request entry of user entered callback number, and a triple progress tone (3 beeps) to request the caller to hang up for callback. For example, if all trunks were to be programmed for a single progress tone to indicate password entry, the command line would be typed as: x35t
> 153531 > 7.65

- The x36t command programs the amount of time to wait after valid password determination before initiating the callback process (i.e., time until initiation of the drop and reseize command x36t
Page
54
SECTION MlTL8350-048-lOO-NA
x05t). The default for this command is 0 for 10 seconds. The range of the timer is from 10 to 150 seconds as selected by the number 1 to 9 or the letter A to F that replaces t.For example, if it is desired to program Trunk 1 to wait for 150 seconds prior to initiating callback, the command line would be entered as: > Il36Fl > Non-Controller 7.66 Pertinent Parameters
Table 7-5 below lists the Trunk related programming parameters that are non-Controller associated. Detailed descriptions of the parameters follow the table. The letter xpreceding the command digits indicates that a trunk select number be entered to choose the particular trunk to be programmed for the command. These numbers equate to: 1 2 3 4 5 Note: = = = = = program program program program program only Trunk only Trunk only Trunk only Trunk all trunks 1 2 3 4 simultaneously
Since these are Non-Controller pertinent parameters, it should seldom be necessary to reprogram them from their default settings. Improper programming can result in unreliable connections with the Central Office. Pertinent Parameters
Table 7-5, Non-Controller ENTER x03t DEFAULT 6 On-Hook 0 1 2 3 4 5 x04t 1 = = = = = =
DESCRIPTION Recognition Time, where t equals: 6 7 8 g A B = = = = = = 750 ms 1000 ms 1330 ms 1660 ms 2000 ms 2500 ms
80 ms 100 ms 150 ms 200 ms 300 ms 500 ms
Flash Allowed Time, where t equals: 0 1 2 3 4 5 = = = = = = 80 ms 100 ms 150 ms 200 ms 300 ms 500 ms 6 7 8 9 A B = = = = = = 750 ms 1000 ms 1330 ms 1660 ms 2000 ms 2500 ms
x06t
Number of Ground Start Tries (failure goes to call drop), where t = the number of times to try. (continued)
Page 55
SECTIQN MITL8350-048-IOO-NA
Table 7-5, Non-Controller ENTER x07t DEFAULT 3
Pertinent
Parameters
DESCRIPTION Time to wait for Tip Ground on Ground Start Try (Ground Start Timeout in seconds), where t equals number of seconds to wait until timeout. Rotary Inter-digit t equals: 0 1 2 3 4 = = = = = 400 500 600 700 800 ms ms ms ms ms Pause for Central Office (outgoing 5 6 7 8 = = = = 900 ms 1 second 1.1 seconds 1.2 seconds dialing), where
x14t
xzot
Incoming Ringing Sensitivity, where t nominally equals: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 = = = = = = = = 40 ms 50 ms 60 ms 80 ms 90 ms 100 ms 120 ms 130 ms 8 9 A B C D E F = 140 = 160 = 170 = 180 = 200 = 210 = 220 = 240 ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms .
x21t
Inter-ring timing in seconds, where t equals the number of seconds to wait. Select Default Route for use within one of two groups of four routes. If this command is set to either 0, 1, 2, or 3, the primary routes will be used. If it is set to either 4, 5, 6, or 7, the alternate routes will be used. Use Default Route is an action digit that is included within the 801 through 815 Search Table action digits (for more information, refer to page 65 paragraph 7.106). tequals: 0 = Use Primary Routes 0 through 3 4 = Use Alternate Routes 4 through 7
x24t
x31t
Tip Ground Application 0=40ms 1 =40 ms 2 = 80 ms 3 = 120 ms 4 = 160 ms 5 = 200 ms
Timer, where t equals: 6 7 8 9 A B = 240 = 280 = 320 = 360 = 400 = 440 ms ms ms ms ms ms
x33t
Flit Timing, where t equals: 0 = 40 ms 8 = 20 ms (continued)
Page 56
Table 7-5 (Contd), Non-Controller ENTER x34t DEFAULT 6

1
Pertinent DESCRIPTION
Parameters
Tip Ground Removal Timer, where t equals: 0 1 2 3 4 5 = = = = = = 40 ms 40 ms 80 ms 120 ms 160 ms 200 ms 6 7 8 9 A B = = = = = = 240 280 320 360 400 440 ms ms ms ms ms ms
7.67
x03t - This command programs the On-Hook Timing (i.e., how long the controller has to recognize an on-hook condition). The default for the command is 750 ms. The parameter can be programmed for a period from 80 to 2500 ms in 12 steps. To select a particular timing, enter a number from 0 to 9 or the letter A or B in place of t in the command line. For example, if it is desired to program all trunks for an On-Hook Recognition Time of 500 ms, the command would be entered as:
> r50351 > 7.68 x04t - The x04t command programs the Flash Allowed Timing. If the Flash Allowed Time is longer than the On-Hook Timing (x03t), then flash is not allowed. The default for the command is 80 ms. The time period can be programmed from 80 to 2500 ms in 12 steps. To select a particular timing, enter a number from 0 to 9, or the letter A or B in place of tin the command line. For example, if it is desired to program all trunks for a Flash Allowed Time of 1000 ms, the command would be entered as:
> [50473 > 7.69 x06t - This command programs the Controller for the number of Ground Start Tries in case of failure. A failure after the indicated number of tries will go to a call drop. The default for this command is 3. tis selected as the number of tries where tequates to the digit 0 through 9. If Trunk 1 were allowed 4 Ground Start tries, the command would be entered as:
> [lo641 > 7.70 x07t - The x07t command programs the Controller for the time period to wait for Tip Ground to appear on the line on a Ground Start try. The default for this command is 3 seconds. tequates to the number of seconds and may be a number from 0 to 9. For example, if it is desired to program the Controller for a Ground Start timeout of 6 seconds on Trunk 2, the command would be entered as:
Page 57
SECTION
> C20761 > - The x14t command programs the Rotary Dial Inter-Digit Pause time for the Central Office on outgoing dialing. The default for this command is 800 ms. The time period is programmable from 400 to 1200 ms in 100 ms steps. A period is selected by replacing the t in the command line with a number from 0 through 8. For example, if it is desired to program the Controller for an Inter-digit Pause time of 1200 ms on Trunk 3, the command would appear as: 7.71 x14t
> [31481 > 7.72 -This command programs the Incoming Ringing Sensitivity. This sensitivity indicates a time period from the initial application of ringing to the line, to the first recognition of ringing by the Controller. These times are nominal and may be slightly different when actually measured. The period can range from 40 to 240 ms in 16 steps and is selected by substituting a number from 0 to 9, or a letter from A to F for tin the command line. For example, if Trunk 2 were to be programmed for a ringing sensitivity of 160 ms, the command would be entered as:
x20t
> 122091
>
- This command programs the Inter-Ring Timing in seconds. The period may range from 0 to 9 as selected by substituting a number from 0 to 9 respectively for tin the command line. The default for the command is 6 seconds. For example, if it were desired to program all trunks for an 8 second Inter-Ring time period, the command would be entered as: x21t > [52181 >
7.73
7.74
x24t - The x24t command programs the Controller to Select Default Route when called for as an action digit in the Search Tables. This route is from within one of two groups of four routes. Routes are either primary or alternate and are numbered from 1 to 4 for the primary; from 5 to 8 for the alternate. Since one of these two groups is to be selected by this command, it is only necessary to enter a 0(primary) or a 4(alternate) in place of tin the command line. Any other number from 0 to 3 will also select primary routes, and any other number from 4 to 7 will select alternate routes. If the Use Default Route is desired, it must be programmed as an action digit in the 801 through 815 Search Tables. The default for the command is 0 or use primary routes 1 through 4. An example of programming Trunk 2 to use alternate routes 4 through 7 would be entered as: > 122441 >
Page
58
SECTION
x31t - This command programs the Tip Ground Application Timer for Tip Ground application recognition (GND START). The time period is selectable from 40 to 440 ms in 12 steps. The period is selected by substituting a number from 0 to 9, or the letter A or B that equates to the desired time period. The default for the command is 120 ms or 3.For example, to program all trunks for a Tip Ground Application Timer of 440 ms, the command would be entered as: 7.75
> [531Bl > 7.76 x33t - This parameter controls the hit timing for the trunk. Hit timing is the minimum time that an on-hook, a line break, or a D C short must appear on the trunk before the Controller will recognize it. To change the Hit Timing to 20 ms, enter:
> [23381 > x34t - The x34t command programs the Controller for the lip Ground Removal Timer. A period within the range of 0 to 440 ms can be selected by substituting a number from 0 to 9, or the letter A or B for tin the command line. These periods are listed in Table 7-5 above under the x34t command. The default for the command is 240 ms. For example, to program all trunks for a 120 ms Tip Ground Removal time, the command would be entered as: 7.77 > c53431 >
PASSWORD PROGRAMMING
Passwords can range from 2 to 15 digits in length, depending upon the desired usage. Refer to Figure 7-4 for an illustration of the password format. Password programming is accomplished by entering a password string in the 821 through 835 Search Tables.
7.79
7.78
If the Controller is intended to provide an automatic callback function, the password can only range in length from 3 to 12 digits. The last three digits are used as the Speed Call Address which is a label that identifies the callback number to use. Therefore, in this case, the password will be from 3 to 15 digits in length.
If the password action digit does not perform automatic callback, then the password may be from 1 to 15 digits in length. There is no need for a label to the speed call bin. 7.80
7.81
Note that no two passwords may be identical regardless of the action digits that are associated with it. Entering a second identical password will overwrite the original password in the list.
Note:
When comparing the Password Tables against the dialed in password, the last action encountered will be used. Refer to the password programming examples in later text.
Page
59
Figure 7-4 illustrates the password format showing the actual password (authorization code), speed call address (if used), action digit, time-of-day code, and terminator. Password data entry must always be terminated by the BBcode. 7.83 Table 7-6 on the next page illustrates the various password entries for password tables 821 through 835, along with a description of each parameter that must be entered.
7.82
Table 7-7 on the next page lists the password action digits along with a description of each action. If the digit in the first column is used as a password action digit, its use will cause the password to be printed in the Call Detail Record (CDR). If the digit in the second column is used, the password will not be printed on the CDR. The last entry describes the code for the action digit B9. This B9 is considered by the Controller to be one hexadecimal character. Thus, the B9 has to be entered twice. Table 7-8 on the next page lists the time-of-day codes along with a description of each code. The times listed after the code show when a particular password entry that has the code will be allowed access. Times are entered in the 24 hour standard format. At the time of the call, the Controller will compare the current time against the allowable range of times for the password. If not within range, the call will be denied. 7.85
7.84
3/
1 2 3 4 5 6
PASSWORD
7 8 9 101112
JI
13 14 15 A
TERMINATOR
B B
\~r
B
nnnnnnnnnnnn
m
Authorization Code Speed Call Address if action accesses Speed Call, else 3 more Authorization Code digits Action Digit Code
m4
Time-of-Day
Figure 7-4, Password
Format
Page 60
Table 7-6, Password Table Entry 821nat BB 822nnat BB 823nnnat BB 824nnnnat BB 825nnnnnat BB 826nnnnnnat BB 827nnnnnnnat BB 828nnnnnnnnat BB 829nnnnnnnnnat BB 830nnnnnnnnnnat BB 83lnnnnnnnnnnnat BB 832nnnnnnnnnnnnat BB 833nnnnnnnnnnnnnat BB 834nnnnnnnnnnnnnnat BB 835nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnatBB
Table Descriptions Description
Where n . . . n are the password digits to be used for comparisons to the user dialed password digits. n may be any quantity of digits between 2 and 15 corresponding to the size of the table selected, unless the action is accessing a speed call. In this case the minimum length would be 3 digits. n = any DTMF digit from 0 through 9 and JC.n may also be: BO = to search for digit #within the password, or B9 = to allow any DTMF digit in that particular location within the password. Refer to password programming examples. Where ais the action digit to be performed upon expiration of the call answer timer (x27t) for the particular match found. Where tis the time-of-day code to be checked in determining if a particular password is allowed access at the current time. Where BB is the terminator used to indicate end of entry. Table 7-7, Password Action Digits (a) DESCRIPTION Deny call if this is last action encountered. Accept Callback Number. Go to Speed Call callback location determined by last 3 digits of the password, if this is the last action encountered. Cut through, if this is the last action encountered. Delete this password. Table 7-8, Time-Of-Day CODE 1 Codes (t)
3 B9 B9
7 B9 B9
DESCRIPTION All Day (24 Hour Access) Daytime only (0800 to 1700) Evening only (1700 to 2300) Night only (2300 to 0800) Day and Evening only (0800 to 2300) Day and Night only (2300 to 1700) Evening and Night only (1700 to 0800)
Page 61
SECTION
MITL8350-048-IOO-NA
Password 7.86
Programming
Examples
The following paragraphs show examples of password programming. There are three examples listed. These examples, by no means include all possible programming methods, but they do illustrate some of the more basic password programming ways.
1 _1
Example 7.87
Example 1 shows a programming line to allow password 1111 to cause an automatic callback without printing the password in the Call Detail Record. This example allows 24 hour access to the protected Modem. Once in the programming mode, enter: > [824111160BB]
>
The password is 4 digits in length. Therefore, the 824 parameter must be used to enter the 1111 in the password tables. The 6 is the action digit that specifies go to Speed Call callback location 111 (last three digits of password indicate Speed Call bin number) without printing password on CDR. The 0is the time-of-day code for all day access (24 hours). BB is the data entry terminator.
7.88 Example 2
7.89
Example 2 shows a programming line to allow password 22222 to accept a user-entered callback number between 1700 to 2300 hours and to print the password in the Call Detail Record.
> [8252222212BB] >
The password is 5 digits parameter for entry in specifying accept callback. The fies evening only (1700 - 2300).
7.90 Example 7.91 3
in length, requiring the use of the 825 the tables. The 1 is the action digit 2is the time-of-day code that speciBB is the entry terminator.
Example 3 shows a programming line to allow 9999999999 to cut through (no callback) between 1700. The password is also printed in the Call Detail Record. > [830999999999931 > BB]
password 0800 and
The password is 10 digits in length, requiring the use of the 830 parameter for entry. The 3is the action digit that specifies cut through. It also specifies that the password be printed in the Call Detail Record. The 1is the time-of-day code for day only (0800 1700). BB is the data entry terminator. 7.92
Page
62
SECTION
7.93
All of these examples may be programmed is illustrated in the example below:

> > > > > > [8241111 SOBS] 18252222212991 [830999999999931BBl [711183931212BB] [9991 QUITTING PROG.
in one session. This
MODE
Note the fourth programming line from the top. This line programs the Speed Call bin number III for callback number 393-1212. All Speed Call bins are 7nnn parameters where the 111 indicates the actual stored speed call. This was one of the requirements in example 1 above. It was required to make the 8241111 entry operational. If no speed call was entered in the I 11 bin, no callback would be accomplished. Refer to paragraph 7.97 below for more information on Speed Calls and Callback Numbers. 7.95 To delete a password, enter the password, action digits B9B9.For example: > [825222221299991 > will delete the password 22222 and its associated from the 825(five digit) password table. AUTOMATIC 7.96 action digits 12 followed by the
7.94
CALLBACK (SPEED CALL) PROGRAMMING
The example at the end of this paragraph shows the callback number data entry format where 7is the register prefix and nnnis the binnumber (address) of the callback number. Bin numbers must be the same as the last three digits of the assigned password that the caller must dial into the Controller. The nnnmay be any digits from 000 through 999. This allows the use of 1000 callback numbers.
7nnn 7.97 k mmm . . . mmm BB
The kin code. This ler to use Search listed in Table 7-9
the format example above is the network override will normally be an 8 which commands the ControlTables 801 through 815. All possible values of k are below.
7-9, Network Override Codes
Table CODE 0 1
DESCRIPTION
1 2 3
Force Force Force Force
callback callback callback callback
on on on on
Route Route Route Route
1 2 3 4
Page
63
Table 7-9 (Contd), Network CODE 4 5 6 7 8 9
Override
Codes
DESCRIPTION Force callback on Route 5 Force callback on Route 6 Force callback on Route 7 Force callback on Route 8 Use Search Tables Dial immediate, no route. This code is not recommended for use. Since no route is used, there is no check to ensure the presence of dialtone before performing the callback. mmm . . . mmm in the format example is the telephone number to be used for callback. BB is the terminator for the entry.
7.98
7.99
All trunks of the Controller have access to all callback registers. This means that a user may call in on more than one line and receive a callback, in the event that a tried line is busy.
Deletion of a callback Speed Call number consists of entering the Bin number with no callback number. For example, to delete the 7111entry in example 1, simply program: > 17111681 > SEARCH TABLE PROGRAMMING 7.101 Upon execution of callback, the numbers in the callback Speed Call bin or the user entered callback digits are compared against the Search Tables to determine the route to use, and whether or not the call is allowed according to the programming previously entered. Default values are included in the factory programmed defaults that will place all callbacks on the DDD Network. If this is satisfactory, no programming will be required for the Search Tables. Some programming will be required if it is desired to limit callbacks from occurring to certain area codes or to limit long distance calls, or if an Other Common Carrier (OCC) is selected, etc. into these Search Table or user entered callback template. Table 7-10 on 801 through 815 Search
7.100
7.102
7.103
7.104
The sequence of digits programmed registers for comparison to automatic digits, is considered to be the Search Table the next page illustrates the format for the Table data entry. Action 7.105 Digit Definitions
To Force a route means that once the template match has been satisfied for the Force action, no change of the routes
Page 64
SECTION NliTL8350-048-l OO-NA
may occur. This mode of routing will be the usual action used for the Controller operation. Table 7-10, Search Table Descriptions Table Entry 801na BB 802nna BB 803nnna BB 804nnnna BB 805nnnnna BB 806nnnnnna BB 807nnnnnnna BB 808nnnnnnnna BB 809nnnnnnnnna BB 8lOnnnnnnnnnna BB 811nnnnnnnnnnna BB 812nnnnnnnnnnnna BB 813nnnnnnnnnnnnna BB 814nnnnnnnnnnnnnna BB 815nnnnnnnnnnnnnnna BB 7.106 Description Where n . . . n are the digits to be used for comparisons to the user dialed digits or callback Speed Call Number. n = any DTMF digit from 0 through 9 and x. n may also be: BO = to search for digit #within the password, or Bl = Compare against 1 or 0. 84 = Compare against any digit from 2 through 9. B9 = Compare against any digit (do not care). Where a is the action digit to be performed upon successful match of the digit template. The series of n digits (nnn . . . nnn) is considered the template. Where BB is the terminator used to indicate end of entry.
To Prefer a route means to commence the dialout pattern in the preferred route. The route actually used could be changed later on in the dialing sequence as more dialed digits are received. This routing method is a faster means of dialout for commonly dialed or important numbers, usually associated with Other Common Carrier (OCC) programming. This method could allow, for instance, the first three digits of the callback number to cause the Carrier to be accessed, and, on a later dialed digit received, stop the dialout to proceed to a different route (dial a different series of digits). This routing method will probably be seldom used in Security Access Controller operations. Table 7-11 below provides a description of the action digits. Note that only one action may be programmed for a particular template. Re-entering a template with a different action overwrites the previous template and assigns the new action. Table 7-11, Action CODE
1
7.107
Digit Descriptions
DESCRIPTION x24t = o-3 x24t = 4-7 5 6 7 8
0 1 2 3
Prefer Prefer Prefer Prefer
Route Route Route Route (continued)
1 2 3 4
Page
65
Table 7-11 (Contd), Action CODE
Digit Descriptions
DESCRIPTION x24t = o-3 x24t = 4-7 5 6 7 8
4 5 6 7 Bl B6
Force Force Force Force
Route Route Route Route
1 2 3 4
Deny - drop call. Enough digits, stop searching. This action digit must be encountered in order to provide the Route parameter 6r5 permission to allow connection of the telephone lines. Otherwise, the connection will not occur until the expiration of the Inter-digit Time out. Do nothing - wait for more digits. Prefer Default Route (x24t). Delete this template. B9 is used as an action digit in order to delete one particular template from the Search Tables (i.e., 1803393B91 deletes the template 393 and its action digit from the Search Table register 803). Programming 7.108 Examples
87 88 B9
The two examples included below illustrate the programming of the Search Tables. The first is used to deny all calls to Area Code 315. The second is used to force all 393 office codes to Route 1.
Example 1 > [803315Bl BB] > In the above example, the 803 is the designator for the 3-digit Search Table. 315 is the 3-digit template (Area Code). Bl is the action digit to deny the call. Finally, BB is the entry terminator. Example 2 > [8033934BB] > In the above example, the 803is the designator for the 3-digit Search Table. 393 is the 3-digit template (office code). 4is the action digit to force the call to Route 1. Finally, BB is the entry terminator. Search Table Defaults 7.111 Search Table Defaults are listed in Table C-3 starting on page C-6 in Appendix C at the rear of the manual. 7.110 7.109
Page 66
PROGRAMMING 7.112
ROUTING PARAMETERS
The factory installed defaults are sufficient to place all callbacks on the DDD route. The routing parameters require no further programming if the use of the DDD route is sufficient.
7.113
A Route is defined as the instructions to the Controller with respect to the sequences to follow in performing automatic or user-entered callbacks. These parameters control dialtone detection, the order of digits that are dialed out, Centrex dialing if required, and the procedures to follow in the event of call failure. Other route information is also programmable, such as the route name to be used in the Call Detail Record, etc.
7.114
The defaults that are resident in the routes are usually sufficient to detect dialtone and dial out the automatic or user-entered callback number. If Other Common Carrier (OCC) is used, these parameters would also include the telephone number of the OCC, the authorization code for the OCC, and the detection of that particular carriers dialtones and manipulation of the dialout digit order required.
7.115
In the parameters routes 1through
to follow, ris 1 through 8 to designate 8. The routes to be used are chosen within
the Search Tables upon a successful match of digits within the Search Tables. As each callback number is passed through the search tables, a particular route will be chosen after which control is passed to these route parameters.
6r5 Access Route, Access Control 7.116
Sequences
The Access Control Sequences instruct the Controller on the specific actions to perform for the dialout of digits. The route Access Control Sequences are a series of digits that indicate actions. These sequences may be repeated or combined in any order required, as long as the total number of characters in the command is less than 34. The 6r5 route is reached as a result of an action digit in the 801 to 815 Search Tables. A search table action of Force Route 1 for a Search Table template will send control to parameter 615 (r=l). Table 7-12 below lists the 6r5 parameter codes with descriptions.
7.117
Table 7-12, ) CODE 1

0 1 BOA 800 BOI 2 Dial Dial Dial Dial Dial Dial
6r5 Parameter DESCRIPTION
Codes
the digit 0. the digit 1. the DTMF digit jc. the DTMF digit I#. a DTMF # if the last digit the Callback Number
dialed
was not a #.
Page 67
SECTION
Table CODE 3
7-12
(Contd),
6r5 Parameter
Codes
DESCRIPTION
4 6 7
9
7.118
Dial the OCC Telephone Number in parameter 6rl. Dial the OCC Authorization Number in parameter 6r2. Dial the Trunk number of the Controller processing this call. Cut through - done. This MUST be the last command in the Route Access Control Sequence to instruct the SAC to connect the lines together (after split). If this command is not present, the Controller will wait for the expiration of the Inter-digit Timer before accomplishing cut through. Change to DTMF dialing. Normally used with OCC programming. This command would be inserted into the Access Control Sequence when the Central Office being used by the Controller is Rotary only and the OCC requiring DTMF dialing only (parameter x00 would be set to 0 or 1). The code could then change the dialout from rotary to DTMF after dialing out the 6rl OCC telephone number. Dial the Centrex Access Code stored in 6r4.
Table 7-13 below lists the Dialtone Detector codes to be used when coding parameter 6r5. Descriptions of each code is included. ain the code selects the minimum tone duration as listed in Table 7-14. bin the code selects the time out for tones not received and are listed in Table 7-15.
Table CODE 7-13, Dialtone Detector Codes
DESCRIPTION
B25b B3ab B4ab B5ab B6ab B7ab B6ab B9ab BDab BB
Pause for bseconds. Search for amilliseconds of high tone (570-680 Hz) for bseconds. Search for amilliseconds of 440 Hz for bseconds. Search for amilliseconds of 460 Hz Ringback tone for bseconds. Search for amilliseconds of 400 Hz for bseconds. Search for amilliseconds of energy (350 to 620 Hz) for bseconds. Search for amilliseconds of precise dialtone (350+440 Hz) for bseconds. Search for amilliseconds of Not On Network (NON) tone (an OCC function) for bseconds. Search for amilliseconds for any DTMF tones for bseconds. Entry terminator
Page
68
Table 7-14, aCodes

a = 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 -
Table b 0
7-15,
b Codes NOT RCVD.
TONE IURATION Minimum 200m.s 400ms 1.os 2.55s Minimum 200ms 400ms 1.0s 2.55s
ACTION
NOT
IF RECEIVED
TIMEOUT/TONE 0 Seconds 2 Seconds 4 Seconds 6 Seconds 8 Seconds 10 Seconds 12 Seconds 14 Seconds 16 Seconds 18 Seconds 20 Seconds
Redial per r58 Redial per r58 Redial per r58 Redial per r58 Redial per r58 Then continue Then continue Then continue Then continue Then continue
or r78 or r78 or r78 or r78 or r78 Dialout Dialout Dialout Dialout Dialout
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 *
7.119
The default programming Sequences is: 874427
entry for all 6r5 Route Access Control
Where B7indicates that the Controller should search for amilliseconds of wideband dialtone (350+620 Hz) for b seconds. In this case, a equals 2.55s tone duration, then fail to parameter r58. b equals 8 seconds (i.e., the Controller will look for a minimum length of dialtone for 8 seconds). If the tone is detected, then 2 indicates that the Controller should dial the callback (Speed Call) or user entered callback number, and 7 indicates that the dialing is finished. The 7 also indicates that the Controller should cut through (reconnect the lines).
Programming Examples
7.120
Programming the 6r5 Route Access Control Sequences consists of entering the 6r5 parameter after the terminal prompt > where rselects the route number. This parameter is followed by a data string for the Access Control Sequence as selected from the previous tables. The entry is completed by typing the data terminator BB. Example 1
> [6158854347BBl
Example 1 shows that this is the Route 1 Access Control Sequence (615). The 88 along with the 5and 4indicates that the Controller is to wait for a minimum duration of precise dialtone for up to 8 seconds. 3indicates that if dialtone is detected, the Controller then dials the OCC telephone number that is listed in parameter 6rl. 4 indicates that the Controller should dial the OCC Authorization Number listed in 6r2 if 3completes. 7indicates cut through and completion after finishing with 4. BB terminates the string entry.
7.121
Page
69
SECTION
MlTL8350-048-IOO-NA
7.122
Example 1 may not be a valid entry for the SAC, but does illustrate the manner in selecting and entering the 6r5 param-
eters. Table 7-16 below lists some additional Route Parameters that may be programmed to desired operation. Entry is similar to the 6r5 parameter described above for the 6xx parameters. For the r50t through r58t and the r70t through r78t parameters, entry consists of selecting a route number for r and a parameter descriptor for t. These descriptors are listed in the table under the applicable parameter. The descriptor may be an action to be performed or a description of a format or register.
7.123 Note:
r50t through r58t indicate primary routes through r78t indicate alternate routes (l-4).
7-l 6, Additional Route Parameters (r = l-8)
(l-4)
while
r70t
Table ENTER 6r4 (Number) BB
DESCRIPTION
Centrex Number (Default = 9). Can be up to 33 digits in length for number.

OCC Authorization
6r2 ( Number)
BB
Number. number can be up to 33 digits in
length.
6rl( Number) BB OCC Telephone
Number. number can be up to 33 digits in length.

DESCRIPTION (r = l-4)
ENTER r50t r70t
DEFAULT 0 0
Automatic equals:
or User Entered Callback Number Format, where t
0 = Any number of digits. 1 = Add Area Code stored in 601 to 7 digits. If 10 digits, do not add Area Code. 2 = Add l+Area Code stored in 601 to 7 digits or l+ to 10 digits. 4 = Dial 1before 7 or 10 digits (do not add Area Code). 8 = 7 or 10 digits only.
r58t r78t
5 5
Action upon Call Failure. This entry is the action that is initiated upon call failure indicated by the acode of parameter 6r5 if a is less than 5,where tequals: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A = = = = = = = = = = = Redial on Route Redial on Route Redial on Route Redial on Route Drop call (Deny) Redial on same Redial on same Redial on same Redial on same Redial on same Redial on same 1 2 3 4 (or (or (or (or 5) 6) 7) 8) once, twice, three once, twice, three then drop then drop times, then drop then on Route 1 (or 5) then on Route 1 (or 5) times, then on Route 1 (or 5)
route route route route route route
Page 70
SECTION
CALL DETAIL 7.124
RECORD
(CDR)
PROGRAMMING
The Call Detail Record (CDR) output of the RS-232 Computer Port is governed by parameters 006 (Baud Rate), 007 (Nulls after Carriage Return), 009 (Print Format), 010 (Route to Monitor), 602 (Machine Identifier), 6rO (Route Name), and 821 through 835 (print or no print action digit for password). In addition, the CDR responds to the control characters <*S> and <Q> (stop and start commands). The control-S command will suspend the CDR output, while the control-Q will restart the output. These commands are entered by pressing the <Control> and S or Qkeys at the same time.
CDR Description 7.125
The incoming call record will indicate the date, time, and duration of the access attempt. It will also indicate INWARD on a callback access. It will print the INVALID password of an unsuccessful access. In addition, it will indicate C-THRU if the action was not a callback, and will print the successful password used if the password action digit was so programmed. It will not indicate a user entered callback number. The user entered callback number will be printed in the outgoing call record, instead. The outgoing call record will indicate the date, time and duration of the outgoing call along with printing the successful password used if the password action digit was so programmed. It will print the callback Speed Call binnumber (nnnof parameter 7nnn). It will also print the user entered callback number if the password action digit indicates that it should do so. 7.126
Call Detail
Record
Format
SMarT-1
Format (009t = 2, Default) a

4 5 6 7
MM/DD_HH:MM__ I A
DH:DM:DS_nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn I I B
___TSTn_######_eeeaasaaaea~aaaaaa_SAC 1 uu-II c D E F
Where: A) B) C) D) is the Date and Call Duration. is the Speed Call Bin Number or Callback Number on outgoing calls. Nothing is printed in this field on incoming calls. is T for denied on outgoing attempt (space if otherwise), S for Speed Call (space if otherwise), and Tn is the Trunk Number. is the Route Name programmed in ASCII for outgoing calls. C-THRU in this field on an incoming call indicates that the caller gained access to the Modem by virtue of the
Page
71
cut-through action digit associated with the printed password in that call record. THRUin an outgoing call indicates that no route was dialed. The dial immediate function has either been used on the Speed Call dialout or the SAC is programmed to the cut-through mode and is asleep. DENIEDin this field will indicate an unsuccessful password entry and failure to access the host system. E) F) is the Password digits if enabled by the password action digit, or any invalid password received. is the Machine Identifier from programming in parameter 602.
:. ...-,
.. . . :
Examples 7.127 Figure 7-5 below is an example of the SMarT-1 Call Detail Record printout for incoming calls. There are 8 lines in the Figure and these are considered for discussion purposes to be examples 1 through 8, respectively, in the paragraphs that follow. The examples also assume that the print password action digit has been used for each of the passwords. If it was not used, the password section of the printout would be blank.
00/99 11/02 11/02 11/02 1 l/O2 11/03 11103
00.09 10: 11:25 11:53 13:31 21:50 21:22 22:Ol 55
0o:oo: 00:00:26 00:01:06 01:13:49 00:01:57 00:01:22 00:01:22 00:01:30
15
Tl Tl Tl Tl T2 Tl Tl T3
DENIED DENIED INWARD C-THRU INWARD DENIED DENIED INWARD 76276663 623346 22552225 10000000 10000001 76276664
SAC SAC SAC SAC SAC SAC SAC SAC
11/03
Figure 7-5, Incoming 7.128
Call Detail Record Examples made to the The time is momentarily the unit not
Line 1 of Figure 7-5 indicates that a test call was unit. Note the .versus the :in the time field. incorrect (not programmed into the unit or the unit has been powered down). Access was denied by virtue of having been programmed.
7.129
Line 2 of Figure 7-5 indicates that the unit has been programmed and that the first call was made into the unit without entering any password.
7.130
Line 3 of Figure 7-5 indicates that an incoming call was received with a successful password. Speed Call action digits are associated with the password. In Figure 7-6 (Outgoing Calls), Line 1 would be a printout for returning the call.
_:
Line 4 of Figure 7-5 shows that an incoming call was received with a cut-through action digit for the password. In this case, there is no corresponding outgoing call record.
7.131
Page 72
OO-NA
7.132
Line 5 of Figure 7-5 shows that an incoming call was received with a a successful password. A request for a callback number action digit happens to have been used. Note that the incoming record shows only the successful password. In Figure 7-6, Line 2 shows the outgoing call record associated with the incoming call. It displays the user entered callback number along with the password. Lines 6 and 7 of Figure 7-5 are access denials. The Call Detail Record shows the password attempt.
7.133
7.134
Line 8 of Figure 7-5 shows an incoming record with a successful password. Line 3 of Figure 7-6 shows the associated outgoing record. The call listed in the outgoing record was denied (T), possibly because the programmer denied calls to the 818 area code for some particular reason.
11/02 11/02 11/03
11:27 ?3: 22:03 33
01:27:33 00:32:45 00:00:05 3153931212 8185451958
663
ST1 Tl T T3
AT&T OCC OCC
76278663 22662225 76279664
SAC SAC SAC
Figure 7-6, Outgoing MITEL Format 7.135
Call Detail Record Examples
Since this format was developed for use in PABX applications, there are fields that only pertain to transferred calls. The SMarT-1 unit has no use for this information and, as a result, these fields are left blank. Otherwise, the format is very similar to the call record produced by MITEL PABXs. 7.136 Several call costing machines Format. For more information DATACOM. can process the original MITEL on tested systems, call MITEL
The record is 86 characters long with the following fields:

0 0
M - Month/Day B - Start time (BB.BB means that the clock is wrong) (Note the period instead of a colon) C - Call duration Ill1 - Incoming line D - User dialed digits T - Denied S - Speed dialed L - Line number R - Route (8 = Internal in Centrex mode) A - Account code N - System identification
Page 73
SECTION
MITL8350-048-IOO-NA
The named fields on the previous page are printed in a line as illustrated by the line description below: MITEL Format (009t = 1) 0
_MM/DD_BB:BB__ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1234567890123456789012345676SJ
1234567690123456789012345676901234567890123456789912345678
CC:CC:CC_IIII______DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD___TSLLR~_______AAAAAAAAAAAA_NNN
where the fields are as described in Table 7-17. 7.137 Each line is ended with a CARRIAGE RETURN (ASCII 13) and LINE FEED (ASCII 10) and a programmable number of NULLS (ASCII 0). All alphabetic fields are in upper case. The dialed number and the dialed account code fields will be numbers 0 through 9, x and #.
Table 7-17, MITEL Call Record Format Fields
FIELD
COLUMN 1
NR CHARS. ?
FORMAT
MEANING
M B
2-6 7 8-12
5 1 5
13-14 15-22 23 24-27
2 8 1 4
28-33 34-56 57-59 60
6 23 3 1
S L,R
61 62-65
1 4
A N
66-72 73-84 85 86-88
7 12 1 3
SPAeE MONTH; /; DATE SPACE HOURS; :; MINUTES (This is the time of the start of call rounded out to nearest minute) See note 1. SPACES HOURS; :; MINUTES; Y; SECONDS (Call duration) SPACE TnOO(Printed on incoming calls only; blank on outgoing calls. n is the Line Number [l-4]) SPACES This is the number that was dialed as the destination. See note 2. SPACES T = Denied outgoing callback. D = Denied incoming access. C = Incoming cut through access. SPACE = Otherwise. S if the call was speed called; SPACE otherwise. TnOr (Printed on outgoing calls only; blank on incoming calls. n is the Line Number [l-41. r is the route chosen 18 = no route] where r0 - r7 equals Route 1 - 8.) SPACES Dialed account code. See note 3. SPACE System Identification (first three characters of parameter 602).
Page
74
NOTE 1 Time Display Field: If the separating character in the start of call field is a period (.), the time has not been programmed into the Dialer. Use parameter 980 to program the time. When a Dialer is powered on, it will continue to use the last time that was programmed (time at power down) but will mark the call record with a period (,). If the loss of power is only a few seconds, it will not significantly affect the timekeeping. NOTE 2 Dialed Number Field: This field is the Speed Call Bin Number or Callback Number on outgoing calls. Nothing is printed in this field on incoming calls. If there is further dialing, these digits may be collected in the account code. If Centrex mode is being used, the userdialed Centrex Access Code (usually a 9) is not printed. The way to tell internal calls from external calls is to look at the route character (O-7 means a route was used, which probably dialed another 9 for the user; 8 means that the call was not routed, and the Dialer only forwarded the digits as displayed). If an automatic callback is accessed, the speed call binnumber will appear in this field. NOTE 3 Password Digits: This field displays the password digits that were entered by the user, provided that the password action digit allows print password for a valid password. All invalid passwords are printed in this field. Only the first 12 digits are displayed, even though the SMarT-1 unit can handle 23 digit passwords. 7.138 This completes the description of programming for the Controller. All of the parameters described in the preceding paragraphs have been included in a handy reference table showing the default settings in Appendix C. This table is to be used for those programmers who have read and understood all of the descriptions, but wish to have a quick reference guide to the parameter numbers. The table also includes references to paragraphs that cover the particular parameter, if needed. CONTROLLER MEMORY CAPACITY 7.139 The SAC useable memory consists of an 8K X 8 bit battery backed up Random Access Memory (RAM) chip that is capable df holding approximately 14,500 characters. This memory area is available for the storage of parameters and data at programming time. The rest of the available space is used for program execution overhead. It is unlikely that a programmer will completely fill the RAM area with data. In the event that memory space becomes a matter of concern, the ground rules for estimating memory usage are discussed in the paragraphs to follow starting with paragraph 7.143. If a programmer runs out of space while programming the Controller, none of the previously programmed data will be lost.
7.140
7.141
Page 75
The controller simply refuses any more programming after complete memory usage by displaying a question mark (?) on the terminal screen at the termination of each data entry on the keyboard. if it is suspected that RAM space has been completely used up, contact the distributor or the MITEL DATACOM Field Service Office. Once contacted, these personnel can verify that all RAM space has been used, and can possibly recommend more efficient programming techniques that can remedy the situation. As previously mentioned, the programmer should almost never run out of RAM space for parameters and data. 7.142 Estimates of the memory space required versus the available memory space are possible. The programmer can, therefore, estimate the memory space required before programming and can determine if the available space is insufficient. Memory 7.143 Space Estimating Method
The simplest way to determine if the the intended data base will fit into available memory is to calculate the space required by the data. This space is then compared to the space available according to the following rules:
1) There
are approximately 14,500 available data spaces in a freshly initialized SAC. These spaces are used to store programmed data. All data to be programmed into the SAC will use this space with the exception of default settings. If a default setting is used, it will not decrease the available space. Space is mainly consumed by the parameters which are defined as string entries and require the BB terminator for entry. Entries that do not require the BB terminator may be ignored in calculations.
2)
A Search Table entry (parameters 801 through 815) occupies a number of spaces equal to the length of the template plus the action digits. For example, an 804 Search Table entry such as 804 1315 0 BB is four digits plus one action digit for a total of five memory spaces. The 804and BB entries are not counted. An entry of 803 B9B9B9B2 is six digits plus two action digits for a total of eight memory spaces. A password entry (parameters 821 through 835) occupies the number of spaces equal to the length of the template (password) plus the action digits. The password 12345 with a speed call callback action and 24 hour access action would be programmed as 825 12345 20 BB and would require seven spaces. The 825and BB entries are not counted. A callback (Speed Call) entry occupies a number of spaces equal to the length of the Speed Call plus six (an internal Controller requirement) spaces. This number must be rounded off to the next larger even number if the result is odd. For example, a Speed Call programmed as 7nnn 8 139311212 BB requires 14 spaces in memory. The eight digits of the telephone number plus six additional for the Controller equals 14. The
3)
4)
Page 76
SECTION
iVllTL8350-048-l OO-NA
7nnnand BB entries are not counted.

5)
Access Control strings, OCC Access Numbers, OCC Authorization Codes, etc., all count, but in general require so little space that they may be neglected for the purpose of space estimations. Deleting a callback (Speed Call) with the 7nnnBB command does not reclaim all memory previously occupied by that entry. After deletion, the memory space increase only by the number of digits in the removed callback number and not by the + 6 factor that was added in the calculation in 4) above.
Note:
7.144
Figures 7-18 through 7-20 are calculation worksheets that have been included to assist in memory space calculations. Figure 7-18 is to be used in calculating Search Table space. Figure 7-19 is to be used in calculating password space, and Figure 7-20 is to be used in calculating callback number space. These figures are located at the end of this part. The sum of the Search Tables + Passwords + Callback Numbers must be less than approximately 14,500 spaces. Using the assumption that there will be one callback number for each password, and that the 801 through 815 search tables are not required to be programmed (as is the usual case), the following generalizations can be made:
Let X = QUANTITY PASSWORDS (Length 7.146 + 2) X + CALLBACKS (Length + 6) X = 14,500
7.145
For example, assume that the unit is programmed with all 5 digit passwords and 7 digit callback numbers. Using the equation under paragraph 7.146 above, the amount of space used would be 725 spaces as shown below: (5 + 2)X + (7 + 6)X = 14,500 7x + 13x = 14,500 20x = 14500 14500
x=
20
X = 725 Therefore, 725 five digit passwords and 725 seven digit callback numbers may be safely stored in the RAM memory. 7.147 Another example would be to assume that there will be twice as many passwords as callback numbers (two people at each callback location but with different access allowances). Passwords are still 5 digits long and callback numbers are 7 digits long:
Page
77
SECTION
MITL8350-048-IOO-NA
(5 + 2)2X + (7 + 6)X = 14,500 (7)2X + 13X = 14,500
14x + 13x = 14500 27X = 14500
x=
27
14500
x = 537 Therefore, 1,074 five digit passwords (2X) and 537 seven numbers may safely be stored in the RAM memory. 7.148 digit callback
If the extreme case were considered and based on the formula above, up to 381 15-digit passwords and 381 15-digit callback numbers could be stored in the RAM memory. For those who demand more detailed calculations, simultaneous solutions using X and Y unknowns would allow calculation of uneven numbers of password/callback quantities. Calculus formulae .would allow both lengths and quantities to be varied, but for simplicity, it is easier to use the charts included, with known intentions.
Page
78
SECTION MlfL8350-048-l OO-NA
rr
SEARCH TABLES Parameters 801 - 815
PASSWORDS Parameters 821 - 835

-
Length+1
QW-
Subtotal
Length+2
X =
Qty.
Subtotal
i
I
~:
I;
I --
. : :
I I : i i
; i i
j I i/i
I
I -i
I i i
I_
Page 79
CALLBACK NUMBERS 7nnn Entries Length+6 X Qty. Subtotal
Total Space
Sht. 3
Page 80
SECTION
MITL8350-048-IOO-MA
8. TECHNICAL
CIRCUIT
DESCRIPTION
INTRODUCTION
This part will be added at a later date. For the present, refer to Appendix C, Figures C-I and C-2 for an overall block diagram, and a simplified electrical diagram of the Controller, respectively.
8.01
Page
81
SECTION
---
THIS
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
---
Page 82
SECTION
9. MAINTENANCE
AND
TROUBLESHOOTING
MAINTENANCE 9.01
The SMarT-1 Security Access Controller, as is evident, is a fully self-contained unit. As such, it has no user repairable parts. If the warranty seal over the unit fasteners is broken, the warranty is void. In case of failure, replace the Controller as follows: 1) 2) Power down the unit. This will cut-through to the CO side. the subscriber side
Remove the RJ31KA31 plug from the Telco supplied socket. The shorting bars in the RJ31XKA31A will cut-through to the line. Then, Replace the Controller and re-connect. Proceed as if a new installation.
3) 4)
TROUBLESHOOTING
9.02
This part will be added at a later date.
Page
83
SECTION
---
THIS
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
---
Page 84
SECTION
APPENDIX
A FCC INTERCONNECTION Al.01 REQUIREMENTS
Al.02
0
The telephone
number of the line that will connect to the unit. INC. EMP
0 0
l l
The equipment being connected is a MITEL DATACOM model SMarT-I Security Access Controller. The FCC Registration 85B-14558-LR-E. Number for the SMarT-1 is
The FCC Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) which is 0.7B. The Connector Jacks required are RJ31X.
LIMITATIONS
CONNECTION Al.03
Due to the FCC Part 68 Rule, no connection can be made to party lines and to coin telephone service. This unit is designed to be used on standard-device telephone lines. If there are any questions about the telephone line, such as how many pieces of equipment may be connected to it, the telephone company will provide this information upon request.
NETWORK Al.04 CHANGES
The telephone company may make changes to its communication service; such changes may include the change of trunk circuits, changes in the operational characteristics of its trunks, etc. Before doing this, however, the company shall provide official notification, so that the operation of the Dialer service will not be interrupted.
MAINTENANCE LIMITATIONS
Al.05
Page
A-l
SECTION
Al .06
There are no user repairable parts within the unit. It is sealed against user maintenance. If opened, all warranties are voided. by are the
No cabling or wiring changes within the unit are permitted the user. Plug-ended cables, as detailed in this document, connections between the unit and to be used for ail external telephone company interface jack. Al .07 Al.08
TROUBLE Al.09
DISCONNECTION Al.10 If it is ever decided to permanently Security Access Controller from the the telephone company of this change. disconnect the SMarT-1 present line, please notify
Page A-2
SECTION
MITL8350-O48-l OO-NA
APPENDIX
B GLOSSARY 81.01 OF TERMS
The following pages include a Glossary of Common Terminology that might be encountered in this manual. It is presented in the tabular format of term followed by definition. It does not include all possible terms that may be encountered, but tries to include those that may not be common knowledge to the reader. GLOSSARY TERM ACCESS NUMBER The telephone Carrier (OCC). number OF TERMS DEFINITION used to access the Other Common
AREA
CODE
(NPA)
A three digit code used to designate the geographical bering plan area used in nationwide dialing.
num-
ASCII
The American Standard Code for Information Interchange. It is an eight bit alphanumeric transmission code. The first seven bits represent one of 128 standard ASCII characters. The eighth bit is a parity bit for error checking.
AUTHORIZATION
NUMBER
Other
Common
Carrier
(OCC)
required
authorization
number.
BAUD
A term used to define the data transfer rate between a computer and a printer, data cassette, floppy disk drive, etc.. It is the reciprocal of the length in seconds of the shortest element of the digital code used in transmission.
BUFFER
An area in the computers memory temporary storage of data.
(RAM) that
is used for
CALL RECORDING
The process of sending printer (via the RS-232
dialing information Computer Port).
to an external
CALL SEARCHING
The process of comparing dialed digits (one by one) to data stored in the search tables. The result of the comparison usually results in some action being taken by the Dialer.
Page
B-l
SECTION
TERM CENTRAL (CO) OFFICE
DEFINITION A telephone switching system scribers together. It is usually tral to the subscribers. used to interconnect sublocated at a point that is cen-
CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
The circuitry in a computer that controls the computers eration by interpreting and manipulating the information stored in the computers memory (RAM or ROM).
op-
. CENTREX Service providing direct inward and outward dialing for PABX extensions. The PABX is assigned a distinct Central Office code, and made part of the numbering plan. A main listed number will give access to the PABX operator.
CUT THROUGH
MODE
All digits ity).
passed
directly
through
the Dialer
(no Dialer
activ-
DATA
TRANSMISSION RATE DDD
See BAUD.
Direct dialed
Distance Dialing that allows long distance calls to be direct, rather than going through an operator.
DOT MATRIX PRINTER
A printer whose printer head forms its characters by the use of numerous metal pins that punch out the image required on paper. Another method would use jets of ink to form the image. Any method that uses a matrix of dots to form a character on paper.
DTMF
DIALING
A system of dialing that uses tones number to the Central Office.
to transmit
the dialed
END OFFICE
A local central office arranged for terminating subscriber lines and provided with trunks for establishing connections to and from other central offices and toll offices.
EXTENDED AREA SERVICE (EAS)
Telephone subscribers
service that allows subscribers in one area to call in another area without a toll charge.
Page
B-2
SECTION
TERM FOREIGN EXCHANGE
DEFINITION
(PXI
A classification of subscriber service that indicates service from any other central office other than the central office that would normally serve a subscriber. For example, a telephone in N.Y. has a Washington number assigned to it.
GROUND
START
A method of signaling to the Central Office. This signaling requires that a ground be applied to the RING side of the Line to indicate an Off-hook condition.
HERTZ
(Hz)
A term adapted as a unit of frequency preferred for world wide standardization and replacing cycles per second. 1000 Hz = 1000 cycles per second.
INTERCONNECT
Companies other than the main telephone companies that supply telecommunications service and equipment.
KEY SYSTEM
A versatile switching system located on the customers premises consisting of one or more multi-button telephone sets and associated equipment. Permits the mutual access to and control of several central office lines.
LINE
An installed telephone with its associated wiring and auxiliary equipment. Also referred to as a station or extension.
LOOP START
A method of signaling the Central Office. This signaling requires that a termination be placed across the Tip and Ring to indicate an off-hook condition to the Central Office.
MAIN
DISTRIBUTION FRAME
A frame where cables terminate for cross-connecting to a central office or private automatic branch exchange, equipment and connections to lines.
MEMORY
The part of a computer where information binary form, and retrieved at any time.
can be stored, in
OFF PREMISE EXTENSION (OPX)
A line connected to the PABX that is at a location other than the location of the PABX.
Page
B-8
SECTION
MITL835W048-IOO-NA
TERM -OFFICE CODE (NNX)
DEFINITION Any of the 792 codes that can be used as an address 10,000 line unit of Central Office. for a
-.OTHER COMMON CARRIER (OCC) A telephone system that provides other than normal carrier facilities, long distance calls via usually at a lower rate.
PRIVATE AUTOMATIC BRANCH EXCHANGE (PABX)
A telephone system located on the customers premises (Private Exchange), that allows calling between extensions without the assistance of an operator (Automatic), and having trunks going to the central office (Branch).
PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE (PBX)
The same as PABX above, dant (operator) is required
with the exception to process calls.
that
an atten-
ROM
Read Only Memory, a memory storage chip that may be programmed by someone other than the manufacturer. This chip can only be programmed once, and becomes a permanent modification when the process is completed.
RAM
Random Access Memory, a section of memory written to or read from at any point in time.
that
can be
RESERVE
POWER
A backup DC battery system used to maintain operations in the event of a power failure.
normal
switch
ROTARY
DIAL
A dialing system that uses pulses number to the Central Office.
to transmit
the dialed
SEQUENTIAL ACCESS
A manner in which to read or write data as complete of information, with each byte accessed in the exact which it was stored.
blocks order in .
SOFTWARE
Electrically stored memory, either on a permanent basis (ROM) or for a short time (RAM), that causes a computer type system to operate (a set of instructions).
SPEED
CALLING
A method of automatically by use of Speed Dialing.
completing
a call to a subscriber
Page
B-4
SECTION
MlTL8350-048-l
OO-NA
TERM SPEED DIALING
DEFINITION The automatic dialing of a stored number by a microprocessor or similar unit. The process presupposes that the user will dial a single digit to cause the unit to dial many digits automatically, saving time and effort.
STATIC
Interference caused by electrical disturbances in the atmosphere, or any man-made electromagnetic device.
SWITCHING
SYSTEM
A device
that
interconnects
two or more
subscriber
circuits.
TIE TRUNK
A trunk
between
two
PABXs.
TIP & RING
Indicates each side of a pair of wires used throughout the telephone industry. The first wire is the tip and the second wire is the ring. Normally, the tip is ground and the ring is battery.
TOLL OFFICE
The office that tional charges).
handles
toll calls (calls where
there
are addi-
TRUNK
A telephone or between
circuit or channel between two Central a Central Office and a PBX or PABX.
Offices,
VOICE
FREQUENCY
The sound waves when speaking.
produced
by the vibration
of the voice
box
WIDE AREA TELEPHONE SERVICE (WATS)
For a basic monthly charge, the customer is allowed to make calls within a specific region without any additional charges. A WATS line can be incoming or outgoing, but not both. Outgoing WATS is OUTWATS and incoming WATS is INWATS.
Page
B-5
SECTION
---
THIS
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
---
Page
B-6
SECTION
MITL8350-048-100-NA
APPENDIX
C ADDITIONAL Cl.01 INFORMATION
Figures C-l and C-2 on the following pages are a block diagram and a simplified electrical diagram for the SMarT-1 Security Access Controller. Table C-l is a listing of the standard 7-bit ASCII codes followed by the code equivalents. Table C-2 contains Legal Dialer Programming Input Characters.
Cl.02
Table C-3 lists the Parameter Defaults along with descriptions. The table also lists reference pages where the particular commands and descriptions may be found.
Page
C-l
SECTION
MlTL8350-048-IOO-MA
>
INPUT
#l
> RECJGEN. LINE CCT #l <
<
OUTPUT
#l
>
INPUT
#2
> RECJGEN. LINE CCT #2
<
OUTPUT
#2
<
>
INPUT
#3
> RECJGEN. LINE CCT #3 <
> > > > MPU
<
OUTPUT
#3
<
>
INPUT
#4
> RECJGEN. LINE CCT #4 ROM
<
OUTPUT
#4
<
POWER SUPPLY
Figure
C-l,
SMarT-ltm
System
Block
Diagram
Page
C-2
SECTION MITL8350-048-I
00-Nk
DTMF
RX
RINGING DETECT
I I I 1 I r - - - &~TFN;- - - - - - -
--_--
-I
INPUTS
PROM
Figure C-2, SMarT-1
Simplified
Electrical
Diagram
Page C-3
SECTKIN
MITL8350-048-I OO-NA
Table
C-l, HEX. CODE
ASCII
Codes
CHAR.
t;;E
CHAR.
CHAR.
t;EE
CHAR.
;;tE
NUL SOH STX ETX EOT ENQ ACK BEL BS HT LF VT FF CR SO SI DLE DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 NAK SYN ET6 CAN EM SUB ESC FS GS RS us
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 OA OB oc OD OE OF 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A IB 1c 1D 1E 1F Note:
SP ! ti # $ % & ! * + I ; 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : . :: = > ?
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 28 2c 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3c 3D 3E 3F
d A B C D E F G H I J K L M N 0 P Q R S T U v W X Y Z ; A _
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 48 4c 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F
: z e f g h i i k I m n o P 9 r s t
U
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 78 3: 7E 7F
v
W X
Y ; \ DEL
The last character of an ASCII string may not be B. However, a single B within a string is allowed. If the last ASCII character of a string must be B, then it must be followed with a nonprinting character such as a space (hexadecimal 20). If necessary, the LF, FF, CR, BEL and so on may also be used within a string.
Page
C-4
SECTION MlTL8350-048-1
OO-l\)lA.
Table C-2, ~ !gal Controller FROM TERMINAL 0 through 9 #, * A or a B or b BB or bb C or c D or d E or e F or f FF or ff Period <.> Comma <,> Hyphen C-> <LF> <CR> <Space> 999 X or x TERMINAL DISPLAY 0 through #, * A or a B or b BB or bb C or c D or d E or e F or f FF or ff Period <.> Comma <,> Hyphen <-> <LF> <CR> <Space> 999 X or x 9 0 through #, * * # ## C D E 9
Programming
Input Characters
SAC INTERPRETATION
F if it is within a string. SPACE if it is last character of a string. ## # # # # # # Exit PROGRAM mode Exit PROGRAM mode SPECIALS
co
Cl c2 c3
For LlH4 Tone Pair dial-out through 6r5 For L2H4 Tone Pair dial-out through 6r5 For L3H4 Tone Pair dial-out through 6r5 For L4H4 Tone Pair dial-out through 6r5
in parameters 601 and 6rO in parameters in parameters 601 and 6rO 601 and 6rO
in parameters 601 and 6rO
Page C-5
Table C-3, Default Register

001
Parameter Description
Summary Reference
Default
0
005 006 007 009 010 x00 x01 x02 x03 x04 x05 x06 x07 XI4 x20 x21 x24 x27 x28 x29 x31 x33 x34 x35 x36 r50x, r55x, r56x, r57x, r58x, r70x r75x r76x r77x r78x
0 4 2 2 9 2 4 2 6 1 5 3 3 4 2 6 0 I I 2 3 0 6 0 1 0 * 3 7 5 000 SAC <CR> DDD ROUTED ROUTED
Reorder Tone OFF Trunk to Monitor for CDR I200 Baud RS-232 Port 2 Nulls after Carriage Return SMarT-1 CDR Print Format Monitor All Routes for CDR Loop Start, DTMF Central Office 60/40 Rotary Dialing (Standard) 60 ms On/Off for DTMF Dialing 750 ms On-Hook Recognition Time IO0 ms Flash Allowed Time 1.25 Second Drop 81 Reseize Time Max. 3 Ground Start Attempts Wait 3 Sec. for Ground Start Response 800 ms Rotary Interdigit Pause to CO Ringing Sensitivity 6 Sec. Inter-Ring Timing Default to Primary Routes Auto-Answer in 3 Seconds Wait 8 Sec. for Password and I6 Sec. for UserEntered Number (if used) Busy Out Trunk for 30 Sec. on Invalid Password 120 ms Ground Start Tip Ground Application Timer . DTMF, IO or 20 PPS Rotary Dial-in Tip Ground Removal Timer All Progress Tones Enabled Wait 10 Seconds before Initiating Callback Any Number of Digits in Callback Number Not On Network Trigger Digit 30 Days before NON Entry Delete 7 Digits stored upon NON Detection Redial Once, then Drop Call Dummy Area Code Machine Identifier Terminal Program Access
See Pages 47-49
See Pages 50-59
See Page 71
601 602 604 610,650 620-640 660-680 6rI 6r2 6r4 6r5
Code
See Pages 44 81 46
9 874427
Name of Route for CDR Name of Route for CDR Name of Route for CDR OCC Telephone Number OCC Authorization Number Centrex Number Route Access Control Sequence (continued)
See Pages 65-72
Page C-6
SECTION
MlTL8850-048-7
66-N&
Table C-3 (Contd), Default Register 7nnn Default Dialback Speed Call Bin
Parameter
Summary Reference See Pages 63 81 64
Description
801
lB7 xB7 B90
If 1st digit = 1, do nothing If 1st digit = *, do nothing If 1st digit # 1, x, prefer call on Route 1. Stop searching after receipt 911. 801 search above will prefer call on Route 1. *and 2 more digits = speed call number. Dial and cut through after I+41 1. Place I+555 calls on Route Place 1+800 calls on Route Place l+NXX calls on Route of
802 803
911B6
xB9B9B2 804 141183 15550 18000 lB4B9B91 805 806 807
1. 1. 2. See Pages
184BlB95550 B4B4B9BgBgBgBgB6
808
BlB4B4BgBgBgBgBgB6
Place l+N(O or 1)X-555-xXxX calls on Route 1. Stop searching after receipt of NNX-XXXX (local call). Stop searching after receipt of l+NXX-XXXX (long distance call with same area code). Stop searching after receipt of N(0 or 1)X-XXX-xXxX (long distance, outside of local calling area). Stop searching after receipt of l+N(O or 1)X-XXX-xXxX (long distance, non international call).
59-65
809 810
B4BlB9B9B9B9B9B9B9B9B6
811
BlB4BlB9B9B9B9B9B9B9B9B6
812 813 814 815 (continued)
Page C-7
SECTlrQN M1TL8350-048-l OO-NA
Table C-3 (Contd), Default Register 82 l-835 902 907 980 942903 942904 Default
Parameter
Summary Reference
Description Password Tables Enter Data Confirmation Mode Exit Data Confirmation Mode Enter Date and Time Load Factory Default Database Erase all Search Table Data
See Pages 43-46
Page C-8
SECTION
MBTL885Cb048-IOO-
til% ?
APPENDIX D OVERALL TOPICAL INDEX

CONTENTS ACCESS ACCESS ACR SEE ADAPTIVE ACTION ACTION ADAPTIWE ADDITIONAL SEE TABLE ALLOWABLE ALTERNATE APPENDIX A LIMITATIONS JACKS .._..........._ : REQUIREMENTS NUMBER _.........._........, NUMBER .._..... A-l A-l A-2 A-l A-l A-l A-l A-l A-2 B-l C-l _.. __. _.. _.. _.. _.. DIAGRAM .__ INPUT _.._ _.... c-4 ..c-1 C-l c-5 c-4 c-4 B-l B-l SEARCHING 6 B-l _.... _. __ .._ ., __ __. _, C-l c-4 DATA C ACCESS DESCRIPTIONS DESCRIPTIONS . 25 43.63 PROGRAMMING OPERATING PROGRAMMING ENTRY. 35 c-4 CHARACTERS DIGIT DIGIT SEE SEARCH SEE TABLE CALL ROUTING TABLE 7-11 PROGRAMMING _.________ DESCRIPTION PARAMETERS 70 SPECIFICATIONS ROUTING 10 6 CALL ANSWER SEE TABLE SEE TRUNK CALL CALL DETAIL DETAIL TIMER 7-4 RELATED RECORD RECORD PARAMETERS PROGRAMMING FORMAT RECORD 71 71 71 DESCRIPTIONS 71 23 70 OF TERMS PORT DESCRIPTION OF TERMS _. ____ FORMAT 70 34 TERMINAL DISPLAY 37 AND CAPABILITIES PROGRAMMING r. 3 71 48 67.48 (CO) OF TERMS CONNECTIONS USOC UNIT OF TERMS OF TERMS JACK (CPU) B-2 B-2 70 OF TERMS REQUIREMENTS 29 PROGRAMMING A A-l 16.20 7 B-2 AND CABLE 20 B-Z .._ _. B-l 23 6 6-1 PROGRAMMING FORMAT 51 52 .._ .._ _... 6 BB 64 65.66 6 SEE NOTES BIT EIGHT SEE RS-232 SEE RS-232 BRIDGE CLIPS ON DATA ENTRY 34 11 11 CABLE 20 B-1 SENSE PORT SPECIFICATIONS PORT SPECIFICATIONS USOC OF TERMS JACK AND DEFINITIONS DESCRIPTIONS ROUTING CODE OF TERMS SEQUENCE ROUTING PARAMETERS 67 B-l CONTROL PAGE SEE VERSATILE BAUD SEE GLOSSARY BAUD RATE PORT 6 11 PORT SPECIFICATIONS OF TERMS B-l PROGRAMMING CONTENTS PAGE . . ...6
SEE GLOSSARY
SEE PROGRAMMING
SEE CALL RECORDING/R.%232 SEE RS-232
CALL
BITS PER CHARACTER
SEE CONTROLLER ROUTE 7-16 VOLTAGE ROUTING COST
SEE RJ31X/CA31A BUFFER SEE GLOSSARY
SEE HARDWARE SEE LEAST CONNECTION CONNECTOR DISCONNECTION
FCC INTERCONNECTION FCC REGISTRATION MAINTENANCE NETWORK RINGER TROUBLE APPENDIX APPENDIX ASCll ASCll B OF TERMS C GLOSSARY CHANGES EQUIVALENCE CORRECTIONS
SEE CALL DETAIL CALL DETAIL
LIMITATIONS
RECORD
CDR DESCRIPTION SEE DETAILED PROGRAMMING CALL DETAIL RECORDING SEE SECURITY CALL CALL CALL FAILURE ACTION 7-16 SEE TABLE
CODES................................ TABLE __ SIMPLIFIED SYSTEM .._ _.. _... PARAMETER SUMMARY PROGRAMMING ELECTRICAL BLOCK OF TERMS OF TERMS CODE/CALL DESCRIPTION OF TERMS C __, DIAGRAM
RECORDING RECORDING/RS-232
SEE GLOSSARY SEE CONTROLLER CALL SEARCHING SEE GLOSSARY CALLBACK CALLBACK CALLBACK CALLBACK FEATURE NUMBER 7-16 SEE SECURITY
DEFAULT DIAGRAMS LEGAL SMarT-1 SMarT-1 AREA AREA AREA ASCII CODE CODE
CONTROLLER
SEE GLOSSARY (NPA) SEE GLOSSARY CODE/OFFICE SEE CONTROLLER SEE GLOSSARY ASCII CODES C-l ON SEE APPENDIX SEE TABLE ASCII ASCII STRING TABLE SEE NOTES
SEE TABLE
OPERATION PROGRAMMING 7-1
SEE PROGRAMMING SEE FIGURE CAPABILITIES CDR DESCRIPTION SEE CALL DETAIL CDR PRINT FORMAT PARAMETERS 7-3 SEE SYSTEM SEE TABLE CENTRAL CENTRAL CEBTRAL CENTREX OFFICE OFFICE RECORD
SEE FEATURES
SEE APPENDIX AUTOMATIC AUTOMATIC SEE DETAILED SEE DETAILED
CALLBACK CALLBACK
SEE GLOSSARY SEE RJBlX/CABlA
PROCESSING
SEE GLOSSARY B SEE NOTES BASIC ON DATA ENTRY. 34 33 29 PROGRAMMING POWER SPECIFICATIONS 6 5 9 29 PROGRAMMING co SEE GLOSSARY COMMUNICATIONS SEE GLOSSARY CENTREX NUMBER 7-16 SEE TABLE
SEE INTRODUCTION BATTERIES SEE INITIALIZATION SEE VERSATILE BATTERV BATTERY BATTERY BACKUP FEED TVPE SEE SYSTEM
SEE INITIALIZATION SEE VERSATILE CONNECTION CONNECTION CONNECTIONS SEE APPENDIX LIMITATIONS PROCEDURE
SEE HARDWARE SEE INITIALIZATION
SEE CONNECTIONS
Page
D-5
CONTENTS RJ31X/CA31A F&232 USOC JACK AND CABLE SPECIFICATIONS AND ORDERING INFORMATION
PAGE 20 20 11 16 A-l DISCONNECTION SEE APPENDIX DOCUMENT DOCUMENT DOCUMENT 6 SEE DOCUMENT SEE INTRODUCTION HISTORV SEE INTRODUCTION DOCUMENT DOCUMENT DOCUMENT DOCUMENT DOCUMENT DOT MATRIX OF TERMS OF TERMS ACCESS NUMBERING OBJECTIVES SEE DOCUMENT SEE INTRODUCTION OVERVIEW SEE INTRODUCTION PART TITLE OBJECTIVES SEE DOCUMENT A
CONTENTS
PAGE
PORT CONFIGURATION INSTALLATION A ROUTING CODE/CALL PORT SEARCHING
A-2 DESCRIPTION 1 2 .._ __._ _.... _. 2 : 1 1 . . . .._........._......._........... OVERVIEW.............................. 1 1 1 E-2 B-2 42 B-2 50 PARAMETERS 52 10 10 . OVERVIEW.
SEE ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL SEE UNPACKING, CONNECTOR CONTROLLER AOAPTIVE AREA LEAST JACKS DESCRIPTION CALL SEE APPENDIX
APPENDICES CONVENTIONS
CODE/OFFICE COST ROUTING
6 6 6 5 5 3 5
CALL RECORDING/AS-232 LINES/MODELS NETWORK SYSTEM CONTROLLER MEMORY CURRENT SEE HARDWARE CUT THROUGH SEE OPERATIONAL SEE DETAILED CUT THROUGH SEESECURITY.. SEE GLOSSARY MODE OF TERMS .:._.:..: COMPATIBILITY DESCRIPTION POWER MEMORY SPACE SEE GENERAL
OBJECTIVES
DESCRIPTIONS
CAPACITY METHOD 76 75
ESTIMATING
SEE PROGRAMMING SPECIFICATIONS SEQUENCES
SEE DOCUMENT SEE GLOSSARY DOT MATRIX SEE GLOSSARY DTMF DTMF DTMF
9 24 27 B-2
ACCESS OPERATING.OESCRIPTION
PRINTER
CUT THROUGH DIALING
SEE PROGRAMMING :i..

-Tf.j,
,;,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._
.:r....
,:
_.
_.
23
SEE GLOSSARY DIALING SEE TABLE SEE TRUNK 7-4
OF TERMS
RATE RELATED
DATA DATA DATA
STRING 34 RATE OF TERMS STEPS SPECIFICATIONS I. ._ SEARCHING B-2 36 9 : 20 6 6-2 7 C-l 33.34 13 TABLE ENTRIES 45 44 DESCRIPTION PROCEDURES .~. DESCRIPTIONS PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS. 63 71 55 59 PARAMETERS
. . . . . . . . . . .._...____ . . . . . .._..__ .___ ..__
SEE PROGRAMMING TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION SEE GLOSSARY SEE PROCEDURAL DC BALANCE SEE HARDWARE DCE SEE RS-232 DDD SEE AREA DEFAULT DEFAULT DEFAULT DEFECTIVE DELETE CODE/OFFICE OF TERMS CODE/CALL SEE GLOSSARY LOAD
..___ ____ ___._...., ._._..., .____..
DTMF DTMF
RECEIVER SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS SENDER
SEE HARDWARE SEE HARDWARE
EAS SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS SPECIFICATIONS 11 11 CONVENTIONS OF TERMS MODE 45 44 TIME 45 44 44 NUMBER STEPS TIME STEPS IDENTIFIER STEPS STEPS MODE PROCEDURE MODE 36 34 MODE 44.45 44 44 44 MODE PROCEDURE (EAS) B-2 30 SERVICE STEPS 30 36 36 36 36 PARAMETERS .._.. _................... 2 B-2 B-2 ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL SEE SPECIFICATIONS SEE TABLE ELLIPSIS SEE DOCUMENT END OFFICE DATA CONFIRMATION 3-3
PORT CONFIGURATION
SEE PROGRAMMING PARAMETER C PROGRAMMING 7-l EQUIPMENT SEE APPENDIX SEE TABLE
SUMMARV :. PARAMETERS
SEE GLOSSARY ENTER SEE SYSTEM
SEE TABLE 7-2 ENTER DATE AND SEE SYSTEM ENTER DATE/TIME SEE SYSTEM SEE TABLE ENTERING
SEE REPACKING ALL SEARCH 7-2 SEE SYSTEM SEE TABLE DETAILED OTHER WITH DETAILED PARAMETERS
PARAMETERS PARAMETERS 7-2
OPERATING OPERATIONAL MODEMS PROGRAMMING
CALLBACK DATE AND
28 25 25
SEE PROCEDURAL ENTERING ENTERING ENTERING ENTERING ENTERING SEE PROCEDURAL MACHINE PASSWORD PROGRAM SEE PROCEDURAL SEE PROCEDURAL SEE INITIALIZATION
SEE OPERATING
DESCRlmlON
AUTOMATIC CALL DETAIL PASSWORD SEARCH SPEED SYSTEM TRUNK DETECTOR
CALLBACK RECORD
NON-CONTROLLER PROGRAMMING TABLE CALL
PERTINENT ROUTING
PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING
. . . .
67 64 42 63 43 49 69 69
PROGRAMMING
SEE PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS RELATED TIMEOUT 7-14 7-15 C
SEE PROCEDURAL ENTRV TERMINATOR SEE PROGRAMMING EXIT DATA
:.
PARAMETERS CODES
CONFIRMATION PARAMETERS 7-2 MODE PARAMETERS 7-2
SEE SYSTEM SEE TABLE EXIT PROGRAM SEE SYSTEM C-l SEE TABLE EXITING
SEE TABLE SEE TABLE DIAGRAMS
SEE APPENDIX DIALTONE SEE HARDWARE DIALTONE DIMENSIONS
PROGRAM AREA
SPECIFICATIONS CODES
10 .66 SPECIFICATIONS 11
SEE INITIALIZATION EXTENDED SEE GLOSSARY
DETECTOR 7-13
SEE TABLE
OF TERMS
SEE ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL
CONTENTS F SEE NOTES GENERAL SEE APPENDIX FCC REGISTRATION SEE APPENDIX FCC RINGER FEATURES SEE FEATURES FEATURES FEED FF SEE NOTES FLASH ALLOWED 7-5 (FX) OF TERMS OF TERMS ON DATA TIME PERTINENT PARAMETERS. ENTRY. AND SEE GENERAL RESISTANCE SPECIFICATIONS SEE HARDWARE AND CAPABILITIES SEE HARDWARE A SPECIFICATIONS A NUMBER ON DATA ENTRY. REQUIREMENTS .._..............
PAGE INTERCONNECT 34 1 A-l A-l 9 3 JACKS 3 9 KEY SYSTEM 34 57 55 B-3 B-3 LEAKAGE SEE HARDWARE SEE GLOSSARY KEVSLOT MOUNTING SEE MOUNTING OF TERMS SEE APPENDIX A SEE GLOSSARY INTRODUCTION DOCUMENT DOCUMENT DOCUMENT DOCUMENT INTENDED READER CONVENTIONS HISTORY OBJECTIVES OVERVIEW AUDIENCE COMMENTS OF TERMS
CONTENTS.: SL. : :I -. : I
PAGE _ :
FCC INTERCONNECTION
._ :,. .:;i: ? ..i.i B-3 , * ,, , ; ., 1 .A! .:j_ : ..!,Z
:-: .:I.
I .;:riI.~:~r2C
EQUIVALENCE
CAPABILITIES DESCRIPTION
/ :A::+ i :.;.I i!: .. -C. L<!. i;..!F.. 1.7: : ._ I-. _ (/.f.-32 : _L::..: c : .: ;:! il ...ii .2 , A... 4: .j,!S ; - --. ...!. .-. ( ,-.<; . : _.. A-l
::.,. .
:_
: :.
B-3 16
SEE NON-CONTROLLER SEE TABLE FOREIGN FX SEE GLOSSARY EXCHANGE
,?;
.:
: 7
1.
. i ,. A :. . - : :. i, I
SEE GLOSSARY
SPECIFICATIONS DESCRIPTION PROGRAMMING INPUT
LEAST LEGAL
COST
ROUTING
.,i.: c.,:6.i? .;,:;.(: .,. ..-.(;. i3..,:. : : : .:: 9 I~. ; .7P.? jil;)., pi INPUT GHARACTERS ? .? : ? .q.% C ::: .:? 6 -:., ,-. .I , _. _ CHARACTERS _. 5 :
SEE CONTROLLER CONTROLLER C-2 DIALER GENERAL DESCqlPTlON DESCRIPTION AND CAPABILITIES PROGRAMMING OF TERMS TRIES NUMBER PERTINENT PARAMETERS SEE TABLE LEGAL LENGTH
CONTROLLER FEATURES VERSATILE GROUND GROUND
PROGRAMMING C ENTRY
SEE APPENDIX OF NON SEE TABLE LINE LINE 7-16
.- : ..
_!,.: C-4 70 E-3 50
START START
SEE GLOSSARY
,.. OF TERMS TIME PARAMETERS __ I.
SEE GLOSSARY SEE TABLE SEE TRUNK LINES/MODELS SEE CONTROLLER LOAD DEFAULT 7-4
SEE NON-CONTROLLER SEE TABLE GROUNDING 7-5 VOLTAGE
DROP/RESEIZURE RELATED
52 1:: 5
SEE HARDWARE
SPECIFICATIONS
DESCRIPTION : : .,:,.-. .. .;.
DATABASE PARAMETERS .45 :44 :_ :. PARAMETERS .:: r:.;. 1.: :!. : : .: _.:_ ._ _-:; .a .., .. , t :. I, : I-51 53 E-3 : RELATED .._.._._.___.,._.__._____.._....__.._ 7-4
HARDWARE
SPECIFICATIONS 9 9.10 OF TERMS PERTINENT PARAMETERS B-3 56 10 3-1
SEE SYSTEM SEETAELE7-2 LOCKOUT TIMER SEE TABLE SEE TRUNK LOOP START
SEE SPECIFICATIONS SEE TABLE HERTZ HIT (Hz)
SEE GLOSSARY TIMING
SEE NON-CONTROLLER HUMIDITY SEE HARDWARE
SEE GLOSSARY LOSS OF DATA SEE lNlTlALlZ4TlON
OF TERMS
SPECIFICATIONS
29
IMPORTANT INCOMING INCOMING
NOTICES OVERVIEW RECOGNITION SENSITIVITY PERTINENT PARAMETERS. 56 56 ____ ____._ 7-l PROGRAMMING . DESCRIPTION _. __ ._ INSTALLATION _._. .__. __ _.. ___...._ PERTINENT ______ AND ..__ _. _. _.__ ORDERING __.. __.__ _.. __ PROCEDURE 29.30 5 25 13 23 2 56 56 _......_ _._....................... .., .___.__..__. __. __ _........ 29 30 33 33.34 6 TYPE TIMER 56 DIGIT 7-5
MACHINE
IDENTIFIER PARAMETERS 7-2 FRAME OF TERMS TROUBLESHOOTING ; ..,*:: :P;:::-: :. .c: ..i :,1_ . . CAPACITY : . . . /.I _ 1 .: .: : ._ :
L ., ; _:, :. 46 *.? ::~..;;f .<, --,,> i.. ., l:J _:. .::s..-,:-. 2: ,. .: !I -44 .?: ~ !
SEE DOCUMENT SEE TABLE
SEE SYSTEM SEE TABLE MAIN
DISTRIBUTION
RINGING 7-5
SEE GLOSSARY
SEE NON-CONTROLLER SEE TABLE INITIALIZATION INTRODUCTION PROCEDURE SEE TABLE lNlTlALl2ATlON INSTALLATION SEE CONTROLLER INSTALLATION SEE WITH INSTALLATION INSTANT INTENDED INTER-RING SEE TABLE MODEMS PROBLEMS SEE PROGRAMMING SEE VERSATILE SEE lNlTlALlZATlON
MAINTENANCE AND MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE SEE APPENDIX MAINTENANCE MEMORV SEE GLOSSARY MEMORV MEMORY SEARCH SPEED STRING MEMORY FULL SEE CONTROLLER SPACE PASSWORD
: :..: .-,.li : :: :?q;>. B-3 ,:qi?, :: 4 ! s!:. :.!.r:. i$,. q.:? 1183
LIMITATIONS A PROCEDURE
t.:.:.. : . . .\,d,!;ei 63 ;,i. ,-A :, _- .._ ?. i a-1 i .!,, ,\ ,, ?.ii::;d:63 .i. r I..,
SEE MAINTENANCE OF TERMS MEMORY
1. 83
.-: I,,? .:: ,. : 95 ,;
ENTRIES ENTRIES
!.:.:78*1 :.-76
TABLE CALLS ENTRIES SPACE SPACE
REQUIREMENTS INFORMATION __._ __._ ._ ._
: .. -? 77
CALCULATION ESTIMATING MEMORY FORMAT METHOD CAPACITY FIELDS . 74 r. : . -. ,a,, .:\c;~.?S; .I j.?.:. 77.. ! ;.: -:.x 76:.
SEE UNPACKING, ACCESS AUDIENCE SEE SECURITY SEE INTRODUCTION TIMER
SEE EXAMPLES MEMORV SEE CONTROLLER MITEL CALL RECORD 7-17 SEE TABLE MITEL FORMAT
______._ PARAMETERS.
::: .,.: .;:i ,.
SEE NON-CONTROLLER 7-5
, SEE~LLDETAILRECORDFORNIAT...::: MODE MODEM MODEMS SEE DETAILED MOUNTING SEE ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL SEE UNPACKING. MOJJNTING MOUNTING $EE SEE MOUNTING INFORMATION ENVIRONMENTAL INSTALLATION PACKAGE AND RECEIVING MULTI-UNIT INSTALLATION HARDWARE OPERATING OF OPERATION SEE RS-232 SETUP CONTROLLER SEE TESTING
CONTENTS
.. ____: _.._....._.__..
PAGE 73 11 _ 37 25 11 INFORMA 16 16 16 13.16 13 AUTOMATIC CUT-THROUGH SEE DETAILED SEE OPERATING CALLBACK ACCESS OPERATING DESCRIPTION SEQUENCES CALLBACK OPERATING OF TERMS
CONTENTS ACCESS _......... DESCRIPTION _.. _..........
PAGE 24 24 27 23 24 24 25.26 B-3 21
PORT SPECIFICATIONS INSTALLATION DESCRIPTION s,:,; :._.:_ SPECIFICATIONS AND ORDERING . REOUIREMENTS REQUIREMENTS
SEE OPERATIONAL USER ENTERED OPERATIONAL OPX SEE GLOSSARY ORDERING SEE TABLE OTHER OTHER 4-1 INFORMATION STEPS
ACCESS DESCRIPTIONS
SEE DETAILED
SEE UNPACKING, COMMON SEE GLOSSARY OPERATIONAL SEE DETAILED
INSTALLATION CARRIER (OCC) OF TERMS PROCEDURES OPERATING
AND
ORDERING
INFORMATION
21 B-4
SEE SHIPPING
DESCRIPTION
26
NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NON
CHANGES A DESCRIPTION CODES ,_ COMPATIBILITY
.c A-l 5 63.64 70 PERTINENT PARAMETERS DESCRIPTIONS 55 55 TRIGGER DIGIT 70 34 PROGRAMMING ..__ CODE/CALL .___ .___ ._. _. _.._ .., 35 6 B-l 46 CODE/CALL SEARCHING .;: 6 B-4 B-4 1,; - i I<:_,:_ SEARCHING . . 6 B-4 46 .._.__ NUMBER .: _ : ._ +i... ,. ..; 70 70 (OPX) .:. ;-. B-3 9 *,j_ . . PARAMETERS B-4 57 55 : 9 25 23 . . . . . . . . . _. __ .._. .___ ___. 23 10 -i,.; DESCdlPTlONS 42 OF TERMS SPECIFICATIONS ,;,. OF TERMS TIME PERTINENT . SPECIFICATIONS DESCRIPTION _- .. .___ ____ .___._. _.., 44
PABX SEE GLOSSARY PACKING MATERIAL 13 34 11 :. AND ORDERING INFORMATION IDENTIFIER SEE REPACKING PARAMETER SEE PROGRAMMING PARITV SEE RS-232 PART NUMBERS INFORMATION INSTALLATION DIGITS 4-l PORT SPECIFICATIONS OF TERMS B-4
SEE APPENDIX
SEE CONTROLLER OVERRIDE 7-9 PERIOD 7-16 SEE TABLE ENTRV <SEE TABLE
NON-CONTROLLER SEE DETAILED SEE TABLE NOT ON SEE TABLE NOTES NOTES NPA SEE AREA NUMBER NM fiEE NXX AREA ON 7-5 7-16 NETWORK DATA
PROGRAMMING
SEE ORDERING SEE TABLE PASSWORD PASSWORD PASSWORD PASSWORD SEE UNPACKING. ACTION 7-7 ENTRIES SEE TABLE
ENTRY OF PASSWORD
SEE PROGRAMMING ON ORDER SEE PROGRAMMING CODE/OFFICE OF TERMS FOR CDR PARAMETERS
MEMORYSPACE FORMAT 7-4 SEE FIGURE
. . . . . . . .._........_
__........
_..
76 59
.-SEE GLOSSARY OF NULLS SEE SYSTEM
SEARCHING r, I if,e_. :
PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . .._.. _..._. __.. __ __ EXAMPLES 62 62 . .._ __. 62 62 3 61 23 OPERATING OPERATING DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTIONS 27 26 23 OF TERMS SPECIFICATIONS MODE 5 5 16 AND ORDERING INFORMATION 16 20 (PBX) B-4 B-4 29 CALLBACK OPERATION 41 B-4 11 62 43.59
PASSWORD PASSWORD EXAMPLE EXAMPLE EXAMPLE PASSWORD PASSWORD PASSWORD PASSWORD
SEE DETAILED
PROGRAMMING
1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z................................, 3 . . . . . PROGRAMMING DESCRlmlON DESCRIPTIONS
CODE/OFFICE OF TERMS OF TERMS
SEE GLOSSARY NUMBERS SEE GLOSSARY
SEE PASSWORD SEE CONTROLLER TABLE 7-6 TVPE
PROTECTION
occ SEE AREA OCCAREACODE SEE SYSTEM SEETABLE SEE TABLE 0% TELEPHONE SEE TABLE OFF PREMISE OFF-HOOK OFFICE PARAMETERS 7-2 7-16 NUMBER 7-16 EXTENSION CODE/OFFICE OF TERMS COD~&ALL *SEE GLOSSARY
SEE TABLE
SEE SECURITY VERIFICATION SEE DETAILED PASSWORDS SEE DETAILED SEE SECURITY PBX SEE GLOSSARY POWER SEE ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL POWER POWER POWER POWER PRINTER PRIVATE PRIVATE PROGRAM PROGRAM USER DOWN OUTAGE POWER RECOMMENDATIONS REQUIREMENTS INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION BRANCH OF TERMS D(CHANGE OF TERMS CODES EXCHANGE RECEPTACLE REQUIREMENTS CONNECTION PORT AUTOMATIC BRANCH ACCESS CUT THROUGH POWER SEE SYSTEM SEE SYSTEM SEE POWER
OCC AUTHORIZATION
SEE GLOSSARY SEE HARDWARE CODE (NNX) SEE GLOSSARY Or?-HOOK
CURRENT
RECOGNITION 7-5 VOLTAGE
SEE NON-CONTROLLER SEE TABLE OPEN CIRCUIT
SEE UNPACKING, SEE RS-232
SEE HARDWARE OPERATING DETAILED SECURITY OPERATING OPERATIONAL OPERATIONAL
DESCRIPTION OPERATING . . RANGE SPECIFICATIONS PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS SEQUENCES . SEQUENCES . . . . .
.OPERATIONAL
SEE GLOSSARY SEE GLOSSARY
SEE HARDWARE SEE DETAILED
SEE INITIALIZATION VERIFICATION ENTERED
CONTENTS PROGRAMMING CONTROLLER DETAILED DTMF CUT FOR USER NOTES ON MEMORY THROUGH ENTERED ORDER CAPACITY DESCRIPTIONS NUMBER .._ OF PASSWORD FOR CALLBACK PROGRAMMING INSTALLATION ROUTING PARAMETERS OPERATION EXAMPLES OPERATION _...... PROGRAMMING ACCESS CALLBACK
PAGE SEE NON-CONTROLLER 75 42 42 39 33 35 34 7 37 69 66 35 34 SEE TABLE ROTARY ROTARY ROUTE 7-5
CONTENTS PERTINENT
.,: :r :: i.. :?j:.. ..,
PAGE .-. ::.%I :: II 51:. :.,I .: <i
PdiANiE1ERS. -_ ,,:-,.:
PROGRAMMING
RECEIVER SPECIFICATIONS SENDER SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS PROGRAMMING ., RELATED
: .J. . _ I.
SEE HARDWARE SEE HARDWARE SEE DETAILED
;&:..~~>:, .?q
;;!;,
..,.(,
!!! ,?. :::qt?: .:b;, .;-: :.;z
INTRODUCTION PROGRAMMING SEE VERSATILE TESTING PROGRAMMING SEE SEARCH PROGRAMMING PROCEDURAL PROGRAMMING 6R5 ACCESS ACCESS PROGRAMMING SEE DETAILED PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING SEE TRUNK PROGRAMMING PROGRAM PROGRESS
.. T4iF
>!,!i, i ;_..:z,-:
.?%@?W .j.:,,. ::G :,r :., ,I .j141%$! !1 I?? f
CONTROLLER
ROUTE TO MONITOR SEE SYSTEM PARAMETERS SEE TABLE ROUTING SEE LINES/MODELS RS-232 BAUD RATE PARAMETERS 7-3 SEE SYSTEM SEE TABLE RS-232 SEE RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 PORT RECORDINGIRS-232 CONFIGURATION SPECIFICATIONS 3-2 .._........ 7-16 ENTRY PERIOD ENTRY SEE CALL PORT PORT 7-3
DESCRlmlONS : .:::,y .:or ::..:!b,.:-<;. ,+?,T,:,
f:;. -_ ::+,
: y.::.. :,.. _I_ _. .:y: .349 :.. :.:< I,. _: :?&W

.?l!,, i;!, .: : ..: ..; : ?? ;! 9 . 46 -
SEE PROGRAMMING TABLE STEPS ROUTING ROUTE
PROGRAMMING
FOR CALLBACK
::.r!:
1:; 1;,,
.;.
__:_. :. :. :.i. ,
SEE PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS
.:47 20
CONNECTOR PORT CONFIGURATION PORT
67 SEQUENCES 67 69 DESCRIPTIONS 67 31 50 r50t 41 39 DESCRIPTIONS 25 23 23 51.52 PARAMETERS 54 r57t mit
CONTROL
EXAMPLES PROGRAMMING TIMEOUT PROCEDURE PARAMETERS ENTERED CALLBACK TRUNKS RELATED USER
.@i .:I.
: 6
SEE CONNECTIONS .,;.:, SEE SPECIFICATIONS SEE TABLE SEETABLE7-16 SEE TABLE . .___.._.__.. !; 1 i- .,,wisq :. ::?_;;:::
SEE INITIALIZATION
.;?: :j ..?*. :>: .%..20 . ,,:y I,,

<zlij;,c I-1:
-.i~!%.~~~!?%+?
:????l
!c!
.? :.,::.!!: .-:r:l .?i ,j y,.:: :o,liP _.._._ :..::L::-.?$ I .,,:,lit, ;.I-.n :2.? :C, c. ..:??:. i-r-,.-. :;;:: .. : : T :.! - . _Ie ?.. : :..-. .) :: _. :::_ */ ::. : : 70 : :i -:1; ?j 7b z-1. 7611 76.
VERIFICATION TONES OPERATING
SEE PROGRAMMING SEE DETAILED SEE SECURITY SEE TABLE SEE TRUNK 7-4 RELATED
r56t SEE NON
SEE OPERATIONAL
SEQUENCES
SEE LENGTH r5Ett SEE CALL
OF NON
FAILURE
ACTION
:~..:,!::
i%!:-:.
RAM SEE CONTROLLER SEE GLOSSARY RE-INITIALIZATION SEE INITIALIZATION RE-ORDER TONE PARAMETERS 7-3 .._ _. __ .___ .._ _.. __ 48 47 2 29 INSTALLATION TIP TO GND SPECIFICATIONS AND RECEIVING AND ORDERING INFORMATION 13 SEE SYSTEM SEE TABLE READER REASONS RECEIVING SEE UNPACKING. RECOGNITION REPACKING SEE SHIPPING REPAIRED UNIT PRIOR TO INITIALIZATION 29 B-4 9 A-l SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS JACK AND CABLE . . ___.._. ___...__ 20 B-4 B-4 50 PARAMETERS 52 PAUSE . . . . . . . 9 9 TIME, SEE HARDWARE 29 MEMORY OF TERMS CAPACITY 75 : B-4 SEARCH SEARCH SEARCH SEARCH TABLE TABLE TABLE TABLE DIGIT TABLE DEFAULTS TABLE 7-10 ENTRIES _. :.: f.-.:?.c. __: .:c PROGRAMMING DEFINITIONS EXAMPLES DEFAULTS PROGRAMMING DESCRIPTIONS .:-: ?? ..::-.-. DESCRlFnON DESCRIPTION ROUTE PERTINENT :;? :? ic! .z:!:: .. ,, . .:n... ? _I _. ; ,, .: ;
!
.!-T
,.z.+_
.. ,.
-_ . , _ >
SEE SEARCH SEE TABLE MEMORY ACTION SEARCH SEARCH
PROGRAMMING
DESCRIPTIONS
_.
:d6 Zq,.,?_i)bi .I. j-65 i _I 1 :?f6 I:.. : :!: :64il : 66 86 64 L-b 43 5 : _? 1:; :. :: ?I ;: ,_:fl;:,
SPACE
COMMENTS FOR INlTlALlZATlON
SEE INTRODUCTION SEE INITIALIZATION
PROGRAMMING SEE DETAILED TABLES SEE DETAILED SECURITY SEE CONTROLLER SEE OPERATING SELECT DEFAULT 7-5
PROGRAMMlNG%&CR@TlOtiS~.
SEE LINES/MODELS
.? .1.!. ;.i:i.~.
?.a3 i3
-:,.j
; :. ? I.. i 3) ;t !,,!: -i:i~.(Tu; PARAMETERS. : ! _4 !:!..
SEE INITIALIZATION REQUIREMENTS RESERVE RETURN RINGER RINGER RINGING RJalWCA3lA ROM SEE GLOSSARY ROTARY ROTARY DIAL OF TERMS RATE RELATED DIALING 7-4 SEE GLOSSARY SEE TABLE SEE TRUNK ROTARY OF TERMS POWER OF TERMS SPECIFICATIONS NUMBER A LOSS EQUIVALENCE IMPEDANCE SENSITIVITY USOC SEE INITIALIZATION SEE GLOSSARY SEE HARDWARE SEE APPENDIX SEE HARDWARE SEE HARDWARE SEE CONNECTIONS
SEE NON-CONTROLLER SEE TABLE SENSING SEQUENTIAL SHIPPING SEE UNPACKING, SHIPPING AND REPACKING UNPACKING SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT SEE HARDWARE SIMPLIFIED SINGLE SMART-l UNIT SEE FIGURE SEE SHIPPING FORMAT DETAIL C C-2 EXAMPLES SEE CALL SMarT-1 C-2 PACKAGE AND RESISTANCE
886
.??,~.? ?!??? !13? 56:. ,< : .I $ ./ 7 -:?y.> SPECIFICATIONS .:- .!:. .?%?.?? : <+ I. , ,:.. .?.?r: _; .i ;h: :!~. -9.-y ;;,-..- I ; ?. :.-; .?:;%4 _I ,_ ,,.. .;:1; ?lZi ,, . : :??13.: I:. i3 I.. -1 I. .I? .,i :Ejc: ~,. ..z.;
SEE HARDWARE ACCESS SEE GLOSSARY
OF TERMS . INSTALLATION AND 2;:
RECEIVING
ORDERING INFORMJi7~0iQ!(??. _. ; i ,l, .
.?~!T :
1;!+ . I
: ?:t. :: :.
?. . :. : :?1. SPECIFICATIONS DIAGRAM ,.. RECEIVING :_ :
ELECTRICAL
!. :? .?!?+!%~ ,.:) n-1 ;.s,!=j(, .l: .- :!a:,: .i: 113 : 7 ,i(l-:: :l.!?? .:?!!- :st.?l
RECORD
FORMAT DIAGRAM
.::-!:;!-. ;;! .i . .<.
SIMPLIFIED
ELECTRICAL
. I.? ?:i*: ,<,I
y.?. .-+. il h {T!.j -u?.,. ....: +!?;: Iti:?ti3
SEE APPENDIX SEE FIGURE
INTER-DIGIT
::. ?:-:.. ..-i .J !:iJ. .?
:->;,.
SMa!T-1 SVSTEM C-l BLOCK C SEE APPENDIX SEE FIGURE SO@VARE SEE GLOSSARY SPEWAL SEE DETAILED SPECIFICATIONS El,ECTRICAL/MECHANICAL HeRDWARE RS-232 SPEEp CALL PORT PROGRAMMING CALLBACK OF TERMS SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS DIAGRAM
,>;:
PAGE SEE TRUNK C-l 4 TIP IIt RING SEE GLOSSARY TIP GROUND B-4 42 11 SEE TABLE OF TERMS TIMER RELATED
CONTENTS PARAMETERS
PAGE 54 B-5
.j.._j OF TERMS PROGRAMMING : DESCRIPTIONS
APPLICATION 7-5 REMOVAL 7-5 TIMER
SEE NON-CONTROLLER TIP GROUND SEE TABLE TIP GROUND SEE TABLE
PERTINENT TIMER PERTINENT
PARAMETERS.
58 56
PAFIAMETERS
SEE NON-CONTROLLER SPEClFlCATlOl$3 . .-. 9 : 11 PROGRAMMING 63 B-4 . OF TERMS PROGRAWlMlNG OF TERMS DESCRIFIIONS 77 B-5 43 B-5 76 29
PARAMETERS.
56 57
SEE NON-CONTROLLER 7-5 TOLL OFFICE
PERTINENT .._........
PARAMETERS __ ..__ .._.... __...
57 56 E-5 A-2 B-5
SEE AUTOMATIC SPEED CALLING SEE GLOSSARY SPEED CALLS MEMORY SPACE SPEED DIALING SEE GLOSSARY SPEEDCALLS SEE DETAILED STATIC SEE GLOSSARY STR!JdG SUITABLE SWifCHING ENTRIES SPACE TERMINAL SYSTEM MEMORY
SEE GLOSSARY TROUBLE TRUNK SEE GLOSSARY TRUNK RELATED SEE DETAILED SEE DETAILED SEE TABLE 7-4 SEE TRUNK TRUNK SEE SYSTEM SEE TABLE TYPE OF CENTRAL 7-4 SEE APPENDIX
OF TERMS A OF TERMS PARAMETERS PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING DESCRlmlONS DESCRIPTIONS
CORRECTIONS
42 49 50 52 46 47
;_.7z,. _
RELATED
PARAMETERS
TO MONITOR 7-3
FOR CDR
PARAMETERS OFFICE
SEE lNlTlALlZATlON
&E
SVSTEM SYSTEM SVSTEM
5 .-:>
OF TERMS .: .:; -t : .( ** -.I. 4 AND TROUBLESHOOTING DESCRIPTIONS 63 42.43 43 DESCRIPTION AN0 TROUBLESHOOTING PARAMETERS 47.48 5 63 8-5
SEE TABLE SEE TRUNK TVPE TYPES TVPES OF UNIT
50 PARAMETERS 52 A-l 5 5
GLOSSARY BLOCK C-l
RELATED A
DIAGRAM
SEE FIGURE
SEE APPENOIX SEE NETWORK OF DIALING SEE NETWORK
MAINTENANCE PARAMETERS PROGRAMMING 7-2
OF CO LINES COMPATIBILITY COMPATIBILITY
SEE MAINTENANCE SEE DETAILED SEE TABLE SVSTEM SVSTEM SYSTEM POWER
SEE CONTROLLER SEE MAINTENANCE WIDE SEE TABLE 7-3
UNAUTHORIZED UNIT STORAGE
ACCESS DESCRIPTION 5 29 RECEIVING ..____._....___....._ AND _............ REQUIREMENTS __ .__ .._ ___ _. INFORMATION AND RECEIVING ACCESS DESCRlmlONS PROGRAMMING 42 26 24 OPERATING CALLBACK DISPLAY ORDERING INFORMATION _....... 16 13 16 21 16 13 13 13
TROUBLESHOOTING OPERATION
SEE CONTROLLER SEE INlTlALlZATlON UNPACKING SEE SHIPPING UNPACKING AND
PROCEDURE INSTALLATION
TECHNICAL TEMPERATURE
CIRCUIT
DESCRIPTION . . . . . .._ __., . QpEfJAT!O? . .._. 61 10 35 20 CALLBACK .I: . SECURITV . CONVENTIONS DATA ENTRY .tlJ;_; COtrE 46 , 9 35 . . . . . INSTALLATION . . 36 37 37 37 37 E-5 eLii,. r : PROGRAM CODE .7T.,T;,Tj:; ,. 44 2 35 PROGRAMMING 42
SEE UNPACKING UNPACKING, CONNECTIONS
INTRODUCTION SEE HARDWARE TERMINAL TERMINAL TEF+llNAL TERtvllNAL TERhUAL kkE ACCESS SEE PROGRAMMING CONNECTION PORT 7-3 7-2 SEE Rs-232 SEE FIGURE SFE TABLE
SPECIFICATIONS CODE FOR CALLBACF CONFIGURATION USER ENTERED
INSTALLATION MOUNTING ORDERING POWER SHIPPING USER
REQUIREMENTS CALLBACK
DISPLAV PROGRAM PROMPT DOCUMENT ON SECURll-V
ENTERED
SEE DETAILED USER ENTERED
SEE OPERATIONAL TERMINAL
SEQUENCES
SEE NOTES TER?+lNAL TERMINATION SEE SYSTEM
VERSATILE
PROGRAMMING 6 6 7 OESCRlmlON OF TERMS 6 6-5
PARAMETERS SPECIFICATIONS ENTRY. INSTALLATION
DESCRlmlON INITIALIZATION PROGRAMMING SEE GENERAL VOICE FREQUENCY
SEE HARDWARE TERMINATOR SEE NOTES TESTING ~TUAL MODEM THEORY THEGRV
ON DATA
CONTROLLER TESTING SETUP OF TEST
SEE GLOSSARY
SEE PROGRAMMING OF TEST CONTROLLER OF TERMS
WAIT
FOR PASSWORD 7-4
TIMER 51 PARAMETERS 53 16
SEE TABLE SEE TRUNK WALL WATS MOUNTING
RELATED
SEE TESTING TIE TRUNK SEE GLOSSARY TIME-OF-DAY SEE TABLE
BRACKET
SEE MOUNTING CODES 7-6 CALLBACK 52 SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS SPECIFICATIONS (WATS)
B-5 11
. .
61
WEIGHT SEE ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL WIDE AREA TELEPHONE SERVICE
TIMER BEFORE PROCESSING SEE TABLE 7-4 .
CONTENTS SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS
PAGE 6-5
CONTdlTS
PAGE
mot
SEE TABLE SEE TYPE xo1t SEE ROTARY SEE TABLE rLl2t SEE DTMF SEE TABLE x03t SEE ON-HOOK SEE TABLE xQ4t SEE FLASH SEE TABLE x05t SEE LINE SEE TABLE xolt SEE GROUND SEE TABLE x07t SEE TABLE x14t SEE ROTARY SEE TABLE xzot SEE INCOMING SEE TABLE x21t SEE INTER-RING SEE TABLE x24t SEE SELECT SEE TABLE x27t SEE CALL ANSWER SEE TABLE x28t SEE TABLE SEE WAIT x29t SEE LOCKOUT SEE TABLE x31t SEE TABLE x33t SEE HIT TIMING SEE TABLE x34t SEE PROGRESS SEE TABLE x35t SEE TABLE SEE TABLE x36t SEE TABLE SEE TIMER 7-4 BEFORE PROCESSING CALLBACK 999 SEE EXIT 001t SEE RE-ORDER TONE 46 SEE TABLE PROGRAM 7-2 MODE 7-4 7-4 51 52 960 SEE ENTER SEE TABLE DATE 7-2 AND TIME . SEE PROCEDURAL STEPS 7-5 REMOVAL TIMER SEE TIP GROUND TONES 7-5 7-5 APPLICATION TIMER 907 SEE EXlT SEETABLE 942903 SEE LOAD SEE TABLE 942904 SEE DELETE SEE TABLE ALL SEARCH 7-2 . TABLE ENTRi$$. FACTORY 7-2 DEFAULT DATA 7-2 coNFIRMA~o~~~&~i-.(: SEE TIP GROUND 7-4 902 SEE ENTER SEE TABLE DATA 7-2 CONFIRtiATi@J i,lOiiE .,:,. *,i_ .:i. _ :i.. 1 . .~ii\: : >,. .: :- :.I .45 f !. 44 3 ;3 1 TIMER 7-4 FOR PASSWORD TIMER 625 SEE PROCEDURAL STEPS ,/I; I ,jp: I -:,,w ._36 jT _ 7-4 TIMER 7345 SEE PROCEDURAL STEPS DEFAULT 7-5 ROUTE 7-5 6r4 SEETABLE 7-16 _. _. :. ._I ,I?. ,*%. ,.,. I! _, .,.. i i I.:. 1 i: .:.. , :r.*,: .. .:d..:% .3 5;: , i& .36 TIMER 6r2 SEE TABLE 7-16 7-5 RINGING SENSITIVITY 6rl SEE TABLE 7-16 _ INTER-DIGIT 7-5 6R5 PAUSE 7-5 TIMER 664 SEE TABLE 6R5 ACCESS 7-2 PROGRAM SECURITY CODE ROUTE ROUTING PARAMETERS . .. ...:=.! : $ :.:! i :: .,, .::i.::: _ij .:. i 67 67.88 70 70 :; CODES 7-12 ?J .1. !dii ,p* - , SEE TERMINAL :,:/;i,.~. .._. SEE TIP GROUND 7-5 START TRIES NUMBER DROP/RESEIZURE 7-4 602 SEE MACHINE SEE TABLE 7-2 IDENTIFIER STEPS . FOR CDR . ?i;:. SEE PROCEDURAL !;.?:?li TIME ALLOWED 7-5 601 SEE AREA SEE TABLE CODE 7-2 OF OCC ., : . r?:: i : : ?. :I: :.?TIME ,.!ix <_ : 7-5 RECOGNITION TIME DIALING 7-4 RATE
-11.
7-4 OF CENTRAL DIALING 7-4 OFFICE. RATE
SEE CDR PRINT SEE TABLE 01ot SEE ROUTE SEE TABLE 7-3
FORMAT
TO MONITOR 7-3
.. i; :. :.
: i?. ~ ,:._:
.( .,i
49 .::
.. :$;. 46 i
:. _,, .. 46 : ._ 44 -.Iw7 a;; .+ik+ri. >,: !
.:: 1::?:.-:
:i?$s~;.::;;;~d,i 1 I: i -: ::,;:.;;.,; , :I_ 44
:I,~.,i.!l~~
SEE PROGRAMMING PARAMETER SEE TABLE
,,; .q:;:i
., ,.ifil,
.: i L ?,d i *-)I,
_?,,.,,,.;;.~-;,?i:. . *
;yd.b,.,yy .?il?cl _. _. f:ii!
_?_ _, .. :!&y45. _. :. i?i-! ..i4 i AIA!:-j()R :hlfi:r :-..i f! $6
DATABASE :.T. ._ ;;;:!&: _
?: :i?! -f?%ti ;,,r,:> :,.; -ri !C ; ,yJ -7, : ;x,-, ; m 2 ,;,; 3.. ..,_ r; .,..,: : : 1 .45 :_ .9 : _~__I .:fti I ?? i _: _. :. :. &
I :-. :.< . ;?5? :;,., . .,...i... :. I.: . .;,, : _:., .: ..
::::: : . 36 :,!;!. ez7 .I: : .,;: ::: Fj :ii! :.,: :$ f. 5
::..+iF: :?.
. .
.A . . .,.
.;
.^.
NOTES
MITEL DULLES
DATACOM
INC. AIRPORT 20641
P.O. BOX 17266 INTERNATIONAL D.C.. WASHINGTON, TELEPHONE: U.S.A.,
VOS)-661-6600
MITEL
ENGINEERING
PRACTICE
SECTION MITL8350-I Ol-lOO-NA Issue 1, September 1985
SUPPLEMENT TO GENERAL INFORMATION ; MANUAL
EXPANDED MEMORY COMMON
UNIT
CARRIER ACCESS DIALER
AND CALL CONTROLLER GENERAL INFORMATION
MITE
0 - Copyright of MITEL DATACOM INC. 1985 - Trademark of MITEL DATACOM INC @ _- i:gistered Trademark of MITEL CORPORbTlON
SECTIQN MITL835Q-lOl-lOO-NA
--- THlS PAGE INTENT16)NALLYLEFT BLANK ---
SECTION
MITe8350-l Ol-lOO-NA
NOTICE
TO U.S. CUSTOMERS
WARNING
The SMarT-lTM Common Carrier Access and Call Controller generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions manual, may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case the user, at his own expense, will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.
Bage i
SECTiON
MITL8350-lOl-l OO-NA
---
THIS PAGE INTENTIQNALLY
LEFT BLANK ---
Page ii
SECTION
MITL8350-l Ol-lOO-NA
NOTICE :. :
TO CANADIAN
CUSTOMERS
WARNING
The Canadian Department of Communications label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety requirements The Department does not guarantee that the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction. Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissable to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some cases, the company s inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure, for their own protection, that the electrical ground connections to the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
CAUTION Users should not attempt to make such connections appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, themselves, as required. but should contact the
The Load Number (LN) assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load, to be connected to a telephone loop, that is used by the device to prevent overloading. The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load Numbers of all of the devices doesn not exceed 100. An alphabetic suffix is also specified in the Load Number and designates the appropriate ringing type (A or B), if applicable. For example, LN = 20 A designates a Load Number of 20 and an A type ringer.
Page iii
SECTION
---
LEFT BLANK ---
Page iv
SECTlON
MITL8350-l Ol-l OO-NA
IMPORTANT
NOTES
Please note that MITEL DATACOM INC. has set up a National Field Service number for technical and installation assistance located in Dallas, Texas. This number is [214] 386-9400 for U.S. customers only (outside of normal working hours, a telephone answering service has been established for your convenience at this same number). For Canadian customers, please contact your local MITEL Regional Office. The SMarT-lrM Dialer includes an on-board battery back-up system to loss of customer database. Besides protecting against loss of data during power outages, this battery back-up should also provide sufficient memory allow the Dialer to be programmed by the distributor and then transported tomer s site for installation. This battery back-up, however, is not intended for periods and cannot be guaranteed to support memory for long periods of time. prevent the momentary retention to to the cuslong storage
As received from the factory, the Dialer battery is not guaranteed to have a full charge applied to it. In fact, the battery is likely to be only partially charged in view of the time in transit, and distributor storage time. No guarantee of any battery charge status can be made until the Dialer has been powered up for a period of time. A period of 24 hours is necessary to achieve a full charge on the battery. Upon removal from its shipping carton, the Dialer should be powered up for a period of time and then * INITIALIZED to load the operating system and default database into memory. Initialization may only be performed with a DTMF telephone set and requires connection to a working telephone line or an acceptable substitute. Never rely on programming entered into a Dialer until it has been X INITIALIZED (see Page 4, para. 4.03). Note that there is a short tone burst heard in the earpiece of the phone upon initialization. This tone indicates a successful initialize sequence has occurred. Once initialized, the Dialer should seldom Load Default Data Command that will restore INITIALIZE has been performed. Once initialized, RS-232 Input. ever have to be initialized again. There is a memory to the initialized state once a * the Dialer will also respond to input via the
REASONS
FOR ADDITIONAL from storage
* INITIALIZE or shipping carton.
OPERATIONS
Dialer has just been removed No toneburst upon release
of the * Key. Maybe the tone was missed have been deleted accidentally
- check carefully. codes have been
or the access
Long storage
Page w
SECTION
---
THIS PAGE INTENTlONAbbY
LEFT BLANK ---
Page vi
SECTION
MlTL8356-l Ol-l OO-NA
COMMON
CARRIER ACCESS DIALER AND CALL CONTROLLER
GENERAL
INFORMATION
CONTENTS 1. INTRODUCTION ..................................... GENERAL .......................................... OVERVIEW OF THIS MANUAL .......................... INTENDED AUDIENCE ................................ .......................................... HISTORY 2. GENERAL DESCRIPTION PAGE l 1 1 1 2
. u. . n s . . . . . 0 . . . . . . a, . , . . . . . . . . . 2 0 s.................. .. . . . 3 3 3 4 5 7 7 7 8 9 11 11 11 12 1% 13 13 13 13 15 17 17 19 19 me..o....m o...... 4 mms. 0 0 m. mm. . . . s. . 1 r D 0 s m.m.D.D..m... 9
3. INSTALLATION
. . . . . s s.....e
4.OPERATlON ........................................ GENERAL .......................................... INITIALIZING THE DIALER ............................. ENTERING SPEED CALLS .............................. SPECIFIC DEFAULTS ................................. 903 Default Command - Standard O.C.C. Dialer .......... 909 Default Command - Speed Dialer Mode ............ Specific 909 Command Defaults ...................... DEFAULT COMPARISON .............................. 5. PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES AND USE ................... 909 SOPHISTICATED SPEED DIALER PROGRAMMING ...... #O%SYSTEM PROGRAM ACCESS ....................... USER PROGRAMMING OF SPEED CALLS ................. 903 STANDARD O.C.C. DIALER PROGRAMMING .......... DIALING SPEED CALLS .............................. 6. SPEED CALL VERSUS SCREENING CAPABILITIES Ground Rules ................................... Methods ....................................... Calculation Examples ............................. 7. SPECIFICATIONS ..... ; ............................. ....................................... HARDWARE RS-232 PORT ..................................... ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL ........................... APPENDIX A . . . . . . ..a FCC INTERCONNECTION General ...s.....m *........a....REQUIREMENTS -.....-.s...D ...........
Page vii
1: SMarT-lTM EXPANDED MEMORY WNIT 4 : : : : : : : : : : : 3 2:: TYPICAL 800 RESALE SERVICE INSTALL/&Ch WORKSHEET 3: CALCULATION o o . 9 s 0 . . o o e a . o . 0 o n e o mn o 0 16 TABLES 1. 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: PAGE
SPEED CALL ENTRIES 0 0 . m. . . . . s . . . m. . . mm. . e 0 . o . . o . 56 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS AND COMMANDS . . . . ~. . . . ~. . . . . . 7 SPECIFIC 909 DEFAULTS . . . . . . 0 . . . . . . . _ . . . . . , . , . , D. . 9 COMPARISON OF 903 VERSUS 909 DEFAULTS . o m. . . . . 10,ll SPEED CALLS (With no Search Tables present) . . . . o _ . . . 14 SEARCH TABLE SCREENS (with no Speed Calls present) . s 15 SMarT-lTM SPECIFICATIONS . n D. n o o e s . a a D. _ . D o D. . . 17,48 RS-23% PORT SPECIFICATIONS 0 s o . 0 a Qo e o o s . o 0 . o . 0 . . . 19 ELECTRlCALh lECliANlCAL SPECIFICATIONS 0 . . . _ . . o 9 s s . 19
Page viii
SECTION
MITL8350-1
01-l OO-NA
FIGURE
1: SMarT- lTM
EXPANDED
MEMORY
UNIT
1. INTRODUCTION GENERAL This document contains all information that relates to the SMarT-lTM Expanded Memory Unit Common Carrier Access Dialer and Call Controller. This particular section (Section 1) is an overview of the contents of the document and outlines the intended audience. 1.02 Dialer . OVERVIEW 1.03 OF THIS MANUAL From this point forward, the SMarT-lTM Common Dialer and Call Controller will be referred to Carrier Access in text as the 1.01
The manual consists of seven sections and two appendices. Sections one through four provide both general and detailed descriptions of the Dialer features and functions while section five provides detailed program data entry information. Sections six and seven provide engineering information and the appendices provide additional information that may be of general use to the reader. INTENDED 1.04 AUDIENCE
This document is intended for use as a general reference document for the installer and user of the SMarT-lTM and SMarTlATM Expanded Memory Unit Common Carrier Access and Call Controller.
Page
SECTiON MIITL8350-1 Ol-lOO-NA

HISTORY This is the first issue of the SMarT-lTM Expanded Memory Unit Common Carrier Access Dialer and Call Controller General Information Manual. The reason for issue was to supplement the General Information Manual with the Expanded Memory Unit and includes requirements of the present software level (Generics 19 and 29, Rev. 07 and later) of the Dialer. 2. GENERAL DESCRIPTION The SMarT-lTM Expanded Memory Unit Common Carrier Access Dialer and Call Controller is a self-contained electronics unit that provides all functions of the standard SMarT-lTM Dialer plus four times the amount of memory. The standard 2K of RAM Memory has been expanded to 8K. It also has the capability to assume the function of a sophisticated speed dialer for applications such as 800 Service Resale, special DISA, or l-800 service. 2.01
2.02
1.05
The SMarT-lTM lowing features
Expanded Memory and functions:
Unit
Dialer
provides
the fol-
FCC Parts 15 and 88 compliance Four Line 8350-654) Two Line 8350-652) SMDR Output Versatile Automatic programming Route Selection (ARS) on length of Speed Call capability capability for for the the SMarT-I SMarT-lATM unit unit (MITEL (MITEL P/N P/N
Up to 1,000 Speed 0
l
Calls, depending
Installer-programmable Customer-programmable
Tone to Pulse conversion Pulse to Tone Each code

a
conversion Dial entry may contain Call and its its own related unique account code
Speed
SMDR indication number In addition, 0 a a 0
of Speed
account features:
the unit has the following
convenience
Useable with CENTREX Lines Useable behind a PBX/PABX Hot Line operation Multi-Tenant service. Speed Dialer mode, the to assume that of the
2.03
Instead of operating in the dedicated operational mode can be programmed
Page 2
SECTION
SUBSCRIBER TIP & RING
C.O. TIP & RING
FIGURE
2. TYPICAL standard 2.04
800 RESALE SERVICE
INSTALLATION capability. mode, the unit
O.C.C. Dialer, but with four times the memory Speed Dialer
If the unit is used in the dedicated dial-out is defaulted as follows: Dial digit 1 (Parameter Pause. Dial seven digit Destination Detect dialtone. digit Account Number.
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 3. INSTALLATION 3.01
6r4 - may be changed
if needed)
Dial seven
Code, if programmed.
Refer to the General Information 100-NA) for unpacking, mounting
Manual (MITEL P/N 8350-047and connection details.
4. OPERATION GENERAL 4.01 The following descriptions outline typical operating modes for the SMarT-lTM Dialer with Expanded Memory. These operating modes are unique to this unit. Except as noted below, the General Information Manual applies in its entirety. The Expanded Memory Unit may be programmed for either of two modes of operation. These are; a) an 800 Service Resale Dialer with an account code associated with each speed dial, or b) as a
4.02
Page 3
SECflON
MITE8350-I
91-1 00-NA
standard O.C.C. Dialer with enhanced search table quantity capabilities and capable of up to 1,000 speed calls (still with an account code associated with each speed dial, if desired). INlTlAblZlNG 4.03 THE DlAbER .. ,, : :
The Dialer is initialized in the same manner as the standard SMarT-lTM Dialer with the exception of the default command to be given upon initialization completion. The procedure for initialization listed below is repeated from the General information Manual to reduce cross referencing and to include the default command upon completion of initialization.
1) 2) 3)
4
5)
Connect
an earth
ground
to the Dialer. set to the or network subscriber to the side
Connect a DTMF telephone or butt Tip & Ring leads of the Dialer. Connect a standard of the Dialer. With the power telephone line
CO. side
to the Dialer
disconnected,
go off-hook
While holding down the * key on the DTMF set, connect the power to the Dialer. A DTMF tone should be audible in the handset receiver. Continue to hold the * key for ing power to the Dialer. 10 seconds or more after apply-
61 7)
Release the ++ key. The unit should respond immediately with a short tone from the handset receiver. If the tone is not heard, return to step 1 above and start over. The tone burst indicates that the Dialer is initialized and defaulted to its standard configuration. It also indicates that it is in the programming mode and awaiting a command. If the Dialer is to be used as an 800 Service Resale Dialer, the user need not be concerned with further programming other than referenced for this use below. If the Dialer is to be used as a standard O.C.C. Dialer, then programming may be accomplished by the use of any of the methods listed in the General Information Manual, Section 5. Once the above has two options listed procedure available. These has been completed, are: the user
Note:
4.04
1)
GO ON-HOOK: The Dialer is defaulted as a standard O.C.C. Dialer as noted in the General Information Manual. The only difference is that it is capable of up to 1,000 Speed Calls (with account codes). All of the programming information in the General Information Manual applies to the Dialer in this configuration This configuration will also be assumed if a 903 command is issued in the Program Mode. DIAL 909 ON THE DTMF S&T: This action defaults the Speed Dialer Mode (800 Service Resale Dialer the Dialer to with account
2)
Page 4
SECTION MITL8350-l Ol -lOO-NA
code
associated
with each Speed Call).
ENTERING SPEED CALLS 4.05

dure 1)
Once the
listed below:
Dialer
has been
Calls
above,
Speed
initialized by may be entered
using the procedure by using the proce-
Dial in Speed Snnn dk
Calls mm..
in the format: , mm * (if used), mm . . . mm ##
Table 1 below lists digits required for Speed Call entries. nnn is the number of the entry, while d is the key that is used to determine which trunk or trunks have access to the particular speed call number. k is a Network override and is used to select the allowed routing for the particular speed call number. mmmmmmm is the phone number to be dialed. If a * is used in the Speed Call entry, an account code must be entered following the %. The Speed Call entry is terminated by using ## .
TABLE 4: SPEED CALL ENTRIES

FIRST DIGIT DIAL 7nnndkmm...mm## or rnnndkmm..mm~mm..mm## Speed call entry where: number of the speed call entry. to access the = 7 SPEED CALL DEFINITION
nnn is the
d is the key that selects call number as follows: DIGIT 0 1 ALLOWED
the trunks TRUNKS
2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 * # C D E (Continued on next
ALL TRUNK 1 TRUNK 2 TRUNKS 1,2 TRUNK 3 TRUNKS 1,3 TRUNKS 2,3 TRUNKS 1,2,3 TRUNK 4 TRUNKS 1,4 TRUNKS 2,4 TRUNKS 1,2,4 TRUNKS 3,4 TRUNKS 1,3,4 TRUNKS 2,3,4 page)
Page 5
SECTION
MlTL8350-101-l
OO-NA
t: TABLE 1 Con FIRST DlGlT DIAL
SPEED CALL ENTRIES = 7 SPEED CALL DEFINITION
NGTE: The C, D, and E entries a terminal. k is the network 0 - 3 4 - 7 8 9 override:
above
may be made
from
Force on Route #0 - #3 Force on Route #Qa - 3a Use search table Dial immediate, no Route Xs (transparent). if a * is entered, to be an ac-
mmmmmmm is the phone number. the digits after the ++ are considered count code. ## NBTE: Speed 7nnn## Delete is the end of Speed Call entry.
See Search Table Call Programming. dial entry nnn.
Action
#C for limited
access
to
speed
After entering all Speed Calls, exit the programming mode by going On-Hook; or by dialing 999 on the DTMF Handset or, if using a terminal, typing an X . If it is necessary to re-enter the program mode, the default access codes are the same as those of a standard Dialer. They are: a) #OS from the DTMF Handset, or b) ### from a user Speed Call entry viewpoint, or c) Carriage Return (<CR>) from a terminal. Data confirmation may be accomplished from the programming mode with the use of a terminal. The 902 command will enter the data confirmation mode and allow the reading back of Speed Call entries (or any other parameter). The 907 command is used to exit the data confirmation mode. Table 2 below lists System Parameters that are present and contains a description of the programming entries required to invoke special functions. Commands 903, 904, 906, and 908 will affect calls in progress.
Page 6
SECPIBM
MlTL8350-l Ol -lOO-NA
TABLE 2: SPECIAL
FUNCTIONS
AND = 9
COMMANDS
FIRST DIGIT
described above, the Dialer will display the data if programming method 1 is employed, or if using methods 2 or 3, the Dialer will wait for 0.5 seconds, then send the data out on the C.0 side in DTMF format. See General Information Manof programming met,hods 1, ual, Section 5 for a description 903 904 906 907 908 909 980mmddhhmm Load O.C.C. default data - delete Clear all search tables (including Enter clone master mode. Return to normal programming all non-default data. defaults, primary and al-
mode from
data confirmation
Enter tandem operation mode (ASCII - DTMF conversion). Default the Dialer to 800 Service Resale mode of operation with an account code associated with each Speed Call. the internal clock where mm = month, dd = day, hh =
SPECIFIC 4.06
DEFAULTS
The paragraphs that follow list specific defaults and values for the Expanded Memory Dialer. Any parameters that are not listed appear in the General Information Manual. They are also the same defaults as for the standard SMarT-1 TM Dialer and are identical for either modes of operation of the Expanded Memory Dialer. For more information on these defaults, refer to the General Information Manual, Section 5. Command - Standard O.C.C. Dialer
903 Default 4.07
All defaults are unchanged from the standard SMarT-lTM unit defaults. Refer to the General Information Manual, Section 5, for a complete listing. Also refer to Table 4 of this manual for Speed Call and Account Code enhancements that are provided in the Expanded Memory unit under the 903 default. 909 Default 4.08 1) Command - Speed Dialer Mode defaults are present:
In the Speed
Dialer
Mode, the following
It is not necessary to enter the 523 8 parameter that commands the Dialer to wait for dialed digits and use the search tables. This parameter is already activated for all trunks. The intended and recommended Route for Speed Calls is Route
2)
Page 7
SECTION
MiTL8350-l Ol-l OO-NA
3 . This Route is the least likely to be used route for C.C.C. activity (should it be desired) and allows Route 0 to remain as the default route. If this parameter is used in this manner and it is decided to add call routing capabilities at a later date along with the Speed Call function, it may be programmed as with the standard Dialer without disturbing Speed Call programming. 3) The system default Program Access Code is #Cl*. The Subscriber (User) Speed Call Program Access Code is ###. All trunks have access to all subscriber entered Speed Cal,ls. These subscriber entered Speed Calls are forced to dial out on Route 3. Speed Call triggers are any combination of three digits ranging from 000 to 999 (1,000 possible combinations). As defaulted, no * or similar prefix need be dialed to trigger a Speed Call. All digits entered (or dialed) are considered as a part of the Speed Call trigger (location) up to a maximum of three digits. There are no Q.C.C. Search Tables present. The only Search Tables present are those for DTMF Program Access and the Speed Call action The Call Recording output along with the destination code, if entered. The Speed cess is: Call programming will indicate SC. for Speed Call, number dialed, and the account format from the system #OS ac-
4)
51
6)
7)
_ mm## 7nnn dk mm.. (If ## is not entered. interdigit time-out will complete the entry) while the subscriber Speed Call programming format from the ### access is: nnn
dk
mm..
_ mm##
(or timeout)
(if ## is not entered, interdigit time-out will complete the entry) where all trunks are allowed access and the Speed Calls are forced out on Route 3 (equivalent to dk=03). Specific 4.09 909 Command Defaults
Table 3 below lists the specific defaults for the 909 Command that causes the unit to act as a sophisticated Speed Dialer (800 Service Resale Dialer). The letter x or r in the code, represents a single user selectable character for entry to select a specific trunk or route number for the parameter. The letter t represents a digit for entry. For more information on specific uses of these letters, refer to the specific command description in the General Information Manual, Section 5 and Table 8.
Page 8
SECTION
TABLE DEFAULT/ RECOMMENDED (not applicable)
3: SPECIFIC
909 DEFAULTS
PARAMETER
8 r50t & r70t r58t & r78t 602 644 & 684 645 & 685 9 #250 2 #833 5 7 SMT
;15, 625, 635, 655, 665, & 675
#803 2 7
These
are the
remaining
Route
Access
Control
803 Search
Table
20, 630, 660, & 670 610 & 650 640 & 680 DDD S.C. Note: 602, 610 through code. 680 programming data entry must be ASCll
DEFAULT 4.10
COMPARISON
Table 4 is a comparison of the 903 versus the 909 defaults. In these comparisons, the reader will note that there are some enhancements that are possible with the 903 defaults that are not included or possible with the standard SMarT-lTM Dialer. Once again, the General Information Manual (MITEL P/N 8350-047-lOO-NA) is applicable to all parameters and functions for the 903 command, but with the addition of the listed enhanced operation capabilities. Specifically, in the 903 standard mode, up to 1,000 Speed Call positions are
Page B
SECTION
now possible. Each Speed count Code, if desired. TABLE 4: COMPARISON 903 DEFAULTED PARAMETER OOOt: 0 = 10 SPEED CALLS 1 = 100 SPEED CALLS 2 = Maximum 1000 possible (3 digit address)
Call may
now
contain
its own
unique
Ac-
OF 903 VERSUS
909 DEFAULTS 909 DEFAULTED
speed
calls
PARAMETER OOOt IGNORED 1,000 Speed Calls maximum consisting of three digit slots numbered from 000 to 999. NOTE: The default trigger is: 803 = #9 +9 #9 82. There is no So prefix in this default. If one is added, be sure to delete the present 803 Search Table entry.
NOTE: To use Selection 2, the default 803 Speed Call trigger search table entry must be deleted and replaced in the 804 Table or other table as desired. The recommended Speed Call trigger is: 804 = $6 #9 #9 #9 #2 (user dialed as *nnn). The number of digits that must be dialed into the Speed Call parameter slot is two or three, depending on OOOt above. The Speed Call programming format is: 7nn or 7nnn, followed by dk mm . o . mm ##. NOTE: The appropriate Speed Call trigger must be entered in the search tables for 7nnn type entries. NOTE: If OOOt is set to 0, the programming slot number is still two digits. This must be within the range of 00 through 09. A single-digit Speed Call trigger (i.e., 802 *#9#2) is possible for the Search Tables, but. must be programmed in the range of 700 through 709 in the Speed Call slots. The foilowing applies to both defaults:
The number of digits that must be dialed into the Speed Call parameter slot is fixed at three digits. Parameter OOOPis not functional. The Speed Call programming format is: 7nnn followed by dk mm ~ ~ * mm ##.
If a * is entered as a part of the mm . . . mm sequence above, all of the digits placed before the ic are entered into the destination buffer. The digits after the * are entered into the account code buffer. The ++ is not dialed out. It is ignored-in the dial-out procedure and only notes the beginning of the account code number. This means that a * may not be a part of a destination number, entered in the Speed Call format, the second and succeeding N S will account code. They will also appear in the Call Recording output but if multiple s s are be made a part of the
The * separating the Speed Call and the Account Code may be positioned If it is left out entirely, the entire in the mm . . . mm string, or left out entirely. be considered as a destination number. (Continued on next page)
anywhere entry will
SECTION
TABLE 903
4 Con t:
COMPARISON
OF 903 VERSUS
909 DEFAULTS 909 DEFAULTED
DEFAULTED
1
to
length digits.
The maximum length of the field is 30 characters (29 digits and a XC).The maximum of a Speed Call or Account Code field alone within the 30-character limit is 23
In the 903 Mode, the 6r5 Access dial out the Account Codes, if desired. Speed Dialing is the recommended
Control
Strings,
of course,
must
be programmed
may be done on any route in either default route for the 909 Speed Dialer Mode.
format.
Note that Route #3
The User Speed Call programming access code is ###. There is no change. In other words, all trunks are allowed access and speed calls go to search tables (dk = 08). Note:
The User Speed Call programming access code is ###. Speed Calls are routed to Route #3. All trunks are allowed access (dk = 03).
For installations not capable of transmitting the # sign to the dialer, the program access may be changed to any desired series of digits via search table programming. Waiting for expiration of the interdigit time-out will automatically complete the entry, thus avoiding the ## terminating entry.
5. PROGRAMMING
EXAMPLES
AND
USE SPEED DIALER PROGRAMMING
909 SOPHISTICATED 5.01
The following paragraphs show examples of specific programming for Speed Calls for both the system programming and the User programming viewpoints. It should be noted that the 0 portion of the 03 strings below may be chosen differently, if desired, to allow differing combinations of trunks to have access to the Speed Call (see Table 1 dk ). The 3 portion of the 03 string, however, should remain 3 each time. This forces all Speed Calls to Route #3. Using other routes may require additional programming (refer to the General Information Manual). #Ox SYSTEM 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) PROGRAM ACCESS
Go Off-Hook. Dial #ON. Wait for the confirming tone. Dial 909. This defaults the Dialer to the sophisticated Dialer data base. The examples that follow on the next page show entries will not use Account Codes:
Speed which
Page
11
SECTION
MITL8350-101-l
OO-NA
7000 7001 7002 7660
(CONFIRM (CONFIRM (CONFIRM (CONFIRM
TONE) TONE) TONE) TONE)
03 03 03 03
3931212## 3861212## 3447725&Y mrn...mm## Des: No.
(CONFIRM (CONFIRM (CONFIRM (CONFIRM
TONE) TONE) TONE) TONE)
6) 7050 (CONFIRM 7051 (CONFIRM 7nnn (CONFIRM
The following examples of entries be dialed out after. the destination TONE) TONE) TONE) 03 03 03 5459958 5661992 mm...mm Des:. No.
will cause number: ## ## ##
Account (CONFIRM (CONFIRM (CONFIRM
Codes TONE) TONE) TONE)
to
* 1234567 * 2345678 ++ mm...mm Act. Code
7)
Dial 999 or go On-Hook.
This exits the programming
mode.
C%SERPROGRAMMING 5.02
OF SPEED CALLS
In this example, the Speed Calls (7)OQ5 through (7)QO9 are assumed to be reserved for the User to program entries as he sees fit. Note that the 7 and 03 portions of the entry need not be dialed by the User. He needs only dial the 3-digit address. I) 2) 3) 4) Go Off-Hook. Dial ###. Wait for the confirming Then dial: 4541956 5451992 3447727 3447777 mm...mm Des: 903 5.03 STANDARD No. ## (CONFIRM TONE) ## (CONFIRM TONE) * 7654321 ## (CONFIRM ++ 6765432 ## (CONFIRM * mm...mm ## (CONFIRM t Ace. Code PROGRAMMING tone.
005 006 007 008 009
(CONFIRM (CONFIRM (CONFIRM (CONFIRM (CONFIRM
TONE) TONE) TONE) TONE) TONE)
TONE) TONE) TONE)
O.C.C. DIALER
Programming Speed Calls for a Dialer in the 903 Standard O.C.C. Dialer configuration is accomplished in the same manner as described above with the following exceptions: 1) 2) Any route may be selected.
To dial out Account Codes from within a Speed Call entry, the appropriate Access Control Sequence must be reprogrammed to request the Account Code for dial-out. If 10 or 1,000 Speed Call selections are desired, rameter must be programmed to 0 or 2 accordingly ing the default 903 or 909 command. the OfJOt paafter enter-
3)
Page
12
SECTION
4)
When programming from the User Program all Speed Calls programmed are routed Tables (dk = 08). SPEED CALLS
Access through
Code (###), the Search
DIALING 5.04
Once the Dialer has been installed and depending upon the type of programming, the user may dial Speed Calls. The method to access Speed Calls differs depending on unit usage. If 909 Default programming was used, there are no special instructions required to dial a Speed Call. Simply dial the three-digit number of the desired Speed Call and all else is transparent to the user. If the unit has been programmed with the 903 Default, there will be a default Speed Call trigger character. This trigger exists in the 803 Search Table. If parameter OOOt is either 0 or 1 (10 or 100 Speed Calls), the trigger exists in the 803 Search Table and is, by default, %. If parameter OOOt is 2 (1,000 Speed Calls), the trigger in table 803 must be deleted and replaced in table 804, for example (by programming). Once again, it is recommended that the x character be used as the trigger. In the case of the 903 default, to access a Speed Call (default programming), simply dial *nn to access a given Speed Call, where nn is from 00-99 for a specific stored Speed Call. Note: 5. SPEED CALL VERSUS 6.01 For more details, refer to the General Information Manual.
SCREENING
CAPABILITIES
There are several ways in which to calculate the maximum quantity of Speed Calls and Screen Quantities capable of being programmed into the Dialer. Since both Speed Call and Search Table screens may be of varying length, depending upon the application, graphs are not practical. Some simple methods of determining the capabilities are possible. Ground 6.02 1) 2) Rules There are two basic ground command, command, rules that are applicable. These are:
After a 909 default ory left for data. After a 903 default ory left for data.
there there
are l5,OOO spaces are 14,500 spaces
in memin mem-
Methods 6.03 The simplest method used to determine if the intended data base will fit into memory (almost all will), is to calculate the space required by the data. Then compare this space to the space available according to the following formulae: 1) A search table entry occupies a number of spaces equal to the length of the template plus the action digit(s). An 804 Search Table entry such as 804 1315 0 , for example, is four digits plus
Page
13
SECTION
MITL8350-I Ol-l OO-NA
one action digit for a total of five. The 804 is not counted. entry of 803 #9#9#9#2 is six plus two, for a total of eight. 2)
An
A speed call entry occupies a number of spaces equal to the length of the speed call plus 6 (an internal Dialer requirement), and must be rounded up to the next ewen number if the total is odd. Thus, a Speed Call programmed as 7nn 08 13931212## requires 14 spaces in memory (8 digits + 6 = 14). The W , if used to partition an account code into the Speed Call, counts as one digit. The #I does not count. As long as the total of the Speed Call plus the Search Table entries does not exceed the available space, the intended program will fit into memory. If, by some chance, memory capacity is exceeded, the Dialer will return error tones in the DTMF set (or a question mark if using a terminal), at the point where data is no longer being accepted. Deleting Speed Calls with the Snnn## command does not reclaim all memory. After the deletion, memory space increases only by the number of digits in the number being removed, and not by the +6 factor that was added to the Speed Call. Therefore, in the rare event that memory space becomes critical, and several numbers are deleted, the offset in memory space regained must be considered. Total memory space is only reclaimed with a default command. Search tables, on the other hand, reclaim all occupied memory space upon deletion.
3)
Note:
Figure 3 on page 16 is a worksheet that has been included to ease the calculations. For those who are less inclined to do the calculations, Tables 5 and 6 below may be helpful. The quantities listed are rounded downward to allow for entry of route names, longer access control sequences, etc., that would seriously complicate calculations. Therefore, the actual calculations on a defaulted Dialer would show slightly higher quantities available than listed. TABLE 5: SPEED CALLS (With no Search Tabies present)
6.04
3 through 8 digit Speed Calls 9 or 10 digit Speed Calls 11 or 12 digit Speed Calls
Note:
All digit used.
counts
include
the
N account
code
separator,
if
Page
14
SECTION
MITL8350-101-100-NA
TABLE 6: SEARCH QTY. 2,900 2,400 1,800 1,600 1,300 1,200 900 Calculation Example 1
TABLE SCREENS OF SCREEN
(with
no Speed Calls
Calls
present)
LENGTH 4 Digit 5 Digit 6 Digit 7 Digit 10 Digit 11 Digit 15 Digit Examples
(No Speed
Present)
Screens Screens Screens Screens Screens Screens Screens
100 8-DIGIT
1,600 7-DIGIT SCREENS OR 1,450 8-DIGIT SCREENS OR 1,150 lo-DIGIT SCREENS OR 1,000 ll-DIGIT SCREENS 90 /-DIGIT SCREENS OR 80 8-DIGIT SCREENS
1,000 8-DIGIT
Page
1%
SECTION
SPEED CALLS
SCREENS IN SEARCH TABLES
TOTAL
SPEED CALL SPACE
TOTAL
SCREEN
SPACE
TOTAL SPEED CALL SPACE + TOTAL SCREEN 15,000 FOR 909 DEFAULTED DIALER AND 14,500 FOR 903 DEFAULTED DIALER. Note a: IF LENGTH+6
SPACE MUST
8E LESS THAN:
IS AN ODD NUMBER, ROUND UP TO NEXT EVEN NUMBER. FIGURE 3: CALCULATION WORKSHEET
Page 16
SECTION
7. SPECIFICATIONS HARDWARE 7.01 Table 7 lists lTM Common specifications also noted. all of the hardware specifications Carrier Access Dialer and Call apply to the SMarT- lATM unit for the SMarTController. These unless otherwise
TABLE 7: SMarT-lTM SPECIFICATlON FCC RINGER EQUIVALENCE
HARDWARE MIN.
SPECIFICATIONS TYP. MAX. 0.78 UNlTS
IDLE LINE, LOOP START RINGER IMPEDANCE: RINGING LEAKAGE: OFF HOOK CURRENT lDLE LINE, GROUND SENSING RESISTANCE: VOLTAGE: VOLTAGE TIP-GROUND Sending Ring-Ground START Tip to Earth Tip 36 -22 -5 10 n/a 40 -25 0 45 -28 +I0 150 K& Volts Volts ms SENSITIVITY: 15-60 Hz, 70- llOV 20-3500 Hz, 1OV 15-60 Tip to Ring, Tip to Earth, Hz 1OOV 1OOV 10 1 40 20 20 15 80 20 K& MSt Volts M& Ma mA
OPEN CIRCUIT
VOLTAGE
22 550 DC 36
24 600 40
26 650
Volts & dB
50
mA
TERMINATION RESISTANCE: DC, 20 mA DC, 40 mA AC, 300-3000 Hz 600 ohms, 20mA 200 200 550 20 13 300 300 650 fi Q fi dB 80 mA
600 26
RETURN
LOSS: CURRENT
OPERATING
Page
97
SECTION
TABLE 7 CON T:
SMasT-1 TM HARDWARE
SPEClFlCATlONS
CO SIDE FEED: INTERNAL DTMF LEVEL LEVEL DIFFERENCE FREQ. DURATlON TIME BETWEEN TONES FEED:
Gain
300 Hz
RECEIVER
To receive To not receive
ROTARY RECEIVER
MAKE IMPEDANCE MAKE DURATION BREAK IMPEDANCE BREAK DURATION RATE DTMF LEVEL FREQUENCY DURATION ROTARY TIMING TIMING (Programmable) SENDER (Programmable) (At 60140): SENDER
RATE (At 60/40) INTERDIGIT OPERATING PAUSE (Programmable) RANGE
TEMPERATURE HUMIDITY ALLOWABLE VOLTAGE: connected to any
-/- With
reference
to 600~
Termination.
Page
18
SECTION
MITL8350-lOl -l OO-NA
RS-232 9.02 iliary output.
PORT Table 8 below contains the specifications for the SMarT-lTM Common Carrier Access Dialer and Call Controller RS-232 AuxPort. This port may be used for programming or for SMDR
TABLE 8: RS-232
PORT SPECIFICATIONS
BAUD
RATE:
300 to 19200
Baud
programmable;
de-
PARITY: BITS PER CHARACTER: BIT EIGHT SENSE: MODE: Eight bits per character with one stop
ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL 7.03 Table 9 contains the Electrical and Mechanical specifications for the SMarT-lTM Common Carrier Access Dialer and Call Controller. These specifications also apply to the SMarT-lATM unit unless otherwise noted. This section Dialer. Other does not contain all of the specifications specifications may be added. SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATION 7.625 (19.37cm) Wide X 10.625 (26.99cm) H X 1.375 (3.49cm) D 2 Ibs (0.907 Supply 1 lb (0.453 Wall Mount kg) kg) (Approximately) with Supplied Bracket for the
4.04
TABLE 9: ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL PARAMETER DIMENSIONS: I
WEIGHT:
Dialer Power
115 Volts
AC, 60 Hz 8
300 mA
Page
19
SECTION
7.05
The specifications in the Tables above are subject to change without notice. The inclusion of n/a for a specific parameter means that the specification is not available at the time of this publication.
Page 20
SECTIBN
APPENDIX
A FCC INTERCONNECTION General Al.01 This equipment has been approved by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) as not being harmful to the telephone network when connected directly to the telephone lines through the standard connection cabling provided with the unit. This section is applicable to telephone interconnection in the United States. REQUIREMENTS
Al.02
e
The telephone
number
to the unit.
The equipment being connected is a MITEL DATACOM INC. model SMarT-lTM or model SMarT-IA Common Carrier Access Dialer and Call Controller. The FCC Registration Number is EMP 85B-14558-LR-E The FCC Ringer The Connector Equivalence Jacks required for the SMarT-lTM Number (REN) which or SMarT-lATM is 0.7B.
8 @ e
are RJ31X.
CONNECTION Al.03
LIMITATIONS
Due to the FCC Part 68 Rule, no connection can be made to party lines and to coin telephone service. This unit is designed to be used on standard-device telephone lines. If there are any questions about the telephone line, such as how many pieces of equipment may be connected to it, the telephone company will provide this information upon request. NETWORK Al.04 CHANGES
The telephone company may make changes to it s communication service; such changes may include the change of trunk circuits, changes in the operational characteristics of its trunks, etc. Before doing this, however, the company shall provide official notification, so that the operation of the Dialer service will not be interrupted. MAINTENANCE Al.05 LIMITATIONS
Page A-l
SECTKIN
Al -06
There are no user repairable parts within the unit. It is sealed against user maintenance. If opened, all warranties are voided. changes within the unit are permitted cables, es detailed in this document, connections between the unit and jack by ara the :.. ...:
Al 007 No cabling or wiring the user. Plug-ended to be used for all external telephone company interface Al.08
TROUBLE Al.09
For all malfunctions, appropriate field service MITE% DATACOM INC. or its authorized agents
DISCONNECTION Al.10 If it is ever decided to permanently disconnect the SMarT-lfM or SMarT-lATM Dialer from the present line, please notify the telephone company of this change.
Page A-2
SECTlON
MlfL8350-l Ol-lOO-NA
APPENDIX B OVERALL INDEX

CONTENTS PAGE CONTENTS PAGE
APPENDIX
A LIMITATIONS JACKS REQUIREMENTS NUMBER A-l A-l A-2 A-l A-l A-l A-l NUMBER. A-l A-2 B-l
FEATURES SEE GENERAL FUNCTIONS SEE GENERAL DESCRIPTION . 2 DESCRIPTION 2
CONNECTION CONNECTOR DISCONNECTION
FCC INTERCONNECTION FCC REGISTRATION MAINTENANCE NETWORK RINGER TROUBLE APPENDIX B INDEX OVERALL CHANGES EQUIVALENCE CORRECTIONS
LIMITATIONS
GENERAL SEE INTRODUCTION GENERAL DESCRIPTION FEATURES __._.. _, _._ .__ CONVENIENCE DESCRIPTION FEATURES FUNCTIONS GENERAL OPERATION . SCREENING CAPABILITIES RULES CALL VERSUS . ..l
I.__., .,
. .._..._ _...................
,.,
CALCULATION SEE SPEED CALCULATION SEE SPEED CALCULATION SEE SPEED CONNECTION CONNECTOR CONVENIENCE
EXAMPLES CALL VERSUS METHODS CALL VERSUS WORKSHEET CALL VERSUS LIMITATIONS A A DESCRIPTION A-l A-l 2 JACKS FEATURES SCREENING CAPABILITIES 16 SCREENING CAPABILITIES 13 SCREENING CAPABILITIES 15
SEE OPERATION GROUND SEE SPEED
HARDWARE SEE SPECIFICATIONS HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS 17 17 SPECIFICATIONS 16 17 7 7 HARDWARE SEE SPECIFICATIONS SEE TABLE SEE TABLE SMART-l HISTORY SEE INTRODUCTION 17
SEE APPENDIX SEE APPENDIX SEE GENERAL
DATA
CONFIRMATION SPEED DIALER CALLS MODE 2 9 .._.. 4 DESCRlmlON CALLS EXAMPLES AND USE 13 A-2 10 11 2 6 INITIALI2ATION INITIALIZING PROCEDURE THE DIALER 4 4 3 DESCRIPTION 3 1 1 2 AUDIENCE 1 1 THE DIALER SEE INITIALIZING SEE OPERATION INSTALLATION DESCRIPTION INSTALLATION INTENDED SEE INSTALLATION AUDIENCE SEE INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION A GENERAL HISTORY INTENDED SPEED
SEE ENTERING DEDICATED DEFAULT
DEFAULT COMPARISON SEE OPERATION SEE TABLE4 SEE TABLE DESCRIPTION SEE GENERAL DIALING SPEED
SEE PROGRAMMING DISCONNECTION SEE APPENDIX
ELECTRICAL
SPECIFICATIONS 19 19 9
OVERVIEW
SEE SPECIFICATIONS SEE TABLE ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL SEE SPECIFICATIONS ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL SEE TABLE ENTERING SPEED ENTERING DATA EXIT 9 . . . DATA CALL ENTRIES SPEED CALLS CONFIRMATION PROGRAMMING PROGRAM .._ MODE .._.._ SPECIFICATIONS . . . .
JACKS 19 19 MAINTENANCE 5 6 6 5 6 7 5 6 CALLS . ..6 NETWORK CHANGES A A-l SEE APPENDIX MAXIMUM MAXIMUM MECHANICAL SEE TABLE SEE GROUND SEE GROUND LIMITATIONS A SPACE SPACE (903 (909 DEFAULT) 13 DEFAULT) 13 19 19 RULES RULES A-l SEE APPENDIX A A-l
MEMORY MEMORY
FORMAT RE-ENTER RE-ORDERTONE SEE OPERATION SYSTEM PARAMETERS SPEED EXIT PROGRAMMING SEE ENTERING
SPECIFICATIONS 9
SEE SPECIFICATIONS
SEE APPENDIX FCC INTERCONNECTION GENERAL SEE APPENDIX FCC REGISTRATION SEE APPENDIX A A NUMBER A-l d-1 REQUIREMENTS 1 OPERATING OPERATION DEFAULT MODES SEE OPERATION
3 9
COMPARISON
Page
B-9
SECTION
MITE8350-l Ol-l OO-NA
CONTENTS ENTERING GENERAL INlTlALlZlNG SPfClFlC SPEED CALLS

..........................................
PAGE 5 3 4 7 f-l 1 ELfCTRlCAL/MECHANlCAL HARDWARE MECHANICAL RS-232 PORT
CONTENTS ..........................
................................
................................... .................................. .................................. 5 .I 5 13 5 6 13 13 15 16 13 13 ............. 7 14 11 D(BMPLfS 11 ..6 7
............................... DIALER ................................... DEFAULTS THE S ................................... ...................................
0VEfbU.L INDEX SEE APPENDIX OVERVIEW SEElNtROOUCTlON
SPEED CALL ENTRIES CDDfS ....................................... SEE ENTERING SEE TABLE1 SPEED SEE MfTHOOS CALL ENTRY DATA SIZE ................................. .............................
...................................
PROGFIAMMING EXAMPLES ................. 903 STANDARD OCC DIALER PROGRAMMING USER PROGRAMMING OF SPEED CALLS. .................... PROGRAMMING fXAMPLfS AND USE 0 MAJOR PROGRAM ACCESS ...................... .....
12 12 11 11 13.
SPEED CALL FORMAT SEETABLE 1 ................................... SEETABLE 1 ................................... SPEED CALL QUANTITY CALCULATION SEE SECTION 6 ................................. SPEED SPEED CALL VERSUS SCREENING OfSCRlFTlON .................................. CALL VERSUS SCREENING CAPABILITIES WAMPLfS ......................... WORKSHEET ......................... RULf.5 ................................ .................................... MODE
q fSCRlPTlON
DIALING
...................................... SPEED CALLS ................................
CALCULATION %-ENTER PROGRAM MODE SEE ENTERING SPEED CALLS RE-OROER TONE SEE ENTERING SPEED C4LLS CALCULATION .......................... ............................. DIALER MODE ................ A-l 17 19 ......... 19 6 7 7 GROUND MfTHOOS
RECOMMENDED ROUTE SEE 909 COMMAND - SPEED
SPCED CALLS 523 8 PARAMETER SEE 909 COMMAND - SPEED DIALER SPEED CALLS IWITH NO SEARCH TABLES)
RINGER EQUIVALENCE NUMBER SEEAPPENQIXA ................................... RS-232 PORT SEE SPECIFICATIONS ... .............................
SEE TASLE 5 ................................... SPEED DIALER MODE PROGFIAMMING EXAMPLES SEE PROGRAMMING fXAMPLfS AN0 US& ............... SPEED DIALER WITH ACCOUNT CODE PROGRAMMING SEE PROGRAMMING fXAMPLfS AND USE .......... SYSTEM PARAMETERS SEE ENTERING SPEED CALLS SEE TABLE 2 .................... .........
RS-232 PORT SPECIFICATIONS ................................. SEE SPECIFICATIONS SEE TABLE 8 .............................
SfARCH
SEfSEtTION
TABLE SCREEN QUANTITY CALCULATION 6 .....................................
13 13 15 17 18 1
SfARCH TAELE SCREEN SIZE SEE MfTHQOS .................................... SfARCH TASLfS SEETABLES (WITH NO SPEED CALLS) .......................................
TROUBLE CONNECTIONS SEE APPENDIX A TYPI OF UNIT SEE APPENDIX A
A-2 A-l
SMART-P HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS SEETABLf 7 .......................................
SEE TAELE
7 ....................................... .......................................
USER PROGRAMMING SEE PROGRAMMING
OF SPEED CALLS EXAMPLES
..
12
SMART-l UNIT SEE FIGURE1 SOFTWARE LNEL SEE HISTORY
0 MAJOR 2 CAPABILITIES ............ 13 7 8 9 ................ 7 7 7 8 19
PROGRAM
ACCESS EXAMPLES AND USE 11
....................................... SOFTWARE RMSIONS SEE SPEED CALL VERSUS SCREENING SPECIAL FUNCTIONS AND COMMANDS SfETA9LE 2 ........................................ SPECIFIC 909 COMMAND 3..
SEE PROGRAMMING
900 RESALE SERVICE SEE FIGURE 2
INSTALLATION
a
OCC DIALER 7 12 7
SEE SPECIFIC
SEETABLE
DEFAULTS ................................ DEFAULTS ...................................... OCC DIALER. ................... DIALER MODE.
SPECIFIC DEFAULTS 903 COMMAND - STANDARD 909 COMMAND SEE OPERATION SPECIFIC SPECIFICATIONS ELECTRICAL - SPEED
903 COMMAND - STANDARD SEE SPECIFIC DEFAULTS
903 STANDARD OCC DIALER PROGRAMMING SEE PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES 909 COMMAND SEE SPECIFIC - SPEED DIALER DEFAULTS MODE
..................................... ........................ 909 COMMAND DEFAULTS .....................................
Page B-2
SECTION
NOTES
. _ .
Page -1
2000-001-Ol-Ae Issue1, Au@usr 1956
MITEL DATACOM FIELD SERVICE

MITEL DATACOM INC. has set up a a National Field Service number for technical and installation assistance (214)386-9400 during normal working hours, for U.S. customers. Outside normal working hours a telephone answering service has been estabIished. For Canadian customers, contact your local MITEL Regional Office.
NOTICE TO CUSTOMERS
The information contained in this document is believed to be accurate in all respects but is not wananted by MITEL DATACOM INC. The information is subject to change without notice and should not be construed in any way as a commitment by MITEL DATACOM INC. or any of its affiliates and subsidiaries. MITEL DATACOM INC. and its affiliates and subsidiaries assume no responsibility for any errors or omissions in this document. Revisions of this document or new editions of it may be issued to incorporate such changes.
TM Trademark 0 8 Copyright Registered
of Mite1 Datacom 1986
Inc.
Mite1 Corporation of MIT?ZL Corporation
trademark
:_
Page -2
ZOOO-OOI-M-AC
Irsuc 1. Augasr 1986
- i n INSTALLATION
CALL CONTROLLE
RJ-31 JACKS POWER SUPPLY GROlhD REQUIRED
Page
-3 Issue
ZOOO-OOl-Ol-Ae 1. Augurt 1986
- 1 n RJ - 31 INSTALLATION
CENTRAL
Page -4
ZDOO-OOl-Ol-AC Issue 1, August 1986
- 1 Ty WIRING TEST
swu-1
CALL CORTROLLlR
0-J
GROUND
TO SMart 1
Page -5
ZOOO-OOl-Ol-Ae Issue 1. August 1986
- 1 T OPERATION
CUSTOMER EQUIPMENT
PHASE 2 INTERPRETiiTION OF TELEPHONE NUMBER, SELECTION OF A ROUTE, TRANSLATION OF TELEPHONE N-UMBER 1 1 DIALING TAKES PLACE ON SELECTED ROUTE
DIGITS ARE COLLECTED
II
I
1 1 RELATED I I I I I I I 6Rl 6R2 6R4 6R5 REGISTERS
{ELATED REGISTERS x03 X08 x09 x19 X23 R51 R71 R59 R79 R60 R80
RELATED REGISTERS 601 801 TO 815 821 TO 835 R50 R70 R50 R52 R54 R70 R72 R74
R58 R78
Page -6
ZOOO-OOI-Ol-Ae Issue 1, August 1986
PROGRAMMING
PROCEDURE - DTMF PHONE
DIAL 523
1 HEAR s
DIAL
8
t HEAR
ss
OR
DIAL 601
1 HEAR s
DIAL 214 ##
t HEAR
Page
-7
2000-OOI-Ol-Ae
. I
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE - TERMINAL
TYPE: 523 >523 8 > TERMINAL RESPONSE: <SPACE> TYPE: 8 TERMINAL RESPONSE: <LFxCR> TERMINAL RESPONSE: >
c
/ \
TYPE: 601 TERMINAL RESPONSE: <SPACE> TYPE: 214## TERMINAL RESPONSE: <LFxCR> TERMINAL RESPONSE: >
Page -8
2000-001-Ol-Ae fssue I. August 1986
REMOTE PROGRAMMING METHOD 1
CENTRAL OFFICE
@E OF
DTMF PHONE LINE 1
PROGRAMMING
BASE
REMOTE
PROGRAMMING SITE
Page-9
ZOOO-OOI-Ol-Ae ksue 1. Auysr 1986
gyarplREMOTE PROGRAA IMING METHOD 2
SMart - 1 DIALER
LINE 4 REMOTE PROGRAMMIN G SITE
PROGRAMMING TERMINAL DTMF PHONE PROGRAMMING BASE
Page -10
2000-OOl-OL-Ae issue 1. August 1986
r:.

Mitel Smart-1 Dialer Manuals

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mitel Smart-1 Dialer Manuals

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mitel Smart-1 Dialer Manuals

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ISSUE 1.

MITEL FIELD SERVICE

NOTICE TO CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

ISSUE 1, JUNE 1988 HEADING

8350-345-012-NA PAGE 1.3

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..~ .......................................................... . ...............

1.19 1.19 1.20

ISSUE 1, JUNE 1988

The user s telephone and the user s PBXkey system.

The Controller can be programmed a DTMF telephone

ISSUE 1,JUNE 1988

ISSUE 1, JUNE 1988

ISSUE 1, JUNE 1988

2 BASIC HARDWARE INSTALLATION

2. 1. DESCRIPTION 2. 1. 1. Mechanical Description

Controller electrical characteristics

Standard RJ3 1X With one FemaleRS-232 and Connector for

ISSUE 1, JUNE 1988

NOT THT,C WAY

2. BASIC HARDWARE INSTALLATION

2. 3. Wall Mounting Bracket

MOUNTING SCREWS FOR BRACKET

2. BASIC HARDWARE INSTALLATION

Figure 1.5 Ground Wisisg

2. BASIC HARDWARE INSTmLATION

SPL&YPE STATION BLOCK (N&E 1)

2, BASIC HARDWiiItE INSTALLATION

= 8 with l-stop bit

2 BASIC HARDWARE INSTALLATION

TO 115 VAC SOCKET

From A DTMF Telephone

will be exited. To exit programming

3. 3. Waking Up the Controller

ePROCEED TO MANUAL 3-a

ISSUE 1, JUNE 1988

APPENDIX 1 TABLE Al-l

FCC RINGER EOUIVALENCE IDLE LINE. LOOP START

RINGING SENS~TWITYZI~ - 60 HZ LEAKAGE:

IDLE LINE. GROUND START

TIME TO RECOGNIZE RESISTANCE:

ISSUE 1, JUNE 1988

APPENDIX 1 TBLE Al-l I-XARDWmE SPECIFICATIONS

ROTARY RECEIVElR M&E IMPEDANCE

RATE (at 60/40) INTERDIGIT PAUSE (Programmable)

OPERATING RANGE Ac SUPPLY

ALLOWABLE VOLTAGE (Connected to any point) With reference to 600 CI termination

APPENDIX 1 TABLE Al-2 ORDERING INFORMATION

ISSUE 1, JUNE 1988

Electrical, 1.7, 1.8

Ground Start Testing,

FCC INTERCONNECFION REQUIREMEmS

The telephone number of the line that you will

connect the unit to,

The connector jacks are BJ31X.

If opened ail warranties are voided.

Power supply components MITEL INC.

For all malfunctions.

.... . .._ ___-.. ;-,-.

Trademark of MITEL FfMTED m CANADA

All rights rcscrved. Corporation

DATA ENTRY 000000~00000.~....~.~~~.~..~